Applies To: John Comaroff

  • Popular Justice in the New South Africa

    Popular Justice in the New South Africa

    For all the hope stirred by the end of apartheid, the transition to democracy in South Africa, beginning in 1994, opened up a social and moral vacuum—not to mention a huge wealth-gap—in which violence and disorder, real and imagined, became commonplace. By the late 1990s, a police service regarded as incompetent, toothless, and overzealously committed to human rights was struggling to cope with rising rates of murder, rape, robbery, and car jacking. Frightened citizens, irrespective of race, class, geography, or gender, came to believe that the inability of government to guarantee their safety mocked their newfound freedoms.

  • Figuring Crime

    Figuring Crime

    Nothing rings with more authority to South African ears than a crime statistic. It is the music of our spheres: what the sound of an accordion is to a Marseilles sailor, or the jaunty plinkety-plunk of the banjo to a Louisiana woodsman, so is the rhythmic, measured refrain of a crime statistic to a South African.

    Darrel Bristow-Bovey, 20001 In an address to the national parliament in 1999, Nelson Mandela voiced an old cliche, a deep truth from both the heart of modernism and the fraught history of numbers in South Africa. “Figures,” he said, “are meaningless in the context of people’s concrete ex- periences.”2 But, in the contemporary world, the opposite may be true: that figures render large abstractions concretely meaningful to personal experience, speaking with authority about the connection of human beings to otherwise incomprehensible phenomena. Being assertions of the real, they fill the space between the unknowable and the axiomatic, imagi- nation and anxiety. Viewed thus, the statistic is a medium of communication and a species of commodified knowledge, one whose value and veracity accumulates as it circulates.

    Part fetish, it has also become a term in the ordinary language of being.
    The rise of contemporary Western perceptions of society, Ian Hacking (1990:1-5) has famously argued, was closely tied to the “avalanche of numbers” produced, publicized, and deployed for purposes of governance by nineteenth-century states (cf. Canguilhem 1989). The obsession with counting, and with calculating probability, he suggests, had pro- found epistemic effects. For one thing, “society” itself “became statistical.” For another, the appeal to law-like regularities began to replace other kinds of causal explanation, such as “human nature,” in making sense of, and acting upon, the world. Which, in turn, made rates of “deviancy” – of criminality, suicide, madness, illness – especially salient. To wit, post-en- lightenment ideas of the social, the moral, the normal, and the rational owe a lot to the crime statistic, a fact made evident in the actuarial underpinnings of much early detective fiction. Take, for example, Edgar Allen Poe, a fine organic anthropologist with an explicit interest in the “public mind.” In common with many writers of good mysteries, Mark Seltzer (2004:561) observes, Poe often invoked numbers in the interests of sociological realism; for him, “the death of God” left us with mathematics, “the death of Satan,” with forensics. The Victorian impetus to quantify deviance, in both realist fiction and social science, pre- supposed a rule-governed social order whose positive outlines were most visible in the negative: in lawlessness and vice. It was these “social pathologies” that would become the urgent object of sociology and social engineering (cf. Hacking 1990:118).

    So much for Euromodernity, in which, from the first, the very idea of governance de- pended on statistics, the “science of [a] state” whose operations were enabled “by the ac- cumulation and tabulation of facts about the domain to be governed” (Rose and Miller 1992:185). Wherein lies the significance of crime statistics at the dawn of the twenty-first century? How do they figure, so to speak, in an age in which foundational assumptions ab- out society, citizenship, and order are called into question, in which social engineering is ever more suspect, in which the discourse of deviance is deeply discredited, in which go- vernment and public alike appear more concerned with personal security, suffering, rights, and risk than with social pathology – and in which the ontological status of “the” state is it- self is a matter of argument?

    The Neo South Africa, like most nation-states today, produces its own avalanche of numbers. The tide of statistics made publically available by the police service is swelled, in this Age of Neoliberalism, by the ever more state-like exertions of non-governmental or- ganizations and the private sector. Those figures feed a thoroughly modernist “lust for precision” (Hacking 1990:5), a fervid faith in the panacea of probability, and a populist sen- se that countering disorder begins with counting it properly. It is hardly surprising, then, that the crime statistic has taken on unprecedented sovereignty in this postcolony. Not only has it become diagnostic of the national health. It is also a discursive currency by means of which government speaks to its subjects, citizens speak among themselves, experts speak to every-persons, everyone speaks back to government – and the media mediate all the incessant talk, adding their own inventions, inflections, inflations.

    Three things are especially noteworthy about the rising sovereignty of the crime sta- tistic in this context. And about the pivotal place of quantifacts – statistical representations that make the world “factual” – in its public discourses. All of them are critical to our broad- er theoretical concerns here.

    The first is the paradox of dis/trust: while crime statistics constitute a widely-cited measure of the condition of the postcolony, they tend also to be distrusted, due largely to their susceptibility to abuse. They are, in short, at once a fetish and the object of a lively hermeneutic of suspicion. The second has to do with alienation and intimacy: counter to the commonplace that numbers displace visceral experience into the realm of pattern and probability – vide Mandela’s observation – it is arguable that they do just the opposite here. As they circulate and are mediated, these statistics reduce a mass of faceless felonies, awful things that occurred elsewhere, into the objects of first-person affect: revulsion, revenge, pain. The third thing arises out of the phenomenology of figures: for all the ambivalence with which they are regarded, crime stats are treated here not as a representation of reality, but as a reality in themselves, a reality in which is congealed material facts, moral order, collective identities, even the quality of life (cf. Urla 1993).

    In this excursion into the criminal anthropology of South Africa, then, we explore what, exactly, it is that crime statistics make real, how they take on a public life, by what means they convert the abstract into the intimate, tertiary knowledge into primary experien- ce, quantity into quality. And why it is that they have become so much more than the tools of criminologists and reformers, so pervasive a public passion, so deeply inscribed in nar- ratives of personal being, so vital to the construction of moral publics, so integral to deba- tes about the meaning of democracy, freedom, security, human rights. Conventionally fra- med as value-free information, these numbers appear to be taking on ever more political heft as the modernist state deregulates the functions of governance, as sovereignty is par- sed and privatized, as control over the means of violence is rendered ambiguous, as a cul- ture of “popular punitiveness” gains credence (Bottoms 1995; Haggerty 2001:197). As they do, and as citizens and communities claim more responsibility for their own welfare, modes of producing and deploying crime statistics themselves proliferate. Which – as we intimated a moment ago and shall see in exquisite detail – sets in train processes whose effects, of- ten unremarked, are deeply implicated in remaking the postcolonial nation-state, the nature of its governance, and citizenship within it. But we are running ahead of ourselves.

    SOVEREIGN STATISTICS: the alchemy of numbers

    Critical readings of the history of the industrial revolution and the rise of democracy return repeatedly to the dangerous alchemy of numbers. At work in processes of commodification and bureaucratization, they suggest, was the power of arithmetic to abstract value, to turn people into ciphers, to enable the alienation of humans from their essence and experience. Lefort (1988:18-19), for one, argues that the paradox of the modern idea of “society” is that it can never be made real: far from materializing “the people,” institutions like universal suffrage turn citizens into statistics as “[n]umber replaces substance.” Simmel (1978:297f., 444) thought differently. For him, money was the currency of counting. And while it served to reduce distinction and weaken personal ties, it also enabled the translation and commensuration of difference, giving rise to a society of morally interdepen- dent, self-sufficient persons in which individuals become real in relation to an impersonal mass. Novel modes of accounting, in other words, enable the production of new qualities, subjects, sensations. Even under the most rationalizing of conditions, the traffic between quality and quantity occurs constantly in the production of meaning and value.

    The contentious life of the crime statistic in South Africa makes it plain that enume- ration is never a mere flight from substance: measurement is always mediated by historical conditions as numbers are made to signify in various ways. Some of those ways – the idi- om of the actuarial state, the principle of majority will – have long been integral to the scaf- folding of democracy, sui generis; shades here of de Tocqueville, Weber, and much of the history of liberalism. Others are more specific. Thus apartheid South Africa tried to legiti- mate itself by dis-counting, literally, large sections of the population; its opponents used statistics, from land distribution through poverty datum profiles to mortality rates, to argue against “unrepresentative” rule. More recently, activists striving to persuade the state of its responsibility toward the homeless and HIV/AIDS sufferers have advocated “emancipatory” enumeration (Robins 2003:259-60).3 Indeed, in the “new modernity,” Beck’s (1992) “risk society,” where personal destiny is read in figures, improving one’s chances requires imp- roving the odds (Crawford 2004: 522). Even in colloquial terms, the quality of life is calcula- ted in relation to the law of large numbers: “I want government to provide more security for people like me,” an elderly Mafikeng man told us in 1999, “before I too become a statistic.”

    While the truth-value of numbers has been a focus of bitter debate between the “hard” and “soft” sciences, there have also long been efforts to grasp the statistic as a so- cial construction (Kitsuse and Cicourel 1963; Poovey 1998). One influential development of this concern has been inspired by Foucault’s analysis of enumeration as a means of go- vernance (Cohn 1987:224f.; Anderson 1991:163f.; Appadurai 1996); another emerges from science studies (Haggerty 2001:53: cf. Rose 1999), which have examined the produc- tion of various modes of calculation as “artifacts” yielded by the interplay of actors, institu- tions, and technologies (Latour and Woolgar 1979; Deleuze and Gauttari 1987). Each of these approaches offers insight into the nature of crime counts in post-apartheid South Af- rica; each has limitations. Thus we might ask, a la Foucault, why measures of lawlessness and victimhood have become so salient in defining populations here, overlaying class, race, and political disposition. Yet, pace Foucault, it is equally necessary to take note of a critical politics that has arisen in response to criminal accounting on the part of the state, a politics of the kind that challenges the Idea of “governmentality” as all-purpose social control. Similarly, in charting the tortuous life of numbers, there is much to be gained from tracing the manufacture and circulation of statistical artifacts in the science studies mode: in this instance, by following the argument that rages about official crime tallies, about their implications for the rights of citizens and the responsibilities of rule – itself a fractal drama in which government, the media, citizen-subjects, and other parties conjure the meaning of normality and emergency, state and nation. At the same time, as we shall see, this argument bears the imprint of larger forces than can be grasped from the perspective of scien- ce studies, with its stress on the contingent outcomes of actor networks.

    But let us begin our excursion into the criminal anthropology of the “new” South Afri- ca with the numbers themselves. In so doing, we enter the concrete world of quantifacts inhabited by its citizens, into the paradox of dis/trust with which statistics of state are nego- tiated, into the intricately scaffolded reality that crime counts make of life here.

    EXCURSIONS INTO THE UNREAL: counting crime in the postcolony

    From within the country, crime rates are seen as anything from dire to catastrophic – and, by many, as deteriorating.4 An American study conducted in 2004 found that 81% of the population take lawlessness to be a “serious threat to democracy.”5 Well, how bad is it? How awful a picture is painted by the numbers? In order to answer the question, we suspend disbelief for a moment and draw a synoptic, quick-and-dirty portrait, courtesy of the Criminal Information Analysis Centre (CIAC) of the South African Police Service – with commentary and complementary counts from critical criminologists and non-governmental research organizations. Our figures are for 2002.6

    Violent crime in South Africa is, by any measure, very high indeed. Almost 22,000 people were murdered in 2002, about 48 per 100,000 of the population. Even in the best of years since 1994, some 58 intentional homicides occurred on an “average” day. Add 35,012 attempted murders and 11,087 culpable (i.e. non-intentional) homicides, and the tally of dead and wounded bodies is considerable. Save, of course, next to those laid waste by AIDS, which, at last count,7 claimed 39% of all mortality in the country. By our calcula- tion, homicide, attempted homicide and culpable homicide have, together, yielded 590,098 victims since the transition – more or less 180 per day. Nor is this all the bad news. Three other serious crimes of violence are also noteworthy: in 2002, there were 119,185 recorded armed robberies, 264,399 grievous assaults, and 52,107 rapes. This last figure, important because sexual crimes are the object of particular national anguish, is a lot lower than some of the more dire ones that circulate as mythostats, according to which an incident oc- curs every 4, 11, 17, 35 or 36 seconds.8 The police aggregate is 16.81 times less than one every 36 seconds, the lowest of those faux figures; which means that 17 out of 18 would have to go unreported. The SAPS believes that it is one in three;9 independent victim sur- veys have it that “approximately half of all respondents who [suffer] rape report” it (Hirscho- witz, et al 2000:2). Still, the figure is frighteningly high. So is carjacking, at about 15,000 cases per annum, although they are counted under other offences by the police.

    To what does all this add up? Over half a million (533,870) serious violent offences in 2002 – murders, attempted murders, culpable homicides, rapes, armed robberies, agg- ravated and indecent assaults, kidnapings, and abductions – in a land of 44.8 million souls. And this excludes the 315,623 residential burglaries and 256,593 common assaults. No wonder South Africa has a very anxious population. Vernacular realism here counts its truths, unsurprisingly, in the dramaturgy of damaged persons and seized property.

    Looked at over space and time, though, these gross numbers take on a slightly dif- ferent cast. First space. Perhaps the most striking thing about crime in South Africa is how unevenly distributed it is. For example, almost two-thirds of all murders occur in just three provinces: KwaZulu-Natal, which has the highest incidence, Western Cape, which has the highest rate, and Gauteng, which is reputed to be the homicide capital of the nation, but actually is not. Hijacking is also heavily concentrated: Gauteng (115.4 per 100k) is a hund- red times worse than the least afflicted province and almost four times worse than KwaZulu-Natal, which comes second.10 These patterns of distribution are not always predictable. Take a figure that most South Africans would treat with incredulity: the most violent province in the nation, measured by rates of attempted murder, rape, and grievous assault. KwaZulu-Natal? No, it is the least. Gauteng or the Western Cape, those scenes of televisual mayhem? Wrong again. Limpopo or Mpumalanga, site of frequent witch purgings and vigilante deaths? No. It is the Northern Cape, usually seen as a sleepy, featureless flatland in the arid heart of the country.11

    Patterns of variance become even yet marked as we move to micro-topographical levels. As the Commissioner of Police put it in his report for 2002/3 (see n.6), a huge dis- proportion of serious “contact” crimes occur in a few “township precincts”; specifically, those with high levels of “urbanization” and poverty, large informal settlements, and prolon- ged unemployment.12 This resonates with the received wisdom that, in a still segregated country, whites and Indians suffer attacks on their property, blacks and coloureds, attacks on their person. In fact, many of the latter also fall prey to robbery. And bloodshed does spill over into white and Indian neighborhoods. But, taken across the statistical terrain of South Africa, patterns of crime and victimhood are typically taken to follow lines of race and class; “extreme poverty and extreme risk,” notes Ulrich Beck (1992:41) tend everywhere to “attract” each other. Thus it is that, in December 2003, the Minister of Community Safety for the Western Cape – a portfolio that tells its own story about the contemporary imperati- ves of governance – assured the public that the “flashpoints for murder and rape” in the province “are Khayelitsha and Nyanga,”13 just the kinds of “township precinct” that the Commissioner had in mind. As if the containment of disorder to two of the poorest, most segregated parts of Cape Town should reassure everyone who does not live in them. Giv- en the proclivity to pin lawlessness on young black men – to situate it, that is, at the conflu- ence of race, gender, and generation – the “fact” that violence is highly enclaved plays into a mass-mediated view of “the” townships as breeding grounds of brutality. It also has the effect of erasing the implications of white collar crime, crimes for which whites tend to be collared, in producing the conditions for lawlessness in post-apartheid South Africa.

    As with space, so with time. “Crime, and the fear of crime,” notes Jonny Steinberg (2001:2), “is as old as South Africa itself.” But shifts in the manner of its counting, them- selves deeply political, make the assessment of long term trends difficult (see below). No- netheless, according to the SAPS, most violent offences have either leveled off recently or are on the decrease, some quite steeply; murder, for instance, has dropped by 19% or so since 1994. Nor are the police alone in asserting this. A 2003 national victim survey, done by the independent Institute for Security Studies (ISS 2004), makes even more opti- mistic claims. Its figures – which, like all victim surveys, elicit a high degree of trust among those who traffic in crime stats – show that the only felony to have increased between 1998 and 2003 was housebreaking, and then only slightly. The study also turned up other telling quantifacts. Of the decreasing percentage of people (24.5% to 22.9%) who fell victim to crime, by far the majority were hit by property offences. None of the five most common fe- lonies involved force; only two of the top ten did, assault and robbery. A victimization rate of less than 1% was recorded for murder, sexual assault, and car jacking (ISS 2004:102f.).. Despite these trends, most South Africans – among whom there is an inverse rela- tionship between fear of crime and the “actual risk of violence” (Leggett 2004b:6)14 – belie- ve lawlessness to be on the rise; although profiles of terror are inflected by race and other social considerations (ISS 2004: 40f.). Perhaps because it measures a wide range of inse- curities in a world of changing power relations, few accept at face value information that calls into question the national trauma. For example, in 1998, The Star, a major daily, publi- shed a feature entitled, “The Surprising Truth About Crime.”15 It argued, on strong empirical grounds, that the country had become safer than it had been under apartheid; that, with some exceptions, lawlessness had not “increased drastically in former white suburbs”; that most categories of offence were on a long-term downward spiral. But “people get angry when you say it,” noted Benty Naude, a professor of criminology. “The public perception is wrong,” she added. “Crime is not really as high as people think.” The inflation of mass fear, the article went on to say, is owed to the fact that media reporting is incident, not inci- dence, driven; its stress on sensational acts of violence has the effect of generalizing the singular, thus to feed the impression that criminality has come to saturate the country. The Star predicted the manner in which all this would be read. A host of angry letters to the paper asserted that South Africa remained the most most crime-afflicted place on earth. Is it? How, criminally-speaking, does South Africa measure up to the world? A parenthetic comment first, though. A “common way of ratifying shared belief,” says Seltzer (2004:560), “is to share in [its] suspension”; Americans, he observes, affirm some- thing by saying the opposite, like “its really unbelievable.” This is no less true in South Afri- ca, where the terrifying reality of violence is materialized in words like “unreal.” But a collec- tive sense of selfhood in the face of disorder is also conjured up, here, by evoking the argot of exceptionalism. This, it is said, is the “murder capital” of the world. It has the highest rate of rape. And so on. Nor is this altogether fanciful. While international comparisons are no- toriously difficult, among countries that report their crime figures in more or less commen- surable ways – less than half of those on the planet – South Africa does seem to have among the worst rates of most violent felonies;16 although there are some surprises, like the fact that a recent UN report showed Estonia and Canada to have over double its per capita incidence of rape.17

    On the other hand, South Africa ranks much lower for property offences. According to the Seventh United Nations Survey on Crime Trends (see n.16), it came only 18th, in 2000 for all categories of theft – behind many “developed” countries, including those to which scared South Africans have chosen to emigrate. Against its rate of 1,287.21, Austra- lia (3,514.65), New Zealand (3,313.25), England and Wales (3,257.52), and Canada (2,220.77) look far worse; so do the Netherlands (4,580.26), Norway (4,281.34), France (3,963.83), Germany (3,701.56), Denmark (3,633.73), Iceland (2,662.99), and Finland (2,207.71), all of them commonly seen as havens of peace, order, and civility. Similar pat- terns and rankings obtain for other property offences. In fact, on the United Nations “grand total of recorded crimes” for 2000, which includes violent offences, South Africa was 10th, after New Zealand, England and Wales, the USA, the Netherlands, and Canada. This rank is inflated, moreover: the “grand total” omits several nations, many of them thought to be crime-ridden, that did not submit figures to the UN. Over the long run, too, South Africa’s relative position seems to be improving, not least because felony rates have been going up fast across the world; note, in this connection, the argument, made by John Gray (1998) and others, that the downside of “the neoliberal project” is a destructive escalation in global incidences of lawlessness and imprisonment. Thus, between 1997 and 2001, robbery inc- reased on average by 24% in Europe and 128% in Japan; violent criminality, by 22% in the EU (50% in France, 35% in the Netherlands, and 26% in England and Wales) and 79% in Japan (Barclay and Tavares 2003:2). Against this, if we believe the SAPS and the 2003 victim survey, the South African picture looks less dire. But could this more positive, less exceptionalist gloss be a product of the fact that less crimes are brought to the attention of the police here than elsewhere? Not really. All the comparative evidence suggests that South Africans report crime as often as citizens in other countries (Louw 1998:12f.).

    There is, however, a qualification to be made at this juncture. A decade ago, Lorrai- ne Glanz (1994:10) declared, peremptorily, that it is impossible to “know precisely how much crime takes place in South Africa, or anywhere else.” Glanz should know. Or, rather, not know. She was to become the Director of Crime Statistics in the post-apartheid Department of Justice. What she was pointing to, implicitly, is the fact that police statistics every- where are erected on an edifice of indeterminacies and impossibilities.

    The most pervasive of those indeterminacies are pragmatic. Official figures are composited from cases either brought to the police by the public or turned up by their own investigations. As a result, they inevitably under-count the incidence of crime; in South Afri- ca, this is made worse by a historic mistrust of the law, by the belief that conviction rates are low, and by the uneven bureaucratic capacities of the SAPS. But felonies may also beover-reported. This is less remarked in South Africa, with its strong public predilection to stress the pathological. According to both the police commissioner and the press,18 there has been a palpable increase in false claims of late, largely for financial motives; bearing false witness to having suffered crime is itself becoming a major category of criminality. Nor is it confined to minor misdemeanors. It extends to robbery, hijacking, housebreaking, ass- ault, sexual violation, arson, even homicide.19 It is impossible, of course, to establish the precise extent of either under- or over-reporting. Together, they make the quantifactual world of crime impossible to plumb.

    But indeterminacies inhere in other things as well. Some are purely actuarial, like the fact that crime rates are necessarily calculated against size of population – which, in South Africa, is affected by the presence of an unknown, if often wildly-guessed-at, number of “aliens.” Others lie in record-making itself. For example, the eventual disposition of felony figures often depends on whether a reported episode is coded as, say, attempted rape, sexual abuse, or aggravated assault, as murder or culpable homicide, kidnaping or abduction. A high level of arbitrariness is unavoidable. What is more in this respect, official statistics do not re-classify dockets once they have gone through the courts. Thus a death listed as murder that turns out to have been suicide, a car jacking or burglary or rape that morphs into a fraud case, an abduction that becomes a homicide; each of these will remain where they were originally tallied, there to disfigure official numbers in ways that are well-nigh impossible to ascertain – numbers that can, at best, paint a highly schematic, distorted picture of law and disorder in South Africa.

    Yet another species of indeterminacy derives from a quite different source. Because crime statistics are the dual products of police work and public reporting, it follows that they will fluctuate in proportion to the efficacy of the SAPS and the trust placed in it by the popu- lation. Hence, paradoxically, rising crime rates may be less an indicator of rising crime than it is of increased confidence in, and the success of, policing; less, in other words, a function of lawbreaking than of law enforcement. Or, which is most likely, of a complicated dialectic of the two. But the disfiguration of the real lies not only in the production of crime statistics. It also inheres in their circulation. There is, it appears, a proportional relationship between the generality of a quantifact and its capacity to travel as knowledge. The more inflected or refined any number, the less likely it is to survive the rigors of movement or mediation. It is only the most gross, least qualified – those that erase the differences which make a difference – that become national truths. Thus, to return to our example for all seasons, South African murder figures are cited constantly as a symptom of the state of disorder in the land. Rarely is reference made to the highly inflected geography that restricts most kill- ing to relatively confined spaces, spaces with a specifiable sociology. In this respect, the social geography of violence resembles those of countries like the USA or Brazil, which have lower homicide rates, but whose death zones in inner cities and favelas are not all that dissimilar from the sites of greatest danger here; indeed, relative enclaving is, arguab- ly, a better key to the calculus of risk than are national aggregates.

    When fully parsed, then, crime patterns in South Africa – even read through a haze of indeterminate numbers – are less exceptional than public discourse allows. But such ni- ceties are erased in the circulation of quantifacts. Among other things, this reasserts the contemporary mythos of a society at risk, its populace equally endangered. Which, as a large body of research shows, the population here is not. It also leaves intact the racial ar- chetype according to which the source of disorder lies overwhelmingly at the hands of young black men who are – in a metaphor that will prove both apt and unfortunate – hold- ing the country to ransom. Lost, too, is the fact South Africa has a social history, and a poli- tical sociology, in which statistics have come to mean different things to different people.

    To the extent that the crime stat is a mode of objectification, alike a means by which realities are realized and a lens through which a nation may see itself, they take on special salience in South Africa. Why? Most immediately, because, under the ancien regime, they did not circulate as a free currency of social knowledge; matters of law and order were ma- naged by the state as part of its racial politics of security. Besides which, black-on-black crime was under-counted because blacks did not count. Indeed, it has been said that, be- fore 1994, “the ‘real’ state of crime” was never reported (Marsh 1999:76; Shaw 1997; Em- mett 2000:290). But something more profound has happened than the mere provision of new, improved information. It is only with the opening up of a democratic public sphere – or, rather, of variously articulated spheres – that South Africa, as an undivided polity, has been able to reflect on itself, on its social order, on the spirit of a polity reborn. And in that process, crime statistics have become a standardized measure of disorder, marking out a new emergency to replace those of old. They are, as it were, a medium of populist dis- course that appears, also, to be a message.

    To say that the “real” extent of lawlessness in South Africa is unknown, that official statistics are a fact-making fiction, is not to deny the reality of crime. Or the brutal truths to which the numbers speak. Nor is it to deny that South Africans encounter criminality in visceral, concrete terms – whether it be at first hand, by anecdotal narration, or by a barra- ge of mediated incidents that, in their repeated re-telling, take on a perceptual mass of their own. As they do, these encounters morph from incidents to incidence, read in “the public mind” as the state of the nation, as the law in disorder, as a world under threat. Thus it is that numbers become a vehicle for the experience of the unreal, an experience that transforms the abstract into the sensate, general into the particular, the unknowable into the known. All of which serves to conjure up, once more, our reality-producing aphorism: Crime in South Africa is unreal. Therein, if we may be forgiven the pun, lies its truth value.

    THE CALCULUS OF POLITICS

    “They are now treating [crime statistics] like they are national security secrets.” Ted Leggett, BBC News, 7 October 2003.20

    In July 2000, Steve Tshwete, then Minister for Safety and Security, announced a moratorium on all official statistics. Due to grave doubts about their accuracy, he said, no more would be published for the while: the Police Commissioner had ordered a revision of prevailing procedures of data gathering and calculation. During the hiatus, government would continue to collect figures for its own purposes. But not for public consumption. Then, almost a year later, and as suddenly, the silence came to an end. On 31 May 2001, Tshwete declared that a re-tooled technology of number production was in place: the SAPS had a new, computerised Crime Administration System, new manuals, new staff, new training arrangements and equipment, more precise definitions of felonies, even fresh crime statistics.21 A New Era of Enumeration had dawned. The flow of figures began again.

    Once more, South Africa was awash in a stream of stats.
    When he announced the moratorium, the Minister seems to have sensed what was to come. The ban, he insisted, was “not an attempt at secrecy.” But then, as if to confirm suspicions to the contrary, he berated those who “bl[e]w South Africa out of existence by blowing up the levels of crime.”22 As he anticipated, the announcement was greeted with outrage. Opposition politicians accused the African National Congress of “an absolute abuse of power…outrageous in…a democratic country.”23 Independent researchers, noting that South African figures were the best on the continent, said that the withholding of crime information would “foster mistrust between the rulers and the ruled.”24 Could it be, asked one, “that the police…do not like what the statistics say?”25

    Perhaps the loudest protest came from the print media, for whom crime figures are a daily staple, their febrile fluctuations marking the pulse of national life. In the void left by the blackout, reporters set about doing their own counts “in the public interest.” The Cape Times called on readers for accounts of violent incidents on the notoriously crime-ridden N2 highway, a vital artery that has long been a corridor of conflict between the dispossess- ed and the prosperous who drive by to and from Cape Town. By compiling “an accurate picture” of risk, the paper hoped to goad the SAPS into action.26 Soon after, Independent Newspapers, arguing that the moratorium violated the Constitution, took legal action ag- ainst the Minister of Safety and Security and the Commissioner of Police for the Western Cape Province.27 Joining the chorus, the opposition Democratic Alliance alleged that, in the absence of proper statistics, it was impossible to “evaluate the performance of government” in discharging one of its most fundamental duties: ensuring the security of citizens.28 Public opinion was as vociferous: “Surely one of the best ways to counter the negative impact of crime…is the greatest possible degree of transparency from our public representatives?” wrote a typically angry correspondent to the Cape Times, indignantly offering a tally of his own recent encounters with crime.29

    The argument continued as long as the ban itself. Nor did it abate fully when the moratorium ended. This furore makes clear how crime statistics have become objects of struggle, how they crystalize debate among disparate parties in an expansive political process. As gauges of disorder, they are now the diagnostic index of the effectiveness of governance; which is why their publication is a vital sign of the transparency now synony- mous with democratic rule. As lawlessness eclipses other threats in the popular ima- gination, citizens regard this information as an inalienable right. And government, itself an increasingly complex amalgam of public and private interests whose functions are defined in terms of service provision, is seen above all as a guarantor of law and order to the citizen-consumer – even in South Africa, where there is still some commitment on the part of the state to public welfare amidst neoliberal devolution.

    Small wonder, then, that ruling regimes should feel compelled to produce credible crime counts. And to put a favorable spin on them for public consumption. Small wonder, too, that scholars, commentators, and the population at large should be wary of these counts, suspecting them of various sorts of misinformation. Nor is this a specifically South African problem. In September 2002, criminal justice experts in the U.S. expressed con- cern that the Attorney General was “exerting political control” over previously independent agencies responsible for collecting crime statistics.30

    To count crime, in short, is to produce the stuff of politics (cf. Dixon 2002). This has three dimensions. The first is epistemic. It lies in the nature of measurement itself. As we saw above, “true” rates of lawlessness are unknowable, “accurate” comparisons in space and time are all but impossible, and felony figures are an indeterminate product of the in- terplay of law-breaking and law enforcement. All of which lays the ground for a more calcu- lating play on quantifacts, one that seeks make them signify in different ways for different ends. This is the second dimension of the politics of crime statistics, the strategic, one much in evidence in the controversy over the moratorium. Here all parties “argued with numbers,” using them to confirm their own assertions and to discount those touted by others. Thus, where critics censured the withholding of data that reflected poorly on the state, and victims published counts in order to highlight statistical subterfuges, government accused the media of an unpatriotic inflation of levels of crime.

    The play of political strategy has been most palpable in relation to the national homi- cide rate, not least because it remains the standardized nightmare of most South Africans, a measure of the obscenity of a people wallowing in its own blood. Predictably, the state has reacted strongly to the assertion that the country is the “murder capital of the world.” One official response has been to try to counter South Africa’s alleged exceptionalism by placing its statistics in favorable light. Thus, in its first quarterly report after the moratorium (CIAC 2001), the SAPS presented a set of bold global contrasts; among them, the fact that, where Washington, D.C. had a homicide rate of 69.34 per 100,000 for January-June 1998, Pretoria’s was 41.12. While the logic at work in this comparison might not be totally arbitrary, it drew a sharp riposte: D.C. was the city with the steepest rate in the US, chided criminologist Ted Legget (2003); Pretoria was far from that here. Local figures for murder, rape, and aggravated robbery, went the counter-argument, are still “terrifyingly high” (Louw and Schönteich 2001:45). But the efforts of government to “spin” South African statistics continue unabated: housebreaking and assault are worse in Australia, we are told, car theft more prevalent in Canada, personal safety levels lower in the UK, and so on. At issue, in this counterfactual conjuring with comparison, is the production of a state of normality – and, hence, a normal state. To argue, both for domestic and foreign consumption, that rates of violent disorder are declining, at worst “stabilizing,” or that the police are “winning the war against crime,” is to assert that state, to assert the state.

    As this suggests, crime statistics have become inflated political tender. Among other things, they are an index of national worth in a global marketplace in which southern poli- ties must meet northern scrutiny in respect of democratization, stability, and credit-worthi- ness, and the like. In contention are such prizes as investment, foreign aid, tourism, world sports events. Spiking the public argument about numbers is the sense that what is “really” at issue are unspoken and unspeakable matters of race. African politicians and cultural commentators often suggest that the exaggeration of lawlessness in white media is an insi- dious form of racism, disparaging the ability of a black government to maintain order, of black police to enforce the law, of black youth to behave with civility. Conversely, many whites feel themselves to be the victims of a system in which violent crime is a form of racial revenge (van Rooyen 2000).

    Tangible in the controversy over crime figures has been the paradox of dis/trust of which we spoke earlier. Allegations about the abuses of enumeration seem only to affirm the faith in their revelatory potential, raising their value and intensifying the quest for ever more rigorous measurement. Thus it is that, despite suspicions about the distorting effects of statistics, especially in the service of a calculating government, hope remains in the re- demptive power of “accurate” – i.e. unmediated – numbers. Herein lies their quality as fe- tish. Note, in this respect, the enthusiasm for two internationally-acclaimed techniques of enumeration recently introduced in South Africa, victim surveys and geographical informa- tion systems (GIS). Far from being subjected to critique, they are widely held to offer a more exact purchase on levels of disorder. But these are not purely technical instruments: they have social and political implications, marking notable shifts in the ways that crime is conceived and counted. And how it is made to signify in public discourse.31

    It is precisely at the level of discourse that we must seek the third, the constitutive dimension of crime statistics. Because of the way they circulate, these numbers translate large vectors of danger into personal and collective markers of risk, subjectivity, identity. In so doing, they render numinous forces of disorder into concrete, communicable “facts,” conjuring up citizens, moral communities, the nation. Herein lies their “politics” in the lower case: their capacity to contrive or reproduce meaningful social categories. Nor is this merely a matter of official figures, victim surveys, or geographical information systems. Vernacular statistics, everyday forms of counting crime, are also tropes of popular interaction in South Africa; they feature centrally in narratives of lawlessness, themselves a vital idiom of public culture here. The semiotics of popular accounting turn out to be integral to the figuration of self, community, and society in the postcolony. It is to this, the constitutive dimension of statistics, that we devote the rest of this essay.

    CONSTITUTING THE CITIZEN-VICTIM
    “I want to reclaim my right to be wounded without my pain having to turn me into an example of woman as victim.” Njabulo Ndebele, The Cry of Winnie Mandela, 2003

    Victim surveys have gained currency across the world over the past thirty years; evi- dence, this, of a shift of attention in criminology from perpetrators to those whom they harm (Fattah 1986; Maguire and Pointing 1988). In 1987, an International Crime Victim Survey was proposed by the Council of Europe; a standardized version has now been carried out in over 50 countries. In the US and UK, national surveys are done on a regular basis. The method, which involves questioning a sample of people about their experience of a range of offences over a stipulated period of time, is said by its advocates to enhance official sta- tistics, casting light on the “dark figure of crime”: offences, like sexual abuse and assault, routinely under-reported, most of all among the poor and powerless (Banks 1997:11). These claims have been given wide credence, though some critics insist that underclasses are less likely to report “minor crimes” (Cramer 1995; Kleck 1991:175-6), that subjective recollection is always unreliable, and that the method is “not ideally suited” for collecting incidents of an intimate sort, registering a lower rate than do police statistics in respect of offences such as rape (ISS 2004:126).

    For those who champion them, these surveys are more than just an improved measure of crime. The technique has been propelled by an international movement, part of a world-wide politics of suffering, that has lobbied against a global “establishment” allegedly prejudiced against victims, victims held to be excluded from criminal justice processes for being “emotional and vindictive” (van Dijk 1996:1; Camerer 1997:1).32 In South Africa – where the rights of the injured were dramatically endorsed by the creation of the Truth and Reconciliation Commission soon after the end of apartheid – the first national survey was conducted by the Department of Safety and Security in 1998.33 A second, the one mention- ed above, was done by the Institute for Security Studies in 2003 (ISS 2004).

    The methods employed in victim surveys resemble those of market research. As neoliberal political culture comes ever more to define citizens as consumers, casualties of crime seem most aptly depicted as customers ill-served by government. For advocates of “victimology,” the consumer perspective is crucial to rethinking received, state-centric app- roaches to law and disorder. “Get tough” policies have had little success in curbing crime, they note; evidence from across the world suggests that police resources are better spent protecting those at risk (Camerer 1997:1; Farrell and Pease 2001). But more than address- ing state policy, these surveys aim to be vehicles of popular empowerment. “By shifting the focus of the inquiry from the offender” say Camerer et al (1998:1), they “provide information which enables victims themselves to take preventive action against further victimization.” Victims themselves turns out to be the key phrase.

    Displaying a generically neoliberal suspicion of government, the victim movement is wary of having its cause hijacked as an alibi for harsher “law and order.” It accuses the state of “stealing” crime from those who suffer it – and of redefining it as an offence against itself. “Victims,” proponents maintain, “are victims in their own right,…an end in themselves” (Camerer et al 1998:2). They seek to mobilize “civil society” behind “victims’ charters,” de- manding compensation from ruling regimes for their failure to maintain order.34 This stress on self-advocacy resonates with a more general tendency to displace politics into the do- main of the law and to reduce it to redress and punishment (Brown 1995:27; J. Comaroff n.d.; Comaroff and Comaroff 2003). Victim surveys, then, are part of an encompassing set of forces reshaping governance, public culture, and politics at the point at which the risk- bearing subject meets the right-bearing subject.35

    From the perspective of these surveys, “each member of society is an indirect or vi- carious victim of crime” (Glanz 1989:1), either a victim or a potential victim. While their data inform prevention strategies, they are directed largely at the public, being widely circulated by the media, often in dramatic form. In this manner, they become one many mechanisms – from NGO’s promoting civil protections to ubiquitous ads for home security – that encourage people to view themselves as prey; in this manner, too, they may create what they measure. Thus one study of Durban (Robertshaw et al 2001), having asked respondents about their perceptions of lawlessness, concluded that “many South Africans feel helpless and trapped by the fear of crime.” A wealth of evidence confirms that citizens identify them- selves ever more in terms of vulnerability to violation. And they organize on this basis too: support groups mobilize around rape victims, neighborhood watches form in the wake of attacks, petitions circulate in the name of the injured. Even felons see themselves as casu- alties: “Criminality, you have made me your victim!” declared an inmate at a spirited hiphop and poetry performance inside Cape Town’s Pollsmoor prison.36 Similarly an article in The Big Issue, organ of the “marginalized and unemployed,” which described youths in custody as “helpless animals, dumb and resigned behind their bars” (Kretzmann 2004:17).

    The victim surveys published and publicized in South Africa to date offer insight into the unintended ways in which enumeration implies evaluation. The results of the national survey of 2003, for example, were released so as to have maximum impact on public dis- cussion in the run up to the general election of 2004, in which crime was a emotive issue. They received prominent coverage. The media stressed that, despite the stabilization of lawlessness since 1998, the public felt less safe than it had five years before.37 Whatever else they conveyed, their reports gave graphic, pigmented accounts of people in fear. “Race Group’s Views of Safety Differ,” said a typical headline.38 In surveys of this sort, by contrast to official statistics, victimization and the anxieties to which it gives rise are heavily profiled in terms of hard-edged classifications of race, gender, age, and location. While they reveal persisting inequities in risk and security, these measures also reify old catego- ries at a time when identities and relations among them are under reconstruction. A widely reported study by Ted Leggett, for example, asserts that “Coloureds [are] twice as likely to be murdered,” and are much more likely to be jailed, than are blacks, whites, and Indians; his evidence is based on numbers from the Cape Flats, a terrain on which identities are often rendered highly ambiguous. The Director-General of Labor in the Western Cape, who found the study “disturbing,” remarked that it lent itself to the “demoniz[ation] and iso- lat[ion] of a whole group of South Africans.”39

    Undoubtedly, victim surveys expand received understandings of crime. Undoubtedly, too, they provide a counterpoint to official data, albeit sometimes as much for their similarities as for their differences. But, like all social measures, they are also complex discur- sive processes. As Wendy Brown (1995:21) argues, efforts to protect those with injury-for- ming identities may entrench the very thing they denounce. In seeking to counter insecurity by showing who is most susceptible to attack, profiling reinforces risk by reproducing cate- gories of victim in need of protection. And by instilling a culture of fear. This sense of vulne- rability is the ironic underside of liberalization, of a climate in which subjects are held to be “active participants in their own governance” – and government is, in theory at least, a me- chanism for the adjudication of decision-making (Rose 1993). Which is why politics, increa- singly, is centered on recognition, often through the law, for the entitlements of the relatively disadvantaged; why the disempowered are no longer a class but claimants in class actions; why social movements, formed out of shared disabilities, pursue rights to reverse wrongs. Citizenship here is defined as personal fulfilment: as a process of ongoing risk avoidance that rests on “incessant calculations” (Rose and Miller 1992: 201). But devolution has its limits, which are made manifest where freedom and choice run up against the real threat of victimhood.

    It is at this juncture that the paradoxical role of the state becomes visible. In calling for more policing, ordinary South Africans insist that an ordered world is impossible without regulation on the part of an interventionist state; hence the mantra that democracy is en- dangered by criminality. While the victim movement keeps its distance from government, a heightened awareness of the entitlements of citizens translates into a demand that the administration get tough on crime. Not only is there broad skepticism about “human rights policing,” believed to favor criminals over their prey, but there are continuing demands to bring back the death penalty, a topic we revisit below. This mood of popular punitiveness is the under-side of “minimal governance”: it is the animating force that allows the latter to transpose itself into its opposite when, in the name of emergency, executive authority over- rides civil liberties. The line between neoliberal government and fascism-lite, as the history of the present shows, is gossamer thin.

    In all this, the victim has a double-valence. S/he is claimed both by the state as it declares war on crime and by civil activists seeking recompense for the injured (van Dijk 1996:123). “The public,” meanwhile, becomes an aggregate of the imperilled, in which identity and difference are defined in terms of hurt and trauma. And entities like “community” and “neighborhood,” constructs with little other sociological salience, are given fresh life in the search for security, a search that begets new public-private institutions, new forms of surveillance, new modes of control.

    CRIMINAL GEOGRAPHY

    If victim surveys reduce the sociology of disorder to probabilities of injury over time, geographical information systems plot insecurity in space. In essence, GIS overlays one slice of information on another produce a single layer of previously unseen associations. Focusing primarily on criminal incidents, offender movements, and profiles of “targets, it has increasingly incorporated the “victim” as a category of analysis – for example, in dis- cerning the role of location in repeat victimization. As this implies, the two approaches may complement one another: one charts patterns from on high, the other from subjective ex- perience. Rose and Miller (1992:202) see this kind of complementarity as typical of the re- gulated autonomy of neoliberal polities, in which a stress on self-assertive citizenship exists alongside mechanisms for “governing at a distance.” But the two modes of measurement can also come into conflict. Some critics contrast the grounded truth of victim experience with the reified data generated by GIS, questioning the fetishism of its technology and the faith placed in its explanatory powers.

    In the era of “intelligence-led” policing (Read 2001:xxi), the expanded use of GIS un- derlines the ever more prominent role of statistics as vehicles of communication across the dispersed agencies – state, public, corporate, academic – that comprise the “partnerships” of neoliberal rule. Crime statistics circulate not merely as information, but as mediated discourse about the nature and efficacy of governance itself. Unlike victim surveys, which have been used as much to challenge state institutions as to inform them, GIS is a synoptic instrument (Obermeyer 1995:81) most useful in the centralized management of disorder. It has also been deployed in the development of methods of surveillance-from-a- distance, like CCTV, the advent of which has raised questions across the world about violations of privacy (Cho 1998:162). The recent announcement that new British crime-fighting initiatives would include the satellite tracking of serial offenders prompted at least one journalist to remind the Prime Minister of the Human Rights Act.40 But for the most part, such scruples succumb to the popular desire for security. In South Africa, GIS has largely been deployed, more modestly, to map incidents reported to the police. Yet enthusiasm for it has been marked: in 2001, the Minister for Safety and Security announced that it had been introduced at 340 police stations and would “greatly enhance…operational planning.”41

    A virtue of GIS, it is said, is its power to “influence people” by translating statistical analysis into accessible visual displays (Hirschfield and Bowers 2001:6). It is also held to reveal otherwise invisible risk factors for various sorts of offence by situating hotspots of reported attacks in their physical locale. But how exactly does an elaborate mapping of the distribution of lawlessness advance our understanding of its incidence? Ken Pease (2000: 228f), reflecting on the British scene, worries that the visual seductiveness of GIS – and a measure of technophilia – may inflate its importance at the expense of other ways of ap- proaching crime. Mapping belies the fact that victimization is not always structured along spatial lines, he argues. Nor does it capture the experience of those who share anything other than location.42 In short, the claim that GIS enables information to be “seen at a glance” is misleading. Note though, that “victimization,” the actual experience of the injured, re- mains the naked truth that GIS ought to be able to explain.

    Pease has hit on a critical problem here. The invocation of space as source of deter- mination in GIS derives not from a principled criminological theory. It is owed to techniques capable of making patterns of disorder seem so tangible as to be self-explanatory. But space is always, in the first instance, a product of human practice, both material and mean- ingful. As Merleau-Ponty (1962) and others (e.g. Soja 1989) have insisted, it does not exist in unmediated form, as a thing with determinations of its own. If this is true, it cannot, in it- self, reveal hidden causes – however it may be mapped.43 Yet GIS and victim surveys pre- sume that they can, casting their data into categories – “inner city,” “suburb,” “township,” “informal settlement” – that turn race and class into space. And attribute to it an inordinate explanatory weight (see e.g. Robertshaw et al 2001:68; Louw et al 1998:20f.).

    The deployment of crime maps in official reports and public media says much about their role as vehicles of inscription and communication – and about their effects on popular perceptions of space, danger, identity. If maps of state mark out the terrain of the nation, GIS “hotspots” show, vividly, the limits of governance. They delineate where order ends, where disorder prevails. Here the panoptic eye is ambiguous. It is not that of the criminal justice system. It is the dispassionate gaze of a technology that may be deployed, alike by private interests or by ruling regimes, for policing, scientific research, commerce. Even organized crime. If these qualify as instruments of “government at a distance,” to return to a more general issue to which we alluded above, what exactly is government? Foucauld- ians, eager to avoid the reification of the state, deploy the term to gloss the “shifting al- liances between diverse authorities in projects to govern a multitude of facts of economic activity, social life and individual conduct” (Rose and Miller 1992:174). But surely this reifies “governance” instead, fudging critical questions about the effects of privatization and technicization on organized power; questions about the collaboration, in our Brave Neo World, of different sorts of regulation – from law enforcement, through the regulation of intellectual property, to the management of markets. The term seems even less adequate in disclosing how technologies like GIS serve as modes of social control.

    Take an instance of the deployment of crime maps in the South African media: a full-page spread, “Pinpointing Our Crime Hotspots,” in the Saturday Star in 1999.44 It cen- ters on a map of Gauteng, embellished with graphics of a gun, prone bodies, a relict infant, a pair of cuffed hands. Box inserts tabulate figures for the “top-ten hit parade”: the policing areas with the highest concentration of serious crimes. The text situates the reader on this chart of terror: “Tourists and locals alike are familiar with Gauteng’s reputation as South Africa’s crime capital,” it begins, “but there are certain areas where you are more likely to be the victim of a specific type of crime than others.”

    Here it becomes clear how statistical renderings intersect, in “real life” situations, with other genres of representation, giving rise to the total crime fact. The communicative powers of GIS are extended for maximum impact, being overlaid by a montage of melodramatic images drawn from a standard repertoire. This graphic is framed by headlines that sport the grit-and-flash of classic crime reporting. The prose translates the panoptical data on the map into the implications for the reader-as-potential-victim. Together, they illuminate how so-called risk-reducing data information triggers trauma by tying victimhood to identity. “Women living in Johannesburg, Soweto, and Vaalrand should exercise extra caution be- cause in these areas between 43 and 216 women are raped for every 100,000,” says the text. “If you live in Pretoria or Johannesburg, ensure you have a good security system or a fierce dog, because the two cities are equally susceptible to housebreaking.” Finally, “[i]f you are able to dodge hijackers, be careful where you park your car: Avoid Pretoria and Johannesburg’s city center….” and so on. The report garnered considerable attention. In Mmabatho, where the Saturday Star has a large readership, it prompted one Tswana family to consider bringing their daughter back from college in Gauteng. Such “authoritative” interventions, like terror alerts issued by the US Department of Homeland Security since 9/11, are a common feature of official communication in the risk society. They announce serious threats that – while highlighting vulnerable people and places – are agonizingly vague. Risk, as the word itself suggests, is terminally uncertain, at once “both real and unreal” (cf. Beck 1992:29). Which is why it is always open to exploitation.

    The technical aura of the map in the Saturday Star coexists with the mis-en-scene of sensational media crime. Risk avoidance is written in a register calculated to induce fear: the hapless addressee is asked to pondering odds of surviving in Johannesburg, where simply being female is a mortal threat, where owning property requires a fierce dog, where driving a car invites a joust with jackers. No wonder that more than one survey has shown that South Africans, especially bourgeois city-dwellers, are becoming ever more fearful of crime. This imploding terror is the outcome of various intersecting processes, among them, the desire to perfect the measurement of disorder, an active private market in security, and an eagerness to sell newspapers.

    But the value that accrues to these maps as they circulate, as they invoke appre- hensive subjects and publics, is conditioned also by a wider social context: one in which violence has become a currency of politics and of economic enterprise; in which govern- ment both abhors the threat of disorder, yet uses it for its own ends; in which citizens are at once repelled and fascinated by lawlessness; in which other urgent threats, like poverty and ill-health, are eclipsed, making it more likely that crime serves as a routine mode of production and representation. The publication of evocative maps owes much to a deregu- lation of the means of enforcement, to an effort, in the words of a community policing spokesman, to get individuals and neighborhoods to “take responsibility…”45 Yet as we have said, these attempts seem to achieve precisely the opposite, fueling ever more insis- tent calls on government to treat crime “like the national emergency it is” – calls that make repeated appeal to statistics to substantiate their cause. 46

    TRAUMA TESTIMONIES AND MYTHOSTATS: figuring popular experience

    Crime rates, we have argued, are a psychic barometer. They measure the fall of old lines of separation, old securities – and the rise of new modes of integration, expectation, redistribution. But how exactly do they feature in popular discourse? What prompted us to contradict Nelson Mandela in asserting that, far from rendering it alien, numbers give substance to experience?

    A telling statistic of the recent South African past is that 58% of its metropolitan population (49% overall) had discussed crime in the prior two weeks (ISS 2004:49f.). Narratives of lawlessness rival the weather and sport as a topic of common talk, cutting across existing lines of difference: testimonies to transcendent truths, they root their cre- dibility in the fidelity of ordinary experience. These narratives are mundane melodramas whose endless retailing appears to wrest order from chaos. Tokens of a type, they evince several common features. One is to distill circumstantial evidence into fact by enumerating incidences. Not only does this signal veracity. It imparts primary value to second or third- hand happenings, translating a multiplicity of events into a shared subjective reality. The play between quantity and quality involves a humdrum hermeneutic that seeks to spell out the social proportions of risk and uncertainty. Vide this story, told us in June 2000 by a Tswana woman in her mid-70’s:

    Taxis have become very dangerous here in Mafikeng. My daughter had a terrifying experience last November: she hailed a taxi that was traveling to town. By the time it got to the main road, she was the only passenger in the van. The driver, who was drunk, turned sharply in the wrong direction and picked up speed. When L. called out to him, he pointed a gun over his shoulder and kept going. Luckily, he was for- ced to slow down behind a donkey cart, and she leapt out, rolling dow n a bank at the side of the road. She was badly bruised, and lost her purse. This is now the third case I have heard of recently in which women have had trouble in taxis. We really can’t travel around the way we used to in this town, even to wakes or funerals.

    This testimonial evokes the complicity of the listener by voicing several indices of verisimi- litude. It begins with a fact for which the tale is evidence: the risks of taxi-riding, itself iconic of the mobility brought by liberation and liberalization. The legitimacy of the speaker as witness, and the status of the story as evidence, derives from the relationship of narrator to victim; in this case, mother to daughter. Detailing personal connections assimilates the events to the terms of intimate experience. “We” – black, petit-bourgeois, peri-urban women – are meant to feel terror as an ordinary ride becomes a nightmare journey, death just the flick of a drunken trigger-finger away. And so crime produces its own subjects and sensations of the real, its culture of vicarious victimhood. Her story is our experience. It is all too real: we are all victims of taxi assault, we have all lost our freedom to violence.

    Tales of this kind are less about uniquely horrifying events than about the “fact” that such things have become commonplace. The incident in the taxi invoked other instances, however imprecise their comparability. “This is the third case I have heard of” turns random occurrence into a condition of public being and suffering. A letter to the Cape Times from a recently-returned emigre, written during the moratorium on statistics, deploys a similar semiotics of (ac)counting:

    In the 12 weeks I have been back…I have personally “encountered” 10 criminal acts against friends and acquaintances…At nearly one incident per week these statistics are mind-bending. If this is happening in my relatively affluent and sheltered life, I can only imagine what life must be like in less protected areas.47

    Again we see how the idiom of calculation makes visible the limits of order and, thereby, gains purchase on a people united in its vulnerability against the state. Street statistics are a means of embracing otherwise unimaginable sectors of society (“the less protected”) into a nation in search of security. The writer computes a home-made victim count, multiplying his “personal encounters” tenfold, thus assimilating third-hand incidents to first-hand experience. The numbers here make evident a hidden truth to which “the public” has a right – and, at the same time, inflate the menace.

    Here, as in the taxi tale, quantity turns into a qualifact: that the nation is in trouble. In this world, shared truths, about crime or anything else, come from the victims. “How many more innocent people have to die before the government will admit that its so-called law and order is a sick joke,” wrote Patsy Tyler to the Cape Argus in July, 2003.48 Tyler challenges the public to “stand up and be counted.” Anyone who has suffered crime should submit an account, and the media should declare a day on which to publish them, so that “every story has been told.” A “comprehensive list” of offences inflicted on its citizens would “shame our government in the eyes of the world.”

    But the popular calculus of crime also works by magnifying epic events into mytho- stats: events that, in their singularity, come to signify collective being and trauma – and, in turn, give rise to the most terrifying statistic of all, namely, that everyone “knows” one or more people who have suffered brutal attack. Spectacular violence tends to be a ne- cessary condition for an incident to have this effect. Other social considerations also add uncommon sign value to particular episodes; their occurrence, for example, in relatively en- closed populations hitherto largely free from violence. Like the slaying of 52-year-old Mot- lhabane Makolomakwa in the quiet North West village of Matlonyane. Known as “Ten-Ten” after a famed soccer star, the victim was the most prominent resident of his impoverished community; a successful farmer, former mid-level government employee, and chair of the local “tribal council,” he had also sponsored a football team. In 1994, five youths hacked and burned him to death in his own truck. They insisted that he had killed their fathers and turned them into zombies – this being a common explanation nowadays for why some become rich while others, especially young males, remain jobless. Found guilty, the “boys” were each sentenced to twenty years.49 The murder and High Court trial, which were avidly covered by local media, riveted the Tswana-speaking population of the province. They made plain just how much the division between young and old had been exacerbated by fears of escalating crime. Older citizens returned repeatedly to the incident as evidence of a loss of community and respect for authority among “the children.” For them, it underlined the virtues of “traditional” discipline. Young men, on the other hand, took the case to illust- rate the negative effects of the monopolization, by their seniors, of the means of producing wealth. Among both, it hardened lines of generation and intergenerational conflict.

    Another set of collective identities materialized when, in January 2003, nine men were murdered in a male massage parlor in Sea Point, on Cape Town’s Atlantic seaboard, their throats cut before they were shot in the head.50 The site, scale, and bloodiness of the killing pointed to a hate crime. The Gay and Lesbian Equality Project of South Africa quick- ly became involved, its representatives meeting with the assistant police commissioner. Police reported a huge response to the request for leads, and, unusually, sex workers and gay organizations “joined hands” with the ANC in a memorial service.51 While the case re- mained unique in its proportions, its meaning grew murky as the SAPS became convinced that the motives for the crime were more routine: that it was drug-related, perhaps, or the aggravated consequence of a robbery.52 Yet the atrocity retained its mythic proportions, entering public discourse as an index of heightened risk to all gays. Just how such episo- des generate terrors of their own became clear in June 2004, when the Gay and Lesbian Alliance lodged a complaint against a website that, among other offensive statements, said – with obvious reference to the massacre – that homosexuals should be “Sizzled.”53

    This case makes plain how epic crimes may evoke and intensify a sense of citizen- ship in communities of identity. Mass mediation is integral to the process, converting extra- ordinary happenings into a generic intimacy, a shared sensation of fear. Their victims are at once unusual and horrifically commonplace: you, I, could be next. Derrida (2002:248) observes that each murder is “singular, thus infinite and incommensurable” (original em- phasis); yet, ironically, its capacity to bespeak the general, to instill a sense of common predicament, derives from that very singularity. Mythic crimes signify by means that go bey- ond identification or transference. In their suffering and annihilation, the socially-marked casualty substitutes for the self and the collectivity for which s/he comes to stand: youth, the elderly, women, gays, whites, property-owners, the nation. Hence the tendency to claim those who, like sacrificial victims, redeem their kind with their innocent blood. By their dramatic erasure they spell out the minimal conditions of humanity and moral community.

    Particularly galvanizing in this regard was the kidnaping of Leigh Matthews, 21-year- old daughter of a Johannesburg businessman in July, 2004.54 In South Africa as we have seen thousands of persons, young and old, go missing each year. Yet this case mobilized an “overwhelming” response from people across the land.55 Why?

    What made this event so compelling was not just the media melodrama or the voy- euristic curiosity aroused by the private suffering of the attractive and the affluent. Neither was it the appeal of its blond victim, pictured again and again in a satin ball-gown, on the poignant brink of womanhood. It was the way in which these things, occurring at the inter- section of race and class, worked together to make it seem at once exceptional – “Touched By an Angel,” ran one headline56 – yet capable of typifying the state of the nation-as-trau- ma. Ms. Matthews was singled out by social circumstance: reports noted that her kid- nappers had probably done research into her father’s income.57 Yet, as You magazine not- ed on its cover, “not only [the] rich” are targets. “You could be a victim.”58 The dialectic between singularity and representativeness at work in the image of Leigh Matthews is evident, too, in a report in a national Sunday paper:59 “Hundreds of South African families are tormented by the anguish of not knowing when their missing loved one might be found,” it read. “More than 1800 adults and nearly 1300 children were reported missing…last year” Missing, but not kidnaped. There is a wealth of difference between abductions, runaways, and kidnapings. A wealth of difference and a difference of wealth. Child abductions have long been prevalent in poor communities all over the country.60 These ca- ses seldom merit media attention, a point forcibly made by several black callers to talk shows in Cape Town at the time; one community network, Bush Radio, refused to cover the event for this reason. The discrepancy is underscored in Michael William’s perspicacious detective thriller, The Eighth Man (2002), which follows the parallel deaths, in the Western Cape, of two young people separated by race and class. By contrast to those of middle-class white children, Williams’s story tells us, the bodies of impoverished young blacks often still do not count.

    Leigh Matthews is set apart from these faceless victims. Her case had proved a challenge, said the head of the Missing Person’s Bureau, “because kidnaping for ransom [i]s not…common.”61 This is disputable. SAPS figures indicate that it became much more frequent during the 1990’s; though just how frequent is a subject of disagreement.62 A spokesmen for a corporation that markets “risk assessment” and “crisis management” across the world suggests that it has become a brazen industry in search of quick turn- over.63 This corporation, which trains wealthy, nervous South Africans in “pre-incident” and anti-kidnap techniques – its courses are covered by ransom insurance – insists that the vast majority of those kidnaped are returned alive.

    Not in this case. A cash ransom was delivered by Mr. Matthews.64 But his daughter was not returned. As the days went by, the “public” coalesced ever more visibly around the incident. Police set up a 24-hour line to deal with the “flood of information” coming in; hund- reds of South Africans, including many abroad, posted messages of support on a special website.65 Strangers in the street, in elevators, in taxis exchanged information, particularly in Johannesburg. The tragic discovery of her body eleven days later drew forth an outpour- ing of emotion: “Country mourns for Leigh,” intoned a typical headline, above a photograph of a diverse group of fellow students signing a book of sympathy on the elite private univer- sity campus from which she was snatched.66 A petition was launched on the internet calling on government to reinstate the death penalty:67 “Do it for Leigh Matthews,” it read. Nelson Mandela, the State President, and representatives of all major political parties offered public condolences. “Leigh Matthews was a flower, the lifeblood of the nation,” said an ANC spokesman. “We can’t unite…if these sick elements are in our midst.” But, ironically, it is precisely around events like these that the nation does unite, hyperreal events that become the measure of a traumatized citizenry transcending its differences, if only for an instant. “Something like this could happen to any of us,” wrote the Matthews family to the Sunday Times; “we need to come together as a community, as a nation, and take a stand against such wickedness.”68 Obscured here is the place of this tragedy in a larger pattern of lawlessness, one heavily inflected by race, class, and gender: one in which, as we have seen, rates of injury remain heavily concentrated among the black urban poor. The fact that the suspect subsequently arrested for the killing was a young white man, the son of a Baptist minister and a fellow student – not, as widely anticipated, a Nigerian gangster – merely adds to the irony.69

    Such is the alchemy of numbers in everyday discourse – in which crime stories are a privileged register not just for calculating the quality of life and the state of the nation, but for mobilizing mass action. In making the singular into the plural and vice versa, we repeat, this arithmetic bypasses the sociology of crime. Narratives of lawlessness might console, enthrall, indict, particularly among the classes that take personal safety as a right and have property to protect; one effect of the Matthews kidnaping, after all, was to magnify levels of terror among paler, more prosperous citizens. A politics of indignation comes not far be- hind: “It is our country and our right to be able to live free of fear,” said that same internet petition in the name of Ms. Matthews. While such exchanges, mulled over in private, may do little to address the structural bases of insecurity, they do a lot to prime the culture of dread, and the sense of immanent victimhood, that they seek to redress.

    CONCLUSION

    “It is a terrible space to be living in; in what must be one of the best societies on earth and not allowing yourself to enjoy it.” Mondli Makhanya, Sunday Times, September 200470

    In Lewis Nkosi’s play, The Rhythm of Violence, published in 1964, the main action takes place in a makeshift police station in the Johannesburg City Hall, overlooking a square in which a protest meeting is in progress. The crowd yells (p.3),

    “Freedom in our lifetime!”
    Jan ( [a young white policemen] nervously): ”How many of us are here? “
    Piet (his senior) ”Two hundred men at the ready to shoot…”
    Jan (more nervous still): “You think that number is enough?”
    A voice from the square, across the dialogue: “Can they rule by the gun forever?”

    In this brilliant cameo, Nkosi captures a telling moment in the tortured history of numbers in South Africa. Critical episodes in this history are figured in stark fractions, the proportions of which have not changed as much as we might like to think. The brutal percentages of apartheid rule – 13% of the people with 87% of the land – have morphed into new mea- sures of inequality: grossly uneven rates of victimization, a close correlation of poverty with violence and disease, and the like. Now, as before, politics crystalizes in ratios, and not just in respect of crime. Few issues loom as large in the battle over AIDS than statistics that purport to describe the pandemic. This, too, is evidence for one of our contentions: that, in their very abstraction, numbers make real phenomena otherwise ungraspable in human experience. But, in so doing, they produce new indeterminacies. And P/politics in both the upper and the lower cases.

    These politics, we argue, are more complex than is implied by the Foucaultian link between numbers and biopower. This is not only because “governmentality” fails to grasp neoliberal collaborations between the private and public sectors. It also glosses over the degree to which quantifacts are the stuff of contestation. As we have seen, official felony counts are routinely debunked, and often appropriated, in the cause of new species of so- cial action. When governance is reduced to law, order, and service delivery, and when citi- zenship hinges on security, crime rates become a prime currency of public culture, a prime index of order, a prime gauge of effective rule – and a prime suspect in efforts to detect a politics of bad faith.

    In South Africa, in sum, levels of lawlessness are made to bear witness to the suc- cess or failure of post-apartheid democracy and, by extension, to the legacy of colonialism. They are the benchmark against which reconciliation and enfranchisement are evaluated. And the specter against which a sociological imagination is shaped, moral reform is moot- ed, and grass-roots mobilization takes flight. In all this, whatever they may or may not actually measure, crime statistics fill the space between the unknowable and the axiomatic, defining subjects and populations as they do. As this suggests, they are uncommonly good to think with – which, in part, is why enumeration is not limited to state bureaucracies or even to those who count in the public interest. Tallying lawlessness is a mundane communicative practice, a mode of figuring the relationship between incidents and incidence, epic events and everyday existence, uncertainty and order.

    But, as we have seen, vernacular accounting is no more capable of eliminating un- certainty than is any other form of calculation. The endless recycling of experience – its re- counting, in the double sense of the term – may seek to probe reality and reduce ambigui- ty, to tame horror by resort to repetitive narration. But, by making third-hand happenings into first-person sensations, it amplifies vulnerability, reiterating a state of apprehension, a frisson to be replayed, a trauma hard to transcend. Which may explain why such anger is evinced by evidence that South Africa is not as exceptional as it may seem. At the same time, numbers do not mean the same everywhere across the social spectrum. Recall one last time that those most at risk are also least likely to see crime as a transcendent danger – in part because they face other life-threatening challenges. It is also the case that the vic- tims who count most, who escape “becoming a statistic” by attaining mythic status, are sel- dom those for whom suffering is part of their generic condition. But it is such epic felonies, like the Makolomakwa burning, the Leigh Matthews kidnaping, or the Sizzlers massacre, that become iconic of collective identities, of publics, of a nation said to be sinking into a sea of criminality. Therein lies the standardized nightmare, the abomination, from whose jaws social order it to be wrested. Therein lie the perverse politics and the peculiar produc- tivity of crime. Therein lies the criminal anthropology of the Brave Neo South Africa.

    AFTERWORD

    Just after this essay was completed, in September 2004, the South African Police Service published its new statistics for the financial year 2003/4. They showed that the incidence of most violent felonies – the major exception being armed robbery, much of it street mugging – had decreased perceptibly. What is more, figures for the provinces indicated that patterns of variance had increased; for example, the homicide ratio of Khayelitsha, the township mentioned earlier, and Camps Bay, a famously rich, white seaside neighborhood, was 358:1. In sum, the patterns described above were, if anything, further emphasized. Also affirmed was our observation of the tendency of South Africans, especially South Africans of privilege, to disbelieve “good news” or to discredit official numbers that might salve the national trauma. The reaction to these new statistics was striking: they were greeted, wrote the Cape Times, with the same “outrage,…anger and displeasure” that annual police reports always seem to evoke.71 The flood of letters to the press is best captured, perhaps, in a single caption: “We, the People, Victims of Horrific Crime, Know the `Good News’ is a Lie.”72 Nor did such responses come only from the lay public. Women’s and children’s rights activists, offended at the under reporting of rape and abuse, expressed themselves volubly. So much so that President Thabo Mbeki counter-attacked at length in his weekly letter published on the African National Congress website, ANC Today.73 “When,” he asked, “is good news bad news?” When it is read, he said, answering his own question, through the kind of psychosis that produces a fear of freedom. Perhaps. The argument continues.

  • Beasts, Banknotes, and the Color of Money in Colonial South Africa

    Beasts, Banknotes, and the Color of Money in Colonial South Africa

    Introduction

    Once upon a time it was little more than a cliche ́ to remark the material(ist) underpinnings of colonialisms, old and new. Classical Marxist political eco- nomy, its various Marxoid offshoots, and liberal economic histories alike took for granted that materialities motivated and conditioned colonial encounters everywhere. This, almost in a caricature of Hegelian dialectics, produced its antithesis in the 1990s – the so-called ‘culturalist’ approach, which argued that, above all else, those encounters were exercises in the imposition on widely dispersed ‘others’ of new orders of knowledge, new ways of being- in-the-world, new modes of self-awareness. In retrospect, this theoretical opposition now seems Procrustean. Colonialism everywhere has always been a process simultaneously material and meaningful, violent and capillary. Materialities – the concrete, ecologically founded activities of production, exchange and consumption – are always mediated by cultural categories and dispositions, themselves less a closed system of ‘symbols and meanings’ than a field of evanescent, differentially valued, variably contested signs and practices; conversely, those categories and dispositions are constantly revalued by the conditions of the concrete world in which they are firmly embedded. To be sure, meanings, messages and values are often materialized in objects that carry their force more compellingly and unobtrusively than words. Which is why the material record often reveals things about large- scale historical processes that the documentary record does not.

    It is for this reason that close attention to materialities affords a privileged insight into the workings of colonialisms everywhere; they open up an otherwise refractory angle of vision onto the regimes of value that underlie the interactions, over the short, medium and long run, between colonizers and those whom they would bring under their dominion.

    But regimes of value – and, even more, encounters between different regimes – presume mediation, translation and communication among the currencies, at once verbal and material, that objectify them. Which, in turn, depends on mechanisms of commensuration, that render negotiable otherwise inimical, apparently intransitive, orders of signs and practices. Without such mechanisms, which have often been the object of conflict and contestation, colonialism, as modernist project, would have made no sense, neither as a world-historical undertaking on the part of colonizers nor as a lived reality to those upon whose worlds it was wrought.

    The following essay, then, interrogates the role of commensuration in the colonial encounter and, by extension, in the production of society and history. It explores a very specific obsession with very general historical implications: the effort of colonial evangelists to introduce coinage, to replace beads and cattle with banknotes, among Tswana peoples in South Africa. At its broadest, it posits a post-Marxist argument about the salience of commensuration in the modernist construction of society and history, and, above all, in the forging of empires. For at the heart of all ‘modern’ colonialisms, a condition of their possibility perhaps, were mundane mechanisms that made inimical kinds of value, with different cultural roots, at once objectifiable, comparable and negotiable. Commensuration and objectification, standardization and abstraction, equilibration and convertibility, of course, all feature prominently in classic theories of commodification, also in theories of the workings of money. But their significance in the construction of modernity as an ideology of global scale, and in the encounter between Europe and its others, has not been adequately plumbed. Nor, we believe, have their various media, their poetics and magicality, been adequately theorized.

    In order to make our general point, and to explore its further theoretical consequences, we analyse processes of commensuration in one African colonial theatre, focusing on the material transactions they enabled across semantic frontiers; on their diverse and differently endowed media, alike indigenous and imported; on their implications of the long run for cultural constructions of wealth; on their material effects upon all involved. We ask why it was that the campaign to convert Tswana to Christianity, and to the ways of the West, concentrated so centrally on recasting their currencies – on teaching them to use cash, to do good by buying and selling goods, to commodify their labors by transforming the wages of sin into virtuous incomes. We trace how these ventures were challenged by African conceptions of value, how they called into being hybrid tokens of exchange, how they set in train struggles to domesticate new alchemies of enrichment while striving to protect local means of storing wealth. We shall show that, for 19th- century colonial evangelists in South Africa, saving savages meant teaching savages to save. Also to produce providentially, using God’s gifts to bring forth the greatest possible abundance. Or at least marketable surpluses. Drawing ‘native’ communities into that body of corporate nations meant, first and foremost, persuading them to accept money, the ultimate currency of conversion, commerce, civility, salvation. In their efforts to do this, the Protestant missions took the waxing spirits of capitalism, its specie and its signifying conventions, on a world-historical journey.

    In recuperating that journey, we seek to make visible the hidden hand, sometimes the sleight of hand, behind the political economy of 19th- century European colonialism. Which returns us to the broad outlines of our argument: (i) inasmuch as the building of empires depended on processes of commensuration, on rendering epistemically equivalent and transitive once incomparable objects and ideas, signs and meanings, it demanded media – beads, coin, contracts and the like – with the capacity, simultaneously, to construct, negate and transfigure difference; and (ii) inasmuch as those media, those currencies of conversion, opened up new lines of distinction, new languages of value, new forms of inequity, new objects of desire, new possibilities of appropriation and exploitation, they took on magical properties; this because (iii) they appeared, in and of themselves, to objectify history-in-the-making, even to make history of their own accord. Which, we shall demonstrate, is why banknotes, beads and bovines became the objects of a protracted struggle in the South African interior; why, more generally, they became metonymic of the differences of value on which the colonial encounter, tout court, was played out.

    page4image30440688

    Figure 1 Map of South Africa in the early 19th century.

    As this suggests, we seek here to make two species of theoretical claim. Both are instantiated by our South African story, both extend far beyond it. One is about ‘modern’ European colonialism, whose historical logic, we propose, is incomprehensible without an understanding of the processes of commensuration and conversion that allowed various worlds to be brought into the same orbit of being, both imaginatively and concretely. The other is about commensuration itself and about the media upon which it depends; media fetishized not merely because they congeal labour power and/or obscure relations embodied in processes of production, nor because they displace unspeakable passions from people to objects or vice versa, but because, being uniquely endowed things, they take on a social life of their own. Their genius, we shall show, does not lie in their being empty, or emptied, signifiers, just as their meaning does not derive from their relations to other, equally empty, signs. It is owed in part to their intrinsic properties, in part to the moral, material and magical work they are made to do in the exigent course of history.

    Species of values, value and specie

    Christian political economy: secular theology, sacred commerce If early modern European political economy was a secular theology (Hart 1986, 647), contemporary Nonconformist theology sanctified commerce. During the ‘second reformation’ of the late 1700s, British Protestantism had refashioned itself with cultural fabric milled by the Industrial Revolution. Indeed, the interplay of church and business, realms never fully separate, produced a rich discourse, at once religious and temporal, about value and its production (Hempton 1984, 11; Waterman 1991, 3f). Evangelicals of the 18th century, Rack (1989, 385f) claims, had been more influenced by the language of practical reason than their espousal of scripture and spirituality might suggest.

    But the discourse of political economy was particularly congenial to the spirit of the great evangelical societies. While liberal theory per se was seldom a subject of open discussion among missionaries to South Africa, most of them were guided by its material and moral principles. Evangelical societies were run like businesses, with men of commerce actively investing their resources and managing their affairs (Helmstadter 1992, 10). ‘Business’, in fact, seems to have served as a synecdoche for human action in the world (Smith 1976 (1776), 14), just as ‘usefulness’ conveyed a sense of virtuous efficacy (Helmstadter 1992, 9). In the field, the Nonconformists put their trust in the power of money to bring progress, and to place all things, even God’s grace, within human reach. This faith in the creative powers of cash recalls Simmel’s Philosophy of money, perhaps the most refined statement of the 19th-century European belief in the transformative power of coin. For Simmel (1978, 291), man was by nature an ‘exchanging animal’ and, by this token, an ‘objective animal’ too; exchange, in its ‘wonderful simplicity’, made both the receiver and the giver, replacing selfish desire with mutual acknowledgement and objective appraisal. Transaction, he went on, begets rationalization. And the more that values are rationalized, ‘the more room there is in them, as in the house of God, for every soul’. Because of its unlimited convertibility (Simmel 1978, 292), money was uniquely capable of setting free the intrinsic worth of the world to be traded in neutral, standardized terms. And so it enabled the construction of an integrated society of morally dependent but psychically self-sufficient persons (Simmel 1978, 297f).

    While they might never have put it in just these terms, Nonconformist missionaries in South Africa devoted much of their effort to making Africans into ‘exchanging animals’, an enterprise in which cash played a pivotal role. They, too, nurtured the dream of an expansive civil society built not upon savage barter but upon transactions among self-possessed, moneyed persons. According to this dream, the liberation of ‘natives’ from a primitive dependence on their kin and their chiefs lay in the creation of a higher order, a world of moral and material interdependence mediated by stable, impersonal media: letters, numbers, notes and coin.

    There was, as everyone knows, another side to money: its long-standing Christian taint as an instrument of corruption and betrayal. In part this flowed from the power of cash, indeed all instruments of commensuration, to equate disparate forms of value. It could dissolve what was unique, precious and personal, reducing everything to the indiscriminate object of private avarice. What was more, the ability of coin to transpose different forms of worth enabled profitable conversions to be made among them; in particular it allowed the rich to prosper by using their assets to control the productivity of others. Bloch and Parry (1989, 2f; cf. Le Goff 1980) remind us that this sort of profit was anathema to the medieval European church, which saw productive work as the only legitimate source of wealth and condemned, as unnatural, the effortless earnings of merchants and moneylenders. Capitalism was to exploit the metabolic qualities of money in unprecedented ways, of course – especially its capacity to make things commensurable by turning distinct elements of human existence, like land and labour, into alienable commodities. Protestantism would endorse this process by sanctifying desire as virtuous ambition, and by treating the market as a realm of provident opportunity. Yet its medieval qualms remained. As Weber (1958, 53) stressed, those Christians who most aptly embodied the spirit of capitalism were ascetics. They took little pleasure in wealth per se. For them, making money was an end in itself, a transcendental value. It gave evidence of ceaseless ‘busy-ness’ and divine approval.

    Insofar as money remained demonically corrosive, there was only one way to avoid its corrupting qualities: to let it go. If it was to generate virtue, it had visibly to circulate. Hoarded wealth was ‘the snare of the devil’ (Wesley 1986, 233). It made men forsake the inner life for superficial pride, luxury and leisure. The Divine Proprietor required that his stewards put his talent to work either by cycling it back into honest business or by giving it away in charity; the proper movement of wealth was both creative and positive. By those lights, exchange was production (Parry 1989, 86). Nonconformists like Wesley still held to a labour theory of value, but now the notion of industry was cast in terms of manufacture and the market, of wage labour, the circulation of wealth, and the productive character of capital.

    Read in this light, it is clear that the economic emphasis of missionary practice in South Africa expressed more than a mere effort to survive or even to profit. It expressed the spirit of liberal modernity, being part of the attempt to foster a self-regulating commonwealth, for which the market was both the model and the means; to foster, also, what Unsworth (1992) has aptly termed a ‘sacred hunger’, an insatiable desire for material enrichment and moral progress. As we shall see, the task proved onerous, for the ‘mammon of unrighteousness’ was never easily befriended. By the mid- 1820s some of the more radical evangelicals in England were denouncing the reduction of human qualities to price. And, in the mission field, the Nonconformists were caught, time and again, in the double-sided implications of money. Meanwhile, the kind of value carried by coin would come face to face with African notions of worth, setting off new contrasts, contests and combinations.

    Other kinds of value The southern Tswana world of the early 19th century bore some similarity to the one from which the missionaries set out. Stress was laid here, too, on human production as the source of value. Here, too, communities were understood as social creations, built up through the ceaseless actions and transactions of people eager to enhance their fund of worth. Here, too, exchange was facilitated by versatile media that measured and stored wealth, and permitted its negotiation from afar.

    These parallels, we have argued (Comaraoff and Comaroff 1992, 127f), are sufficient to cast doubt on the exclusive association of commodities and competitive individualism with industrial capitalism. Or with modernity. But, by the same token, similar practices do not necessarily have the same genesis, constitution or meaning. Although southern Tswana subscribed to a fundamentally humanist sense of the production of wealth, their understanding of value – and the way it vested in persons, relationships and objects – was different from that of their interlocutors from abroad. Thus, while early missionaries thought they detected in the Africans a stress on self- contrivance, a dark replica of Western economic man, they found, on longer acquaintance, that this person was a far cry from the discrete, enclosed subject they hoped to usher into the church. Indigenous ‘utilitarianism’, Tswana literati like Molema (1920, 116) insisted, was unlike European ‘egoism’; the evangelists referred to the ‘native’ variant as ‘selfishness’. Indeed, closer engagement of previously distinct economies on the frontier would reveal deep distinctions behind superficial resemblances. And it would give birth to a dynamic field of hybrid subjects and signs.

    The Setswana verb go dira meant ‘to make’, ‘to work’, or ‘to do’. Tiro, its noun form, covered a wide range of activities – from cultivation to political negotiation, from cooking to ritual performance – which yielded value in persons, relations and things. It also produced ‘wealth’ (khumoˆ), an extractable surplus (of beer, artefacts, tobacco, stock and so on) which could be further deployed to multiply worth. Sorcery (boloi) was its inverse, implying the negation of value through attempts to harm others and/or unravel their endeavours. Tiro itself could never be alienated from its human context and transacted as mere labour power; that experience still awaited most southern Tswana. Rather, it was an intrinsic dimension of the everyday act of making selves and social ties.

    This vision of the production of value, based on close human interdepen- dence, bore little resemblance to that of liberal economics. For Tswana, wealth inhered in relations. Which is why its pursuit involved (i) the construction of enduring connections among kin and affines, patrons and clients, sovereigns and supporters, men and their ancestors; and (ii) the extension of influence by means of exchanges, usually via the medium of cattle, which secured rights in, and claims over, others. But, while these rights and claims were constantly contested, the productive and reproductive properties of a relationship, be it wedlock or serfdom, could not be separated from the bonds that bore them (Molema 1920, 125; Schapera 1940, 77). The object of social exchange was precisely not to accumulate riches with no strings attached; the traffic in beasts served to knit human beings together in an intricate weave, in which the density of linkages and the magnitude of value were one and the same thing.

    Because they were the means, par excellence, of building social biographies and accumulating capital, cattle were the supreme form of property here; they could congeal, store and increase value, holding it stable in a world of flux (Comaroff and Comaroff 1992, 139). Not surprisingly, their widespread use as currency in human societies was noted by early theorists of political economy (Smith 1976 (1776), 38; Marx 1967, 183). While Adam Smith judged them ‘rude’ and ‘inconvenient’ instruments of commerce, he appreciated that they embodied many of the elementary features of coin, being useful, alienable, relatively durable objects. Although standardized as species, moreover, stock come in different sizes and colours, genders and ages, and so might be utilized as tokens of varying quality and denomination. (Many African peoples, famously, have long elaborated on the exquisite distinctions among kine). True, cattle are not as divisible as inanimate substances like metal and tend, therefore, to be more gross, slow-moving units of trade. But, as we shall see, southern Tswana took this to be one of their advantages over cash, whose velocity they regarded as dangerous. Herds were movable, of course, especially for purposes of exchange, a fact stressed by Marx (1967, 115); for him, the apparent self-propulsion of currency was crucial to its role in animating commodity transactions. Affluent Tswana men exploited this ambulatory quality, dispersing bridewealth to affines and loaning stock to clients as they strove to turn their resources into control over people. They also rotated animals among dependents, and between cattle-posts, both as a hedge against disaster and as a way of hiding assets from the jealous gaze of rivals (Schapera 1938, 24).

    It is as exchange value on the hoof, then, that cattle occupied a pivotal place in southern Tswana political economy. Their capacity to objectify, transfer and enhance wealth endowed them with almost magical talents. Much like money in the West. The beast, goes the vernacular song, is ‘god with a wet nose’ (modimo o nkoˆ e metsi; Comaroff and Comaroff 1992, 127). This is a patent instance of fetishism in bovine shape – of the attribution to objects, that is, of value produced by humans – which suggests that the commodity is not specific to capitalism. At the same time, the case of Tswana stock also shows that commodification need not be an all-or- none process, that it is always culturally situated in a meaningful world of work and worth. Here, for example, while animals enabled rich men to lay claim to the labours of others, they did not depersonalize relations among people. Quite the contrary. They drew attention to the social embeddedness of those very relations – while making them seem part of the natural order of things.

    The complex qualities of cattle currency would intervene in mission efforts to transform the southern Tswana sense of value. For beasts were enough like money to be identified with it, yet enough unlike it to make and mark salient differences. On the one hand, they could abstract value. On the other, they did the opposite: they signified and enriched personal identities and social ties. The capacity of animals in Africa to serve both as instruments and as signs of human relationship has often been noted; the so-called ‘bovine idiom’ is an instance of the more general tendency of humans to use alienable objects to extend their own existence by uniting themselves with others (Mauss 1954; Munn 1977). Both in their individual beauty and their collective association with wealth, kine were ideal – and idealized – personifications of men. A highly nuanced vocabulary existed in Setswana to describe variations in colour, marking, disposition, horns and reproductive status (Lichtenstein 1973, 81; Sandilands 1953, 342). Named and praised, they were creatures of distinction. Not only did they bear their owners’ stamp as they traversed social space (Somerville 1979, 230), they also served as living records of the passage of value along the pathways of inheritance, affinity, alliance and authority.

    The intricate patterns of stock deployment among Tswana made it difficult for early European visitors to assess their holdings. Longer-term records suggest a history of fluctuations in animal populations, with cycles of depletion being followed by periods of recovery, at least until the end of the 19th century (Grove 1989, 164). But there is clear evidence of the existence, at the beginning of that century, of large and unequally distributed herds. Observers were struck by blatant discrepancies in cattle ownership, and by the unambiguous association – Burchell (1822–24, ii, 272) used the word ‘metonymy’ – of wealth in kine with power (cf. Lichtenstein 1973, 76f; Molema 1920, 115). Thus the chief was the supreme herdsman (modisa) of his people, a metaphor that captured well vernacular visions of value and political economy. Situated atop the morafe (‘nation’), he presided over a domain marked not by fixed boundaries but by an outer ring of waterholes and pasture – in other words, a range (Comaroff and Comaroff 1992, 141). Royal stock also built relations beyond the polity, being used to placate and to trade with other sovereigns.

    It was not only chiefs who mobilized cattle as a currency of power; other men of position also accumulated stock and set up networks of alliance and patronage. Ordinary male citizens, however, relied on inheritance, bridewealth and natural increase to build their modest herds. Some had no animals at all. They made up what Burchell (1822–24, ii, 348) termed an ‘ill-fated class’, eternally dependent on their betters. In the bovine economy of the southern Tswana, in sum, an indigenous ‘stock exchange’ underwrote inequalities of class, gender, generation and rank. As the pliable media used to forge all productive relations, human and superhuman alike, cattle were the quintessential form of social and symbolic capital.

    Cattle were also a prime medium in the exchanges that, by the late 18th century, linked southern Tswana to other peoples on the subcontinent, yielding beads from the Kora and Griqua to the south, and iron implements, copper jewellery and tobacco from communities to the north and north-east (Lichtenstein 1930, 409; Stow 1905, 449, 489). Bovine capital also gave access to the ivory and pelts desired by white travellers, who arrived in growing numbers from around 1800 (Shillington 1985, 11). And pack-oxen enabled the long-distance haulage of sebiloˆ, a sought-after hair cosmetic, from its source in Tlhaping territory (Campbell 1813, 170). But the earliest European explorers already noted that Tswana were reluctant to trade away their beasts. Somerville’s (1979, 140) expedition to the interior failed in its mercantile objectives because of the natives’ ‘unwillingness to part with their cattle’. The Englishman found this ‘difficult to account for, since they convert them to no useful purpose whatever’.

    Nonetheless, regional exchange networks were active enough to persuade the Europeans that they had stumbled upon the ‘essential principles of international traffic’, or ‘mercantile agency in its infancy’ in the African veld (Burchell 1822–24, ii, 555; original emphasis). Andrew Smith (1939, 251), in fact, observed that chiefs managed production explicitly to foster alliances; they tried, as well, to monopolize dealings with foreigners and to control commerce across their realms (Campbell 1822, ii, 194). Indeed, whites found these men aware of discrepancies in going rates for such items as ivory, and keen to profit from them. Notwithstanding the reluctance to sell beasts, occasions to traffic with Europeans – in the early years for beads, later for guns and money – were eagerly seized.

    We shall come back, shortly, to the entry of the civilizing mission into southern Tswana commerce. Already, however, two things are clear. The first is that the Africans had long channelled their surpluses into trade, bringing them a range of goods from knives and tobacco to widely circulating forms of currency. The second is that, of the latter, beads had become the most notable. According to Beck (1989, 220) beads were introduced into southern Africa by the Portuguese, and continued to find their way into the interior in small quantities after the establishment of the Cape Colony (Saunders 1966, 65). Only at the turn of the 19th century, however, did sizeable mass- produced stocks arrive from abroad (Somerville 1979, 140). Metal rings and beads, especially of brass and copper, seem to have pre-dated glass imports in long-distance trade (Stow 1905, 489).

    By the early 19th century mass produced beads were serving as media of transaction that articulated local and global economies, linking the worlds of cattle and money (cf. Graeber 1996). Along with buttons, which were put to a similar purpose, they were portable tokens that, for a time, epitomized foreign exchange value beyond the colonial frontier. Beads were ‘the only circulating medium or money in the interior’, Campbell noted (1822, i, 246), adding that every ‘nation’ through which they passed made a profit on them. Different kinds composed distinct regional currencies; Philip (1828, ii, 131) tells us that no importance was attached to particular examples, however beautiful, if they were ‘not received among the tribes around them’. At the same time African communities showed strong preferences, in the early 1800s, for specific colours, sizes and degrees of transparency (Beck 1989, 220f).

    Even as they became a semi-standardized currency for purposes of external trade, beads served internally as personal adornments; in this they were like many similar sorts of wealth object. Their attraction seems to have stemmed from the fact that particular valuables could be withdrawn from circulation for display, itself a form of conspicuous consumption.1 But men of means also accumulated hidden stocks: ‘their chief wealth, like that of more civilized nations, [was] hoarded up in their coffers’ (Campbell (1822, i, 246; cf. Graeber 1996). Market exchange was, at this point, a sporadic activity directed at specific exotic objects. It was set apart from everyday processes of production and consumption.

    Some observers stressed the monetary properties of beads: ‘They answer the same purpose as cowrie shells in India and North Africa’, Campbell (1822, i, 246) wrote, ‘or as guineas and shillings in Britain’. But others were struck by the differences. For a start, aesthetic qualities seemed integral to their worth. ‘Among these people’, offered Philip (1828, ii, 131), ‘utility is, perhaps, more connected with beauty than it is with us’. Simmel (1978, 73) would have said that the separation of the beautiful from the useful comes only with the objectification of value; the aesthetic artefact takes on a unique existence, sui generis; it cannot be replaced by another that might perform the same function. Such an artefact, therefore, is the absolute inverse of the coin, whose defining feature is its substitutability.

    Among southern Tswana the increasing velocity of trade did render some media of exchange – first beads, then money – ever more interchangeable. But the process was never complete. And it did not eliminate other forms of wealth in which beauty and use explicitly enhanced each other. Indeed, the longevity of cattle currencies in African societies bears testimony to the fact that processes of rationalization, standardization and universalization are always refracted by social and cultural circumstance. In the cow, aesthetics and utility, uniqueness and substitutability complemented each other, colouring Tswana notions of value in general, and of money in particular.

    Objects that come to be invested with value as media of exchange vary greatly over time and space, a point well demonstrated by the emergence of new currencies as formerly distinct economic orders begin to intersect. Marx (1967, 83) once said that, when the latter happens, the ‘universal equivalent form’ often lodges arbitrarily and transiently in a particular commodity. So it was with beads, which had been mass produced for different ends in the West, but turned out to serve well, for a while, as a vehicle of commerce beyond the colonial border. Marx also added that, as traffic persists, such tokens of equivalence tend to ‘crystallize…out into the money form’. So, once again, it was with beads. While Tswana would accept various articles as gifts, these were of little use in trade. ‘They want money in such a case’, Campbell (1822, i, 246) found, ‘that is, beads’. As transactions increased in volume, standards of value in the worlds linked by this new currency began to affect each other; merchants noted that rates charged by Africans in the interior rose and became more uniform.2 By the 1820s the demand for beads at the Cape had driven up prices dramatically, to the extent that missionaries tried to secure supplies from England at one-third of the cost (Beck 1989, 218f).

    The bottom soon fell out of the frontier bead market, however (although not so further north; see Chapman 1971 (1868), 127). That market seems to have been sustained by the dearth of fractions of the rixdollar, the currency at the Cape in the early 1800s (Arndt 1928, 44–46). After 1825 Britain introduced its own silver and copper coinage to its imperial possessions, and paper dollars were replaced by sterling. Once the new supply had stabilized, and had filtered into the interior, its effect on bead money was devastating.

    Ironically, while Tswana came to reckon in money, many traders preferred to deal in kind. But, even more important than changes in the cash supply, a shift was occurring in the structure of wants and in local notions of value. It was encouraged, above all, by the presence of the evangelists and by the entry onto the scene, at their urging, of a cadre of itinerant merchants and shopkeepers.

    Here, then, were two distinct regimes of value, one European and the other African, whose engagement would have a profound impact on the colonial encounter. To the Nonconformist evangelists economic reform was no mere adjunct to spirituality; virtue and salvation had to be made by man, using the scarce material resources bequeathed by providence for improving the world. Commercial enterprise allowed the industrious to turn labour into wealth and wealth into grace. Money was the crucial medium of convertibility in this. It typified the potential for good and evil given as a birthright to every self-willed individual. Southern Tswana, upon whom the evangelists hoped to impress these divine possibilities, also inhabited a universe of active human agency, in which riches were made through worldly transactions. Exchange, in their case, was effected primarily through cattle. In contrast to cash, stock socialized assets, measuring their ultimate worth not in treasures in heaven but in people on earth. We move, now, to examine how these regimes of value, already in contact in the early 1800s, were brought into ever closer articulation.

    Extending the invisible hand

    Civilizing commerce, sanctified shopping: the early years British observers in the early 1800s might have acknowledged that southern Tswana showed a lively interest in exchange. But they also stressed the difference between ‘native commerce’ and orderly European business. Thus Burchell (1822–24, ii, 536–39) noted that ‘mercantile jealousy’ had produced competing efforts to monopolize traffic with the colony to the south. He proposed a ‘regulated trade for ivory . . . with the Bichuana nations’, to be vested in an authorized body of white merchants who would institute ‘fair dealing’ to the advantage of all. Like liberal economies before and since, his ‘free’ market required careful management.

    The founding evangelists shared this trust in the beneficent effect of trade. Some said that the very ‘sight of a shop’ on mission ground roused savages to industry (Philip 1828, i, 204–5). The equation of civilization with commerce might have become one of the great cliche ́s of the epoch. But, for the Nonconformists, it was far from a platitude. The point was not to create an exploitable dependency, although that did happen. Nor was it simply to play on base desire to make people give ear to the Gospel, although that happened too. It ran much deeper. Trade had a capacity to breach ‘the sullen isolations of heathenism’, to stay the ‘fountain of African misery’ (Livingstone 1940, 255). All of which made material reform an urgent moral duty. The optimism of the missionaries in this respect was to falter in the face of the stark realities of the colonial frontier. The Christians had eventually to rethink their dream of a commonwealth of free-trading black communities, actively enhancing their virtue and wealth. But they continued to hold that the market would rout superstition, slavery, sloth; this even when, later in the century, market forces undercut their own idyll of independent African economies, compelling ‘their’ peoples to become dependent on wages.

    There was, in other words, more to championing commerce among heathens than merely making virtue of necessity, as some have suggested, although it is true that many pioneer evangelists had to exchange to survive (Beck 1989, 211). In fact, the most ardent advocates of free enterprise were often those most opposed to clergy themselves doing business. Livingstone (1857, 39) held that, while missionary and trader were mutually dependent, ‘experience shows that the two employments can not very well be combined in the same person’. Ironically, he was to be accused of gun-running by the Boers. But then, on the frontier, the lines between prestation, purchase and profit were very fine indeed – and frequently in dispute. While traffic with peoples living beyond colonial borders was forbidden by law, missionaries were de facto exempt, except for the ban on selling liquor, weapons and ammunition. Dealings with Africans often went well beyond the procuring of necessities, involving considerable capital outlay. In the upshot, competition and accusations of dishonorable practice among the brethren soon became common (Beck 1989, 214).

    From the first, Tswana associated evangelists, like all whites, with barter. The clergymen tended to be less than open in their formal correspondence about their dealings. Cooperation between the Nonconformists and merchants was close; traders journeying beyond the Orange River tended to lodge at mission stations and often accompanied evangelists on their travels (Livingstone 1960, 141).

    The Nonconformists also gave out goods for purposes other than trade. Early on they dispensed tobacco, beads and buttons to encourage goodwill, only to find that prestations came to be expected in return for attending church and school.3 Few Tswana seem initially to have shared the European distinction between gifts and commodities, donations and payments. Yet one thing was widely recognized: that whites controlled desirable objects. As a result, they soon became the uncomfortable victims of determined efforts to acquire those objects. Their correspondence declared that all Africans, even dignified chiefs, were inveterate ‘beggars’, that they persistently demanded items like snuff, which the missions were assumed to have in large supply, and that their behaviour violated Protestant notions of honest gain (Moffat and Moffat 1951, 63). It took a while for the Christians to realize that ‘begging’ was also a form of homage to the powerful (Price 1956, 166; Mackenzie 1871, 44f).

    As Beck (1989, 224) confirms, the evangelists introduced more European goods than did any other whites at the time. Their dealings eroded the local desire for beads and buttons in favour of a complex array of wants, primarily for domestic commodities like clothes, blankets and utensils. But this transformation, as we have suggested, entailed far more than the mere provision of objects. Changing patterns of consumption grew out of a shift in ideas about the nature, worth and significance of particular things in themselves. Which, in turn, was set in play by the encounter of very different regimes of value. Thus, even where their uses seemed obvious, such goods as clothes and furniture were given meanings irreducible to utility alone, meanings which often made the Europeans uneasy (Comaroff and Comaroff 1997, chapter 5).

    Yet more basic than this was the fact that, as the century wore on, it was less missionaries than the merchants they brought in their wake who were responsible for the supply of goods. Discomforted by the image of men of God haggling over the price of trinkets (Beck 1989, 213), most evangelists encouraged independent traders to settle on their stations. By 1830 John Philip (1828, i, 204f) had already publicized the success of his ‘experiment’ to have one open a store at Bethelsdorp. Money, he said, had gone up in the people’s estimation. They had begun, enthusiastically, to bring produce to the trader to exchange for goods. Bechuanaland soon followed Bethelsdorp. The introduction of stores in this manner – all the better to instruct non-Western peoples in ‘the economic facts of life’ – was a high priority among British Protestants in many parts of the world.

    Time would mute the idyll of cooperation between missions and merchants. Already in 1841 Mary Moffat (1967, 18), while reiterating the need to foster a desire for commodities, bemoaned the high prices charged by local dealers for ‘worthless materials’. While the whites squabbled over their dealings with Africans, Tswana sovereigns had their own reasons for being wary of merchants. The latter paid scant respect to long-standing mores or monopolies, being ready to buy from anyone who had anything desirable to sell; the purchase of ivory and feathers from Rolong ‘vassals’ in the Kalahari, for instance, cost the life of one businessman and his son (Mackenzie 1871, 130). Such friction was frequent beyond the mission stations (Livingstone 1959, ii, 86). But even when storekeepers operated under the eyes of the evangelists, their behaviour often gave offense. Brawling, theft and sexual assault were common. No wonder that local rulers developed a ‘well-known’ reluctance to allow itinerant traders to traverse their territories (Mackenzie 1871, 130), or that, later in the century, strong chiefs would try to subject European commerce to strict control (Parsons 1977, 122).

    The evangelists would have to wrestle constantly with the contradictions of commerce. In embracing its virtues, they had to deal with the fact that the two-faced coin threatened to profane their sacred mission. Yet the merchants were essential in the effort to reform local economies by hitching them to the colonial market – and to the body of corporate nations beyond.

    Object lessons And so the merchants remained on the mission stations, where they prospered. Storekeepers stocked all the quotidian objects deemed essential to a civil ‘household economy’ (Moffat 1842, 507, 502f): clothes, fabrics, furniture, blankets, sewing implements, soap and candle moulds; the stuff, that is, of feminized domestic life, with its scrubbed, illuminated interiors. Shops also carried the implements of intensive agriculture, and the guns and ammunition required to garner the ‘products of the chase’, increasingly the most valuable of trade goods. Colonial whites abhorred the idea of weapons in African hands. But, by the 1830s, ‘old soldier’s muskets’ were being sold for ‘6, 7 and 8 oxen’, and three or four pounds of gunpowder for a single animal (Smith 1939, 232).

    Mission accounts from the late 1800s show that European commodities had begun to tell their own story in the Tswana world. Ornaments, cooking utensils and consumables were widely purchased, as were coffee, tea and sugar. The foreign goods that seemed everywhere in use spoke of far-reaching domestic reconstruction.

    At least in some quarters. The acquisition of these commodities required surplus production and disposable income, which was restricted to the emerging upper and middle peasantry. At the same time, despite their taste for European things, many wealthy men remained reluctant, save in extremis, to sell stock (Schapera 1933, 648). On the other hand, the market was particularly attractive to those excluded from indigenous processes of accumulation. Client peoples, for example, were easily tempted to turn tribute into trade – which is why some chiefs lost their monopolies over exchange (but cf. Parsons 1977, 120). Especially along the frontier, ever more Tswana, citizens and ‘vassals’ alike, entered into commercial transactions; as a result, they acquired manufactured goods well before the South African mineral revolution of the 1870s and the onset of large-scale labour migration. Small objects may speak of big changes, of course. Rising sales of coffee, tea and sugar marked important shifts in patterns of nutrition and sociality. They also tied local populations to the production and consumption of commodities in other parts of the empire (cf. Mintz 1985). As George Orwell (1962 (1937), 82) once said, in this respect, ‘changes in diet are more important than changes of dynasty or even of religion’.

    But mission accounts also suggest that things had veered out of mission control. Wookey (1884, 304), for instance, admitted that the material developments promoted by the evangelists had not been an ‘unmixed good’; in this he anticipated the concerns of African critics, voiced later, about the impact of sugar, alcohol and imported provisions on the health of black populations. Not only had new diseases appeared, but drink had become ‘one of the greatest curses of the country’. The most profitable and addictive of commodities, its effects were a sordid caricature of the desire to make ‘natives’ dependent on the market.

    As new industrial centres sprang to life around the diamond fields, the satanic underside of commerce came all but to the Nonconformists’ door. And, as it did, it exposed their naivety in hoping to introduce Tswana to the market in a controlled, benevolent manner. By then, in any case, the traders they had brought into their midst had already helped to set a minor revolution in motion through the ‘magic’ of their commodities. That magic had ambiguous effects. It led, at one extreme, to the contrivance of a polite bourgeois life-world; it led also, among ordinary people, to forms of consumption in which objects were deployed in new designs for living, newly contrived identities, all of them stylistic fusions of the familiar and the fresh. At the other extreme, it left a trail of addiction and poverty (Holub 1881, i, 236). To be sure, the merchants had also given southern Tswana practical lessons in the exploitative side of enlightened capitalism. From the very first, these entrepreneurs had engaged in the infamous practice of buying local produce for a pittance and then, when food was short, selling it back at exorbitant profit.

    The missionaries themselves had also played a crucial role in determining the ways in which Western objects and market practices had entered into Tswana life, however; as we have stressed, there is more to commodification than the mere provision of goods. The Christians had set out to instil a ‘sacred hunger’, a sense of desire that linked refined consumption to a particular mode of producing goods and selves and encouraged continuing investment in civilizing enterprise. Above all else, this required a respect for the many talents of money.

    The objectification of value and the meaning of money

    Insofar as colonialism entailed a confrontation of different regimes of value, the encounter between Tswana and the missionaries was most clearly played out – and experienced – through the media most crucial to the measure of wealth on either side: cattle, money and the trade beads that, for a while, strung them together. Encounters of this sort, especially when they involved European capitalism in its expansive form, often ended in the erasure of one currency by another. But they sometimes gave rise to processes a good deal more complex than allowed by most theories of commodification. For value is borne by human beings who seek actively to shape it to their own ends. Along the frontier, cash and cows became fiercely contested signs, alibis of distinct, mutually threatening modes of existence.

    To Tswana, it will be recalled, beasts were the prime means of storing and conveying wealth in people and things, of embodying value in social relations. In fact, control over these relations was one of the objects of owning animals. Thus, while cattle were indeed sometimes dealt on the foreign market, the bulk of both internal and long-distance trade seems to have been directed towards acquiring more stock.4 In ordinary circumstances barter never drew on capital. Beads, here, stood for worth in alien and alienated form, circulating against foreign goods, or against those which had been freed from local entanglements. By being transacted with neighbouring people for animals, they could also be used to convert value from more to less reified forms.

    But this currency had its own logic. With the increasing standardization of the bead market across the interior in the early 19th century, the value of certain resources in Tswana life was rendered measurable, and more easily negotiable. Articles formerly withheld from sale, or given only for cattle (such as karosses, made as personal property; Lichtenstein 1930, 389), became purchasable (Moffat and Moffat 1951, 262, 267). The Nonconformists encouraged this process of commodification, although their real objective was the introduction of money. Hence they used the token currency themselves to put a price on inalienable things, such as land and labour. Not only did they pay wages in it, but, in 1823, used it to acquire (what they thought was) the freehold on which their station was built (Moffat and Moffat 1951, 189, 113). Beads were also bartered for agricultural surpluses by both missionaries and merchants.

    The effort of the evangelists to commodify African land, labour and produce, and to foster a desire for domestic goods, eventually helped to reorient the bulk of trade from the hinterland towards the Cape. This had the effect of limiting the viability of bead currency itself. The latter had served well as long as token transactions remained relatively confined in space and time, as long as they involved a narrow range of luxuries from a few external sources of supply, as long as exchange was sporadic and did not extend to the procurement of ordinary utilities. But once the ways and means of everyday life began to be commodified, and increasingly to emanate from the colonial economy, a more standardized, readily available and widely circulating currency was needed to buy and sell them. And so, as Tswana engaged with a broadening range of manufacturers and middlemen in the 1830s, money quickly became the measure of worth. This, in turn, posed a threat to vernacular regimes of value, which before had been kept distinct from foreign traffic. Even where coin did not actually change hands, it came to stand for the moral economy, the material values and the modes of contractual relationship propagated by the civilizing mission – and its world.

    In spite of this, or perhaps because of it, the first attempts of the missions to teach the value of cash were not a success. Tswana evinced distrust in European tender, most notably in paper money. Not only was it suspected of being an easy medium of fraud, but its lack of durability was also a worry. For good reason. Between 1806 and 1824, rixdollar notes were infamously fragile, and were thought unreliable by many whites as well (Arndt 1928, 44, 62). Later in the century, traders would pass illiterate Africans false bills – issued, in one case, by the ‘Bank of Leather’, entitling the bearer to ‘the best Value’ in ‘London or Paris Boots & Shoes’ in exchange for diamonds (Matthews 1887, 196).

    Given the uncertainties of colonial currency, the evangelists did not always entrust the introduction of money, or the dissemination of its qualities, to the workings of the market. Occasionally they took matters into their own hands. Thus the Rev. Campbell had, on a tour beyond the colonial frontier in 1812–13, decided that the Griqua merited consolidation both as a ‘nation’ and as a base for expanding London Missionary Society operations into the interior (Parsons 1927, 198). Crucial to the venture was a proper coinage (Campbell 1813, 256):

    It was likewise resolved, that as they had no circulating medium amongst them, by which they could purchase any small articles . . . supposing a shop to be established amongst them . . . they should apply to the Mission Society to get silver pieces of different value coined for them in England, which

    page18image30847792

    Figure 2 Examples of Griqua Town coins.

    the missionaries would take for their allowance from the Society, having Griqua town marked on them. It is probable that, if this were adopted, in a short time they would circulate among all the nations round about, and be a great convenience.

    God’s bankers indeed! This mission money would be dubbed ‘one of the most interesting emissions in the numismatic history of the British Empire’ (Parsons 1927, 202; see also Arndt 1928, 128). Campbell set about ordering supplies of special coinage from a well-known English diesinker. We have record of four denominations, two each in silver and copper. Shipped to South Africa in two consignments in 1815 and 1816, this money established itself in limited circulation (pace Arndt 1928, 127), a few examples turning up in places like Kimberley in later years.

    The evangelists also deployed other means to foster respect for money. At issue, as we have said, was a moral economy in which its talents measured enterprise and enabled the conversion of wealth into virtue. If there was no cash in the African interior it had to be invented – or its existence feigned. The evidence shows that, even when little coinage was in circulation, the Nonconformists used it as an invisible standard, a virtual currency, against which to tally the worth of goods, donations and services.

    Amidst a barter economy the missions reckoned accounts with numerical exactitude. In the 1820s the Methodists on the eastern Cape frontier encouraged offerings of beads and buttons that would be rendered in shillings and pence according to current ‘nominal’ values (Beck 1989, 223). Also at issue in this small grinding of God’s mills was the effort to encourage calculation. Counting – adding up, that is, the margins of profit and loss – enabled accounting, the form of stock-taking that epitomized Puritan endeavour. The evangelists associated numeracy with self-control, exactitude, reason; school arithmetic, for example, was taught mostly in fiscal idiom, computation being inseparable from the process of commodification itself.

    Numbers provided a tool with which to equate hitherto incomparable sorts of value, to price them, and to allow unconditional convertibility from one to another. Quantification was iconic of the processes of standardization and incorporation, the erasure of differences in kind, at the core of cultural colonization. But it was also salient to the exacting logic of evangelical Nonconformism, with its need to measure conquests and count treasures. This emphasis on numbers cannot be taken to imply a trading of quality for quantity, however, as Simmel (1978, 444) might have implied in arguing that the reduction of the former to the latter was an intrinsic feature of monetization. The Protestants were also preoccupied with the morality of money, with the exchange of riches for virtue above price. They sought ceaselessly to reconcile these two dimensions of value. For, just as time always entails space, quantity always entails quality.

    Still, by promoting the commodification of the Tswana world – where, in fact, cattle had long been counted – colonial evangelism spawned a shift from the qualitative to the quantitative as the dominant idiom of evaluation. This shift had important consequences for control over the flow of wealth, as men of substance were quick to grasp. In effecting it, the Nonconformists were helped, and soon outstripped, by the European traders. Ironically, while these men preferred to do business by barter, they used monetary values to compute all transactions (Philip 1828, i, 205f) – including the wholesale purchase of local produce, for which they gave goods set at well-hiked retail rates, and the extension of loans, from which they extracted high interest (Shillington 1985, 221; Livingstone 1940, 92). In attempts, later on, to exert influence over prices and profits, some Tlhaping farmers would persuade merchants to pay them in cash for their crops (Shillington 1985, 222). But coin remained scarce for a long time and struggles to elicit it from white entrepreneurs would go on well into the next century in some rural areas (Schapera 1933, 649). Not only did storekeepers benefit from conducting business by barter, mediated through virtual money; by using goods as token pounds and pence, they also limited the impact of rising prices in the Colony on those they paid in the interior. This form of cash in kind was a species of signal currency that had its (inverted) equivalent in Tswana ‘cattle without legs’, or cash as kine. Such were the hybrid media of exchange born of the articulation of previously distinct, incommensurable regimes of value. They expressed the efforts of the different dramatis personae to regulate the conversion of wealth in both directions. We return to them below.

    While familiarity with the value of money did not always translate into the circulation of cash, it did bear testimony to the growing volume of Tswana production for the market. Most lucrative were the fruits of the hunt. As they gained access to guns, African suppliers became ever more crucial to the capital-intensive colonial trade in feathers and ivory – until natural resources gave out (Shillington 1985, 24). But agriculture was also important, especially among the middle and upper peasantry. Surpluses were sold in increasing quantities, permitting the purchase of cattle, farming implements, wagons and other commodities. With the discovery of diamonds, but before the territory was annexed by Britain in 1871, Tlhaping, Kora and Griqua took part in the new commerce, finding stones and selling them to speculators for cash, wagons and beasts (Shillington 1985, 38; Holub 1881, i, 242). Matthews (1887, 94f) writes that, once this trade had been outlawed, traffic was conducted in an argot in which gems were referred to as ‘calves’.

    Although southern Tswana soon lost all claim to the diamondiferous lands, many remained implicated in the local economy around Kimberley – wherever possible converting their profits into livestock. Indeed, a report in the Diamond news in 1873 voiced the worry that, by turning their cash into animals, blacks were avoiding wage work (Shillington 1985, 68). Such anxieties were not baseless. But they focused only on Africans of means, underestimating the growing impoverishment of the interior. While most resources, even water, now had a price in southern Bechuanaland (Holub 1881, i, 231, 246), the majority of Tswana were in no position to benefit from new market opportunities. Those with stock and irrigated lands might have been able to provision the diamond fields; however, as John Mackenzie observed, the ‘poorer classes . . . [were] often sadly disappointed’.5 Many had already begun to sell their labour either to rural employers or in the Colony.6

    Of the ironic history of southern Tswana proletarianization we have written elsewhere (Comaroff and Comaroff 1987; 1997, chapter 4). Here it will suffice to make two points. First, the workings of the colonial economy, of the very mechanisms supposed to ‘civilize’ and enrich Africans, did more than just eat away at their material lives. It also perverted the effort of the Protestant mission to instill in them a commitment to the idea of self-possessed labour and enlightened commerce; to seed among them the persuasive hegemony of the market as sacralized place, practice and process; to replace their ‘primitive communism’ with a lifestyle centred on refined domesticity, the nuclear family and money. Second, as this suggests, most ordinary southern Tswana remained reluctant proletarians, with strong views about the terms on which they were willing to sell their labour. Even when hunger was rife, and jobs at the diamond fields were scarce, they were loath to toil on the Transvaal goldmines, where there was a great demand for employees, but where workers were known to be ill treated (Van Onselen 1972, 486; Cape of Good Hope 1907: 20). In fact, observers noted repeatedly that labour migration was not driven by brute necessity. Among other things, it was tied, as an inspector of native locations observed in 1908 (Cape of Good Hope 1909: 32), to the state of cattle-holding; also, as we have said, to the desire of Tswana to invest, through various forms of stock exchange, in local social relations and political enterprises. It was just this, of course, that decades of colonial evangelism had been designed to transform.

    Stock responses

    Cattle, currency and contests of value By the close of the 19th century southern Tswana communities had become part of a hybrid world in which markets and migration were more or less prominent, in which money had become a ubiquitous standard of worth, in which coin undercut all other currencies, including cattle. For many, this last development was neither inevitable nor desirable. Turning cattle into cash was not a neutral act. It entailed the loss of a distinctive form of wealth and endangered their autonomy. Especially older men, whose power and position derived from their herds, sought to reverse the melting of everything to money. Even more, as we have noted, they tried constantly to convert all gains from the sale of labour or produce into beasts. Their orientation contrasted with that of the rising Christian literati, for whom universalizing media – cash, education, consumer goods – promised entry into a modernist, middle-class commonwealth. Not that these families ceased to invest in beasts; correspondence among southern Tswana elites at the time makes frequent mention of transactions in kine.

    The missionaries knew that livestock enabled southern Tswana to sustain their independent existence – and to resist the invasive reach of Christian political economy. Efforts to persuade men to harness their beasts to arable production might have been reasonably successful. But, for the most part, the evangelists had failed to decentre the ‘alien order’ inscribed in animals. They had not convinced Tswana to dispense with their herds or the social relations secured by them. Quite the contrary; in 1881, in Kuruman, the people were still ‘almost all engaged in pastoral pursuits – either being themselves the owners of cattle, or as servicing those who are’.7 What is more, their stock gave the Africans a potent resource – their own cultural expertise – in their dealings with whites. Here, to their obvious satisfaction, they were on home ground; here their own local knowledge gave them a clear edge; here, within the colonial economy, was one domain, one site of contest, from which they profited (Mackenzie 1887, i, 80). The corollary? By investing in wealth that served as a hedge against the market they made themselves less dependent, conceptually and bodily, on the cycle of earning and spending on which the missions had banked to change their everyday life-ways. Through such ordinary deeds were grand colonizing designs eluded. For a time.

    Other whites, in particular those eager to employ black labour, shared the uneasiness of the missionaries over the enduring African preoccupation with cattle. They, too, were aware that stockwealth allowed ‘natives’ some control over the terms on which they entered the market economy. From the very start the colonization of southern Tswana society involved the gradual, deliberate depletion of their herds and the dispossession of their range. It was a process that gained momentum through the century. Early on, Boer frontiersmen tried to press Rolong communities into service by plundering their beasts, seizing their fountains and invading their pastures. Later, in the annexed territories of Griqualand West and Bechuanaland, settlers impounded ‘stray’ African stock in such numbers that government officials were moved to express concern (Shillington 1985, 99f). Exorbitant fees were charged for retrieving these beasts, cash that had to be borrowed from traders at the cost of yet further indebtedness. The Tswana sense that ‘money eats cattle’ (Comaroff and Comaroff 1992, 151) owed much to such experiences.

    Apocalypse, then: rinderpest Several of the evangelists working on the unsettled frontier protested the blatant expropriation of African stock.8 At the same time, they did not mask their relief when the rinderpest pandemic of 1896 seemed, along with overstocking and deteriorating pasture, to deal a fatal blow to Tswana herds. Clergy elsewhere in southern Africa reported that stricken populations were seeking refuge at missions (Van Onselen 1972, 480f). Many of them cheered the apparent demise of pastoralism. A few, though, pondered its implications for the lingering ideal of viable Christian communities in the countryside. While the scourge would probably help their cause, mused Willoughby at Palapye, it had reduced ‘the capital of the country’ by some 50% to 60%. And it had deprived Tswana of their protection from drought, their income from transport riding and their main means of locomotion.9

    The Tswana experience of rinderpest was unquestionably apocalyptic in the short run. Stockowners large and small lost millions of beasts (Molema 1966, 196). The southernmost peoples, who were already land-poor and widely dependent on wage labour, never fully recovered. Some communities in semi-arid regions turned to agriculture for the first time, only to be struck by locusts and drought. Over the longer run, in fact, herds did recover in most places. But the impact of the devastation was inseparable from that of wider political and economic processes unfolding at the time – most immediately from the protracted, at times violent, struggle of the Africans to withstand those who would deprive them of their autonomy. Beasts were often implicated in acts of rebellion along the frontier; they became highly charged objects of contestation on both sides. When government agents sought to halt the implacable advance of the pandemic by shooting entire herds of Tswana stock,10 they were met with acute disaffection. Rumours spread that the authorities had introduced the rinderpest to reduce blacks to servitude (Van Onselen 1972, 487). In the end, some rulers complied with the administration and received compensation. From cattle to cash once more.

    Africans in the Cape called the rinderpest masilangane, ‘let us all be equal’ (Van Onselen 1972, 483), a sardonic reference to its levelling effects and to the power of beasts to make or break people. While the pandemic was ruinous, it did not diminish the value of stock among Tswana. Exploiting the transport crisis caused by the shortage of oxen, the upper peasantry were first to rebuild their herds – and, with them, the distinctions that comprised their world. Their understanding of the economic forces at work was epitomized in the relation of cattle to coin. Not only could coin eat cattle, but the replacement of the second was made possible by the first. And yet animals remained the preferred form in which to store money; a form which, barring catastrophe, allowed it to grow into, and accumulate, social worth. The association of beasts with banks became a commonplace, making livestock synonymous with wealth at its most generative (cf. Alverson 1978, 124). In the event, cash came to be seen as the most fitting recompense for kine (Schapera 1933, 649), kine the optimum medium for the storage of cash. As we said earlier, they were alike special commodities. Both had an ‘innate’ capacity to equate and translate different sorts of value. And to produce riches. It is this capacity to commensurate that gives such media their magic. Because of it, they seem to bring about transformations, and so to make history, in their own right.

    But cash and cattle were also different in one respect that no European political economist could have anticipated: their distinctive colours, their racination. Money was associated with transactions controlled by whites. It was also a highly ambiguous instrument. On the one hand, it opened a host of new possibilities, typifying the culture of the mission and its object-world, and it made thinkable new materialities, new practices, new passions, new identities. Yet, on the other, in its refusal to respect personal identities, it also undermined ‘traditional’ monopolies, eroded patriarchal powers, displaced received forms of relationship. ‘Money’, the vernacular saying goes, ‘has no owner’ – madi ga a na mong. In democratizing access to value, it put a great deal of the past at risk, sometimes in the cause of transitory desire. Formerly inalienable, intransitive values might now be drawn into its melting pot. And, in the name of debt, tax collectors could attach Tswana cattle and force men to sell their labour to raise cash.

    Government stock, live stocks Meanwhile, many observers were announcing the death of African pastoralism. Prematurely, it turns out. The Report of the South African Native Affairs Commission of 1903–4 (South Africa 1905, 54), concluded that ‘money [has become] the great medium of business where formerly cattle were used’. In a post-pastoral age, it went on, Africans should be encouraged to use government savings banks. But the matter was not so straightforward. In 1909 a resigned Rev. Williams wrote to his superiors that, to Tswana, cattle were already like government bonds:11

    the Native is very slow to part with his cattle…Too often he will see himself, wife and family growing thin, whilst his cattle are increasing and getting fat, but to buy food with any portion of them is like draining his life’s blood . . . His cattle are like Government Stock which no holder will sell for the purpose of living on the Capital unless forced to do so.

    The reference to ‘life’s blood’ is telling. Williams understood that beasts, here, enabled a particular kind of existence. It was this, for Tswana, that made them capital in the first place. Indeed, any asset that did the same thing might be treated as if it were stock. Even coin. But all too often coin did the opposite, consuming cows and threatening relations made through them. Ironically, it was referred to in Setswana as madi, an anglicism and a homonym for “blood.” But this was blood, or perhaps blood-money, in a less sanguine sense. It connoted the alienable essence of the labourer, that part of her or him from which others profited (J. Comaroff 1985, 174). As Williams implies, selling cattle under coercive conditions was tantamount to selling lifeblood.

    page24image30448752

    Figure 3 Cattle being herded in Mochudi (photo taken by Isaac Schapera in the early 1930s and made available by the Botswana National Museum and the estate of Isaac Schapera).

    The Rev. Williams went on to say that in fact Christian teaching had made inroads into the Tswana reluctance to sell beasts, that many were now willing to part with cattle when corn was scarce. But prices had fluctuated wildly on local markets. No wonder, Williams concluded, contradicting what he had just said, that Tswana were slow to retail their stock. Returns on agricultural produce were also erratic. As a result, money was often scarce. Under these conditions, the capacity of kine to serve as the ‘safe custody’ of wealth was underlined. Hence the fact that they were exchanged only for coin or other forms of capital, particularly wagons, ploughs and guns, which had become the primary means of producing wealth in a receding rural economy.

    But, as importantly, cattle were also shares – live stocks, as it were – in a social community and a moral economy whose reproduction they enabled. In southern Tswana chiefdoms, patronage continued to be secured through the loan of cows; young, educated royals seem, in the early 1900s, to have used their cultural capital to shore up family herds, and vice versa. Court fines were levied in kine and marriage involved the transfer of animals late into the 20th century. Significantly, where bridewealth came to be given in cash payments, the latter was often spoken of as token beasts, ‘cattle without legs’ (Comaroff and Comaroff 1992, 148).

    Endings, continuities

    Livestock, in sum, were still the medium for making the social connections that formed and re-formed a recognizable social world. These ‘signal transactions’ (Sansom 1976, 145) – in nominal animal currency at a rate well below prevailing prices – distinguished privileged exchanges from ordinary commercial dealings. Legless cattle were a salient anachronism, an enclave within the generalizing terms of the market. Counted in cows but paid in coin, this notional cash in kine was the inverse of the cash as kind deployed by merchants to compel Africans to barter at non-competitive rates. Both virtual currencies served as modes of surge control that tried to harness the flow of value, if in opposite directions, by putting a brake on the rapid conversion from one form to another.

    It was precisely because they experienced colonization as a loss of control over the production and flow of value that so many Tswana pinned their hopes on cattle in the early 20th century. In them, it seemed, lay the means for recouping a stock of wealth and, with it, a sense of self-determination. This did not imply an avoidance of money or wage work. The Africans had been made dependent, to a greater or lesser degree, on the colonial marketplace; their access to beasts and other goods – not to mention cash – lay increasingly in the sale of their produce and/or their labour. Neither did it imply opposition to Christianity. By the turn of the century most chiefs had joined the church, and many of their people followed suit, even if they were not, in the main, pious converts. The significant contrast in this world did not lie between Christian and non-Christian. It was between those for whom the values and relations inscribed in cattle remained paramount and those more invested, ideologically and materially, in the capitalist economy of turn-of-the-century South Africa. Cows, and the ways in which they were used, were the markers of this contrast. Rather than the bearers of a congealed, unchanging tradition, they were the links between two orders of worth. Thus, even where they served as icons of setswana, they were hybrid signs of identity in the here-and-now; identity that was itself a matter of shifting relations and distinctions.

    Remember too, in this respect, that stockwealth was not repudiated by those of more modernist bent; they tended to treat it like other forms of capital in a world of mercantilism, commerce and commodities. It was they – the educated children of old elites, the upper peasantry, and the petite bourgeoisie cultivated by the mission – who were heirs to the liberal vision of the early evangelists. Others, less able to ride the contradictions of colonial political economy and Protestant modernism, remained marginal to the conventions and the cultural practices of the marketplace. They sought to garner what they could of its wealth,12 and to invest it in the social and material assets they knew and appreciated. This was to be an enduring strategy, visible even as the forces of global capital reshaped the post-apartheid southern African periphery in the late 20th century. In August 1995 the Gaming gazette of the Sun International Corporation carried the story of a man, apparently of modest means, from Ramotswa in Botswana. He had hit the jackpot on a slot machine at the Gaborone Sun Hotel. Ralinki, his given name, would use his winnings to buy beasts. For Tswana, he explained, ‘cattle are . . . wealth, and it is traditional to have as many as possible to pass on to your sons’.13

    Which brings us back to the matters with which we began. World historical movements of social incorporation – nation-building, colonialism, globalization and the like – are all founded on a logic of commensuration and conversion, on the demand that inimical sorts of value – in respect of language and culture, wealth, beauty, even the idea of God – are made equatable and translatable. Irreconcilable forms of difference among people and things are rendered reducible, imaginatively and concretely, to common denominators. As our case shows, such processes of commensuration and conversion, and above all their enabling currencies, have often been the focus of concern, indeed of struggle, among people caught up on all sides of colonial encounters. These people tend to be minutely sensitive to the capacity of diverse media – money, beads, stock or whatever – to make or to resist convertability and, therefore, the modes of exchange, abstraction, exploitation and incorporation they allow, modes that sustain or threaten the autonomy, distinctiveness and control we often associate with the ‘local’. That is why currencies of conversion often come to be fetishized, why they seem to have a power all of their own, why they loom so large at times of great historical changes of scale in economy, society and culture. Hence the obsession on the part of European missionaries with inducting Africans into the use of money – and the equally impassioned investment, among Tswana, in retaining their wealth in kine. Conversion, after all, was not merely a matter of religious reform. It was the key mechanism of imperialism at large.

  • Reflections on Youth, From the Past to the Postcolony

    Reflections on Youth, From the Past to the Postcolony

    PROLEGOMENON

    philosophy does not concern itself with children. It leaves  them  to pedagogy, where they’re not in very good hands. Philosophy has forgotten about children.

    Bernhard Schlink, The Reader, p.141

    There has long been a tendency in the public discourse of the West to speak of youth as a transhistorical, transcultural category. As if it has existed everywhere and at all times in much the same way. This is in spite of the fact that anthropologists and historians have insisted, for almost as long, that the cultural meanings and social attributes ascribed to “youth” have varied a great deal across time and space; recall Malinowski and Margaret Mead, not to mention Philippe Ariès. It is also an anthropological truism that the way in which young people are perceived, named, and represented betrays a lot about the social and political constitution of a society. Thus it is that, in nineteenth-century Britain, down-class juveniles were referred to as “nomads’; their terrains, the internal colonies of the industrial metropole, were called “Jungles,”  even “Africas” (Hebdige 1988:20). Similarly, in late twentieth-century North America and South Africa (Seekings 1993:xii, citing David Everatt), white pre-adults are typically termed “teenagers” while their black counterparts are “youth”; adolescents with attitude, so to speak. In this manner, language racializes and demonizes difference without explicitly marking it. “Words,” Joseph Conrad (1957:11) once said, are “the great foes of reality.” But they also open a window onto its secrets.

    Far from constituting a universal category–a social status generated by the abstract sociological principle of generation– youth, as we speak of them here, are the historical offspring of modernity; modernity, that is, as the ideological formation which arose during the Age of Revolution, 1789-1848 (cf. Hobsbawm 1962), and was honed in the fraught dialectics of empire; modernity as an ideological formation which naturalized its own telos in a model of human development (Lukose 2000) that casts “youth”  as both the essential precondition and the indefinite postponement of maturity.1 Industrial capitalist society has been

    1

    Constructs like “racial adolescence,”  deployed by civilizing missions abroad to measure the (lack of) “progress”  of more-or-less unique in making childhood into a site of self- conscious cultural reproduction, releasing its young from the workplace so that they might enter the rarified world of education; the latter being the space in which the nation-state seeks to husband its potential, in which it invests in its human capital, in which, says Foucault (1976:81), it “hides its dreams.” Yet juveniles are also the creatures of our nightmares, of our social impossibilities and our existential angst.

    It is in this latter sense that, for Hebdige (1988:17), youth enter modernist narratives only when they stand for trouble. But the matter is more ambiguous than this suggests. Trouble, Butler (1990:vii) insists, need not merely be cast in the negative. It can also imply the productive unsettling of dominant epistemic regimes under the heat of desire, frustration, or anger. Youth, in other words, are complex signifiers, the stuff of mythic extremes (Blanch 1980:103); simultaneously idealizations and monstrosities, pathologies and panaceas. This has been true for a very long time. Witness the ambivalent appearance of the young in Dickensian London, on one hand as orphans and artful dodgers, yet also as the bearers of Great colonized peoples toward “modernity,”  demonstrate the ideological uses of this form of developmentalism; see W.C. Willoughby (1923:239) for a South African instance.

    Expectations. Or the discordant images of juvenile activists in late twentieth-century Africa: contrast, for example, the preternatural child soldiers of Mocambique or Siera Leone, the very epitome of civil disintegration (Honwana 1999), with the heroic “young lions”  of South Africa, who were the harbingers of democracy and the end of apartheid. Such contrasts are likely to persist: in Brazil, homeless children have come to symbolize both the collective shame of the nation-state and its future resurrection through proper planning and legal intervention (Veloso n.d.).

    In short, “youth” stands for many things at once: for the terrors of the present, the errors of the past, the prospect of a future. For old hopes and new frontiers (cf. De Boeck in this volume). In all of these tropic guises, of course, they are figures of a popular imagination far removed from more nuanced social realities.2 This is crucial to keep in mind as we interrogate the place of young people in the late twentieth- century nation-state–especially those neoliberal nation-states currently in difficulty–in Africa and elsewhere.

    Apart from all else, “youth” are always only a fraction of those not yet adult: that fraction whose anomalous agency asserts itself in honor or breach of communal order. Often they are the mutant citizens of the modern nation, purveyors of its violent undersides. This is a point to which we shall return.

    Generation  Trouble

    The meaning of globalization, at least as an analytic concept, might still be in dispute in some circles. But few would deny that one global feature of the contemporary world–from Chicago to Cape Town, Calcutta to Caracas–is a sense of crisis surrounding the predicament of juveniles. Although it is always locally mediated and modulated, that predicament appears to arise out of the workings of neoliberal capitalism and the changing planetary order of which it is part. It takes many forms, patently. But it seems everywhere to be founded on a counterpoint, a doubling, a contradiction perhaps. On one hand is the much remarked exclusion of the young from national economies, especially from their shrinking, metamorphosing productive sectors. As the frenzied expansion of the free market runs up against the demise of the welfare state, a process that manifests itself in an ever widening gulf between rich and poor, the commonweal of all but few sovereign polities has been drastically eroded. In the upshot, most are unable to sustain previous levels of social services and benefits, to afford the cost of infrastructural reproduction, or to underwrite a labor market in which there is regular or secure employment in any abundance.

    Even in advanced industrial societies, the modernist dream of infinite progress–a narrative according to which each generation does better than its predecessor–is constantly mocked; mocked by conditions that disenfranchise many people,3disproportionately the young and unskilled of the inner city and the countryside, from full waged citizenship in the nation-state.4 This despite the claims by some that the current generation of mainstream American “kids”  is more compliant, less cynical than those who came before them (Howe and Strauss 2000). To be sure, patterns of polarization and exclusion, among youth and across the age spectrum at large, is ever more palpable in these neo liberal times.

    This theme was sounded repeatedly by proponents of Ralph Nader’s Green Party in the recent US elections. Michael Moore, radical film-maker and anti-corporate activist, described Nader as the champion of “young people, who feel disenfranchised and dispossessed by mainstream American politics”  (special election report, 848, National Public Radio, November 6, 2000).

    While it might be argued that, constitutionally, citizenship in liberal democracies has never included a right to work, the provision of unemployment benefits, worker’s compensation, and pensions to the nationals of welfare states has implied entitlement to an income. Such benefits are widely under threat in this neoliberal age, but the obligation to sustain the highest possible levels of employment continues to be one of the taken-for-granted expectations of government everywhere, notwithstanding the ferocious realpolitik of market competition. In this paper, we use the notion of “waged citizenship”  to imply social and moral membership in the national commonweal.

    On the other hand is the recent rise of assertive, global youth cultures of desire, self-expression, representation; also, in some places, of potent, if unconventional, forms of politicization to go along with them. In the cyberspace age, juveniles have an enhanced capacity to communicate in, and act effectively on, the world at large. Generation has become a concrete, quotidian principle of social mobilization, inflecting other dimensions of difference; notably, race, gender, ethnicity and class.5Transnational youth activism, and the mutually comprehensible signifying practices on which it is based, are facilitated by planetary flows–of currencies, people, value– across old sovereign boundaries (cf. Venkatesh n.d.[a]:6; Appadurai 1990). The young have taken to the internet and to the streets in growing numbers as post-Fordist economics recast relations between capital and labor, profoundly altering global geographies of production. More of this below.

    This is not to imply that youth forms a “homogeneous, sociological category of people which thinks, organizes and acts” in coherent ways (Seekings 1993:xiv); but the same may be said of “working class politics” (pace Seekings, loc.cit.). Youth, like the working class, is a politically constructed category; both are rooted in their relationship to production and consumption. Most notably, immigrant workers and non-autochthonous minorities; see Comaroff and Comaroff (2000b).

    Increasingly, moreover, they are entailed in each other (cf. Corrigan and Frith 1976; Comaroff and Comaroff 2000a). In the late twentieth century, in sum, youth have gained unprecedented autonomy as a social category an und für sich, both in and for themselves. This is in spite, or perhaps because, of their relative marginalization from the normative world of work and wage. In many Western contexts they, along with other disenfranchised persons,6add up to an incoherent counter-nation with its own illegal economies of ways and means, its own spaces of production and recreation, its own parodic patriotisms.

    Elsewhere (1999b), we use the term “alien-nation” to describe the phenomenon; in like vein, Zizek (1997:127f) treats these disenfranchised persons as the “symptoms”  of late-capitalist universalism, whose imminent logic ensures that their equivalent deprivations never find unified voice in some “rainbow coalition”, notwithstanding progressivist liberal hopes and expectations. As this suggests, youth embody the sharpening contradictions of the contemporary world in especially acute form. Take South Africa for example. Here, in the apartheid years, the juvenile black counter-nation had a palpable opponent in the racist state. With the demise of the ancien regime, the dispossessed won the right to enter the workplace as “free” individuals. But, in a tragic irony, this occurred just as the global impact of neoliberal capitalism began to kick in. Now large-scale privatization, the loss of blue-collar employment, and the erosion of working-class identities vitiate the prospects of building an inclusive social democracy. Young people of color, would-be citizens of the “new” millennial order, must find their place in a society whose hard- won nationhood is already subverted by forces that compromise the territorial sovereignty of its political economy.

    But we are running ahead of ourselves. In order to push our understanding of the contemporary predicament of youth beyond the merely superficial, to explore further the doubling–the ambiguous threat and promiseB-inherent in its formation, it is necessary to dig a little deeper into the modernist archaeology of the category. For it is here that we are likely to find the source of contemporary generation troubles. Or, at least, our apprehension of them.

    A BRIEF HISTORY OF YOUTH

    Foucault (1976:80) may or may not have been correct in claiming that modern Western society is unique in accentuating the gulf between children and adults. But we do appear to have romanticized and commodified that space, making it a site wherein immature carelessness confronts full-grown desire, wherein an irrepressible sense of invincibility seems to drive precocious power. Of course, the nation-states of Europe were not alone in marking out “youth” as a life-phase whose liminal force could be tapped for the collective good. Age-based societies in Africa mobilized premarital warriorhood to this end as well; indeed, those who languish between corporeal and social maturity, debarred from marrying or establishing families, have become the footsoldiers of adult hegemony in many places. Youth, from this perspective, is everywhere a potential category of exclusion and exploitation, a source of surplus value.

    It is arguable that twentieth-century European polities– with their technologies of mass production, communication, and coercion–have been singularly well positioned to idealize and utilize the physical and imaginative resources of the young. Yet one of the hallmarks of the present moment, of the age of globalization and postcoloniality, has been a diminishing of the capacity of governments’-if not of the market forces they foster–to control adolescent bodies, energies, or intentions. From the spread of global youth cultures and environmental politics to the sprouting of urban gangs, soccer armies, and neoNazi cadres, the nation-state plays host to forces that it can no longer adequately reign in. Often, moreover, the more radical of these forces name themselves–Hip Hop Nation, Gay Nation–in ways that both mimic and mock it, all the better to trouble its sovereignty. Thus the phalanxes of football supporters in the new Europe, who savage people and property, assault police, and transgress barriers and borders at home and abroadB-all in the name of national pride (Buford 1993). Likewise the rise of libertarian militias, whose youthful troops declare war on established government in the name of purer forms of patriotism, albeit often at the behest of more cynical, less visible father figures.

    How has this come to be? Whatever its resemblance to comparable usages in other periods and places, the Euro-construction of “youth,”  we repeat, is the outworking of a specific set of social conditions; its evolution, still ongoing, bespeaks a submerged history of modernity and its imperial underbelly. While those covered by the term have long had their deviant identity thrust upon them (see below)–and, since World War II, sold to them–they have increasingly made it their own. A brute deus ex machina propels this unfolding story: the complex relationship between capital and the nation-state. Industrial capitalist economies were capricious in the ways in which, Janus- faced, they both begat and undermined equalities of citizenship and entitlement; their post-industrial counterparts have cumulatively subverted national sovereignty and the substantive rights of subjects. The sanguine expectations that once framed bourgeois cultures of progress and their civilizing missions abroadB-ideals that vouchsafed the young a future under the sign of “development”–are, as we have already said, sorely compromised by the growing inequalities wrought in the name of neoliberal capitalism. Postmodernity is often characterized as modernism bereft of its hopeful, utopian thrust.

    Concomitantly, the new age of globalism might be seen as one in which the world-wide fabrication of desire, of the promise of infinite possibility, meets the impossibilities occasioned by widening disparities of wealth, itself a corollary of the devolution and decommissioning of economies of manufacture. In the face of all this, many youthful entrepreneurs, having been raised in advanced commodity cultures, find their own ways and means. Sometimes these involve the supply of hitherto unimagined “services”; sometimes the recommissioning of the detritus of consumer society; sometimes the resale of purloined property of the state; sometimes the short-circuiting of existing networks of exchange. For a burgeoning number, they entail entry into the lower reaches of the transnational trade in drugs, and/or into a netherworld in which the deployment of violence becomes a routine mode of production and redistribution–often in a manner that replicates the practices of international business. And visibly corrodes the authority of the state. But more of this in due course.

    If, to return to the earlier moment, it was the rise of industrial capitalism that first created the conditions for the emergence of a semi-autonomous category of “youth,” it was in the exploding cities of modern Europe that this category first took on a manifest sociological reality. Hebdige (1988;19f; see above) has argued that the young first showed their insolent face, across modern Britain, in the “delinquent” crowds that gathered in manufacturing towns, where the offspring of the rising working-class were often left to survive, and to create their own social worlds, independent of paternal or patrician control (Blanch 1980; Gillis 1974; Jones 1984). Observers were particularly disturbed by children and adolescents in urban slums, by the “wandering tribes” or “young Arabs”  who inhabited the internal colonies at the heart of London and Manchester (Mayhew 1851:277f). These were the artful dodgers of the Dickensian inner city, to whom we alluded above, the mutant citizens of its alien-nation. They inspired a civilizing crusade, prompting the founding of Ragged Schools and Reformatories, and, in due course, a compulsory system of state education; also a pedagogic mission to “the dark places”  of the earth. One might note, with the hindsight of history (Willis 1977), not least South African history, that state education would not so much eradicate the alien-nation as reproduce it by different means. The South African Broadcasting Corporation, in collaboration with the Department of Education, recently commissioned a team of the country=s most gifted young film-makers to make a docudrama on post-apartheid schooling. 7They painted a chilling portrait of endemic frustration and routine violence, prompting widespread and anguished national debate.

    Youth as a sign of contradiction, as the figuration of mythic bipolarity, is enshrined in the foundations of the modern collective imaginary. In the abstract, the term congeals pure, utopic potential. In everyday reality, however, “youth”  is a collective noun that has all too often indexed a faceless mass of persons who were alike underclass, unruly, male, challengingly out of place–and, at once physically powerful and morally immature, always liable to seize the initiative from their elders and betters. They personify the failure of moral reproduction, the dangerous obverse of capitalist optimism, the limits of a meliorist, bourgeois social vision. The tensions embodied in this pre-adult population, exacerbated where differences of race or creed color those of generation, have peaked in periods of economic slump. For, as surplus citizens, youth are not born. They are made by historical circumstances. And rarely as they like.

    Yizo Yizo, a thirteen part series, aired on SATV3 in 1998. It was created and written by Mtutuzeli Matshoba and Angus Gibson, and directed by Angus Gibson and Teboho Mahlatsi.

    But if these young people have embodied the threat of civil disorder, they can also be harnessed for state projects of organized violence; in particular, for mobilization as soldiers. Often, those not yet deemed ready to live as full citizens of the nation-state have been called upon to die for it. (Remember, in this respect, the Africans who served the colonial powers in both world wars; see e.g. Bent 1952). This is the flip side of the story of youth and modernity: adolescence as the infantry of adult statecraft, as the ever more reluctant blood and bone of national aspiration. At the core of the making of “modern” youth, then, has been the role of the state in naturalizing, exploiting, and narrating the relationship between juveniles and violence, a relationship all too neatly eclipsed in the disciplinary logic of peacetime discourses about adolescent deviance.

    And so it is that the association of juveniles with the threat of precocious, uncontained physicalityB-sexual, reproductive, combativeB-has haunted popular and scholarly perceptions alike in the twentieth century. In the 1920s, a rapidly professionalizing sociology (first in America, then in Europe) depicted “youth” as a disruptive masculine force in the city, as purveyors of violent crime and ready recruits to the barbarities of life in gangs. Functionalist sociology turned historical contradiction into social pathology, and took these youth to be its epitome. They were tribal, feral beings who hunt in packs, anti-citizens, an affront to bourgeois family values and social order. Delinquent, down-class, male, and violent, they were also increasingly black. Nor is this true only in the northern and western hemispheres. Recent South African history is another instance. In the final years of struggle against apartheid, the category of “youth” expanded to include diverse classes of freedom fighters: students, workers, even criminals.

    In this story, it is true, not all young blacks are youth. But all youth are black. Also overwhelmingly, if not exclusively, male. And if some people never become “youth,” others seem unable to outgrow the label, even in middle age (cf. Buford 1993; Seekings 1993:11). Shades here again of Mannheim’s foundational insight, recalled by Bundy (1987:304) in the African context, that generation is a social, not a chronological, category. It is also a political one. With deep material roots.

    The Rise of Global “Youth Culture”

    The rise of neoliberal capitalism on a planetary scale has further complicated the modernist construction of youth. Often associated with the events of 1989, this epochal transformation was heralded by the thoroughgoing shifts in global power, economy, and modes of communication set in motion in the wake of World War II; shifts that would reshape the structure of international capital and intensify its workings. As we shall see, those shifts would not merely reconstruct colonial relations, national economies, and international markets in goods, services, and signs. They would also globalize the division of labor, remake human subjects, alter the relationship between production and consumption, and reform identities and citizenships across the world. While in no sense homogenizing, this process involved novel forms of space-time compression, as well as the reformulation of boundaries and localities everywhere. It also ushered in a new moment in the history of youth; to be sure, as we noted earlier, an electronically mediated “youth culture” was one of its earliest, most expansive cultural expressions, providing a lexicon for the ever more explicit assertion of juveniles across the globe as agents in and of themselves.

    It is significant, in this respect, that the USA–“the only victor” of the Great War (Fussell 1975:317)–emerged as the major economic and cultural force on the international scene after 1945. For here, where postwar affluence and pronatalism combined to usher in a fresh phase of expansionist capitalism, the “teenager” became the new model consumer-citizen, the term itself an invention of the marketing industry (Cook 1998). Equipped with disposable wealth to spend on commodities and “leisure” (Cohn 1969; Hebdige 1988:30), this was the first generation set loose to craft itself in large part through consumption. Capitalists for the first time saw youth as a market with its own infinitely cultivable needs. “Fawning like mad” (Cohn 1969:15), they manufactured the means–clothes, music, magazines, dances–for creating age-based collectivities with unprecedented self- awareness, visibility, and translocal potential.

    The capacity of the languages of youth culture to mark emergent identities and consciousness was shown when the “rebels without a cause” of the 1950s became rebels with causes aplenty, from the romance of white hippy flower power to militant Black Panther antiracism. And while the naive self-absorption of lifestyle politics and rock resistance might have been evident from its roots in Haight Ashbury, the mass protests against the Vietnam War demonstrated that a self-conscious youth counter- culture could engage mainstream politics. Artful dodgers became draft dodgers, and the right of states to commandeer the means of violence, especially in the bodies and purposes of youth, was seriously challenged. Neither was this a purely parochial struggle; that much was attested by simultaneous upheavals among restive students in many parts of the world. The historical significance of these youth uprisings remains an open question.

    But one thing about them is clear: youth activism was a precursor of new sorts of social movements, movements born of the creative refiguring of local means and ends in light of global, media- driven identities, ideologies, and vocabularies. The sounds of the sixties, perhaps the true Age of Youth, traversed a multicentered, electronically unified planet, fueled by transnational commercial interests. Amidst a rapidly proliferating flow of signs and values (Appadurai 1990; Hannerz 1989), youth culture began to construct an “elsewhere”–a universe-wide, alienated age-grade–that gave pre-adults the language for an identity apart from the “soiled and compromised parent culture” (Hebdige 1988:30).

    This age-grade, purely a figurative community of course, was inherently tenuous and virtual. Its imagining could seldom fully transcend the limitations imposed by the commodity-dependence of mass cultural forms. As actors-through-consumption, teenagers bought–literally–into mainstream interests at the same time as they contested them. In so doing, they typified the predicament of would-be subversives in advanced capitalist contexts; of those who struggle to seize control of commodified signs and practices, thus to use them in ways that do more than merely reaffirm the status quo. Located far from sites of primary production, theirs is often a politics of style. Its iconoclasm is effected on camera ready bodies; or, more recently, along digital frontiers where hackers and “cyberpunks”  protest freedoms lost as computer technology becomes ever more subject to corporate control (Coleman n.d.). To the critically minded, like Hebdige (1988:35), their exertions appear ambiguous, as “neither affirmation nor refusal.” Their iconoclastic play with mainstream commodity forms often signal subversionB-as in the case of Punk and RapB-and may discomfort the guardians of property and propriety. But it must always struggle to remain ahead of encroaching market forces, forces that threaten to neutralize its effects by reducing its creativity to bland consumer goods.

    Beyond the Politics of Metaphor

    Still, we mistake the possibilities of the moment if we see youth culture simply as a “politics of metaphor” (Hebdige loc. cit.). It is a mistake that flows from focusing more on the products of that culture, on its disembodied images and texts, than on their situated production and use. The potential of its signs and objects to be (re)deployed, to be “cut and mix[ed],” have made them easily available for the fashioning of a wide variety of identities and projects; identities and projects whose sometimes subversive strain, itself often acted out rather than spoken out, underlie the ambivalences endemic to the late twentieth-century representation of the young, sui generis. Also, perhaps to the political spirit of the age writ large. For the productive aspect of “youth culture”  has expanded as juveniles have come to participate on a global scale in shaping their own markets, both legal and illegal; as their signifying practices have connived with those species of post-Fordist capital that owe little loyalty to local establishments or economies. Youth have been integral to the opening up of new economic spaces of unprecedented profitabilityB-the fertile Silicon Valleys, where young “nerds,”  eschewing academic credentials and professional regulation, have become multimillionaires; the childlike insouciance that typifies this field, in image if not in terms of real control, being legible in the bespectacled boyishness of an aging Bill Gates.

    The libertarian possibilities of electronic technologies that simultaneously privatize and globalize the means of communication are intrinsic to the effects of capitalism in its neoliberal guise, and have generated new openings for juvenile adventurers, ostensibly unfettered by a gerontocratic establishment. This is captured in the equivocal figure of the “hacker,” an underage outlaw bent on maintaining the freedom of the information highway, and redeeming his (more rarely her) creative potential from the grasp of evil corporations and imperious governments (Coleman n.d.). A string of American movies (like Hackers, Wargames, and Johnny Mnemonic) rehearse popular nightmares of electronic whizkids breaking into top security enclaves, and threatening to hold the state and its guardians to ransom. Recent reports in the US media, interestingly, tell of teenage e-traders amassing huge fortunes in their bedrooms while putatively doing their school “homework.”

    But suburban cyberbrats are hardly unique in their capacity to mine the potential of new economic frontiers. Every bit as inspired and ingenious have been the ventures of less advantaged young people from the inner cities, from postcolonial and postrevolutionary societies, and from other terrors incognita, who seek to make good the promise of world-wide laissez-faire.

    Here, too, liberalization has created room for youthful entrepreneurs to manoeuver beyond the confines of modernist modes of production, polity, legitimacy. Take the burgeoning “bush economies”  of Cameroon and Chad, where “market boys”  cross borders, change passports, trade currencies, and traffic in high-risk cargo like guns and drugs; in so doing, they invent fresh ways of getting rich on the margins of global markets (Roitman n.d.). Or consider the ferociously escalating teenage diamond trade-Banother amalgam of danger, desire, and deregulationB-that provisions armies in West and Central Africa, setting up innovative configurations of libertarian commerce, violence, and profit (De Boeck n.d.). Or observe the young Mouride men from Senegal who have taken to translocal enterprise with such energy that they talk of New York as “a suburb of Dakar;”  their remittances finance major reconstruction of urban neighborhoods at home, transform local power relations, and, concomitantly, highlight the dwindling capacity of the nation-state to sustain its infrastructure (Mamadou Diouf, personal communication; Buggenhagen n.d). These fluid economies are usually not altogether free of gerontocratic control, of course. Nor do they supplant all formal political and economic arrangements, with which they have complex and multiple interconnections. But they do circumscribe and relativize them in significant ways, thereby challenging their exclusive sovereignty.

    In sum, youth culture, in an epoch of liberalization, has shown itself uniquely able to link locales across transnational space; also to motivate the kinds of material practices that, in turn, have redrawn the maps of high modernism. Contemporaneity is its essence. In this, it echoes present-day pop, whose fast moving “sampling” distends the normative by juxtaposing sounds in startlingly labile ways, not least when it cannibalizes ethnomusics from across the planet. Small wonder that our nightmare adolescent–wearing absurdly expensive sports shoes, headphones blaring gangsta rap, beeper tied to a global underground economy–is a synthesis of street child and corporate mogul.

    A qualification here. The marginalization of young people, at least in its present-day form, may be a very general structural consequence of the rise of neoliberal capitalism. And “youth culture” may be increasingly global in its reach. But this does not mean that the predicament of juveniles, or the manner of its experience, is everywhere the same, everywhere homogenized.

    Neither in its social nor in its cultural dimensions is this the case. It takes highly specific forms, and has very different material implications, in Los Angeles and Dakar, London and Delhi. Hip hop, Air Jordans, and Manchester United colors might animate youthful imaginations almost everywhere, often serving as a poignant measure of the distance between dream and fulfillment, between desire and impossibility, between centers of great wealth and peripheries of crushing poverty. But these signs are always domesticated to some degree. Otherwise they would have very little density of meaning. Appropriated and re-contextualized, they are translated into hybrid languages capable of addressing local concerns. Thus it is that rap music is inflected in one way on the Cape Flats, another on the streets of Bombay or Havana.

    Writes Richard Ssewakiryanga (1999:26):

    Today in Uganda, rap music is not only received in its American form, but repackaged by borrowing from some of the traditional folklore to fill in the incomprehension…suffered by the audience listening to the poetics of American rappers.

    Imported images, he notes, quickly penetrate local repertoires of humor, irony, anger. At the same time, these media remain points of intersection, points of connection between here and elsewhere, between sameness and difference, between received identities and a global imaginary.

    Partly as a result of all this, youth tend everywhere to occupy the innovative, uncharted borderlands in which the global meets the local; this often being audible in the elaboration of creolized argots–like Street Setswana and Kwaita in South Africa–that give voice to imaginative worlds very different from those of the parental generation. 8These frontiers are also sites of tension, particularly for young people who confront the contradictions of modernity as they try to make good on the millennial promise of democracy and the free market in the newly liberalized states of Africa and Eastern Europe. In the late twentieth century, we have suggested, the image of youth-as- trouble has gained an advanced capitalist twist as impatient adolescents try to “take the waiting out of wanting,” thus to lessen the gulf between hope and fulfillment. In the process they have felt their power, power born of a growing willingness and ability to turn to the use of force, to garner illicit wealth, to hold polite society to ransom. Bill Buford (1993:264f) has said that it is only in moments of concerted violence that riotous British soccer fans experience a real sense of community, a point others have extended to gangland wars in US cities, to witchburning in the northerly provinces of South Africa, and to cognate social practices elsewhere. Is it surprising, then, that so many juveniles see themselves as ironic, mutant citizens of alien-nations, finding scant reflection of themselves in the rites and rhetoric, the provisions and entitlements, of a liberal democratic civic order?

    8 For an excellent study of Street Setswana in the North West Province of South Africa, see Cook (1999).

    ENDNOTE

    It was the ANC manifesto that proclaimed “jobs for all at a living wage”…Where are the promised youth brigades? Where are the jobs? Where is the living wage? Now is the time.

    Shaheed Mohamed, Cape Times, 7.xxix.99

    Elsewhere (2000a) we explore the (onto) logic of neoliberal capitalism; or “millennial capitalism,” as we refer to it, thus to index not merely its epochal rise at the end of the century, but also the fact that it has become invested with an almost magical, salvific capacity to yield wealth without work, money without manufacture. There we seek to show that structural transformations in the material, moral, and signal relationship of production to consumption have altered the very essence of labor and social reproduction; also the essence of–and mutual bleeding into each other–of class, race, gender, and generation. 9 In the final analysis, it is this epochal history, this analytic ur-narrative, that holds the key to any understanding of the present and future predicament of youth; even of its unfolding construction as a category an  und  fur sich. Here we have sought to lay out, somewhat cavalierly, bits and pieces of the genealogy of that ur-narrative.

    9 Age and generation, as the marxist anthropology of precapitalist societies has long pointed out, may coalesce in self-reproducing structures of exploitation. In many of these societies, youthful cadres provided the labor power, and hence surplus value, for their elders. The parallel with neoliberal capitalism is obvious. Increasingly, “youth” and “underclass,” both ever more racinated and ethnicized, run together; note, here, Abdullah’s (1998) suggestive use of the term “lumpen youth culture.”

    In so doing, we have sought to complicate current talk, at least in populist discourses, of “the crisis of youth”; talk that portrays the predicament of the younger generation in monochromatically bleak terms. And 10 if all were entropy, all catastrophe, all impossibility in this Age of Futilitarianism, this age in which rampant self-interest meets rampant pessimism (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999a). It is not that these terms are inaccurate. Nor that deep concern is unwarranted. To the contrary. The metamorphosis of the global economy is marginalizing many people before they grow to full maturity, excluding them from the prospect of regular employment, treating them increasingly as adults before the law when they transgress the bounds of the normative, demonizing them as they turn to crime in the absence of any other means of livelihood. The young of today, it seems, are more than ever enfranchised as consumers-welcomed into the marketplace in the immediate interests of corporate capital–often then to be excluded from the benefits of mainstream economic participation, political acknowledgement, and civic responsibility (cf. Venkatesh n.d.[b]).

    But this is only a part of the story.

    10 No less problematic are statements of unqualified optimism about a new and undifferentiated “millennial generation”  in the US, bereft of the cynicism and rebelliousness of their parents (Howe and Strauss 2000).

    For one thing, as we have said, the attribution to unruly youth of the standardized nightmares of polite society–not unlike the witch in precolonial and colonial Africa (Wilson 1951)–goes back to the genesis of industrial capitalism and its bourgeois sensibilities. It is on the back of those situated in the liminal space between childhood innocence and adult responsibility that modernist sociomoral anxieties have tended to be borne. For another thing, it is crucial, if we are to make any real sense of the contemporary predicament of youth, of its neomodern construction as a category in and for itself, that we stress its intrinsic bipolarity, its doubling. Youth is not only a signifier of exclusion, of impossibility, of emasculation, denigration, and futility. Nor, by all accounts, is it experienced as such. While they may not, for the most part, have captured the mainstream–and may, indeed, constitute an infinitely exploitable market, an inexhaustible reservoir of consumers, an eternal font of surplus value to be extracted–the young remain a constant source of creativity, ingenuity, possibility, empowerment. A source of alternative, yet-to-be- imagined futures.

  • Notes on Anthropological Method, Mainly in the Key of E

    Notes on Anthropological Method, Mainly in the Key of E

    “There is only one method in social anthropology, the comparative method – and that is impossible,”  Sir Edward Evans-Pritchard.

    Prolegomenon

    It is exceptionally difficult to address questions of method for anthropology at large unless one reduces the field to a caricature of itself. To wit, the discipline – if anything so obviously polytheistic, anything so unruly its expansiveness, can be a called a discipline at all – extends from the “hard” biological sciences and archeological forensics through “comparative sociology” in the British tradition, technical linguistics of the various American schools, and ethnologist-everything in the formalist mode, to the “soft” hermeneutics of interpretive and historical ethnography. And this barely begins to exhaust the field. Even if we take Clifford Greertz’s (1973) fashionable saw for the seventies, that anthropologists “do ethnography.” It is difficult to pin down what this might mean in general, replicable terms; after all, Geertz’s often initiated, widely-cited methodological approach – which was fleshed out only illustratively, never rigorously – was itself directed toward ideographic particularly and away from anything that might present itself as nomothetic, general, theoretician. Since then, moreover, the discipline has become much more diverse, much less coherent; having departed the village, the reservation, the island, both its ends and its means are more contested than ever before. Indeed, if, for David Lodge (1999:52), writing a novel is “like playing chess in three dimensions,” doing anthropology nowadays is like playing it in four; the fourth being the terrain of the virtual, the electronic commons that ties even fairly remote social worlds into an expansive, if often exclusionary, global cumene. In short, what follows is a redacto, if not ad absurdam, then certainly to the ethnographic practice. It omits, for example, the question of historical method, critical though it clearly is to what we do much of the time; also the methodological challenges faced by anthropology as the scope and scale of its objects metamorphose. It also refuses the idea that the qualitative social sciences can or should measure their methodological worth, or be evaluated, against the quantitative social sciences, whose techniques, their authority notwithstanding, are no less open to radical doubt (Comaroff and Comaroff 1992). The challenge for both lies in commensuration: how do we arrive at once at techniques of producing knowledge commensurate with the problems that we seek to address? This much is self-evident. It is here that the difficulties begin.

    Three or So Questions

    On the matter of rigor, and its mortifications

    Socio-cultural anthropology is often accused, to its mortification, of lacking all methodological rigor. Or worse yet, of having no discernible method at all – beyond its reliance on the self-assertively authoritative eye (or, more capaciously, the senses) of the enthographer. Recall, in this respect Levi-Strauss (1976:35): ethnography is a means of producing knowledge in which “[t]he observer apprehends himself as his own instrument of observation” (cf. also Foucault 1975). As Jean Comaroff (n.d.) has pointed out, its frank faith in the role of subjective experience in empirical investigation, and in the testimony of the lone investigator, has always been controversial: the anthropological mode of induction has repeatedly been accused of ineluctable ethnocentrism, of fetishizing difference, of celebrating imaginative idiosyncrasy, and of a cavalier disregard for replicability, refutability, or reliable accountability. To be sure, its most invoked technique, “participant observation,” is often dismissed, at worst, as an oxymoron, at best, as a disingenuous synonym for “hanging out” with “the natives,” whomever they may happen to be. Or, in slightly more dignified terms, engaging them in a “long conversation” (Block 1977)

    Bracketing for now all the epistemic and ethical problems said to inhere in the methodological practices of anthropology – they are little different from those attendant upon the techniques of less reflexive disciplines and a lot less severe than those intrinsic to, say, modern journalism (see Steinberg 2002) – ethnography, done well, can and often does evince a great deal of rigor. And a high measure of refutability. For an ethnographic account to pass methodological muster, insisted Max Gluckman – founder of the Manchester School, which shaped post-WWII anthropological practice and developed some of its most innovative techniques – it ought to present primary data of sufficient quantity and depth to allow them to be reinterpreted from a theoretical perspective different from the one that produced them. This was the tacit standard to which much of British anthropology, famously empiricist in its orientations, held its practitioners until very recently.

    I shall say more, in a moment, of the rigors and replicabilities of anthropological methods. First, though, a qualification: because their objects of research are diverse and protean, because the truths they pursue tend to be less nomothetic than those sought by most other species of social preoccupations with which they are confronted, it is always hard to lay out a set of ethnographic techniques in the abstract. Not, at least, without specifying the empirical problem to which they are to be addressed and the theoretical concerns that motivate, and are motivated by, that problem: in this sense, anthropology always rests on a dialectic between the deductive and the inductive, between the concept and the concrete, between its objectives and its subjects, whose intensions and inventions frequently set its agendas. The failure to grasp this may account in part for the autonomic dismissal of ethnography as unrigorous, unreplicable, unfalsifiable, and all the other (non-)u words with which it is regularly damned. More pragmatically, it means that its technologies have to be taken as a repertoire, an imaginative tool kit, whose various elements may be deployed, combined, and refashioned in an almost infinite variety of ways. It goes without saying that it is the ethnographer’s obligation to explicate how and why s/he has deployed those elements in the ways s/he has; for example, our effort to specify how we went about designing a theoretically-principled methodology with which to arrive at an account of, and to account for, the occult economies of postcolonial South Africa – economies made manifest in rampant witch-killing, zombie conjuring, AIDS related rape, financial frauds, and other complicatedly interconnected phenomena (Comaroff and Comaroff 2003).

    The methodological toolkit available to the enthographer – in addition, of course, to more conventional techniques, such as interviews, surveys, and focus groups of sundry sorts – begins with a number of “traditional” instruments whose uses are well-established: the extended case method and the social drama, for instance, both of which have well-elaborated, replicable procedures, and suggest ways of extrapolating general processes from singular events (see e.g. Epstein 1967; and, as applied in legal anthropology, Comaroff and Roberts 1981; Gulliver 1979); the recording of “natural discourse” (in court cases, public meetings, informal conversations, and ritual cycles), and of “native” exegeses on that discourse – all of which may be digitized for deposit and review – for purposes of both formal and content analyses; symbolic analyses of the kind pioneered by Victor Turner (e.g. 1967), which laid out a carefully ordered series of observational and interpretive procedures; the documentation at periodic intervals of “routine” activities, parsed by salient social categories (gender, generation, class, status, etc.); ethnomappinj and elicitation of other vernacular modes of representation, which, by virtue of being available for transcription and dissemination, may be subjected to scrutiny and reanalysis; the collection and aggregation of life-histories and the developmental cycles of collectivities, ranging from families to large-scale associations (see e.g. Goody 1958); network and transactional analysis (e.g. Mitchell 1969); and so on.

    For anthropologists of my own generation, these remain some of the essential components of a solid spectrum of rigorous techniques that produce the kind of data out of which compelling accounts may be written: accounts that may be invoked in support or rejection of broad theoretical positions, of more specific explanations for social and cultural phenomena, of claims about the human predicament, past and present. Of late, they have been augmented by more literary and hermeneutic modes of descriptive analysis, and by rather more impressionistic, aesthetic, reflexive approaches to the act of observations itself; also by attention to domains of human existence – from mass media and finance capital to the workings of the electronic commons and the dispersed practices of governmentally, to mention a few at random – hitherto not subjected to ethnographic methods. These can and have yielded exceptionally detailed, rigorous accounts of an extraordinary range of phenomena; but their rigor is not easily specified in programmatic terms. Indeed, they rely, for their persuasiveness, on their plausibility – itself often judged by virtue of their density, their imaginative scope, their capacity to bring a wide range or recognizable “facts” into a single descriptive-analysis purview – and their aesthetic composition.

    Which leaves the question as posed: what are the standards of rigor in anthropology? In the abstract, there are none, none that are universally shared. Given that all method is mediated by theory and vice versa, our standards are, in the final analysis, determined contextually. If anything more general is to be said, it is that we tend to assess our techniques of knowledge production by the degree to which they yield data about which a cogent argument can be made in terms of prevailing conceptions of plausibility, persuasiveness, parsimony, density. Or, as Gluckman put it, the extent to which they yield accounts about which we may reasonable disagree, accounts that may reasonably be subjected to reinterpretation.

    Communicating our Differences, Differentiating our Communications

    The biggest challenge for anthropology is not to find more rigorous methods. As I have said, despite stereotypic caricatures to the contrary, ethnography practiced well – a qualification that applies to all methodology – is quite rigorous enough. Not only can it stand critical scrutiny as a mode of producing knowledge; it has long yielded truths of enormous insight and value, often to the discomfort of conventional Western wisdom. The challenge, in my own view, is to convince its practitioners that they owe it to themselves, and to their colleagues in other disciplines, to explicate their procedures fully. There is, if we are to be honest, a degree of high-handedness, even assertive contempt, among anthropologists, for speaking about our method: ethnography, to put it crudely, is what makes us different – or, rather, used to – and the rest of the social sciences can take it or leave it. Of course, “doing fieldwork, an extended spell of participant observation, remains a necessary rite of entry into our collegium (Ortner 1997:61); like all rites of passage, its mystique lies in notdisclosing too much of its secret, even when the secret is that there is not much of a secret to it at all. Understandable though this might be as an exotic cultural practice, there is something self defeating to it. After all, on purely epistemic grounds, making an argument of commensuration for the relationship between an ethnographic account and the mode of producing it is an essential part of making a persuasive theoretical claim, or offering a persuasive explanation, for the phenomena under anthropological scrutiny. To be self-evident about all this: If an anthropologist wants, for example, to assay the view that a new religious movement has arisen in response to changes in local material conditions, her or his claim can only ever be as strong as is his or her demonstration that the new religious movement actually exists, that the alleged material transformations have actually occurred, and that the two things share a set of spatial, temporal, and experimental coordinates – all of which demands that we be shown, explicitly, the means by which these things have been established. Without this act of commensuration, no theory or explanation, however exquisite, imaginative, ingenious, will stand scrutiny. For all the fact that this is obvious, it seems rarely to be honored in the discipline. If we are to communicate about our practices, and convince other disciplines of their worth and their rigor, we have to begin with three principles: explication, explication, explication.

    All the rest follows. The extent to which there are or will be common criteria for designing and evaluating research between anthropology and the other social sciences depends on how much the latter incorporate ethnography into their repertoires. And are prepared, reciprocally, to make the effort to understand what it actually is, what the e-word actually stands for. To the degree that they do – and many of them are, increasingly, if sometimes only at their margins – engaging in common substantive discussions about techniques is more than appropriate, largely because anthropology does have a large and well-honed toolkit to offer.

    Topic of Caprice and Corn: Promising Horizons for Qualitative Research

    There are very few topics which cannot be illuminated by qualitative research, again well done. It depends how they are defined and formulated, what questions are asked of them, what it is about them that we wish to explain. Ethnography, these days, is being applied to an extraordinary range of things, from the caprice of future markets to the science of genetically modified corn. And a great deal in between. Indeed, one way to answer this question as posed is to elicit an inventory of doctoral dissertation titles from any major anthropology department in the country – or, better yet, several of them. One thing becomes clear: in the rapid expansion of subject matter deemed suitable for ethnographic treatment, enthography itself is undergoing an imaginative explosion, its horizon ever widened by its modes of knowledge production.

    A closing thought. Perhaps the time has come to address the conundrum at the core of this workshop, well…methodically. And methodologically. How? By doing an ethnography of enthography. If nothing else, it might prove that Evans-Pritchard was wrong all along. Anthropology has, from the first, had a plurality of techniques. What is more, comparatively speaking, its methodological tools have grown over the years. Indeed, far from being impossible, they open up all sorts of promising possibilities for the future.

  • Civil Society and the Political Imagination in Africa

    Civil Society and the Political Imagination in Africa

    This essay explores the diverse, unexpected, and controversial ways in which the idea of civil society has recently entered into populist politics and public debate throughout Africa. It offers a critical theoretical analysis of the nature and deployment of the concept—and the current debates surrounding it across the continent. Drawing on the comparative literature in the subject, John and Jean Comaroff examine the impact of colonial ideology, postcoloniality, and development practice on discourses of civility, the workings of everyday politics, the construction of new modes of selfhood, and the pursuit of moral community. They argue that struggles over civil society in Africa reveal much about larger historical forces in the post-Cold War era, making a strong case for the contribution of historical anthropology to contemporary discourses on the rise of a “new world order.”

  • Policing Culture, Cultural Policing

    Policing Culture, Cultural Policing

    PROLEGOMENON

    Our objective here is somewhat unusual. Rather than an ethnographic analysis or a theoretical discussion, what follows is an extended reflection on a research endeavor still in its early stages. We are concerned to share the methodological and conceptual questions raised, ab initio, by the effort to interrogate an unusually perplexing phenomenon. In so doing, we transgress the received distinction between two genres: the grant proposal and the scholarly essay. By means of this hybrid, however, we seek to open a new aperture onto a global issue at once consequential and difficult to pin down: the contradictions that manifest themselves in postcolonies when, under the impact of neoliberal capitalism, constitutionalism, recourse to law and popular justice are fetishized – and when the future of the nation-state comes to depend on struggles over inimical species of rights and entitlements.

    The study of which we speak grows out of a spectacular rise, during the 1990s, of witch burnings in the northern provinces of South Africa. Several aspects of the phenomenon are stri- king: the fact that, while they began in the last years of apartheid, these killings have intensified dramatically in the postcolonial period; that they are a response to populist fears of an alarming increase in witchcraft practices, zombie-conjuring, and the traffic in body parts; that they are perpetrated largely by youth in the cause both of the common good and of individual aspiration; and, most of all for present purposes, that the punishment of alleged evil-doers has involved distinctly hybrid cultural styles of informal justice.

    We have sought elsewhere (1999) to explain the unusual escalation in occult-related violence here. Note, in this respect, that we do not ourselves pass judgment as to whether there has actually been an “epidemic” of witchcraft and other forms of magical practice in the nor- thern provinces. Locally, however, people are wont to say that more cases of ritual murder have come to courts in recent years than ever before. They also point to more confessions of Sa- tanism, some of them in dramatic media revelations; more press reports of zombies, some of them replete with photographs and “eye witness” accounts; more confirmatory testimony given by ritual experts about the nefarious behavior of prominent people. All of which has led to a widespread sense of crisis in the countryside.

    While the state has been forced to react to this “crisis” – both to the belief that there is an epidemic of evil about and to the “vigilante” violence it has sparked – it has found it hard to do so by legal means. Indeed, so agitated has been the moral panic in the Northern Province that one of the first things done by the African National Congress (ANC), after it came to power in 1994, was to appoint a Commission of Inquiry into Witchcraft Violence and Ritual Murder. Its report (see below) posed a stark paradox by presenting its findings in two inimical voices. One evoked the spirit of legal universalism: it called for rigorous prosecution of those who “took the law into their own hands” by attacking suspected witches. The other spoke the language of cul- tural relativism: the criminalization of witchfinding, it said, was incompatible with the pervasive African belief – shared by many state functionaries – in the actuality of witchcraft itself. By mid- 1998, the recently established Occult-Related Crimes Unit of the South African Police Services had set up a national workshop on the forensics of occult-related crime scenes. But questions were raised about the constitutional status of the Unit: did not its very existence presuppose the illegality of the cultural convictions of many citizens?1 Later that year, a Witchcraft Summit was convened to discuss the problem tout court. It was attended by prominent politicians and public intellectuals – and (then) Deputy President Thabo Mbeki. Soon thereafter, in August 1999, the media took to the air on the issue: SABC began a 13-part TV series, Ke Bona Boloi? (“Is This Witchcraft?”) which addressed the threat of occult activities to civic order.

    A CONUNDRUM, FOUR QUESTIONS, AND A THESIS

    The particular form taken by this confrontation between legal universalism and cultural relativism lies at the core of our concerns here. It is made even more explosive by another, his- torically specific tension. On one hand, the “new” South Africa is founded on a distinctly moder- nist idea of the nation-state: of a polity with a strong sense of unity and collective interest, with a deep investment in democracy and human rights, with a government which sustains a monopoly over the legitimate means of force. It is an ideal underpinned by an almost fetishized faith in constitutionality and the rule of law. On the other hand, despite the popularity of the ANC, many South Africans believe that the post-apartheid state is failing to ensure the moral and material prosperity of its citizenry, failing to protect it from illegitimate violence, failing to deliver on the promise of rights, failing to unite the postcolony in the face of countervailing cul- tural and ethnic impulses. In the northerly provinces, these sentiments are given expression in community efforts to redefine moral order and to police, by local cultural means, those infrac- tions of the commonweal that escape the oversight of the authorities; most notably those involv- ing the occult. Our objective in this study, then, is to address four sets of related questions.

    First, how exactly are we to understand occult-related violence – violence, that is, again- st alleged perpetrators of magical evil – in this context? As a kind of vigilantism, in which communities “take the law into their own hands” in dealing with people who contravene their norms? As the revenge of the poor against the rich, young against old, male again- st female? Or as a mode of “cultural policing” directed at those held to threaten the well- being of the community itself?

    This form of action, whether it be regarded as illegal vigilantism or cultural policing, violates the exclusive control by the state of the legitimate means of force. And so:

    Second, how does the state react to community policing of the occult? How do we exp- lain the fact that, despite efforts to criminalize them, such “dangerous” cultural practices are proving decidedly recalcitrant to regulation, posing a stark challenge to the idea of a nation unified under the law?

    Occult-related violence may be seen to shade into other local institutions of informal justice – among them, makgotla, urban courts modelled on Sotho-Tswana tribunals; the “trial and pu- nishment” executed in Cape Town “by taxi-drivers with strong community support”;2 the contro- versial activities of Mapogo a Mathamaga, a notorious “vigilante” organization in the north; and, in times past, the “necklacing” of apartheid collaborators by township youth. Is the policing of the occult different because it seems so manifestly “irrational,” because it is clothed-in-culture, because it is sanctioned by appeal to customary moral and legal conventions?

    Third, to the extent that occult-related violence contests the state’s monopoly over the means of coercion, what are its implications for the governance of the “new” South Africa? Does its appeal to cultural relativism call into question the Eurocentric ideal of the nation-state? Can cultural relativism and legal universalism coexist? How might postcolonial states adjudicate among the individual rights of citizens, the cultural rights of ethnic groups, and the collective rights of other kinds of community?

    The new South African constitution puts individual rights above all else; to wit, it is censured, in some quarters, for its relative disregard of community or cultural rights. But here lies the classic conundrum of the modernist nation-state: if it presumes a unity born of a commitment to univer- sal truths and to One Law, how much cultural relativism can it tolerate? To what extent can it concede legal authority, or the means of violence, to ethnic or religious groups and still retain its sovereignty?

    Fourth, to what extent is this a peculiarly South African problem?
    Are we merely observing a parochial phenomenon? Or are similar problems manifesting them- selves elsewhere in this ever more global age?

    It is our thesis that the “epidemic” of occult-related violence, and the kinds of cultural policing that accompany it, are the product of a structural contradiction at the heart of post- apartheid South Africa, a contradiction also evinced in other postcolonies – especially since 1989, when new liberal democratic constitutions began to give primacy to legal universalism while seeking, simultaneously, to protect cultural heterodoxy.3 These postcolonial polities are all rooted in the modernist ideal of nationhood, an ideal embodied in bills of rights that subordinate difference to a transcendent moral and legal unity. Yet all of them are, in prospect or in fact, challenged by the very pluralism that they embrace: by the entitlement of their subjects to their own vernacular ways and means. When those ways and means transgress the bounds of the commonweal, when they defy the rationalist assumptions on which governance is founded, when they violate the authority of the state, government cannot but intervene. But local “tradi- tions,” especially those involving the occult, are notoriously resistant to regulation; if anything, efforts to police them intensify the assertions of difference out of which they arise in the first place. While the antinomy between universalism and relativism has always been inherent in the nation-state, it has been sharpened of late, on one hand, by an erosion of modernist state power and, on the other, by the rising stakes invested in the cultural politics of identity. This, in part, is why ruling regimes across the world perceive their moral and executive legitimacy to be under increasing threat from “dangerous” customary practices. And from relativist assertions of truth and right. But we are running ahead of ourselves. What we seek to do here is to proceed, dialectically, from the empirical phenomenon with which we are concerned – and the problem of cause-and-effect posed by it – toward the theoretical terms by means of which we may give explanatory account of it.

    FRAMING THE PROBLEM: (i) background

    On the Archaeology of the African Occult: the crime of witchcraft

    Historians and anthropologists have documented the existence of a highly elaborate ar- ray of ideas about witchcraft, sorcery, ritual murder, and divination in southern Africa. These vary across the region. And they have changed markedly over time (Comaroff and Comaroff 1993). Their common features, however, are well-known: most notably, that the African occult is not a form of primitive magicality or “animism”; that, everywhere, it embodies a set of normative convictions about moral order, social value, and material equity; that it provides a matter-of-fact repertoire of “first cause” explanations in the face of human misfortune or natural catastrophe; that, in respect of the latter, its bears epistemic analogy to Western notions of ill-fortune, divine intervention, or even statistical probability; that, as a set of techniques, it tends to be regarded, indigenously, as a species of practical activity whose principles of operation, while not transpa- rent to all, are regularly deployed by those with the necessary power/knowledge.

    Occult means have been used, since time immemorial, for socially accepted ends – as when a family employs “medicines” to prosper in its enterprises, to protect its property, or to enhance its fertility. They still are relied upon by many people. Similar means might also be de- ployed by political communities for the collective good. Among Tswana, for example, rain rites were performed periodically during colonial times (Schapera 1971); such rites persist in some places, often in conjunction with Christian prayer (J. Comaroff 1985). These exercises in the oc- cult were conducted under the direction of experts, some of whom acquired great fame. In fact, during the late colonial epoch “traditional healers” were formed into a national association re- cognized by the state; in the “new” South Africa, they are accorded respect by government – to the extent that their ministrations are, under some conditions, covered by medical aid.

    Conversely, for as long as there is a documentary record, magical means have been said to be used for antisocial, selfish ends, typically to appropriate the life-force, social wealth, and effects of others. Witches epitomize this mode of destruction. Their activities were widely treated as crimes (Schapera 1970) and were severely punished. On the other hand, the intrinsi- cally ambiguous character of the occult – as a force for either good or ill – is symbolized by ri- tual specialists, who have always been ambivalent figures. While they were usually employed to counter the activities of malevolents, their expertise in the arcane opened them to suspicion: it was widely believed that, at a price, they might be induced to abet evil schemes.

    Much has been made of the figure of the witch in Africanist anthropology. The “standar- dized nightmare of the group,” Monica Wilson’s (1951) celebrated aphorism, suggests that the symbolic substance of this figure is determined by a cultural process of inversion: by turning the ethics of communal life on their head. Wilson went on to claim that moral orders are themselves a function of social structure – and that, by extension, so too are patterns of witchcraft accusa- tion. Different social structures yield different modes of transgression, and hence different expectations about the means and ends of magical evil. All of which is to say, after Munn (1986), that witches produce “negative value”: they unravel human relations and moral commu- nities. It was this that persuaded Marwick (1965) to describe allegations of malevolence as a “strain gauge”; to argue, that is, that such allegations occur at critical points of stress in any so- ciety. From this perspective, in sum, witchcraft has both an ethical and a social rationality.

    These anthropologies of the African occult, all of them dating back to the colonial era, were written with a specific set of interlocutors in mind: state functionaries, missionaries, set- tlers, and other agents of empire who regarded “native” ideas of witchcraft as primitive, often dangerous, superstitions.4 For its part, the colonial state outlawed accusations of mystical evil (Schapera 1938), treated ritual murder as a common crime (Jones 1951), and liked to think that, under its civilizing influence, vernacular ideas of the occult were disappearing. Beyond the purview of colonizers, however, witchcraft retained a lively salience for most Africans; for many, it still does. Only members of the Christian elite spawned by the mission churches eschewed their existence – at least in public, and even then not all of them. As we noted a moment ago, – the substance of these beliefs varied across space and time. For now, following what we have already said, a few summary points, focused on South Africa, will suffice:

    (i) Witch beliefs and practices saturated everyday life. The presence of mystical evil, and the need to protect against it, was taken for granted; most rural people, and many in town, consulted doctors regularly to divine the cause of affliction, to guard against at- tack, to give a competitive edge over rivals, and to ensure their well-being. The scope of activities subject to magical attention has increased over the generations: it now covers such things as passing school and university examinations, success in job applications, and the effort to win elections.

    (ii) For those who believe in it, witchcraft is the presumed first cause of misfortune. Un- less another explanation is found for an affliction, the activities of a witch are blamed.

    (iii) Symptoms of witchcraft have always been said to be fairly nonspecific; they include physical illness, delusion, the death of a child or livestock, loss of work, the disappea- rance of possessions, crop failure, and sudden, inexplicable misfortune. However, its prime effects are often those associated with aborted reproduction and production.

    (iv) Human organs – especially of children, cut out while the victim is alive, or those ta- ken from fresh corpses – were, and still are, held to make potent medicines. At the same time, ritual murder was rare in the colonial period (see e.g. Jones 1951).

    (v) According to local oral history, occult techniques have always been both desired and dreaded: people want access to them – and yet fear anyone who has it. Tautologically, a person of great wealth, especially wealth gained by invisible means, is liable to be sus- pected of having dabbled in the arcane; s/he will almost certainly inspire moral opprobrium and, simultaneously, the uneasy respect accorded to the powerful.

    (vi) Indigenous ideas of witchcraft and healing have come to live easily with Christianity, even though they were demonized by colonial missions. This is owed, in part, to the relativizing tendencies of the vernacular cultures of South Africa; unlike post-enlighten- ment European epistemology, they posited no contradiction in the coexistence of more than one order of knowledge in the world. As a result, the African occult is an evanes- cent hybrid of iconography and ideology, of signs and practices.

    (vii) Occult movements, particularly outbreaks of witch-finding, occurred intermittently in Africa during the colonial period, perhaps the best known being that described by Ri- chards (1935) in Northern Rhodesia. But such outbreaks were rare in South Africa.

    It is against this cultural archaeology that the recent rise of occult-related violence, and the moral panic to which it is a response, must be read. Before addressing the contemporary mo- ment, however, let us turn briefly to the emergence of the “new” South Africa.

    The Making of the New South Africa: legality, identity politics, and the question of youth

    The fall of apartheid, and the rise of the new South Africa, is one of the great liberation narratives of the 20th century. The official story – often told in black and white, washed clean of its complexities – speaks of an unremitting struggle, of untainted heroes and unvarnished hopes, of the turning back of history on itself, of a post-racist future of infinite possibility. As Ro- bins (1998, 9) notes, this “heroic nationalist narrative” was sundered by often angry, often poig- nant, occasionally revisionist evidence given to the Truth and Reconciliation Commission, whose task it was to lay some very restless ghosts; also by such things as the controversial film Apartheid did not Die, made by John Pilger in 1998, and Antjie Krog’s Country of My Skull (1998), an agonistic reflection on the past and the difficulties of recuperating its “truths.”

    If the past is proving more elusive than it first seemed, so is the present: the political, economic, and cultural sociology of the postcolony, still in its infancy, is also a matter of ani- mated public debate. A few features of that contested sociology are especially relevant here.

    Perhaps the most notable feature of the emergence of the “new” South Africa is the way in which it reversed the teleology of the anti-apartheid struggle. That struggle was grounded in a vision of African socialism; or, rather, visions of anti-capitalism, since the spectrum of ideologies that congealed in the liberation movements was strikingly broad. Indeed, the founding document in the fight against white domination, the Freedom Charter of 1956, undertook to nationalize major industries and to mandate a state-directed, welfare-freighted economy (see e.g. Walshe 1971; Lodge 1983). And yet, from the moment it took office, the ANC, constrained by its perception of global economic realities, has committed itself unequivocally to neoliberal capitalism (Sharp 1998, 245). It has courted global corporations, sought foreign investment, en- forced wage restraint, and reigned in the labor unions. Many blacks who believed that the new regime would deliver jobs, housing, wealth, and well-being, now accuse it of not meeting its promises, of favoring the powerful over the poor, of being rife with corruption, of allowing crime to run rampant, of failing to ensure a future for its youth. Middle class whites and the national media make similar complaints: that the wealth gap is widening dangerously, that unem- ployment is even higher than the unofficial 38% to which the state admitted in the late 1990s, that unstable labor conditions are discouraging investment, that urban violence is scaring off tourists, and so on. So much so that, in 1998, the press spoke of imminent economic “melt- down” – although, since then, public opinion on the matter has become more nuanced.

    Whether or not this alarmist scenario turns out to be justified, the anxieties are real en- ough. What is more, they are deeply implicated in the occult-related violence across the north- erly provinces. At the same time, there is more to the sociology of the “new” South Africa than a precarious economy. Three features of that sociology are noteworthy for present purposes.

    (i) the culture of constitutionalism, legality, and rights:

    Among the most protracted, contentious processes in the construction of the postcolony was the writing of its constitution. The document itself is remarkable for its sheer scope. Emphatically modernist, Eurocentric, and liberal – individual rights take precedence over all other claims – it does nonetheless protect “traditional beliefs.” The faith in the capacity of this constitution to resolve social problems by appeal to legalities verges on fetishism: the Constitutional Court is presented with an extraordinarily broad range of issues on which to adjudicate. Likewise, other courts have to deal almost daily with unprecedented forms of conflict arising out of cultural difference.

    The tolerance of the new constitution for “traditional beliefs” – which, after all, are held by the majority of South Africans – raises several pressing issues. The most ob- vious is whether, and in what form, indigenous ideas of the occult are to be recognized by the state and with what implications (i) for the treatment of accused witches and (ii) for those who take action against them. Recall that witchcraft allegations were outlawed by colonial governments. The prospect of admitting them into law – efforts are currently being made to draft a new Witchcraft Act – has consequences that are only beginning to be understood; apart from all else, those who presume the reality of the African occult, and who see witches as anti-constitutional, antisocial figures par excellence, are skeptical that any law might keep them in check. More immediately, however, the consti- tutional protection of custom raises a number of general problems. Are cultural rights held by persons or ethnic groups? And what happens when such rights violate those of individuals? Add into the mix a great deal of popular criticism against the constitution for not protecting communities – note, not necessarily cultural communities – against crime, corruption, and avarice, and it is clear that there is room for serious conflict over the proportional significance and articulation of different kinds of rights. This conflict has profound material and ideological implications for the future of South Africa.

    (ii) the rainbow nation and the rise of identity politics:
    The dominant ideological trope in the fight against the old regime – indeed, its final objective for many – was “nonracialism.” Intellectuals have long argued about the meaning of the concept; nor was it accepted by all anti-apartheid organizations (see Gerhard 1978). Still, it featured prominently in the Eurocentric ideal of the nation-state to which the ANC aspired: South Africa was to be a “rainbow” nation, one that made no distinctions of color or creed as it fashioned a strong sense of unity to embrace the cul- tural traditions of its polyethnic population.

    Notwithstanding the official narrative of nation-building, postcoloniality, as we have already intimated, has been accompanied by a vigorous politics of difference, of identities seeking to assert collective interests, even to reinvent themselves. Often moreover, such claims are made by appeal to primordial affiliations, not least by “peop- les” whose ethnogenesis dates to the colonial epoch. In the upshot, the accommodation of their life-ways within the post-apartheid polity has become controversial; to wit, it is just this that frames the debate now joined over “traditional” practices deemed danger- ous by the state and by others who do not share in them.

    The waxing politics of identity in South Africa may be read as an effect of local processes: either as a legacy of the colonial past or as a reaction to postcolonial circum- stances, in which the mobilization of collective interest, mandated in the name of culture, seems the only available protection against the overwhelming force of the market and a new ruling class. On the other hand, it may be interpreted as an outworking of the rise of a neoliberal capitalist order which appears everywhere to have intensified identity poli- tics. These, as it turns out, these are not alternatives. They are conditions of each other’s possibility. We shall return to them.

    (iii) the youth question:
    Public discourse in contemporary South Africa, as in many other places, is deeply concerned with the “problem” of youth” (Comaroff and Comaroff n.d.[a]). This “prob- lem,” fundamentally, boils down to the “challenge” of making young blacks – many of whom were brutalized by the old regime, more of whom have been left un(der)employed by the new one – into “responsible” citizens. The nightmare citizens of the postcolony are liberation fighters who have turned their skills to illicit ends; without the prospect of a secure livelihood, or the means of becoming fully adult, they are commonly assumed to be the material from which violent, vengeful outlaws are made.

    NGOs, churches, and overseas donors have introduced innumerable small self- help projects, built community centers and sports clubs, and established training prog- rams in order to address the problem. The youths we interviewed saw little value in such projects. For them, there is only one solution: regular jobs and incomes. Even in the remote countryside, they were quick to point out that the “new” South Africa has made some people very rich. In a rapaciously consumerist culture, where the politics of desire is measured in the possession of commodities, those without are constantly confronted with their privation. As we shall see, this sense of privation manifests itself explicitly in occult-related violence.

    Clearly, these aspects of the “new” South Africa constitute only a small part of its postcolonial sociology. As we have said, however, they chart the context in which an occult economy, driven largely by youth, has arisen. We now move from background to foreground.

    FRAMING THE PROBLEM: (ii) foreground

    The Rise of the Postcolonial Occult Economy: from global capitalism to local illegality5
    The Commission of Inquiry into Witchcraft Violence and Ritual Murders in the Northern Province was set up in 1995 to deal with a growing sense of crisis in the countryside. A melan- ge of eyewitness evidence, case records, observations, and recommendations, its Report6 calls for tight control of occult-related violence, including a possible return of the death penalty. But, it notes, most Africans regard magical attacks as normal, everyday events – a reality incompati- ble with European law, which criminalizes witchfinding. It adds also that the majority of black po- lice believe in witchcraft and are reluctant to intervene when suspects are attacked (see below). The Report concludes that there is no clear answer to the legal problem; nor does it dispute the facticity of witchcraft itself. It does, though, advocate means of stemming the brutality with which accused malevolents are hunted down. The urgent tone of the Commission is underscor- ed by a rising demography of violence: from 1985 to 1995, 300 witch-related killings were recor- ded in the North (p.31); in the first half of 1996 there were 676. “[A]s the Province… burn[ed],” as “witchcraft violence and ritual murder” were becoming endemic, “something had to be done, and very fast” (p.i)

    There are several ironies here. For one thing, this was a triumphal moment of exodus from colonial bondage. And yet many were convinced that their communities harbored trench- ant human evil, that familiar landscapes were alive with phantasmic forces, that the state had failed to shield them from those forces. For another thing, it was youth, not men in authority, who felt most moved to execute “instant justice” and to cleanse the countryside of malevolence. Singing freedom songs (p.62), they marked Nelson Mandela’s release from prison with a fu- rious spate of witch burnings. All this was fed by a growing fear that some, usually old, people were turning others into zombies: into a virtual army of ghost workers, whose lifeblood fueled an energetic immoral economy beneath the slow rhythms of rural life.

    We have already said that none of this is entirely new. In Africa, the colonial encounter gave plenty room for the play of the occult. As this suggests, and it is a point on which we shall expand, witchcraft is a profoundly historical phenomenon. Shifts in the cultural conception of the witch often register the impact of large-scale transformations on local worlds (see e.g. Aus- lander 1993), writing global processes into vernacular vocabularies of cause-and-effect; s/he has a genius for distilling complex social forces into the language of intimate, interpersonal rela- tions. It is this that underlies the intensification of witchfinding in postcolonial South Africa, where it has coincided with a fluorescence of other magical technologies that link the occult, by thoroughly modern means, to the workings of the free market.

    Thus ritual murder is said to have become “big business” in the northern provinces. In 1995, for example, rumors spread widely that dismembered corpses had been found in a casi- no freezer in Mmabatho, capital of the Northwest. The casino was built in the apartheid years, when betting and interracial sex, banned in South Africa, were allowed in the ethnic “home- lands.” Here, in the grey interstices of the transnational, whites came to purchase carnal servi- ces and to gamble. In the postcolony, black bodies were again for sale, but in different form; the macabre trade now nested within the orbit of everyday commerce, circulating organs to whom- ever could buy them for dipheko (medicine). Much the same thing was apparent, too, in the allegations that some local entrepreneurs were turning people into working zombies in order to profit from their labor. But more fabulous still were stories about Satanism, held in the North-west to be the most global of occult enterprises. Dabbling in the diabolical was especially attractive to the young. In 1996, when Mmabatho TV broadcast two programs on the subject, the ex-Satanists featured were all juveniles. As they took calls from the public they told of the translocal power of the black arts – among them, an ability to travel great distances at miracu- lous speed to garner wealth at will.

    What we have here, then, is an expanded array of enchanted means of producing value. Enchanted yet also ordinary. Witchcraft, money magic, and unnatural death are discussed, al- most every day, in churches and comic strips, on radio and television; newspapers and magazi- nes regularly advertise “dial-in-diviners.” This turn to the mass-media has also spawned innovative ritual technologies. One, an update of water bowl oracles, requires clients to drink an alcoholic potion and watch a white “screen” on which the figures of miscreants take shape; their transmission mimics the manner in which satellite dishes, broadcast networks, and the long-dis- tance magic of witches condense images and sounds from afar. While an adept might help to unscramble the ethereal pictures, these are received directly by his “customers,” who sit in the archetypal posture of family viewing-and-listening.

    Who are the actors in these theaters of the banal? Who are the witches? And who kills them? Our evidence shows that young men are the most identifiable perpetrators of occult-rela- ted violence. The purported malevolents, on the other hand, are the usual suspects of African witchcraft – people of conspicuous, unshared wealth and undue influence – although it is old, defenseless females who tend to be attacked; however much they may be rumored to engage in the arcane arts, the rich and powerful are more difficult, more dangerous, to accuse or to assail. In a notorious case recorded by the Witchcraft Commission, “youths” of Madura village, most of them unemployed, killed an elderly woman in the early 1990’s (p.193f). Witnesses recall that, after gathering at the local school – where a noisy agreement was made to extermi- nate all witches in their midst – they went off in search of suspects; echoes, here, of Ashforth’s (2000) thesis that, without apartheid to blame for their misfortunes, South Africans are turning inward to find scapegoats. When they reached the yard of their victim, they doused her with petrol and set her alight. Dying, she cried: “Why are you killing me, my grandchildren?” Her as- sailants responded: “Die, die you witch. We can’t get work because of you!” (p.206, 212).

    There could hardly be a balder statement of antipathy between young and old. Given that, for most rural youth, the end of apartheid has brought none of the employment or empow- erment that it had promised, given also that the global economy of desire is experienced in the backveld largely as traces on television screens, it seems non-coincidental that the most spirit- ed witchfinding should occur where conditions are most straitened. And where inequality has become most blatant. The North is the poorest province in the country, with the remote regions of the Northwest not far behind;7 Reconstruction and development has had little impact here. Furthermore, the migrant wages that had once subsidized faltering agrarian endeavors, and had granted young men some autonomy, are now diminishing. Agriculture is still practiced, but most of it by older women on a pitiable scale. Household budgets have often to be buttressed by petty business – brewing, sex work, carpentry, leather craft – much of it erratic. As a result, cash resources vested in the elderly, notably pensions, have risen in value; they are the object of fierce jealousy, criminal assault, and mystical activity. At the same time, the creation of the ethnic homelands under apartheid funded the emergence of small elites, elites marked by ass- ertive patterns of consumption, elites that have been able to take advantage of the few oppor- tunities for enrichment that have lately presented themselves. And so, in places like Madura, new material distinctions have become discernible among neighbors. Such differences are made incarnate in prized commodities: in houses, cars, televisions, cell-phones.

    In sum, concerns about wealth in the countryside – about its production, distribution, and scarcity – have been translated into bitter generational, gendered opposition. Young com- rades, their manhood compromised, forge identities against the foil of an emasculating geronto- cracy; significantly, those attacked are called “old ladies,” even when they are men (cf. Ritchken 1995, 344). Their antisocial greed, real or imagined, is epitomized in the idea of unnatural pro- duction and reproduction; also in images of debauched, ungenerative sexuality. The Commis- sion speaks repeatedly of the inability of witches to bear children, of their red vaginas and their “rotten” sperm (cf., again, Ritchken 1995, 325; also 363). Killing such “perverts” by fire evinces the desire, literally, to engender a more propitious, “natural” mode of reproduction.

    Threats to local well being, as we said before, were also associated with the creation of a zombie workforce. Zombies, long a feature of Caribbean vodoun, are often said to be new in Africa (Geschiere 1997), although they have local precursors (Junod 1927, 299, 488f; Harries 1994, 221; cf., on Tswana, Comaroff and Comaroff 1991, 143). Whatever their source, these nightmare figures have been spliced into vernacular mystical and moral economies. Allegedly killed and revived by witchcraft, they are believed to toil for their creators, usually unrelated neighbors. Bereft of tongues to give voice to their affliction, these living dead are believed to work after dark, mainly in agriculture, but can also be magically transported to urban centers to accrue riches for their owners. In this era of increasingly impermanent jobs, there are even “part-time zombies”: people who are made to serve unwittingly in the deep of the night to feed the greed of a malign master.

    Although they have no tongues, zombies speak of a specific time and place. By 1994, when South Africa finally threw off its colonial shackles, much of the continent had learned the harsh truth about the postcolonial predicament, having experienced unprecedented economic hardship. Such conditions disrupt narratives of progress. But they do not necessarily dispel their animating desires. In these circumstances, there tends to be an expansion in modes of producing and redistributing value – modes, like crime and magic, that often break the bounds of legality. Which is why violence, both ordinary and occult, is such a common feature of post- colonies. The living dead are the monstrous citizens of this parallel world. Reduced to raw labor power, their toil is pure surplus value: it has, in Marx’s (1976, 325) phrase, “all the charms of something created out of nothing.” As spectral capital, the zombie is an apt icon of the occult economies of contemporary Africa. The rise of a phantom proletariat, after all, offers a ready explanation for the scarcity of work,for the impotence of youth and the relative wealth of their elders, for the destruction of the labor market, conventional patterns of reproduction, and “the community.” It is also a potent metaphor for the emptiness of democracy sans a substantive right to material well-being.

    But zombies are not the only object of moral panic. So-called “muti (medicine) killings” have also been the subject of graphic media accounts; since the early 1990’s, moreover, the press has reported intermittently on the going rate for various organs, making it clear that ritual murder has become highly responsive to market forces.8 We reiterate, again, that this traffic is neither new nor confined to South Africa; that there is a global economy in body parts, which flow from poor to rich countries, from south to north, young to old; that some governments are said to raise revenue by farming corneas and kidneys for export; that, from the Andes through Africa to Asia, mysterious malevolents are alleged to extract blood, fat, members, and living off- spring from the unsuspecting (Frow 1997, White 1997, Scheper-Hughes 1996). Often at issue in these panics about corporeal free enterprise is a fear of the commodification of life itself: of a relentless process that renders human being(s) susceptible as never before to the reach of the market.

    Note the stress in all this on movement. Throughout the north, people ponder its signifi- cance in the production of new wealth, which appears hinge on the capacity to siphon goods, persons, and images across space. Mobility adds value. But how? How are its mechanics to be mastered? Among Tswana, it is this question, as much as anything else, that has given rise to – a growing fascination with Satanism, which seems to be enjoying renewed interest in many other places of late, from the east coast of Africa through Britain to the west coast of America (Wright 1994, LaFontaine 1997, Meyer 1999). Discourses of the diabolical center in this part of southern Africa center upon the most recent in a long line of overseas missions, the Universal Church of the Kingdom of God (Igreja Universal do Reino de Deus) of Brazil, a denomination that promises instant goods and gratification to its members; it is also rumored to issue charm- ed credit cards which register no debt. Here Neo-Pentecostalism meets neoliberalism: one of the early chapels of the Universal Church at the capital of the North West Province was a store- front in a shopping precinct. It held services during business hours, appealing frankly to merce- nary motives, mostly among the young. The ability to deliver fast returns on spiritual in- vestments, itself a potent form of space-time compression (cf. Harvey 1990), is given as the measure of a truly global God. Pictures of BMWs and lottery winners adorn the altar under the legend: “Delight in the Lord and he will give you the desires of your heart” (Psalms 37:4).

    For middle-class Tswana schooled in a more ascetic Protestantism, the crowds that packed the storefront were lured there by the devil – notwithstanding his denunciation by the Church. Nor is this hard to understand. With the radical reorientation of local contours of wealth, desire, and despair, and with the failure of democracy to deliver material returns, the diabolical has taken on provocative, inscrutable powers. Like the mission of the Universal Church, Satan- ism is a globalizing discourse: “The devil,” says the Church website, has “been deceiving peo- ple all over the world.” Recall, in this regard, the TV programs in which “reformed” devil wor- shipers spoke to callers. Asked to compare the diabolical with witchcraft, one youth said,

    “Satanism is high octane witchcraft. It is more international.”9 By such means are old ideas ex- tended to meet altered conditions.10 These devil worshipers claimed to have traveled far and wide, fueling the accumulation of riches with human blood. The petrochemical image suggests that the basis of their potency was an ability to move instantly between the parochial and the translocal – here and there, then and now – thus to weave the connections of cause-and-effect that hold the key to the mysteries of this new, postcolonial epoch.

    This returns us to our opening conundrum, albeit now in a slightly different key. Insofar as occult activity is on the rise, at least in the popular imagination, it has evoked a populist im- pulse to punish mystical evildoers; to police them, that is, by available cultural means. Those means, from a modernist legal perspective, are less judicial or just than they are criminal: they involve “informal” modes of divination, “kangaroo” courts, and unregulated, retributive violence. But they are rooted in “traditional” beliefs protected by the constitution, a fact of which the new regime is acutely aware; hence the Witchcraft Summit. How, then, might we expect the state to police the occult? How does it deal with the kinds of cultural policing to which the allege epide- mic of magical evil has given rise?

    Policing the occult

    The law is no good. The courts don’t believe in witchcraft…They should bring a proven witch into the court room. That would convince them. – Inspector Jackson Gopane
    South African Police Service, 1997 11

    We have noted that the African occult has long presented a challenge to the modernist rule of law. Colonial administrators, as Fields (1985) shows for Central Africa, were caught in a quandary over the policing of witchcraft. To ignore it was to leave its (often violent) prosecution in the hands of local authorities, a situation incompatible with “civilized” governance. But to out- law magical practices and the means of disciplining them seemed to recognize their reality – and to acknowledge their significance. It also risked introducing legislation that European admi- nistrators could not enforce. What is more, from the “native” viewpoint, curbs on the power of indigenous rulers to bring witches to book rendered their subjects defenseless against mystical attack, a perception that, in times of crisis, contributed to mass witchfinding movements. Not surprisingly then, colonial regimes were inconsistent in dealing with the matter, which sometimes gave impression that they were themselves in thrall to the occult.

    In apartheid South Africa, the Witchcraft Suppression Act (1957), an extension of coloni- al law, made it illegal to practice witchcraft, to accuse anyone of doing so, or to use “occult sci- ence” in its detection. While diviners were prosecuted for “sniffing out” suspects, the authorities were more concerned to ensure that offenses under the Act were not tried in customary courts. For many blacks, this limitation of chiefly jurisdiction was a prime instance of the European suppression of African culture; it is often said, in retrospect, to have been responsible for driving magical evil underground. In fact, the reality was more complex: “ritual” offenses were brought to local rulers, albeit in other guises.12 But one thing is clear. The end of apartheid permitted a more overt acknowledgment of witchcraft by ordinary people – and, with it, both an alarming spate of witch burnings and an anguished public debate. Hence the question put by social com- mentator John Matshikiza during a nationally-aired debate on the topic: “How can the nilling be stopped? Must we deny our traditional beliefs, or is there another way?”13 In reducing the conundrum to its bare bones, Matshikiza transposed it into a practical key.

    The postcolonial state is seeking “another way.” But, like colonial authorities of old, the ANC has had difficulty in dealing with the challenge posed by communal witch burning to the rule of law. It is hard for any liberal democratic government to put a stop to retributive violence perpetrated under the sign of “traditional” precepts of truth and justice, especially when those precepts enjoy mass support. In South Africa, the matter is made all the more delicate, and the problems of principle, policing, and prosecution all the more acute, by the fact that the consti- tution explicitly embraces cultural relativism and moral pluralism. Under pressure to address the “crisis,” the Minister of Safety and Security pledged, at the Witchcraft Summit of 1998, to discuss it with the cabinet – and to consider making witch killing a “priority crime.”14

    This undertaking did little to assuage the moral panic in the countryside. For one thing, it was taken as an admission by the ANC that the state had failed to protect its citizenry from a clear and present danger. For another, it promised to act against the victims of magical evil, not against its perpetrators, criminalizing those who would defend themselves by recourse to traditional ways and means. Even more fundamentally, it ignored the paradox at the core of theCommission of Inquiry into Witchcraft Violence and Ritual Murders, namely, the incommen- surability between a Eurocentric national law founded on liberal principles and vernacular Afri- can beliefs in the occult; beliefs that defy investigation or interrogation under the usual terms of Western legal reason. State functionaries who speak to the issue generally try to resolve this in- commensurability by drawing a clear distinction between culture and violence. Said Seth Nthai, a former Minister of Police, Northern Province, “The people have a right to believe in witchcraft. It does not make them part of `African Darkness’. But [that] cannot be allowed to lead to the killing of others and the destruction of their property.”15 On the face of it, this seems perfectly rea- sonable. To be sure, it is the assumption on which is based the existence, and everyday operations, of the Occult-Related Crimes Unit of the South African Police Services (SAPS). In offering their workshops on the forensics of witchcraft, ritual killings, Satanism, and other “dan- gerous” practices – and in going about their routine work – its personnel insist that their busi- ness is not culture but the conviction of common murderers.

    In point of fact, the separation of culture from crime is not quite so straightforward; recall the question raised in this regard about the constitutionality of the Occult-Related Crimes Unit (above, p.2). It is more openly raised by a small vanguard of diviner-detectives in the SAPS, and those of their colleagues – we came across a substantial number – who see in their work an alternative policing capable of dealing with magical evil; also an alternative to “mob” witch burnings. Among them are Sergeant S. P. Moshupa and the celebrated Inspector Jackson Gopane, who seek to address “both sides” of the paradox of culture-as-crime by “crossing into the spiritual world.”16 Described in the national media as “one of the few success stories in a po- lice force that has almost collapsed under the strain of democracy,” Gopane uses methods that require a high level of local knowledge. At relevant moments, he exchanges his police uniform for the paraphernalia of a traditional healer: in him, the forensic and the oracular, scientific in- vestigation and social diagnostics, become one. Photographed beneath a smiling portrait of Nelson Mandela, he makes a strong case for the efficacy of combating occult killings by occult means. In the same vein, the chair of the national Traditional Healers’ Association, Dr. Hitler Letsoalo, has pledged the services of his members to help the state “put out the fires”17; this offer being consistent with the objectives of the Indigenous Knowledge Systems Program, a par- liamentary initiative to “protect and promote indigenous knowledge within a legal framework, and harness indigenous technology in rural development and international trade.”18 While such efforts remain unorthodox and limited, they do seem to be spreading; the SAPS Liaison Officer in the Northwest Province, Patrick Asaneng told us that dealing with the occult has become part of the mundane work of policing in the countryside.

    It is yet to be seen if and how further bridges will be built between conventional law en- forcement and vernacular forensics. In the meantime, the state and its criminal justice system insist on sustaining the distinction between witch beliefs (a constitutionally-protected right to cul- ture) and retributive violence against witches (a common felony). This is in spite of the fact that, both for those who perpetrate it and for those in whose name it is perpetrated, the latter is an enactment of the former: witch killing is the practical expression of a customary belief recogniz- ed under the Bill of Rights. Hence our term “cultural policing” to describe it. With most SAPS cadres unwilling or unable to intervene effectively in cases of the occult, or to provide a convincing alternative for this kind of cultural policing, it is no wonder that “mass action” against alleged malevolents continues to enjoy a large measure of populist legitimacy.

    Neither is it any wonder that the judiciary has also found it hard to hold the line between culture and crime (Comaroff and Comaroff 2004). Perhaps the difficulty is best illustrated by an ideal-typical case, versions of which have come before the courts in the northerly provinces with gathering frequency in recent years. Reduced to its bare bones, with names of people and places appropriately altered, the story goes as follows:

    A late middle-aged woman, Temane Makgetla, widowed and living alone, is alleged to have put several children to death in order to harvest their body parts; these, according to local rumor, have been used to make magical potions for sale to rich clients. Convinced by the “evidence” against her – evidence at once forensic (dipeko, medicines, seen in her home), social (unusual appetites, selfish behavior), and material (assets not easily accounted for) – her neighbors decide that she must be killed in order to prevent further predations on “the community,” the sprawling village of Metsing, 50k from the capital of one of the northerly provinces; this after informal public discussion has congealed diffuse gossip into a specific accusation. Approached by the local chief, Kgosi Monei, to arrest the suspect, the nearest SAPS station commander, Captain Segogelo, responds that he cannot do so without physical proof of wrongdoing; efforts to find witnesses or missing children yield nothing. Initiative to act is taken by a large, but indeterminate, number of young men, most of them aged between 16 and 25, most of whom live in Me- tsing or a nearby village. It is unclear whether they have been encouraged by the older generation. Led by one Moeketsi Monareng, some of their names come to the attention of the police after they tell kin and friends about the circumstances of Temane’s demise. Seven are arrested by Captain Segogelo. Arraigned before the court, they plead self- defense: their act of cultural policing – “protecting our village as our forefathers did,” was the phrase used by one of them – had been made unavoidable by the inaction of “government.” In doing what they did, they had not shed blood for its own sake, nor to enrich themselves. Their sole motive was to prevent more deaths, thereby to “save” their community from a active serial killer. Many of the members of that community, Kgosi Monei quietly among them, fete Moeketsi and his peers for having served the public interest. Some say quite openly that the “boys” should be forgiven and allowed to go home. They are not, however. Sentenced to 25 years each, they plan to appeal, confident that a higher court – one that “understands the Constitution,” said Moeketsi to us – would concur in their plea. “This is the way our people do these things.”

    Pleas of self-defense in cases of this kind – in which the “punishment” meted out to an alleged witch is invariably said to have met culturally accepted canons of proof and due process – are not unlike pleas of self-defense in US murder trials: they justify the use of lethal force by invok- ing the right of persons to protect themselves against a clear and present danger to their lives. Indeed, we have heard the comparison explicitly drawn.

    South African courts are faced with more and more legal arguments made in the name of African “tradition”; hardly surprising, this, in an African postcolony. In the upshot, some judg- es, black and white alike, have come to recognize vernacular conceptions of evil as a sufficient basis for mitigation. Oddly, this often is clothed in the language of diminished responsibility. For example, in sentencing five Tswana youths for burning to death a 52-year-old man – they said that he had slain their fathers and made them into zombie workers – the High Court of the Northwest treated “a belief in witchcraft” and “excessive drinking” as extenuating factors,19 thus equating an indigenous culture with a state of inebriation. Pejorative? Certainly. Ironic? Not in- tentionally. But it does resonate with an old belief, as jailed witch-killer Anderson Tshibalo once explained to a national tv audience, that those overcome by witches lose consciousness of their deeds – and, with it, responsibility for them.20 It also has led to a situation in which, increasingly, courts convict those found guilty of occult-related violence and then, tacitly acknowledging the force of culture, hand down very light or suspended sentences. All of which drives a wedge bet- ween judgment and justice.

    For all such strategic resolutions to the problem, these cases evoke large questions in South Africa, questions that have become the stuff of argument in public spheres across the postcolony. Can there ever be a clear-cut formula for balancing legal rationalities against moral relativities, the universal rights of citizens against the demands of culture? Can they ever be brought into the same orbit, synthesized, mediated, proportioned? Or is the contradiction bet- ween them irreducible, an inevitable corollary of postcolonial constitutions that embrace, simul- taneously, cultural difference and the legal indivisibility of the nation-state?

    THEORETICAL MEANS, ANALYTICAL ENDS

    Our concern here is not to answer these Big Questions. It is to understand why they pose themselves so persistently, so publicly, in the “new” South Africa. Only then does it be- come possible to make sense of the ways in which occult violence – and “dangerous” cultural practices tout court – are regarded in the postcolony; only then might we grasp fully the contra- dictions at the core of its legal culture. Our quest leads us toward the intersection of three ana- lytic frames.

    Modernity and its enchantments

    The first concerns the relationship of enchantment to modernity. Most efforts to make sense of the recent “epidemic” of witchcraft accusations seek an explanation in the continuing hold of “tradition”: the effort to police magical evil by cultural means is seen as a call to return to the values, and to the ways and means, of the African past. Perhaps the aphorism that best captures conventional wisdom is Gluckman’s (1959) famous “magic of despair.” It suggests that indigenous peoples tend to look to their customary ritual practices in the face of the anguish wrought upon them by historical forces beyond their control. Extending the same point to ecs- tatic religious movements, Lewis (1971) argues that they may be understood as vernacular res- ponses to a growing sense of “deprivation.” These functionalist explanations resonate with the view, still held by many anthropologists, that ritual is a conservative species of communal action, one which reinforces prevailing modes of authority and order (e.g. Bloch 1989). They are also a corollary of the classical theories of witchcraft, discussed earlier, that take the African occult to be a timeless mechanism for sustaining the moral and material status quo.

    In our view, the recent spate of witch killings in South Africa has to be approached quite differently. In Modernity and its Malcontents (1993) we showed that ritual is not an endemically ahistorical or conservative species of action, let alone an autonomic mechanism of social, cul- tural, or moral reproduction (cf. Tambiah 1985, 123f); that it is often a site of experiment and social invention, a site for the production of new understandings of the world, indeed for making history ane; that technicians of the sacred – diviners, prophets, witch finders – regularly deploy the heightened sensitivities of ceremonial occasions to distill order out of the ambiguous, incho- ate forces that configure any social environment. Especially a troubled, changing one.

    Seen from this vantage, incidents of cultural policing and occult-related violence – like the Madura witch hunt – are moments of social divination: ritualized moments, that is, in which participants seek, as they assign blame and punish moral infraction, to account for the transfor- mation of their world. And to test out ways of redirecting it. Recall here how divination itself has undergone a semiotic revolution, carving out new techniques for the electronic age. In short, these forms of ritual practice are an altogether contemporary phenomenon, part of an effort (i) to render explicable the bewildering realities of the “new” South Africa; (ii) to fashion a universe in which both the demands of moral community and the ambitions of individuals may be satis- fied, in which young people may find work and the wherewithal to marry and reproduce, in which those who endanger the commonweal are banished; (iii) to resolve the ultimate paradox of the postcolony, the fact that is a place of both infinite possibility and utter impossibility, one wherein fabulous wealth seems to be produced without visible effort by some people and yet eludes everyone else; in other words, (iv) to alter the very trajectory of the present – thereby to realize the promises of democracy.

    It is precisely because the African occult is finely tuned to the contradictions, mysteries, and irrationalities of the here-and-now that it holds such sway for so many South Africans. And it is precisely because it holds such sway that it poses so stark a challenge to the liberal moder- nist state, especially to its legal foundations. Which, in turn, is why there is so much vexed argument about the proper place of culture in the postcolony. But this anticipates a topic to which we shall return.

    The nation-state in an age of revolution

    The second frame concerns twenty-first century nation-states. And citizenship within them.21

    The European nation of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, as Benedict Anderson (1983) famously noted, imagined itself as a culturally homogeneous community, a community- of-the-whole with a deep sense of “horizontal fraternity.” This imagining was always more aspi- ration than achievement: throughout its history, the modernist polity has been a work-in-prog- ress, one that has evinced great variation over time and space. Further, for all the idea that it was made up of right-bearing persons equal before the law, it was inhospitable to difference; to be sure, many were excluded from its commonweal. Still, the fiction of a unity of essence, aff- ect, and interest mandated the legitimacy of the state: government was the ultimate guarantor of the well-being of all citizens. Hence the hyphenated indivisibility of nation and state.

    Much has been said lately of the “crisis” of the modernist polity under the impact of global capitalism: of its shrinking sovereignty; of its loss of control over economic policy, cultural production, and the flow of people, currencies, and commodities; of a widening disjunction between nation and state (cf. Appadurai 1990). Whether or not “the” nation-state is flourishing, ail- ing, or metamorphosing – we prefer the third alternative – one thing is clear. The received notion of polities based on fraternal homogeneity, real or fictive, is rapidly giving way to imagined communities of difference, of multiculturalism, of ID-ology; the pursuit, that is, of interest in the name of shared identities. This is true even in places as long antagonistic to otherness as England, which, despite recent race wars on the streets of its northern towns, now projects itself, with apologies to Benetton, as United in its tolerance of Color and Culture. There has, of course, been considerable scholarly debate over the causes-and-effects of the heterogenization of so many nation-states; also of the rising incidence, since 1989, of cultural struggles and ethnopolitics (J.L. Comaroff 1996). We do not need to retrace that debate here. It is enough merely to take note of the phenomenon itself.

    For most postcolonies, the politics of identity are not new. Heterodoxy has been there from the first. Born of long histories of colonization, these polities typically entered the Neo World Order with legacies of ethnic diversity invented or exacerbated in the cause of imperial governance. Colonial regimes, intent on the management of racial capitalism, never built na- tions in the Euromodernist sense of the term, even where they introduced the ceremonial trapp- ings of nationhood. In their wake, they left behind them not just an absence of infrastructure, but a heritage of fractious difference. This has been heightened, since fin de siecle, by some of the cultural and material corollaries of neoliberalism: the movement across the planet of ever more people in search of work and opportunities to trade; the transnational mass-mediation of signs, styles, and information; the rise of an electronic commons; the growing hegemony of the market and, with it, the distillation of culture into intellectual property, a commodity to be – possessed, patented, exchanged-for-profit. In this world, freedom is reduced to choice: choice of commodities, of life-ways, and, most of all, of identities. In the upshot, the great irony of our times is that identity has become, simultaneously, a matter of voluntary self-production and a matter of ineluctable essence, of genetics and biology.

    In short, notwithstanding their different histories, and their histories of difference, both European and postcolonial nation-states are having to come to terms with heterogeneity as never before. And, with it, fundamental changes in the nature of citizenship.

    The explosion of identity politics after 1989 has not manifested itself in ethnic assertion alone. Difference is also vested, increasingly, in gender, sexuality, generation, race, religion, life-style, and social class. And in constellations of these things, sometimes deployed in highly contingent, strategic ways. While most human beings continue to live as citizens in nation-states, more and more are only conditionally citizens of nation-states: their composite personae may include elements that transgress political borders or mandate claims against the common- weal within them. In consequence, identity struggles of one kind or another appear immanent almost everywhere as selfhood is immersed into collective essence, innate substance, and primordial destiny. What is more, the assertion of autochthony – which elevates to a first principle the interests, “natural” rights, and moral connectedness that arise from a shared place of birth – has become an ever more significant mode of exclusion within polities; this in propor- tion to the extent to which “aliens” are held to erode the Wealth or Security of the Nation. It is, putatively, in the name of the latter that the state is becoming a metamanagement enterprise in the neoliberal world:22 in the name of subjects who, even as they seek to be global citizens in a planetary economy, demand also to be shareholders in the polity-as-corporation. Herein lies the complexity: the fractal nature of contemporary political personhood, the fact that it is overlaid and undercut by a politics of difference and identity, does not necessarily involve the negation of national belonging. Merely its uneasy, unresolved, ambiguous co-existence with other modes of being-in-the-world.

    Of the modes of being that constitute the twenty-first century political subject, cultural at- tachment is often taken, popularly, to run deepest. As we have said, ethnic consciousness, like all ascribed identities, represents itself as grounded ineluctably in blood, essence, emotion, and common purpose. Add to the equation the fact that culture is increasingly regarded as a “na- turally” copyrighted, legally-protected species of intellectual property and it will be clear that we are witness to the dawn of the Age of Ethnicity, Inc. (Comaroff and Comaroff n.d.[b]). Observe, in this respect, that more and more ethnic groups around the world are incorporating themselves; that many have opened businesses to market their heritage, their landscape, their knowledge, their religious rites, their artefacts; that some have sued for the unremunerated reproduction of their symbols, sacred and secular. Thus it is that identity, in the age of partible, conditional citizenship, is defined, ever more, by the capacity to possess, privatize, profit, and consume; that politics is reduced to the pursuit of individual or collective entitlement; that social being in general, and social wrongs in particular, are translated into the language of “rights.”

    Self-evidently, under these conditions, the term “multicultural(ism)” is insufficient to des- cribe the fractious heterogeneity of many contemporary nation-states – and, most of all, postco- lonies. Demeaned in popular usage, that term evokes images of Disney’s “Small World,” of world music, fusion food, and ritual calendars respectful of human diversity; in short, of benign indifference to difference. Neither as noun nor as adjective does it disclose the critical limits of liberal pluralism: the fact that, notwithstanding the utopian visions of progressive philosophers, the recognition afforded to culture even in highly permissive democracries falls far short of allo- wing claims to political or legal sovereignty. In those postcolonies in which ethnic assertion plays on the simultaneity of primordial connectedness, natural right, and corporate interest – and in which the majority of citizens evince strong ethnic affiliations – the nation-state is likely to be less multicultural than policultural. The prefix, “poli-,“ marks two things at once: plurality and its politicization. Far from denoting merely an appreciation on the part of the national majority for the customs, costumes, and cuisine of minorities, it bespeaks an argument, grounded in cul- tural ontology, about the very nature of the pluri-nation, about its constitution and citizenship within it; about the spirit of its laws and its hyphe-nation. In South Africa this takes the form of an ongoing confrontation between Euromodern ways and means and variously expressed, va- riously formulated notions of “traditional” governance, the latter represented by a vocal lobby under the organizational umbrella of the Congress of Traditional Leaders of South Africa. Because its members have the capacity to affect national elections, Contralesa has been fairly successful in husbanding the interests of African “custom” and in enclaving those domains of life in the countryside in which vernacular law still obtains. It has also fought a long fight to change the constitution in such a way as to allow even more to Africanity.

    It is the grafting of policulturalism onto the ontological core of the Euromodernist nation- state that gives cultural policing its shadowy claims to legitimacy – and that, by asserting the so- vereignty of difference, renders murky the distinction between culture and crime. Which brings us to our third analytic frame.

    The postcolonial state and the language of legality

    Postcolonial states vary widely in the extent to which they condense legitimate power in themselves, suppress the politics of difference, contrive popular consent, and ritualize the sub- jection of citizens to their authority. Some seem to be irrecoverably weak, others much strong- er; some highly intrusive, others scarcely visible; some energetically protective of corporate en- terprise, others less so; some brutally violent, others hardly in control of the means of coercion; some prone to ostentatious ceremony, others matter-of-fact in their regulatory routines; some institutionally integrated and fairly efficient in their technologies of rule, others in perpetual dis- array (cf. Cooper and Stoler 1997). These variations are owed to a range of historical factors too broad to list here. So, too, is the degree to which partisan blocs – business interests, ethnic groups, and the like – have insinuated themselves into, and appropriated, the mechanisms of government, including the use of force.

    But, whether weak or strong, these states share one thing. They speak of and for them- selves. Incessantly. Like its Euromodern precursor, “the” postcolonial African state is a state- ment, an ongoing claim: it gives voice to an authoritative world view, sometimes backed by dis- plays of might, sometimes by carnivalesque ritual (Mbembe 1992). Its language, however, is not arbitrary. It is the language of legality. Modern state-formation, note Corrigan and Sayer (1985, 1f), was a “cultural revolution.” At its heart lay the Spirit of the Law. Many scholars have tied industrial capitalism, modernity, the nation-state, governmentality, the right-bearing citizen, and the rise of lex naturae into a single historical knot. We seek to add a modest addendum: that it is this Spirit, this language, hegemonically re-tooled for the neoliberal epoch, that gives postcolonial nation-states their delicate sense of unity and coherence. We would go yet further. The more disarticulated and/or impotent any given postcolonial state, the more the language of law – especially the appeal to a common culture of democratic constitutionalism – affords them a means to make political facts appear out of fantasies, concrete realities out of fragile fictions; to represent themselves as guarantors of the commonweal; to legitimize their power, both coer- cive and capillary, and their right to mediate diverse identities and interests.

    This language also constitutes the currency of the public sphere. Not only does it lay down the terms of cooperation, commerce, competition, and contention among people of differ- ent cultural worlds, social endowments, and material circumstances. It also provides an osten- sibly neutral medium for them to enter into contractual relations, to transact commodities, and to deal with conflicts. In so doing, it creates an impression of consonance amidst contrast, of the negotiability of incommensurables, of the existence of universal standards which, like mo- ney in the domain of the market, facilitate exchanges across otherwise intransitive boundaries. And it establishes the state as the axis mundi of order within diversity. Indeed, by deploying the language of legality, postcolonial regimes, bereft of many of the political and economic resour- ces of modern governance, regularly try to delineate the moral frontiers of civil society; also to criminalize vernacular cultural practices deemed uncivilized, politics deemed primitive. Law, in short, is the hydra-headed instrument by which postcolonial states seek nowadays to extend control over the space and time, the cultures and identities, of their subjects.23

    The enormous significance of the language of law in postcolonies arises in part from the past. In ruling their “native” subjects, colonial states tended to rely heavily on legal instruments – proclamations, decrees, orders-in-council, statutory acts, commissions of enquiry – to impose their will (cf. Ashforth 1990; Mamdani 1996). Tswana-speaking South Africans referred to this, in the 19th century, as “warfare [with] papers” (Comaroff and Comaroff 1997, 378); elsewhere we have called it “lawfare,” the deployment of legalities to do violence to people and their property by indirect means (J.L. Comaroff 2001). In so doing, and in narrating nations that did not exist, imperial regimes tended to draw the attention of emerging indigenous elites to their legal disabilities and social exclusion. As Davidson (1992) argues, it seems overdetermined that early demands for independence made by African nationalist movements should have appro- priated the terms of European politics, with its deep roots in the culture of constitutionalism and the language of the law. It seems overdetermined, too, that, with the passage into postcolonia- lity, this same culture, this language, should come of age as the argot of authority, the source of civility, the guarantor of unity amidst difference – and should also be invoked by those who would perpetrate their own kind of cultural justice.

    CODA

    Draw these three strands together – the increasing appeal to enchantment in dealing with the mysteries of Brave Neo World; the changing nature of the nation-state, its new forms of citizenship and its gathering policulturalism; and the role of law in the postcolony – and it will be clear why the Big Questions of moral relativism and liberal universalism, of cultural difference and legal rationality, are so pressing here. And why they are the object of so much public de- bate. To put the matter in a nutshell, postcolonial nation-states cannot but live with both sides of an unresolvable equation. They have no option: this contradiction is their historical legacy. The best they can do in addressing the pragmatic problems that arise when the demands of culture run up against liberal universalism is to arrive at contingent solutions, strategic compromises; hence, for example, the accommodation forged between judgment and justice in handling ca- ses of witch burning (above, p.000). Occult-related violence rings such alarm bells – and calls forth the urgent attention of the state – precisely because it brings into life-and-death focus the contradiction at the core of the “new” South Africa and other postcolonial polities. These poli- ties, as we said at the outset, are cut from the modernist mould of nationhood: they are founded on constitutions that speak of One Law for One Nation, constitutions with Bills of Rights that set specific limits to heterodoxy, subjecting it to a transcendent legal and moral unity – and to the universal rights of citizens. Yet they are all confronted by the very differences that, simultane- ously, they recognize and embrace: by the entitlement of their subjects to their own cultural practices. That entitlement, we stress again, does not grow out of a politics of recognition for minorities; the kind of thing on which philosophical debates over multicultural citizenship tend to fixate. In places like South Africa, in which the democratic will of the majority is taken very seriously, most people “have” culture; most subscribe to ways and means that, in at least some respects, depart from Euromodern liberal orthodoxy. Those ways and means often include practices that, to others, appear dangerous; indeed, that cross the line between culture and crime. What makes the problem so acute is that such practices are not trivial “customs.” They may be existentially critical: occult-related violence in the northerly provinces of South Africa, as we have seen, is perpetrated in reaction to a perceived threat to life, livelihood, community, and commonweal. It is also an instrument of discovery and divination by which local populations seek to grasp the secrets of a world in flux. And act upon them.

    There is another facet to all this, another piece to bring to conclusion: cultural policing of the kind entailed in burning evil-doers is, itself, a more-or-less explicit indictment of the state. To the extent that the arrival of democracy was taken by black South Africans to promise material melioration and a new measure of personal security – a promise reiterated repeatedly by the ANC – the witchcraft “epidemic” bespoke its dramatic failure. Witches, after all, destroy material wealth and pose a mortal threat to personal security. As this suggests, the moral panic to which the “epidemic” gave rise was, among other things, a statement about the inability of govern- ment to make good on its mandate to safeguard its citizens. Occult-related violence, not sur- prisingly, is almost invariably accompanied by complaints against the inaction of the South African Police, inaction predicated, in part, on the sheer difficulty of intervening in accusations of magical malevolence; vide the role of Captain Segogelo in the death of Temane Makgetla. The “informal” justice dealt in such cases is warranted by appeal to another democracy: the populism of tradition. Ironically, it is also rationalized by recourse to the fetish on which the liberal democracy of the postcolony is founded: the rule of law. Only it turns the Law of the Nation upside down, calling for a mode of policing, rooted in the vernacular, that meets the occult on its own cultural ground; much as do Inspector Gopane and Sergeant Moshupa, who seek – in a manner still exceptional among police cadres – to cross the planes of the bureaucratic and the spiritual. And, as it does so, as it invokes the sanctity of traditional knowledge, this mode of policing confronts the state where it is most ideologically vulnerable: in its assertion of a univer- sal law against the claims of difference enshrined in its own founding constitution. Hence, we repeat, the seriousness with which the problem of occult violence is being regarded. And all the controversies which it has fueled.

    The phenomena of which we write here, phenomena that have their most vivid expres- sion in postcolonies like South Africa, may seem far removed from other parts of the world. And yet the antinomy between universalism and difference, inherent in the nation-state since its in- ception, has been sharpened by the emergence of neoliberal capitalism across the globe. This epochal process has had a mixed bag of consequences. Among them has been the growth of occult economies all over the planet, especially as those left out of the millennial promise of new wealth try to divine its arcane sources; the erosion of modernist state power, producing, in many places, the privatization of policing and the means of violence, the assertion of sub- and transnational identities, and early manifestations of Ethnicity, Inc.; the rise both of populist de- mands for cultural rights and of religious movements, sometimes framed in open opposition to the state; and a growth, almost everywhere, of a new faith in legality and constitutionalism (Comaroff and Comaroff 2001). All of these are ingredients for the emergence of policulturalism and ID-ology of the kinds on which cultural policing in South Africa are founded. Perhaps we have here, in embryonic form, harbingers of things to come elsewhere. Perhaps a new struggle between the imperatives of culture and the hegemony of liberal universalism is just dawning.

  • Criminal Obsessions, After Foucault:

    Criminal Obsessions, After Foucault:

    “Perhaps it is because our lives are so chaotic, so filled with unsol- ved mysteries, incomplete stories, uncaught murderers that crime fiction is so popular. I believe that is why South Africans are so hooked on American TV crime series…because somewhere, some- how, someone is solving crimes. At least in fiction justice is served”….Michael Williams, The Eighth Man, a novel1

    People across the planet have, in recent years, been uncommonly preoccupied with public order, crime, and policing. From Britain to Brazil, Nigeria to the Netherlands, Slovakia to South Africa,2 the specter of illegality appears to be captivating popular ima- ginations. In much of the world, to be sure, this preoccupation is far from groundless. True, “accurate” crime statistics may be impossibly difficult to arrive at3; such actuarial artefacts depend, after all, on what is seen to constitute a felony in the first place, on what counts as evidence, on how much is conceded to the truth-claims of aggregate numbers. True, too, the perceived threat of criminal assault is often incommensurate with the “real” risk to persons and property; as it happens, that risk remains more un- evenly distributed in South Africa than it is in most places.4 All this notwithstanding, the incidence of violent crime here, and its effects on the lives of ordinary citizens, are not to be trivialized. They are perfectly real. As criminologists have come to recognize, the burgeoning violence endured by segregated black communities under apartheid has, especially since the late 1980s, spilled over into once tranquil, tightly-policed “white” cities and suburbs.5 This is an integral part of our story.

    And yet, at the same time, there seems to be more to the public obsession with criminality and disorder than the mere fact of its reality. South Africans of all stripes are also captivated by images of crime and policing, whether it be in the form of avid rumor or home-grown telenovelas, Hollywood horror or high theater, earnest documentaries or trashy melodramas. Whatever dangers they may dodge on the streets by day, at night, behind carefully secured doors, a high proportion of them indulge in vicarious experi- ences of extravagant lawlessness by way of the media, both imported and local. Why should this be so?

    The South African preoccupation with law and order – or, rather, with its mediat- ed representation – is neither new nor unique. “Even though crime exists…in what the public chooses to think of as epidemic proportions,” wrote Stuart Scheingold of the US two decades ago, “we still feel compelled to invent it.”6 For over a century, in fact, fictio- nal “cops and robbers” have provided a compelling topos for popular myth-making all over the world; clearly, they offer pliant allegorical terms for exploring the nature and li- mits of social being almost everywhere. This taste for crime fiction is not restricted to those who consume it as mass entertainment. Nor is it of interest only to those who contemplate order in the abstract. To the contrary, theater and fantasy appear integral to the workaday routines of policing itself. As if to make the point, Scotland Yard recen- tly hired a professional magician, using “illusions as a metaphor for real life situations” to “boost [the] confidence and…leadership skills” of its superintendents.7 In like vein, as we shall see, the strained South African Police Services, whose cadres include a some successful diviner-detectives,8 devote considerable effort to staging illusory victories over the dark forces of violence and disorder. But why all the drama? Why would aug- ust officers of the law – the very embodiment of the state at its most rational, legitimate, and forceful – feel a need to play around, to act out, in this manner? Has Foucault not convinced us that it is the panopticon, rather than the theater, that holds the key to pow- er in its modernist form?

    THE USES OF HORROR

    Crime looms large in the post-cold war age. Increasingly flexible in its modes of operation, it often mimics corporate business,9 constituting an “uncivil society” that flou- rishes most energetically where the state withdraws. Hence the implosion of ever more virtual, more vertiginous forms of fiscal fraud, ever more supple, border-busting markets in illegal substances, armaments, and mercenary violence – all facilitated by the liberali- zation of trade, by new kinds of financial instruments, and by cutting-edge communica- tions media. Hence, also, the role of organized crime: of the mafia and of business-ori- ented “gangs” in post-totalitarian polities which, for a fee, perform services that govern- ments no longer provide.10 Such criminal “phantom-states,” notes Derrida,11 are a fact of our times. Often embedded in complex transnational relations, often relying on highly sophisticated technologies, they shade into the networks of terror that are rapidly repla- cing conventional threats to “national” security.12 Indeed, received distinctions between crime and terror, always inchoate, are being revised as we speak, each term being de-ployed, ideologically, to make sense of, and to “fight,” the other. Thus it is that we have “the war” on terror, on drugs, on gangs, on illegal aliens, on corporate corruption, and so on. Note, in this respect, that Egged, the Israeli bus company, is reported to be suing Yasser Arafat for damages incurred in suicide bombings, and that Americans bereaved on 9/11 have filed a $100 trillion claim against Islamic charities, the Sudanese state, Saudi Arabian banks, and others for their support of Osama bin Laden – actions that would reduce the intifada and World Trade Center attacks to common illegalities ac- tionable by recourse to tort law.13 Under these conditions, crime and terror merge in the epistemic murk of a “new” global system that both reproduces and eclipses its old inter- national predecessor. In the upshot, social order appears ever more impossible to ap- prehend, violence appears ever more endemic, excessive, and transgressive, and poli- ce come, in the public imagination, to embody a nervous state under pressure. Officers of the Los Angeles Police Department, hardly known for their civility, recently described themselves as “the outer membrane of civilization” in a disorderly world.14 Similarly, the policeman protagonist in a stunning piece of postcolonial South African theater, Neil McCarthy’s The Great Outdoors, observes that the “line between order and chaos” is like “one strand of a spider’s web.”15

    The obsession with crime and lawlessness is not merely a commentary – at least, in South Africa – on social order, sui generis. It is also a reflection on the state of the nation. Take mass advertising, a genre that seeks to transform nightmare into de- sire. In April 2001, the Mail & Guardian, perhaps the most seriously critical newspaper in the country, observed that “bolted doors, patrolling dogs defending gated communi- ties and dark figures cocking guns in the shadows appear even in ads for toilet paper and popcorn.”16 At the time, a music radio station in Johannesburg was promoting itself, on huge billboards, by means of just two words: MORE POLICE. And, even more wryly: “YOU CAN TAKE THE CAR. JUST LEAVE THE RADIO. 98.7FM” Hardly subtle, this counterpoint between panacea and panic, pop and the politics of enforcement, ardent consumerism and Hobbesian anarchy. Texts like these are haunted by the specter of immanent attack, above all, attack on the part of unruly black youths. Violent crime, here as in the USA, has become the lightning rod for an escalating range of everyday anxieties; anxieties fed by the insecurity of the privileged as they witness the anger and impatience of those excluded from the Promised Land. In the banal theatrics of the mass media, crime becomes racialized and race criminalized. And both, if we may be forgiven the term, are youthenized.

    Regarded in this light, South Africa appears to evince what Mark Seltzer has ter- med a “pathological public sphere;17 it is increasingly at the “scene-of-the-crime,” he ar- gues, that contemporary publics are constituted. But there is more at stake in the popu- lar obsession with scenes of violent disorder in this particular postcolony. This, after all, was, until not long ago, a racist police state; its transition from the ancien regime, more- over, was husbanded by a celebrated Truth and Reconciliation Commission whose deli- berations were based on a model of justice that sought to address atrocities past with- out resort to punishment. Consequently, beyond constituting a public, the “scene-of-the- crime” in South Africa, broadly conceived, is also the source of a passionate politics on the part of government, a politics aimed at making manifest both the shape of the na- tion and a form of institutional power capable of underwriting its ordered existence. What we have here, in other words, is an inversion of the history laid out by Foucault in Discipline and Punish,18 according to which, famously, the theatricality of premodern power gives way to ever more implicit, internalized, capillary kinds of discipline. Indeed, it is precisely this telos – which presumes the expanding capacity of the state to regu- late everyday existence and routinely to enforce punishment – that is in question in South Africa. To wit, the drama that is so integral to policing the postcolony is evidence of a desire to condense dispersed power in order to make it visible, tangible, accountable, effective.19

    These theatrics, we shall see, are anything but hidden or half-hearted. More of- ten than not they assume the overdrawn shape of melodrama, a genre, according to Peter Brookes,20 that polarizes conflicting forces in such a way as to “make evident, le- gible, and operative” values which lack the transcendent authority of a religion, a domi- nant ideology, or whatever. So it is with the spectacle of policing, the staging of which strives to make actual, both to its subjects and to itself, the authorized face, and force, of the state; of a state, that is, whose legitimacy is far from unequivocal. Nor is this true only in postcolonies. Wrote Malcolm Young, an ethnographer of British law enforce- ment: “police culture possesses a dramaturgical or melodramatic inflection.” It mobilizes “illusion, praxis, and imagery” in “well-directed” social productions, deploying “mythical archetypes…in exaggerated games of ‘cops’ and ‘robbers’.”21 Melodrama in blue, so to speak. Young should know. He was himself a career police officer. His testimony returns us to one of our opening questions, now phrased more specifically: In what ways have illusion and fantasy been implicated in the work of law enforcement in recent South African history? And what might changes in the nature of police performance, in all senses of that term, tell us about the postcolonial – post-Foucauldian? – state, about its powers and its differences from its precursor?

    A great deal, in answering these questions, hangs on the way in which we grasp the connection between modernist state power and popular fantasies of law and order. Gramsci, for instance,22 observed that judicial apparatuses are “always in discredit” with the public, a corollary of which is the enduring appeal of private and amateur sleuths. Especially pertinent to our story, in this respect, is the reflection of CLR James’ on de- tective fiction in America after the Great Depression.23 There has, of course, been a long-standing infatuation with extralegal enforcement in US history; it has expressed it- self not just in the popularity of such things as the dime western, but also in the horror of public lynchings. James’s exploration of the salience of the genre in the 1930’s is to be read against this backdrop. Popular film, comics, and radio at the time, he recalls, were finely tuned to mass desire and frustration, giving allegorical shape to apprehen- sions about the meaning of freedom, prosperity, and nationhood in the midst of epic cri- sis. It was a moment of reckoning, too, for the liberal state and its moral economy; its failure to nurture a capitalist commonwealth had driven many ordinary people to despe- ration. Yet the avidly consumed crime drama of the period seldom spoke of economic collapse, labor struggles, or fear of war. This, James insists, was less a matter of deli- berate sabotage than of a silent, “armed neutrality” among the classes.”24 In the space vacated by politics, dyspeptic private eyes sallied forth in the name of the law, sharing some of the hoodlum chic of gangsters themselves: above all, a “scorn for the police as the representatives of official society.” 25 As ruling institutions lost legitimacy, gumshoes – men of iron, men of irony – became purveyors of a cynical justice that acknowledged anger, appetite, fallibility, power. In so doing, they made it possible to imagine a social order wrought by heroic action in the cause of a greater moral good.

    The detective fiction of post-depression America bears some kinship with popular imaginings of law and order in South Africa after apartheid: its reference to rapidly changing social and economic conditions; to the shock effect of mass joblessness and the unfulfilled promise of a new age of prosperity; to a perceived failure of the regulato- ry state; to a view of the police as inefficient and easily corruptible; to the bipolarization of crime into, on one hand, petty felonies committed by drab miserables driven by ne- cessity and, on the other, the flamboyant larceny of defiant antiheroes. If the US crisis yielded the New Deal, it remains to be seen what kind of deal the “new” South Africa fa- shions for itself. In the meantime, criminality has come to be represented, as it was in America during the 1920s and ‘30s, and would be again in the late twentieth-century in- ner city, as a means of production – or, rather, of productive redistribution – for those alienated by new forms of exclusion. At the same time, there is more at work in contem- porary South Africa than simple deprivation. As Jonny Steinberg points out, and mass- mediated drama affirms, the local underworld is not the sole preserve of the poor; it is peopled, as well, by the “well-healed and well-educated.” This suggests that, for an ever more visible sector of the population, most of all young black men, gangster “lifestyles” have a seductive appeal.26 It also suggests, after CLR James and many popular movies and musics since his day, that the outlaw embodies, often in deeply racialized guise, a displaced discourse about desire and impossibility, one as characteristic of the neoliberal moment in South Africa as it was of the depression-era US. Here too, the state is regarded with ambivalence, roughly in proportion to its alleged failure to secure the well-being of its citizens. Here, too, violence speaks elegaically of a very general angst about the anomic implosion of the established order of things.

    The sheer fecundity of crime-as-imaginaire is no mystery. Thoroughly grounded in the experience of the real, it gives voice to a fundamental conundrum of social being in the secular liberal state, a conundrum of unsettling relevance in the US since 9/11: How much freedom ought to be alienated, in the cause of security, to any regulatory re- gime, especially one whose legitimacy is open to question. This is a tension that dra- mas of law and order tend everywhere to resolve, in Durkheimian fashion, by making the obligatory appear desirable.27 But fantasy is never reducible to pure functionality. Crime fiction also provides readily available tropes for addressing ironies, for ventilating desires, and, above all, for conjuring a moral commonweal, especially when radical transformation unseats existing norms and robs political language of its meaning. In these circumstances, the felon personifies an existence beyond the law, an existence at once awesome, awful, and sublime. Mogamat Benjamin, high ranking member of a deadly gang in Cape Town’s notorious Pollsmoor Maximum Security Prison recently told a TV team: “I am powerful; I am partly God.”28 He was referring to his capacity to determine the lives and deaths of other inmates, even warders. Brusque iconoclasm of this kind opens a space of possibility, a space in which order is up for grabs, a space in which new modes of being are forged in the heat of unspeakably transgressive violence as the state withdraws or is rendered irrelevant. Benjamin and his brethren run a comp- lex organization in the dark interstices of the jail by means that elude its administration; means that spill back into the tough terrain on which their gang does its usual busi- ness.29 Shades here of another revered Benjamin, Walter Benjamin, for whom violence in its archetypal, mythic form was a “manifestation of the Gods.”30 It is awesome, he argued, because it threatens state monopoly over the law; note how “‘great’ criminal[s],” even when their ends are repellant, arouse the “secret admiration of the public.”31 But why do these figures, large and small, take on such intense salience in the here-and- now? Is this a result of the unique predicament of the postcolony? Or did it exist be- fore?

    Some clues from elsewhere may be helpful. James Siegel, for example, shows how, in an Indonesia facing political and economic dissolution, “the body of the criminal” has become the alibi against which the integrity of the nation and the law is asserted.32 The “dangerous classes” serve a similar symbolic end in an ever more polarized, post- industrial Britain, says Malcolm Young: police invoke them to authorize “wars” – again, that term – on behalf of “the social order” against whatever is seen to imperil it.33 Like- wise banditry in parts of the Mediterranean and Latin America, where outlaws are cast as a fearsome anachronism over which modernist states must exercise authority in order to sustain the viability of the polity and its sovereign space.34 In sum, the figure of arch-felon, albeit culturally transposed, seems to be doing similar work in many places, serving as the ground on which a metaphysics of order, of the nation as a moral com- munity guaranteed by the state, may be entertained, argued for, even demanded.

    The question, then, is plainly this: To the extent that discourses of crime and en- forcement, as popular national fantasy, are endemic to the imaginary of modern state power, how might current changes in the nature and sovereignty of states – especially postcolonial states – be tied to the criminal obsessions sweeping so many parts of the world? Why do outlaws, as mythic figures, evoke fascination in proportion to their pen- chant for ever more graphic, excessive, unpredictable violence? In South Africa today,

    Rob Marsh points out, it is white-collar crime that is most likely to “bring the country to its knees.”35 But it is red blooded assault on persons and property that is of most public concern. Violence, in short, is immensely productive, sometimes horrifyingly so: quite apart from its capacity to redirect the flow of wealth, it usurps representation, reveals the limits of order, and justifies state monopolies over the means of coercion.

    Self-evidently, violence is never just a matter of the circulation of images. Its ex- ercise, legitimate or otherwise, tends to have decidedly tangible objectives. And effects. Indeed, it was the raw clarity of physical force that persuaded Fanon of its potential for liberating colonized bodies and minds.36 This notwithstanding, its means and meanings always exceed its immediate ends, precisely because they rely on poetic techniques to inflate their impact. Could this be why brute coercion everywhere is inherently theatrical, its perpetrators upping the emotional ante via a host of self-dramatizing techniques – before, during, and after the fact? Begonia Aretxaga, following Zulaika and Douglass, notes that brutality sets those who wield it in a “play-like” frame, one in which extraordi- nary feats seem achievable, in which all pretense of distinguishing fact from fabrication disappears.37 Those who wish to command must constantly invoke violence, if not di- rectly, then in displaced or mimetic form. It is this invocation – above all, by those en- trusted with the impossibility of enforcing the law – with which we are concerned here: its rough play, its predilection for criminal fantasy, its response to the vicissitudes of state power. The police become visible, argues Agamben, citing Benjamin, where the legal dominion of the state runs out; their “embarrassing” proximity to authority is mani- fested in perpetual displays of force, even in peaceful public places.38 As we shall see, where governance is seriously compromised, law enforcement may provide a privileged site for staging efforts – the double entendre is crucial here – to summon the active pre- sence of the state into being, to render it perceptible to the public eye, to produce both rulers and subjects who recognize its legitimacy. Herein, we shall argue, lies the affinity between policing, drama, and illusion. Herein, too, lies the source of popular preoccu- pations with the representation of law and order. Those, recall, were the two issues with which we began.

    Let us move, then, onto the shifting planes of recent South African history. Scene 1 opens in the late 1980s, in what was the last act of the dying apartheid regime.

    CAPERS WTH COPPERS: The Closed Museum and the Spectral State

    We begin with an anomaly: a public museum closed to the public, perhaps inde- finitely. If this is an oxymoron, it is one that indexes the contradictory implications of ra- dical democratization for the construction of a nation of free citizens on the vestigial ruins of a police state, the ruins of a polity founded on racial exclusion.

    In 1999, when first we visited the South African Police Museum, housed in a shabby, elegant Victorian building in Pretoria, the executive capital of the country, it was shut for “renovation.” The edifice, which had been the national Police Headquarters in the 1930s was, we were told, in dangerous disrepair. This was visibly so, although it soon became clear that the wear and tear was not merely architectural. For the public exhibition space had coexisted, in the apartheid era, with something else, something clandestine, something now abhorrent: the epicenter, and an interrogation facility, of the infamous national security service. The bizarre coexistence of the two within the same walls – the museum below, the secret police above – appeared to be beyond coincidence. But more of that in a moment. It was not only the lurking traces of state terror that compromised the building. The content of the exhibits, once very popular with patrons, had themselves become inappropriate. State museums, of course, are more or less blatant statements, conjuring up the national populations, subjects, and interests for which, and to which, they speak. In times of historical change, they offer glaring indictments of denatured ideologies, of a slippage between state and nation, signifiers and signifieds. Not surprisingly, they have become prime objects of argument about the politics of representation in the “new” South Africa. Behind closed doors, in the late 1990s, the staff of the Police Museum pondered how to make their displays relevant to the post-apartheid era.

    We had been drawn to the place by an interest in the changing public sense of police work brought by the advent of majority rule.39 The indefinitely closed museum called forth an historical speculation, a hypothesis if you will: that reforming the image of the old South African Police Force, jackboot of the state, into that of the South Afri- can Police Services, a gentler, human-rights orientated, community-friendly agency, could well turn out to be an exercise in impossibility. By the late apartheid years, when it became increasingly difficult to contain the contradictions of the racial state, the SAP operated, for the most part, as a paramilitary force. Its security branch existed above the law, torture and deadly force were routine in the treatment of political dissidents, and a dense network of informers extended its capillaries into every sphere of existen- ce. Against this background, the state portrayed the police as heroic defenders of order against terror, treason, and savage insurrection.

    The Police Museum spoke unchallenged from the heart of that state. It began life in 1968 as a haphazard collection of relics – murder weapons, graphic photographs of “ritual” mutilations, the personal effects of a famous female poisoner – all from land- mark cases of the more or less distant past; these being used, early on, in the training of cadets. With the recruitment in 1982 of a museologist, Tilda Smal, herself a police of- ficer, the collection was developed in an altogether more ambitious direction, combining edification with entertainment, high melodrama with low-tech installations. Central to its design was a series of tableaux that, together, composed a specifically South African history of crime and punishment. They also served as the setting for what would beco- me the best known feature of the institution, its Night Tours, during which staff of the museum and the Police Education Unit brought epic felonies to life by impersonating famous “criminals.”

    There could hardly be more literal or vivid evidence of the dramaturgy, the melo- drama, of police work. But what did it all mean? What prompted otherwise austere offi- cers of a police state to inhabit the personae of their arch-enemies; indeed, to make public exhibitions of themselves in order to delight and terrify rather ordinary patrons and their children? What might their play have had to do with the more sinister rituals that took place backstage in this extraordinary venue?

    We take up the story with the help of the curator.40 The Museum, said Sgt. Smal, was only allowed to display artifacts from cases that had ended in convictions. It catalo- gued the triumph of law and order over enemies of the state. In the 1980s, the range of exhibits – a mixture of dioramas, documents, and objects – covered two key domains of police work. One was the apprehension of spectacular criminals, the other, the protec- tion of “national security” against the threat of “terrorism” and, later in the decade, “dangers on the borders.” Installations of the first kind featured the likes of Daisy de Melker, perhaps South Africa’s most notorious serial killer: indicted for poisoning two husbands and one of her children, de Melker was an horrific inversion of the national stereotype of the genteel white female, entrusted with reproducing the moral essence of her race.41 Such emblems of aberration within the nation were set off from the peril to its existence posed by those alienated from it: by Poqo, the armed wing of the radical Pan-African Congress, for instance, which, in the early 1960’s had made a particular target of the police,42 and by the “Rivonia conspiracy,” uncovered with the arrest, in 1962, of several top ANC leaders, most notably Nelson Mandela, who were alleged to be plotting treas- on. Dioramas dealing with defensive action on the borders depicted a hostile alliance of others bent on bringing down the ruling regime: exiled “terrorists,” sympathetic frontline African states, and international communism. As this installation underlined, the dividing line between the military and the police was conspicuously fuzzy in the late years of minority rule.

    Night Tours, in which the tableaux were animated, were started in 1990 as a “once-off” experiment to entertain a group of “VIP’s” from the International Police Asso- ciation. Word spread. Besieged by inquiries from an interested public, the staff decided to offer the tours on request. Soon the demand became overwhelming: at one stage, there were three a week, all year, each for 40 visitors. Performances continued until the building closed in April 1999. Initially, most visitors, both night and day, were white Afri- kaans-speaking South Africans. Later, Africans, especially school groups, began to pat- ronize the place. By that time, efforts had been made to revise the exhibits (see below). The Police Museum, in which everything was free of charge, seems to have been popular above all with the super-patriotic and the very poor. Toward the end, the Night Tours attracted some cultured critics of the regime, for whom this dark, if not wholly in- tended, parody – its freak-chic – became an excursion into the comic underside of the police state.

    The staff look back on the Tours with great fondness. These were occasions of carnivalesque camaraderie, occasions that gave license for various sorts of play, some of it decidedly ambiguous. As visitors entered the building, they came upon cops in ana- chronistic uniforms on antique bicycles; a somewhat heavy-handed signal, this, that they had departed real-time for the domain of history-as-theater, of docu-dramaturgy. As we intimated earlier, the vaudeville itself turned on the willingness of the officer-play- ers to inhabit the identities of public enemies. This willingness, almost a caricature of the mix of outrage and enjoyment that Lacan calls jouissance, may be read, following Aretxaga,43 as an appropriation by state functionaries of the “seductive and fearful pow- er” of their adversaries. But there is more at work here. The performance also recalls the repetitive enactment of paradox characteristic of African rituals under colonial condi- tions.44 The Night Tours replayed the Hegelian enslavement of white rulers to the terror of the swart gevaar, a “black danger” largely of their own making. In the play, the prag- matics of melodrama permitted the separation of the civil from the savage, enabling the law to appear to act decisively upon forces of darkness, as if to redress the contradic- tions endlessly reproduced by colonial rule. The curator acknowledged that her staff presumed that patrons would be fascinated by sensational crime. And eager for vica- rious terror. Consequently, they sought to provoke first horror and then deliverance; such “vicarious adventures in the illicit and the brutal,” Scheingold45 notes, being a “prelude” to the gratification, to the “discharges of anger,” promised by “society’s act of retribution.” In dramatizing the difficulties of defending an enlightened order against un- couth odds, the police-players elevated their audience into metonymic citizens of the nation as moral community – and, also, into a public in need of state protection from a vast mass of unruly others.

    Visitors remember the Tours vividly. One critical observer described the perfor- mance as a “home-grown chamber of horrors”: part amateur theater, part fairground haunted-house. Thus Daisy de Melker walked the halls dressed in period costume, of- fering visitors coffee from her poison flask. The real thing, that is, not a facsimile. Sett- ing the scene was a cast of characters who embodied less alarming threats to everyday order: a few police-women garbed as prostitutes, a couple who postured as addicts in front of a light show that simulated a bad trip; a group of “authentic” sangomas, traditio- nal healers, who enacted a trance to dramatize the dangers of “black magic.” Also brought to life was Panga Man, a notorious black criminal who attacked courting white couples while they were parked in a leafy spot in Pretoria, not far from the Museum. Bearing a panga, a large scythe, he would assault the men and rape the women – to whom, it was said, he then gave bus fare home. There could hardly have been a more intense figuration of the dark, insouciant menace that stalked the cities in the white ima- gination, threatening civility and its social reproduction. This nightmare gained fantastic irony when the attacker turned out to be a mild-mannered “tea boy” at police head- quarters.46 Epitomizing the standard colonial terrors of rapacious black sexuality and subaltern betrayal, Panga Man featured centrally in a regular Museum display, which depicted a car, sawn in half to reveal a couple looking up in petrified expectation of an immanent strike. During Night Tours, a door would burst open in the wall behind, and an African officer would leap out, brandishing the eponymous weapon. “We thought of having him shout something as he did so,” the curator told us. “But the first time we tried it everybody screamed so loudly, he could hardly be heard. People nearly fainted.”

    By the mid 1990’s, with the dawn of the postcolony, efforts were made to add fresh exhibits to the Museum, acknowledging the possibility of different readings of his- tory and the presence of new sorts of citizen-consumer. The aim, said Tilda Smal, was to document the role of the police in the apartheid years in such a way as to capture black viewpoints on that history. This took it on faith that it was possible, within the same signifying economy, to pluralize existing displays, their ideological scaffolding, and the kind of nation they presumed. Thus installations on terrorism were revised to explain the rationale of the liberation movements. And tableaux were included to docu- ment the insidious indignities of the Pass System and the Sharpeville Uprising of 1960, in which scores of nonviolent African protestors were shot to death by police. Popular with the public, itself now changing in social composition, was a depiction of the sabre- rattling antics of the white-right Afrikaner Weerstand Beweging (Afrikaner Resistance Movement), whose assertive racist posturing was the very essence of neofascist melo- drama. These changes produced some paradoxical moments – like one in which Nel- son Mandela, played by a SAPS look-alike, stood inside a replica of his Robben Island cell and answered polite questions from curious visitors.

    Nor were they uncontroversial, particularly among older white police officers. The Museum, now under the jurisdiction of an ANC-administered Ministry of Safety and Se- curity, had entered an era of postcolonial contestation, becoming a space of argument as never before. So much so that, whatever the contingent causes, its closure suggests that it collapsed under the weight of its own contradictions; these wrought by thorough- going changes in the racial composition and status of the police, in the ideology of en- forcement, and, most of all, in the relation of citizenry to government. But the question of what should be exhibited, how and why, pointed to something more than a shift in the way in which the nation narrates its past and future. It signaled a transformation in the social imaginary of the state itself – and the ways in which it deploys horror to make it- self visible. About which more in a moment. In the meantime, the museum staff, un- daunted, continue to plan future displays: on, for example, the more sensational abuses revealed by the Truth and Reconciliation Commission,47 on the “evils” of the “witchdoctor’s art,” and on such spectacular murderers as the so-called Norwood serial killer, who, as it happens, had been a regular police sergeant. But, as these museolo- gists are coming to realize, it is difficult to capture, in tableau, the realities of policing the postcolony. Not, at least, without rethinking the regime of representation required by the present moment. To be sure, in the final years, the Night Tours themselves ran up against this difficulty, finding that the line they presumed between fact and fantasy, order and chaos, safety and violence, was dissolving. In one instance, a harbinger of things to come, the police actors staged a robbery involving hostages and a fake inter- vention on the part of the Flying Squad, firing blank bullets. By this stage, however, vio- lent crime had become a pervasive preoccupation, above all in the inner city, where the Museum was located. As the shots went off, panic ensued. Unclear, in the midst of the mayhem, was whether or not the performance had been overtaken by a real attack from the streets outside.

    It was not the first time that theater and brute reality had been confounded in this house of horrors. As we sat in the closed Museum, talking to the curator about its past and its (im)probable future, Tilda Smal gestured toward the ceiling and recalled how, in the old days, the Pretoria branch of the Security Police had been housed above. “A lot of fa- mous people were interrogated here.” she said, “Almost the whole current government.” The edifice had been home, then, to another, more sadistic form of theater: the surreal techniques of information gathering, of violence and terror, that were the stock-in-trade of “special policing” under apartheid. Since 1994, several prominent figures have revisit- ed the site of their incarceration and torture:48 the upper reaches of the building have, for former enemies of the state, become a space for re-visiting the past, a space for personal and collective re-membering.

    During the heyday of the Museum in the1980’s, its staff and visitors used an en- trance on the east side of the building. The Security Police used the west side. When political prisoners were brought in, the clanking of their handcuffs and leg irons was audible in the exhibition space below. Sgt. Smal said that she had found it hard to be- lieve what she had heard and seen at the time. But, she noted, for patrons it all seemed “part of the show.” In this way, the Museum was the facade for state terror, and state terror the mis-en-scene for the Museum.

    We are confronted here with the strangeness of the real,49 the unnerving interpe- netration of force and fantasy, of policing and performance, of the interiors and exteri- ors of the state-as-violence. There was no simple line, in this house with two entrances, between backstage and frontstage, between actors and audience, between the producers and consumers of a phantasmagoric reality. Ordinary citizens unwittingly played along in the fabrication and reproduction of precisely the sense of apocalypse – the ter- rifying threats to order – that legitimized the deadly exercise of coercion in the name of governance. For despite the distinction between public display and secret interrogation, each represented an aspect of the melodrama, of manufacturing truth by evoking terror, that appears essential to enforcement everywhere; one that takes especially cavalier and destructive forms in totalitarian states, where a continuing sense of emergency ex- onerates the most savage of disciplinary practices. In South Africa, in the present era of “human rights” policing, these practices have been radically transformed. But, as we shall see shortly, the reliance of the law on melodrama has not disappeared. In answer to one of our opening questions, there is both continuity – because it is in the nature of enforcement – and change, because of shifts in the political culture of its context.

    Old horrors leave their traces. While the future of the Janus-faced edifice hangs in the balance, its uncanny past haunts those who were part of it, those who seek now to reconfigure its purpose in the present. Toward the end of our conversation, the cura- tor remarked: “We have a few resident ghosts in the building.” One, she confided, likes to play – note that verb again – with the security system when people work after hours; a phantom, perhaps, with a particularly poignant sense of irony. What is more, Museum personnel attest to strange nocturnal experiences. South Africans of all races have al- ways been actively engaged with the supernatural, although an obsession with the oc- cult has been especially noticeable during this time of transition.50 One Sunday evening, when Sgt. Smal was alone in the building, the alarm began to sound furiously. Unable to switch it off, she sat resignedly for two hours, waiting, as she put it, “for the spirit to play herself out.” On another occasion, she reports having shouted: “Daisy,” de Melker, that is, “leave the intercom alone!” The mechanism, she said, “went wild.”

    But other, unnamed forces also spook this building, struggling to find voice in the great re-visioning of the past occasioned by the birth of the postcolony. It is as if the specters of bygone events are unable to find embodiment – or a means of representa- tion – in the present, notwithstanding laudable efforts to foster new cultures of recollec- tion; as if farce and tragedy, humor and horror, must confront each other before an aw- ful history can become a habitable present. Those who spend time on the upper floors during the small hours speak of an unquiet presence along the corridors. Some say that it is because many prisoners had “committed suicide” here; suicide being a sometime secret police euphemism for “killed in custody.” More recently, a security guard shot himself on the premises. Another person came off the street to take his own life in the courtyard. Black South Africans, in particular, disliked working in the place. Many still do. Here we get to the nub of issue. The lower floors of the building may be frequented by the ghosts of playful lady poisoners and other random spirits, but the upstairs has an altogether more sinister aura. Museum staff told us that, in the former Security Police stronghold, “there is a really strange feeling.” People hear the footsteps of those long departed. No one feels comfortable in the place. This is hardly surprising: only perpe- trators and victims know what unspeakable acts and agonies those walls have witness- ed. Thus it is that history shadows the reluctant consciousness of those – above all, those responsible for justice, law, and order – who must find ways to reconcile their activities in the past, a past that truly was another country, with the radically altered moral regime of the present.

    No wonder the Police Museum remains shut. It does so not just because its cabi- net of horrors requires drastic revision in the postcolony, but because it must find new modes of melodrama, new forms of conjuring order from terror; all the more so since, in recent times, the public preoccupation with violent crime, fed by avid electronic and print media, has made reality seem much scarier than fiction. In the event, the now mul- tiracial staff of the SAPS Education Unit has, over the past few years, begun experi- menting with other genres of self-representation – among them, video shows, popular puppetry, and street theater – to dramatize a contemporary clutch of nightmares: do- mestic assault, rape, gun-related violence, drug abuse.51 As befits the ethos of a libera- lizing state, they take their shows on the road to the various provinces of the postcolo- ny. We follow them to one such provincial outpost, there to explore the nature of police drama after apartheid.

    And so on to Scene ll.

    PLAY ACCIDENTS, CHOREOGRAPHED CRIMES, or Performing the State

    In November 1999, we read in the national press that Mafikeng-Mmabatho52 – capital of the North West Province, where we were living and working at the time – was to host an exhibit on violence against women.53 This was to be part of a countrywide campaign, Project Harmony, which sought to draw public attention to the government’s newly-minted Domestic Violence Act. Members of the North West Police Services, the papers announced, would stage educational performances at taxi ranks, those remark- able agoras of African postcolonies. Our inquiries about the event drew a blank, how- ever. Nobody, neither the local police nor anyone else, knew a thing about it.

    It was only after we traveled to the Secretariat for Public Safety and Liaison at its provincial headquarters, 10km north of town, that we learned the whereabouts of the exhibit. It was to be held in the foyer of the North West Provincial legislature. The Se- cretariat, it should be noted, is a regional division of the national Department of Safety and Security, under whose aegis falls the newly reorganized South African Police Servi- ce;54 although, at the time, relations between the two bodies were rather ill-defined. The new National Crime Prevention Strategy, adopted in 1996, promulgated a dispersed but “integrative” approach, provincial governments being charged with “co-ordinating a range of…functions…to achieve more effective crime prevention.”55 Precisely how this was to be done remained opaque, however, even to those entrusted with the urgent task of promoting “community security.” Here, patently, was local government faced with the demand to invent itself.

    Which is where Project Harmony came in. The directive from the state that pro- vincial governments should raise public awareness of the then imminent Domestic Vio- lence Bill implied a clear line of action. Hence the announcement of the exhibit which proved so strangely elusive. But why, we wondered, had it been so hard to find? And why was it being staged in the Provincial Parliament? This is hardly a public space: se- curity was so tight that only members of government, their staff, and accredited visitors were admitted. Inside, in the grand lobby, two rather flamboyant members of the Police Education Unit fussed, with professional flourish, over a single tableau. The display was small but striking. A very still life, its centerpiece was a bed with disheveled sheets. Across them lay a life-size model of a female, race indeterminate, clad in the shredded remnants of upmarket underwear. Her body was bruised and bloody, her throat cut. A knife lay close to her face. Yellow tape cordoned this off as a crime scene, which was framed by posters and works of art, all depicting violence against women, all urging the public – in English and Afrikaans, but not Setswana, the local language – to “speak out against abuse.”

    What are we to make of this grisly spectacle, whose artful detail seemed so to exceed its function? Why, again, was a diorama ostensibly intended to educate “the public” placed so securely beyond its gaze? The actions and anxieties of the police ar- tistes offered a clue. The display had to be ready for viewing by the parliamentarians, political and civic dignitaries, and press people who had been invited to attend a cere- monial session marking the passage of the Domestic Violence Act. They were the tar- get audience. It was they who were meant to witness that, notwithstanding mounting skepticism, local police and local government could cooperate effectively to fight crime. But the investment of those responsible for the exhibit, and the emotional power packed into it, implied that it was also a site of self-construction. Its authors, in the name of the SAPS, seemed intent on configuring a collective sense of moral purpose in the face of a daunting world in which violence was thought to have become endemic, ubiquitous, even unpoliceable.

    What we were witnessing, in short, was the state performing for itself, performing itself. The state making statements. And drawing its charge from a violated female body that, in a shift from the older signifying economy, had come to stand for the moral citi- zen victimized by the new arch-enemies of the people. For the salience of the meticu- lous melodrama played out in this political setting was that it was a simulacrum of go- vernance, a rite staged to make actual and authoritative, at least in the eyes of an executive bureaucracy, the activity of those responsible for law and order. And, by exten- sion, to enact the very possibility of government. For the battle against crime, epitomiz- ed in sexualized attacks on women, has become diagnostic of the efficacy of the post- colonial regime at a time when the nation’s foes – its rapists and murderers, its gangs- ters and gunmen, its carjackers and drug dealers – are, for the most part, also its own recently-liberated subjects; this, recall, being one of the contradictions faced by the Poli- ce Museum in its efforts to revamp its signifying economy. In showing visible attentive- ness to the sanctity of the female body, to the specter of violence against it, and to poli- cing those who would desecrate it, the state objectified itself – to itself.

    But the institutional face of government also insists that it be recognized by its subject-citizens. Which takes us to the other face of police performance, its public en- actment. One such enactment came at us, literally, two months later. At 8.30 am on a Tuesday morning in downtown Mafikeng, as children rushed to school and businesses opened their doors, we heard an oncoming cacophony of horns and sirens. Obviously a motorcade. Down the street hurried a motley array of conveyances: a few lumbering Public Order Police trucks (aptly named “hippos” in the bad old days), a number of pat- rol cars, and several civilian saloons; about twenty vehicles in all. Each contained a few uniformed officers of different ranks and races, who waved energetically to those gathe- red in bewilderment on the sidewalks. On the doors and hoods of these vehicles were scrawled English signs. One condemned the abuse of women. The other proclaimed: “Give them toys, not guns,” invoking a growing concern about violent acts perpetrated by children. This, self-evidently, was yet a further nod toward crime prevention. But it was also an effort to establish a palpable police presence on the streets by playing on the nightmare of a nation consumed by brutality, a nation in which violated mothers were producing a generation of infant felons.

    People along the roadside, having discerned that the motorcade was “put on by the police,” paid it little heed. The once ubiquitous, menacing presence of the law has been drastically reduced here as elsewhere in the “new” South Africa. By contrast, poli- ce performances, especially under the sign of mass education and public relations, have become much more common. “The streets are full of tsotsis (gangsters),” one old man complained to us, “and all the police can do is play.” The choice of this last word will not go unnoticed.

    The observation itself has some ground. Local law enforcement officers, sensiti- ve to the ambivalence with which they are regarded, have devised various home-grown techniques through which to enact their visibility, efficacy, resolve, and responsibility be- fore a population fearful to inhabit public space. One of their performances – a fake traffic pile-up, staged without warning at a busy intersection in Mafikeng during the mor- ning rush-hour – was so authentic that it caused pandemonium. And one, all too real, accident. Ironically, the aim of the exercise had been to draw attention to a campaign for safe driving: carnage on the roads, much of it caused by alcohol and criminal negli- gence, is another evil besetting the province. So rapid has been the rising death toll that it seems less accidental than an index of new dangers lurking in the unrestrained pur- suit of freedom, not least the freedom to consume, that has come with the end of apart- heid. And with the expansive, and expensive, ethos of neoliberalism.

    Unlike the rape scene but like the motorcade, the accident inserted itself into the thick of street life. It deployed the full power of the law – the right to usurp public space and time, to conjure with truth, to evoke terror by mimicking death – all to impress upon “the community” the authoritative presence of the police, whose absence from crime scenes had been subject to much local criticism. But the smash was also intended, as was the Rabelaisian procession, to be a functional ritual: one that would turn popular ambivalence toward the SAPS into positive affect by dint of carefully staged emotions as transformative for the actors as for their audience. For here, again, the actors were the audience, the audience actors. Their drama was at once opaque to the public, yet made that public part of the staging. The unmarked pile-up, along with the illegible signs in the motorcade56 and the hidden-away exhibit at the parliament, implies a form of reflexivity in which the performers sought, by aping epics of disorder, to interpellate themselves as legitimate agents of caring enforcement: agents whose role in grappling with a new catalogue of national nightmares would be recognized, and respected, by the populace at large. For policing in this new era presumes a high measure of consent from citizens, a consent still very much in question.

    If, as Malcolm Young says,57 policing everywhere relies on “well-directed social productions” to maintain the mythic divide between good and evil, is it any wonder that the new SAPS, still struggling to define itself on a reconfigured moral and political land- scape, should evince a strong tendency to “act out”? Or, as in the Police Museum, that the line between staged performances and the melodrama of everyday police work should often disappear – which it does in many theatrically-staged, mass-mediated arr- ests. This was brought home to South Africans a couple of years back by a series of ostentatiously publicized raids, led with extravagant ceremony by the national chief of police, on those Johannesburg “gentleman’s clubs” alleged to be trafficking in alien sex-workers.58 While it did not lead to many arraignments, the operation dramatized a recur- rent terror of the reconstituted nation: the growing mass of illegal immigrants, archetypal others, whose very being-there is thought to endanger both the borders and the interiors of the postcolony. That such performances – many of which feature police showing off their mastery in melodramas of despoiled female bodies – may be tentative and dispersed, that they lack the compelling power often attributed by anthropologists to communal rituals, is precisely the point. It is through their uncertain playing out that the “new” South African polity is taking tangible shape.

    CONCLUSION

    We have argued that, in postcolonial South Africa, dramatic enactments of crime and punishment – alike those disseminated by the state and those consumed by vari- ous publics – are not merely fabrications after the event. Nor are they reflections, inflec- tions, or refractions of a simple sociological reality. To the contrary, they are a vital part of the effort to produce social order and to arrive at persuasive ways of representing it, thereby to construct a minimally coherent world-in-place; even more, to do so under neoliberal conditions in which technologies of governance – including technologies of detection and enforcement – are, at the very least, changing rapidly and are, in some places, under dire threat. In these times, criminal violence is taken to be diagnostic of the fragility of civil society; concomitantly, officers of the law become the prime embodi- ment of a state-under-pressure. Thus the irony of contemporary South Africans who, in the effort to build a post-totalitarian democracy, find themselves calling for “More Poli- ce.” Theirs appears to be a decidedly post-Foucauldian predicament, wherein disorder seems to exceed the capacity of the state to discipline or punish. It is a predicament in which both those who would wield power and their putative subjects find it necessary to resort to drama and fantasy to conjure up visible means of governance.

    This story could, of course, be read not as post-Foucultian, but as an historical narrative that proves the Foucaultian point; or, rather, that reinforces a Foucaultian te- los by playing it in reverse to show how, when modern power runs out, primitive spectacle returns once more. We would argue otherwise: that the distinction between politics- as-theater and biopolitics underlying this telos is too simple; that it is itself the product of a modernist ideology that would separate symbolic from instrumental coercion, melo- drama from a politics of rationalization. Melodrama may be the medium of first resort where norms are in flux and the state is incapable of ensuring order. But the history of modern policing suggests that theater has never been absent from the counterpoint of ritual and routine, visibility and invisibility, integral to the staging of power, and of law and order, in authoritative, communicable form; recall, one last time, the testimony, in this respect, of Malcolm Young, the policeman-ethnographer. That counterpoint, in short, lies at the very heart of governance, be it metropolitan or colonial, European or African, past or present.

    There is a more than arbitrary connection, then, between law enforcement, thea- ter, and dramatic fiction.59 Crime and punishment are especially salient to the reciprocal fantasy through which police and public construct each other across the thin blue line 60 that makes palpable the power of the state, the thin blue line that, imaginatively, stands between anarchy and civility, the thin blue line that underscores the fragility of order and gives focus to popular preoccupations with the threat of social meltdown. All the more so since, with the rise of global capitalism and the mutation of the old international sys- tem, new geographies of crime and terror, themselves ever more murkily interrelated, have re-articulated criminality inside nation-states with criminality across nation-states, making both harder to contain or comprehend. All the more so, too, since the world-his- torical conditions of this neoliberal age – among them, the weakening sovereignty of na- tions and their borders, the diminishing capacity of governments to control either the means of coercion or the commonweal, the challenge of cultural politics to the liberal rule of law and its grounding in universal human rights – have made policing in its mo- dernist sense difficult. Perhaps even impossible.

    This may be most readily visible in postcolonial, post-totalitarian contexts, where there is a paucity of civil institutions to counter the contraction of the welfare state. It is, however, as urgently felt in, say, the post-industrial north of England61 as in the norther- ly provinces of South Africa. And it expresses itself everywhere in the criminal obses- sions of both rulers and subjects. Thus, while much current opinion, stretching from li- bertarian to Foucaultian, might minimize the importance of “the state,” there is plentiful evidence in popular fantasy of a nostalgia for authoritative, even authoritarian govern- ment. This much is evident in the reflexive self-constructions of South African police, who dramatically inflate both the necessity to wrest community from chaos and their ca- pacity to do so. Their melodramas are founded on a dialectic of production and reduc- tion: on the productive conjuring of a world saturated with violence and moral ambiguity, the threat of which they alone are able to reduce to habitable order. Thus it is that, in their imaginaire, a metaphysics of disorder – the hyper-real conviction, rooted in every- day experience, that society hovers on the brink of dissolution – comes to legitimize a physics of social order, to be accomplished through effective law enforcement. Thus it is, reciprocally, that many ordinary South Africans are drawn to mass-mediated dramas in which men with badges confront, and typically overcome, the most heinous, most vio- lent, most antisocial of felons. Thus it is too, that, distilled in a fictional economy of representation, fantasies become facts, impossibilities become possible, and the law, as foundation of the nation-state, becomes visible once more.

  • Criminal Justice, Cultural Justice:

    Criminal Justice, Cultural Justice:

    Once upon a time, not so long ago, culture, in the lower case, was primarily an anthropological preoccupation. Not any more. It is hardly news that peoples across the planet have taken to invoking it, to signifying themselves with reference to it, to investing it with an authority, a determinacy, a superorganic unity of which even the most conservative anthropologist would be wary. Culture, now capitalized in both senses of the term, has come to provide the language, the Esperanto, of difference spoken in the active voice. And, as it has, its world-historical effect has been to unsettle all sorts of modernist certainties. Notable among them have been some of the premises and promises of Liberal Theory, its hegemonic conceptions of civilization and civitas, its obsession with reason and rationality, its idea of universal truth, its authorization of positivist empiricism. As never before, the liberal nation-state – the political apotheosis of that Theory, in the upper case – is being embarrassed by heterodoxy: by Culture as (i) a primordial alibi for naturally different identities, each of which warrants respect, recognition, room for self-expression, entitlement, and (ii) a solvent that, to the degree that it overlays race, class, generation, gender, and citizenship, reduces politics to what Tom Vanderbilt (1997:140) has dubbed “a host of special interest groups clamoring in the trading pits of pluralist relativism.”

    Not only the trading pits. Also the law courts. From the world over come ever more legal challenges to Euromodernist ways and means, challenges made in the name of otherness, of different kinds of cultural and confessional reason. Like the struggle by Muslims to have their daughters wear head-scarves in French schools, or Sikhs employed by London Transport to don turbans, or Orisha worshipers in the USA to sacrifice animals for ritual purposes, or Christian Scientists to refuse medical intervention. As these examples suggest, the phenomenon is not new, but there seems to have been an exponential increase in landmark cases since the late years of the last century. Most have involved relatively small, disempowered minorities, people who seek, sometimes with moderate success, to assert their difference, phrased as a right to freedom of belief, against the constitutional hegemony of the liberal modernist nation-state; female Muslim cops in Britain, for example, may now don a hijab fringed in the design of the Metropolitan Police.1 But, in postcolonies like South Africa, the situation is more complicated. Significantly so. Here, heterodox practices – some of them long criminalized by the colonial state, some of them regarded as dangerous by the canons of liberal modernity – are claimed by the majority of the population. Indeed, by the very citizens in whose name anticolonial struggles were fought. And to whose empowerment postcolonial democracy is ostensibly dedicated.

    In postcolonies, in short, the challenge of Culture to the sovereignty of the state, to its constitution and its rule of law, seems everywhere immanent. Note, in this respect, the assertive practice of female circumcision in countries that have legislated against it. Or the ascendance, recently, of Islamic sharia in the criminal law of northern Nigeria. Or, at the southern tip of the continent, the anti-constitutional practice of compulsory circumcision by some “traditional” authorities,2 many of whom joust openly with the law of the land under the sign of custom. The examples are endless. In South Africa, the issue takes on especially stark proportions. This, after all, is a postcolony whose government, the African National Congress, is trying to fashion a highly enlightened democracy under the banner ”One Law for one Nation” – and yet, at the same time, to free itself from a legacy of Eurocentric domination; a postcolony rooted in a modernist culture of legality that seeks, explicitly if uneasily, to make space for cultural diversity and customary authority; a postcolony whose Minister of Justice and Constitutional Development, Penuell Maduna, has expressed regret, publicly, that its Euromodern Constitution is not informed by “African jurisprudence.”3

    But to what extent is this possible? What are the limits of liberalism in accommodating difference? Can a Euromodernist nation-state, founded on the sovereignty of “One Law,” actually infuse itself with another jurisprudence? Would it not invite a descent into Hobbesian – or, worse yet, Huntingtonian – pluralism? And why, in this equation, does the law keep raising its head? The equation itself, moreover, presupposes a Manichean opposition between Euromodernity and an Africanist politics of Culture. Is this the most appropriate way of phrasing the problem of heterodoxy in the first place? More consequentially, what happens in countries like South Africa, where cultural beliefs enjoy a large measure of constitutional protection (Comaroff and Comaroff n.d.[a]), when customary usages do run up against the One Law for One Nation? Could this – the immanent clash between Culture and the Law – be the corollary of a contradiction built into the very scaffolding of all postcolonies, which, as we shall see, are erected, simultaneously, on singularity and difference? If so, how is it to be resolved? Elsewhere (loc.cit.) we argue that it is actually unresolvable within the canons of liberal theory and practice. Assuming that this the case, what do human beings actually do when heterodoxy hits the limits of legal tolerance? How do they address the contradiction? And what are the historical implications of their actions for the ever more voluble confrontation, across the world, between Euromodernist universalism and cultural relativism?

    We approach these questions, in South Africa, by way of a particular instance of the conundrum: the challenge to the state and to the One Law of the Nation posed by cultural practices deemed “dangerous” – dangerous because they imperil persons and property, defy received categories of legal reason, and flout the ways and means of Euromodern criminal justice. Of those practices, the killing of witches is perhaps the most acute affront to governance. Not only does it subvert the state monopoly over legitimate violence. It also calls into question the extent of cultural recognition actually afforded by the Bill of Rights. After all, the action taken against witches is justified by the belief that they present a clear and present danger to the lives of their compatriots and the well-being of their communities (cf. Auslander 1993; Ralushai et al. 1996; Geschiere 1997); also, by the allegation that government is putting citizens at risk, and thereby violating their rights, by failing to safeguard them from injury and death by witchcraft – an allegation given circumstantial weight by the incapacity of the severely over-taxed South Africa Police Services to cope with the forces of crime and disorder perceived to be pervading the country (Comaroff and Comaroff n.d.[b]).

    Patently, this kind of cultural policing is a scandal that no modernist state can ignore; it inevitably calls forth efforts to police culture. And yet, under the new South African constitution, traditional African practices cannot simply be criminalized. Herein then, at its most raw, lies the contradiction, the antinomy between Culture and the Law, of which we have been speaking. It has provoked some extraordinary responses on the part of both the judiciary and those who appear before it; one of them being to play ingeniously on the difference between the procedures of criminal and civil law, another to ply the space between judgment and justice. This is most readily visible in the countryside, at a distance from the centers of governance. Here there is more room for experimentation in coping with the implications of Culture for everyday life in the postcolony. Here, too, the pragmatics of the African vernacular make themselves most pressingly felt. Here, tellingly, is where an Afromodernity is being forged – in the teeth of the formal stand-off between liberal universalism and the demands of difference – by ways and means ways that vex such tired notions as “hybridity” or “syncretism.”

    Since the problem of the limits of liberalism and the pragmatics of difference – at least where we are concerned with it – has a great deal to do with postcoloniality, sui generis, we begin with a lateral move: a brief excursion into the life and times of “the” postcolonial nation-state in Africa.

    REFLECTIONS ON THE POSTCOLONY

    It is scarcely necessary any longer to note that “postcoloniality” – one of many contemporary terms marked by a prefixation on what they are not – refers to more than just “[the time] after colonialism” (Prakash 1995). Or to rehearse the fact that it means very different things to different people (cf. Darian-Smith 1996; McClintock 1992), be it a subaltern, “oppositional consciousness” (Klor De Alva 1995:245), a particular sort of “politics of…struggle” (Mishra and Hodge 1991:399), or the historical grounding of a species of literary criticism.4 And yet, in all the efforts to associate the term with a kind of sensibility, there has been a tendency to treat “the” postcolonial nation-state as something of a cipher on whose terrain arguments about the past, about identity, citizenship, consciousness, and other things, may proceed unencumbered by the bothersome details of actual histories, economies, or societies. Clearly, this is not the place in which to “theorize” postcoloniality, sui generis, whatever that may mean in this day and age. But, if sense is to be made of emerging forms of governance, politics, and popular subjectivity in post-apartheid South Africa, or elsewhere, a few thoughts on the topic are in order.

    They have to do primarily with hyphe-nation, with the link between nation and state, state and nation. Some of them, perforce, reprise things we have discussed in other places (e.g. 2000, 2001).

    The modernist nation, to recall Benedict Anderson (1983) and others, was erected on the often violent fiction of cultural homogeneity, on an imagined, if unevenly enacted, sense of “horizontal fraternity.” That imagining, it is often said, has always been more an aspiration than an achievement: the European polity, after Westphalia, is perhaps best viewed not as a singular, fully- realized, definite article but as an ongoing work-in-progress, one that has evinced a great deal of variation across time and space as it has sought to harness the forces of industrial capitalism – forces that have never been fully under its control. Furthermore, for all the idea, the idyll, that it was composed everywhere of right-bearing persons equal before the law, it excluded many from its political embrace and its commonweal. Typically, too, it was inhospitable to difference. Nonetheless, the fiction of a unity of essence, affect, and interest, of common purpose and civitas, underwrote the legitimacy of the state as sole guarantor of the collective well-being and individual entitlements of its citizens. Hence the hyphe-nation, the indivisibility of nation from state.

    Much has been said in recent times of the so-called “crisis” of the modernist polity under the impact of global capitalism: of its shrinking sovereignty; of its loss of control over economic policy, cultural production, and the flow of people, currencies, and commodities; of a growing disjunction between nation and state (cf. Appadurai 1990). Whether or not “the” nation-state is alive and well, ailing, or metamorphosing – we prefer the third alternative – one thing is patent. The received notion of polities based on cultural homogeneity and horizontal fraternity, real or fictive, is giving way to imagined communities of difference, of multiculturalism, of “ID-ology” (Comaroff and Comaroff n.d.[b]).5 This is true even in places as long antagonistic to heterogeneity as the United Kingdom, which, despite recent race wars on the streets of its northerly towns, now projects itself, with apologies to Benetton, as United in its tolerance of Color and Culture. And in ones like Botswana, perhaps the only democracy in the world with a claim never to have imprisoned anybody because of her or his political convictions, and long regarded, if not altogether accurately, as relatively homogeneous. To be sure, the rising incidence of cultural struggles and ethnopolitics since 1989 has called forth a torrent of scholarly argument (see J.L. Comaroff 1996). There is no need to retrace that argument here. For present purposes, we merely need to note the fact.

    For most postcolonial nation-states6 the politics of difference are not new. Heterogeneity has been there from the first. Born of long histories of colonization, these polities typically entered the new world order with legacies of ethnic diversity invented or exacerbated in the cause of imperial governance. Colonial regimes, intent on the management of racial capitalism, never constituted nations in the Euromodernist sense of the term, even where they gave their “possessions” many of the ceremonial trappings of nationhood. In their wake, they tended to leave behind them not just an absence of infrastructure, but a heritage of fractious identity struggles. This has been further attenuated, since fin de siecle, by some of the cultural and material corollaries of neoliberalism: the movement across the planet of ever more people in search of work and opportunities to trade; the transnational mass-mediation of signs, styles, and information; the rise of an electronic commons; the growing hegemony of the market and, with it, the distillation of culture into intellectual property, a commodity to be possessed, patented, exchanged-for-profit. In this world, freed is reduced to choice: choice of commodities, of life-ways, and, most of all, of identities. This at a moment when the moral and material processes that drive desire and fulfilment seem, ironically, to be less and less under local control. And when access to the means of survival, of accumulation and profit, are ever more polarized both within and across nation-states.

    As this implies, postcolonies evince many features common to the modernist polities on which they have had, to a large degree, to model themselves. In coming to terms with the implications of global neoliberalism, they appear, in fact, to exaggerate – or, more accurately, to hyper-extend – those features; all of which makes it seem as if, in their temporal aspect, they are running slightly ahead of the unfolding history of the Euromodern nation-state. Perhaps they are harbingers of the postmodern future. But that is a topic for another time. Our focus here is on two corollaries of the founding of postcolonies not on homogeneity but on difference, not on deep horizontal fraternity but on a social contract among persons who are at once right-bearing individuals and identity-bearing subjects.

    The first corollary has to do with the refiguration of citizenship. The explosion of identity politics after 1989, most notably in post-totalitarian societies, has manifested itself in more than just ethnic consciousness. Difference is also vested, ever more deeply, in gender, sexuality, generation, race, religion, life-style, and social class. And in constellations of these things, sometimes deployed in highly contingent, strategic ways. While most human beings continue to live as citizens in nation- states, they tend only to be conditionally citizens of nation-states: their composite personae may include elements that disregard political borders and/or mandate claims against the commonweal within them. In consequence, identity struggles of one kind or another appear immanent almost everywhere as selfhood is immersed into collective essence, innate substance, and primordial destiny (Comaroff and Comaroff 2001). What is more, the assertion of autochthony – which elevates to a first principle the interests, “natural” rights, and moral connectedness that arise from rootedness in a place of birth – has become an increasingly significant mode of exclusion within national polities; this, as Americans learned after 9/11, in proportion to the extent to which outsiders are held to undermine the Security of the Homeland or the Wealth of the Nation. It is, putatively, in the name of the latter that the state is becoming a metamanagement enterprise in the neoliberal world (loc. cit.):7 in the name of subjects who, even as they seek to be global citizens in a planetary economy of commodities and cultural flows, demand also to be shareholders in the polity-as-corporation. Herein, then, lies the complexity. The fractal nature of contemporary political personhood, the fact that it is overlaid and undercut by a politics of difference and identity, does not necessarily involve the negation of national belonging. Merely its uneasy, unresolved, ambiguous co-existence with other modes of being-in-the-world. It is this inherent ambiguity, we suggest, that makes the ostensible concreteness of concepts like “citizenship” and “community” so alluring.

    Of the modes of being that constitute the twenty-first century political subject, cultural attachments are often taken, popularly, to run deepest. In many postcolonies, they are also the most marked. As we have said, ethnicity, like all ascribed identities, represents itself as grounded at once in blood and sentiment, in a commonality of interest, and, by extension, in “natural” right; one of the great ironies of our time is that identity has become, simultaneously, a matter of volition and self- production through consumption and a matter of ineluctable essence, of genetics and biology. Add to this the fact that culture is increasingly seen, and legally protected, as intellectual property (cf. Coombe 1998) – even more, as a “naturally” copyrighted collective possession – and the conclusion is unavoidable: we are witnessing the dawn of the Age of Ethnicity, Inc. (Comaroff and Comaroff n.d.[c]). It comes as no surprise, therefore, that several ethnic groups have formally incorporated as limited companies; that a large number of others have established themselves as businesses to sell not their labor power but their heritage, their landscape, their knowledge, their religious practices (loc. cit; see also, e.g., Halter 2000; Oomen 2002:135); that yet others have successfully sued for the unlicenced reproduction of their symbols, sacred and secular; that serious scholars are beginning to see the “sustainability” of cultures to lie in their marketing and branding (Chanock 2000:26). Even in modern China, Dirlik (2000:129) tells us,“ethnic groups…which were defined earlier through political classification, are… beginning to perceive themselves also as `natural’ economic groups”; note, here, the stress on natural. Thus it is that identity, in the age of partible, conditional citizenship, is defined, ever more, by the capacity to possess and to consume;8 that politics are treated, ever more, as a matter of individual or collective entitlement, of ID-ology; that social being in general, and social wrongs in particular, are translated, ever more, into the language of “rights.”

    Self-evidently, in this light, the term “multicultural(ism)” is insufficient to describe the fractious heterogeneity of postcolonies. Demeaned in popular usage, it evokes images of Disney’s “Small World,” of college courses in non-Western literatures, of ritual calendars respectful of human diversity, and the like; in short, of benign indifference to difference. Neither as noun nor as adjective does it make clear the critical limits of liberal pluralism: that notwithstanding the utopian visions of some humanist philosophers, the tolerance afforded to culture in modernist polities falls well short of allowing claims to autonomous political power or legal sovereignty. In postcolonies, in which ethnic assertion plays on the simultaneity of primordial connectedness, natural right, and corporate interest, the nation-state is less multicultural than it is policultural. The prefix, spelled “poli-,“ marks two things at once: plurality and its politicization. It does not denote merely appreciation on the part of a national majority for the customs, costumes, and cuisine of one or another minority from one or another elsewhere. It is a strong statement, an argument grounded in a cultural ontology, about the very nature of the pluri-nation: about its constitution and the terms of citizenship within it, about the spirit of its laws and the division of its spoils, about its governance and its hyphe-nation. In South Africa this takes the form of an ongoing confrontation between Euromodern liberalism and variously expressed, variously formulated notions of “traditional” authority. And, by extension, the manner of their coexistence.

    Talk of rights, of culture as property, of citizenship, constitutions, and contestation, brings us to the second corollary that flows from the heterogeneous social infrastructure of postcolonies. Whether weak or strong, intrusive or recessive, autocratic or populist, the regimes that rule them share one thing: they speak incessantly of and for themselves in the name of “the” state. Like those born of Euromodernity, postcolonial African states are statements (cf. Corrigan and Sayer 1985:30). They give voice to more or less authoritative worldviews, sometimes backed by military might, sometimes by carnivalesque ritual (Mbembe 1992), sometimes by mass-mediated shows of rhetorical force. But their language is not arbitrary.9 It is the language of the law. The modernist polity, of course, has always been rooted in a culture of legality. Its subject, as Charles Taylor (1989:11-2) reminds us, was, from the first, an individual whose humanity and dignity were formulated in a grammar of rights and legal privilege. The global spread of neoliberal capitalism has intensified the grounding of citizenship in the jural:this because of its contractarian conception of all relations, its celebration of “free” markets, and its commodification of virtually everything, all of which are deeply inscribed in the vernacular of homo juris. It has also required that received modes of regulation be redesigned to deal with new forms of property, possession, consumption, exchange, and jurisdictional boundaries (cf. Jacobson 1996; Salacuse 1991; Shapiro 1993).

    All of this reaches its apotheosis in postcolonies, precisely because their hyphenation is so highly attenuated, because they are built on a foundation of irreducible difference, because they are endemically policultural. In them, the ways and means of the law – constitutions and contracts, rights and remedies, statutory enactments and procedural rituals – are attributed an almost magical capacity to accomplish order, civility, justice, and empowerment. And to remove inequities of all kinds. Note, in this respect, how many new national constitutions have been promulgated since 1989. Note also the explosion across the planet of law-related NGOs, Legal Resource Centers, Lawyers for Human Rights, and the like, whose offices are now to be found in the most remote of African villages. In South Africa, the language of legality has become so ubiquitous, the Constitution (in the upper case) so biblical, that virtually every organization has its own (lower case) analogue. There is even a Law Train that travels around the countryside offering free legal advice; its volunteer lawyers take pains to encourage all citizens to pursue their rights, and to address wrongs, by legal means.10 In the upshot – and, as we shall see, in ways both overdetermined and unexpected – the terminology of torts has come to loom large in the discourses and practices of the postcolony.

    But why this fetishism of the law? In policultural nation-states, the language of legality affords an ostensibly neutral medium for people of difference to make claims on each other and on the state, to transact unlike values, to enter into contractual relations, and to deal with their conflicts. In so doing, it produces an impression of consonance amidst contrast: of the existence of universal standards which, like money, facilitate the negotiation of incommensurables across otherwise intransitive boundaries. Hence its capacity, most obvious under conditions of social and ethical disarticulation, of the loss of political ideology, to make one thing out of many, to carve concrete realities out of fragile fictions. Hence, too, its hegemony, despite the fact that it is hardly a guarantor of equity. As an instrument of governance, it allows the state to represent itself as the custodian of civility against disorder – and, therefore, as mandated to conjure moral community by exercising a monopoly over the construction of a commonweal out of inimical diversities of interest (Harvey 1990:108). It is this, to return to our point of a moment ago, that is made manifest in the rash of new constitutions written over the past decade or so. Each domesticates the global-speak of universal human rights, an idiom that individuates the citizen and, by treating cultural identity as a private asset rather than a collective possession, seeks to transmute difference into singularity.

    It is an open question whether or not these constitutions, this obsession with human rights – indeed, the language of legality itself – yield empowerment to those who previously lacked it. They do not, after all, guarantee the right to a living, only to possess, to signify, to consume, to choose. Nonetheless, the alchemy of the law, like all fetishes, lies in an enchanted displacement, one that resists easy demystification: the notion, not altogether unfounded, that legal instruments have the wherewithal to manufacture something that was not there before, to yield social value, to achieve political ends, even to orchestrate social harmony (cf. Lazarus-Black and Hirsch 1994). Its charm also lies in the fact that it obscures the most brutal of truths: that, in the ordinary course of things, it is power that produces rights, not rights power; that law is itself a product of the political, not a prime mover in constructing social worlds; that it, alone, is not what separates order from chaos or an equitable society from a state of savagery.

    Put together the fetishism of the law and the policulturalism of the postcolony, and the outcome seems overdetermined: a polity in which struggles over difference – in particular, struggles over the authority to police the practices of everyday life – tend to find their way into the legal domain. Often, indeed, into the dramaturgical setting of the courtroom. But here, surely, there ought to be an abrupt end to our South African story. To the extent that contestations over things cultural land up in the realm of the juridical, and to the extent that this realm is dominated by institutions of state, what chance of success have claims made under the sign of “tradition” against the hegemony of the Constitution, against the Laws of the Nation, against the ideological infrastructure of Liberal Democracy? This rephrases, in more general terms, a question we asked earlier. In a world regulated by Eurocentric jurisprudence, should we not expect that any assertion of Afromodernity, or any argument for the sovereignty of the Kingdom of Custom, would have little prospect of prevailing? Would not the latter simply fade away of its own accord – or under the pressure of the former? American critical legal theory would probably concur, given its tendency to align the law with the power of the state; others, not least those who see multiculturalism as inimical to democracy, would hope that they were correct.11 The matter, however, is not so straightforward. Reality turns out to be much more complicated, much more protean.

    Apart from all else, the Kingdom of Custom is not dying out here. In some parts of South Africa, in fact, it is thriving (e.g. Oomen 2002); so much so that, in spite of the history of contempt evinced by the African National Congress for vernacular ethnicity – some of its cadres still regard “African tradition” as a colonial vestige – its official line has, increasingly, been to pay respect to cultural difference and to the authorities who rule in its name (Comaroff and Comaroff n.d.[a]). Recall, in this regard, Penuell Maduna’s plea for an African jurisprudence. At the same time, the ANC has tried hard to circumscribe the political salience of ethnic affiliations, among other things, limiting the role of local chiefs and kings largely to the ceremonial, the diplomatic, the pedagogic – and to the administration of minor disputes and matters of economic management (loc. cit.). This, self-evidently, is an outworking of the contradiction of which we spoke earlier, a contradiction framed, in South African public discourse, as a zero-sum opposition between Liberal Democracy and African Custom. But there is yet more to the story.

    FROM TOUGH JUSTICE TO ALIBIS OF UNREASON

    The Man Who Took his Neighbor for a Bat: Culture as Mistake

    In South Africa, the voices of legal universalism have a ready response to relativism, especially relativism in the guise of “dangerous” customary practices. It is to insist on a clear distinction between culture and crime. As Seth Nthai, a former provincial Minister in Charge of Police, once put it, “Belief is not a problem of law and order. Violence is a problem of law and order.”12 The Constitution may allow citizens to believe in witchcraft;13 to act on that conviction, however, to kill a witch, is a felony. For its part, the judiciary, given its ideological grounding, has no option but to sustain this distinction: if a Euromodern system of justice is to work at all, it has to presume that the causes and consequences of illicit behavior are matters of empirically-verifiable fact. In so far as the motives for that behavior are taken to arise out of generic conditions of human being, out of anger, jealousy, desire, need, greed, they must, logically, override Culture – and, by extension, the relevance of culturally-specific imperatives.

    As it turns out, a principled distinction between crime and culture is often hard to sustain, particularly in the remote reaches of the country, where the compelling force of custom is most keenly felt. And where the presence of the state is stretched thin. It is not merely that, to paraphrase Bourdieu (1977:2), there is a always some distance between the official road maps of “objective” law and the lived pathways of practice. We appear to be witnessing a historical shift: a shift arising out of the growing impact of a policulturalism that contests any hint of the criminalization of culturally-sanctioned life-ways. To make sense of this shift, let us take a step backward in order to move forward.

    Note the following case, heard in the Venda Supreme Court in the late apartheid years.14 One Naledzani Netshiava, a 25-year-old, had killed his neighbor, Gumani, with an axe. Netshiavha pleaded guilty to culpable homicide, and provided a statement through his council:

    I plead not guilty to murder.15 I deny that I intentionally caused the death of Gumani. I plead guilty to culable homicide in that I unlawfully and negligently caused [his] death. I had mistaken [him for] a bat and only later realised that I had struck a human being. The reasonable man would have foreseen that it was a human being and would not have killed [him]. I did not comply with the standard of the reasonable man, thus I accept [that I acted negligently].

    Netshiavha added that he had always been on good terms with Gumani and had not wished him dead. But he had been very “frightened by what had been happening.” The bench, represented by one Judge Klopper, evinced no interest whatever in what might have prompted a man of indisputable sanity to confuse his neighbor with a bat. The question of belief or cultural motivation was never addressed. Klopper concluded that Netshiavha had indeed intended to kill and, seeing nothing to mitigate the crime, found him guilty of murder.

    We shall return to this case. The judgment was later to be reversed. But mark here the invocation of the “reasonable man.” A concept with a venerable history alike in Roman-Dutch Law, in the South African courts, and in legal anthropology, it has loomed large in analytic discussions of comparative rationality; also in efforts to equate other ontologies with Western jural reason in evaluating intent and culpability across cultural divides (Gluckman 1965, 1967; cf. Wilson 1970). Interestingly, it is enjoying a new lease of life – both in jurisprudence and in popular discourse – as the Laws of the Land try to make peace with pluralism. Its invocation by Netshiava recalls a precedent, an appeal heard in the Umtata Circuit Court in 1933. That case, for reasons to be revealed in due course, has become something of a cause celebre. Here, too, the defense had argued that a killing was not murder but culpable homicide; again, on the ground that it had been committed in the “mistaken” belief that “a human being was an evil spirit.”16 The accused, Mbombela, had put a child to death on the assumption that it was a “tikolosh,” a witch familiar. In the original hearing, the judge had directed the jury to consider whether this “was a reasonable belief.” The standard to apply, he said, was not that of an “18-year-old native living…in his kraal,” but that of ”any reasonable person of his age.” Not surprisingly, the plea of culpable homicide was dismissed. Found guilty of murder, Mbombela was sentenced to death.

    In the appeal, the presiding judge, Judge De Villiers noted that there was no suggestion that Mbombela was of unsound mind. Under Roman-Dutch law, as a result, he could only be excused by mistake of fact if that mistake was rooted in a bona fide belief – and a “reasonable” one. De Villiers went on to say that, “by the law of this country there is only one standard of reasonable man.” If a special plea could be made for “a native aged 18 years and living…in his kraal,” it would follow that “in each and every case the standard would have to be varied so as to suit the… accused,” his “mental and moral and temperamental and racial idiosyncrasies.” At the same time, he found it undeniable that Mbombela actually did believe that he was killing an evil spirit. On that ground he reduced the conviction to culpable homicide and commuted the death sentence, quite dramatically, to twelve months in prison.

    Here we have an instance of what was to become a common strategy for reconciling legal universalism with cultural difference: the law saying one thing and doing another, muting its own convictions by commuting its sentences. We shall return to this as well. Let us merely underscore here the fact that, as the Mbombela case makes plain, for a killing to be exonerated, the killer had either to be “insane” or “mistaken.” If the latter, the mistake had to be based on a demonstrably rational belief. The tautology is obvious. It reduced African cultural reason to a cosmic error.
    Alibis for Unreason: Culture as Madness

    Although Mbombela and Netshiavha were tried over half a century apart, there was little difference between the ways in which the respective judges translated acts and facts deeply rooted in culture into the conceptual terms of the criminal law. Legal formality continues to demand that, when matters arising out of cultural alterity come to court, they be distilled into conventional judicial categories – murder, assault, and the like – and be evaluated according to “one standard” of individual responsibility.

    And yet there is growing pressure, in the policultural world of the postcolony, to recognize that collective beliefs and practices do have consequences for criminal justice. In recent times, South African courts have begun to concern themselves more frequently, and explicitly, with cultural conviction – and, if we may be permitted the pun, with cultural convictions. The problem they face is how, precisely, those convictions are to be dealt with under the still hegemonic terms of Euromodernist legal rationality. One solution has been to allow that culture, rather than being treated as mistaken belief, be regarded as a legitimate mitigation of crime. Which also has unexpected implications.

    Consider, in this regard, a case, fairly typical of its kind, from the High Court at Mmabatho, in the North West Province. Heard in 1995, it involved five young men accused of murdering Motlhabane Makolomakwa, the most prominent resident of Matlonyane village.17 Insisting that he had killed their fathers and turned them into zombies, the youths burned their victim to death (cf Comaroff and Comaroff 1999). The judge in the case did not hesitate to convict them of murder; each was ordered to serve twenty years. But he allowed two mitigating factors. One was “a belief in witchcraft”; the other, that, “on the day in question the [defendants] had also drunk liquor.” Here, then, culture is addressed directly. But it is a treated as a source of diminished responsibility, of a temporary loss of reason, on a par with intoxication. This decision echoes popular perceptions of the effects of witchcraft on those who kill under its influence: jailed murderer Anderson Tshibalo, for example, told a national TV audience in 1997 that those overcome by witches “lose consciousness” of their deeds.18

    The invocation of cultural beliefs in mitigation by South African courts remains uneven,

    however. Sometimes it rests on quite capricious assessments of the “sincerity” of those beliefs. This is particularly ironic because it is the alleged caprice of Culture, its irrationality, that is often used to justify the uncompromising application of universal legal reason – and to argue against any recognition of moral relativism. Indeed, the equation of Culture with unreason, coupled with judicial efforts to establish the sincerity of belief, can produce some odd effects. Thus an official of the Mpumalanga provincial government, charged with theft in 1998, pleaded that he had been bewitched to commit the crime. He was found guilty. Why? Because, said the magistrate, psychological testing had proven him “sane and aware of the consequences of his actions.”19 In other words, his claim to have been the victim of occult influence was a sham. Only if it could be established, scientifically, that he had been honest in that belief, that he had been unaware of the effects of his actions – and was, therefore, insane – could his behavior be explained by (un)reason of his cultural convictions. Which, at a stroke, were translated, by the language of the law, into a form of madness.20

    These strategies, we stress, are all contingent ways of reconciling the law of the land with the policulturalism of the postcolony; a postcolony whose liberal Constitution presumes the juridical indivisibility of the nation-state and yet treats cultural difference as a matter of right. However well- intended they may be, they are notably unsystematic, sometimes incoherent. But they are not the only solutions to the problem of Culture discernible across the broad terrain of a criminal justice system whose own social geography is expanding in direct ratio to the recruitment of black legal functionaries. Other, more substantive efforts to deal with the problem are taking root elsewhere, often unnoticed – and in terms which, while framed in the hegemonic language of the law, strive to remap its lived semantics.

    MIDPOINTS AND MEDIATIONS

    The law is no good. The courts don’t believe in witchcraft… They should bring a proven witch into the court room. That would convince them. –  Inspector Jackson Gopane21

    An early foreshadowing of these efforts is to be found in a case of which we spoke earlier, the case of the man who mistook his neighbor for a bat. In 1990, over two years after he was convicted, Netshiavha was given leave to appeal.22 His wife, the first to testify, told how, on the night in question, she had heard a scratching sound and had seen a bat hanging from the rafters. Her husband – whom, she stressed, harbored no ill feelings for Gumani, the deceased – went to fetch an axe. One of his brothers then told the court how Netshiavha had left the house and “chopped a creature that resembled a bat.” Later, the two men had seen an unknown beast crossing a fence nearby. Netshiavha had followed it and hit it with the axe. Another sibling added that he had seen “strange animals” en route home that night. Reaching the village, he found his two brothers standing next to a body: it was a small boy with the face of a man. He went to call the headman. By the time they came back, however, the corpse had turned itself into that of the victim. The next day, the police found Gumani’s clothes and money neatly wrapped and covered by a stone; sure signs, these, of witchcraft. They also discovered the remains of two wild animals, apparently killed by a car on the road.
    In addressing the court, defense counsel noted the difficulty of weighing up evidence in cases involving the occult. He stressed the absence of a motive for the murder. Presiding judge Richard Goldstone, now a Constitutional Court Justice, concluded:

    Objectively speaking, the reasonable man postulated in our law does not believe in witchcraft. However, a subjective belief in witchcraft may…have a material bearing upon the accused’s blameworthiness…As such it may be a relevant mitigating factor…In my opinion…it offers the only explanation for the [killing].23

    Goldstone insisted that Netshiavha had been negligent in wielding an axe against a man who had not threatened him. But he commuted the sentence to four years; in effect, to time served. In recalling the case, Justice Goldstone said to us, “I let him go.”

    The fact that this case was revisited, and the manner of its hearing, pointed toward a growing recognition of the gravitas of difference in South Africa at the dawn of the postcolonial age. In the appeal, a much wider range of contextual evidence was allowed to establish a meaningful frame within which the rationality of Netshiavha’s actions might be read. True, judgment stops short of permitting Culture, as a collectively inhabited reality, to inflect the notion of the reasonable in law; being a matter of “subjective” belief, it did not remove culpability. But the court’s decision suggested a new seriousness in addressing the relationship of “African custom,” however illunderstood, to criminal justice.

    That this judgment foreshadowed the spirit of the New Age is born out in another medium: popular cinema. Late in the 1990’s, a South African lawyer-film maker, Gavin Hood, made a movie entitled – over-determinedly, given what we have said – A Reasonable Man (Pandora Cinema, 1999). Hood, in fact, retrieved the record of the Mbombela case and updated it to explore the continuing ironies of crime, culture, and legal reason in the “new” South Africa. He himself plays a young advocate, a veteran of the apartheid era war in Angola, who happens upon a homicide in Kwazulu. A seventeen-year-old had killed the infant son of a neighbor, whom he took to be a tikolosh – recall, a fearsome witch familiar – moving under a blanket in the dark. As the case unfolds, Hood’s character is drawn into defending the fictional Mbombela. He is motivated by a parallel between the young man’s act of violence and a guilty secret of his own: under fire during a raid over the border some years earlier, he too had killed a child, misrecognizing its presence behind a door for that of a dangerous enemy. As it turns out, this device undermines the argument of the movie. For it shifts attention from the relativism of the “reasonable man” to the exoneration of the “reasonable mistake,” implying that the homicide was as much a justifiable error as it was a consequence of a compelling, culturally-validated reality – the tikolosh. Still, the film goes to great lengths to establish that ontological difference is an ineffable fact of life in the postcolony.

    As the drama plays itself out, the liberal lawyer is sucked into the Zulu occult, culminating in a surreal encounter with a sangoma, a traditional healer, who exorcizes his own repressed demons – and forces him to realize that her beliefs are as capable as any other of producing compelling truths, of redressing deadly conflict, of dealing with disorder. Thus enlightened, he throws himself into an impassioned defense of his client before the judge, an upright embodiment of the ancient regime. On the epic terrain of South African history, he pleads, European “civilization” has been every bit as capable of giving rise to misdeed, even atrocity, as has African culture. Indeed, any culture. At least the would-be tikolosh-killer sought to protect his kith and kin. The voice of the law seems unwilling to acknowledge comparative rationalities, however: even if the beliefs of the accused were not unreasonable in their own context, his action indisputably was. To second-guess universal reason is to invite an infinite regress into chaos. In the end, the movie, like its protagonist, is undone by this liberal paradox. It fails to make the case that difference is less random disorder than ordered variation, that all systems of reason are bound by cultural and historical particularity. Instead, filmic fiction follows factual precedent, settling for a solution of the sort we have already come to expect. It allows the law to repudiate culture by adjudging Mbombela guilty, but to take it centrally into account in handing down an almost exonerating sentence. By this means – by allowing judgment to ignore difference but justice to be determined by it – the two sides of the equation are, if not finally resolved, then at least reconciled.

    Intriguingly, a similar solution motivates an episode of the multilingual TV series, Justice for All, broadcast on SABC in 2000, which deals with a witch-killing in one of the northerly provinces. In it, a clear tension is portrayed between cultural justice and criminal justice. On one hand, the killer is treated by his community as a local hero, a perpetrator of cultural justice in the fight against evil; on the other, the criminal justice system handles the case as yet another superstition-driven homicide. Unable to dissolve the antimony, the court, cutting no slack to traditional beliefs, convicts the accused – and then, in the name of those very beliefs, suspends his sentence entirely. As he walks free, his kin and neighbors celebrate the result as a vindication of the force of custom.

    Both in Goldstone’s Netshiavha decision and in media representations of postcolonial law, then, we see harbingers of a resolution to the problem of culture in the “new” South Africa; albeit one that, in principle, leaves intact the antinomy between legal reason and relativist heterodoxy, crime and custom. But how far does the strategic separation of judgment from justice really take us? Are there other ways of opening up a dialogue between liberal universalism and the dictates of difference?

    THROUGH THE LOOKING GLASS, AGAIN

    Let us pursue the question in another setting, a magistracy in the Tswana-speaking North West, where the law, ever more under African supervision, comes into daily contact with the pressing demands of Culture. Here, at the nether end of governance, legal code and local custom act upon each other in supple, surprising ways. Just how supple is exemplified by a case that deals differently with the same issues we encountered above: dangerous practices, occult beliefs, reasonable conduct.

    We have seen that witch-killers may be tried in courts of law. Witches, however, are notoriously hard to indict under the provisions of Western jurisprudence; to wit, enlightenment reason denies the very existence of their arcane powers. It is still illegal, in South Africa, to accuse a person of witchcraft, even though most citizens actively believe in it; new legislation, currently under discussion, appears unlikely to accord the reality of its occult aspect any greater recognition than it now enjoys. That is why litigation arising out of magical malevolence has been so rare in the past; why, when it occurs, it is typically framed in terms that conceal its enchanted content; why, also, it is here that the problem of Culture for liberal modernism is most acutely posed. For there is, as we said earlier, a widespread perception that the post-apartheid state has failed to protect its subjects from the scourge of mystical evil. Nor is the perception new: colonial authorities also refused to accept the magical as a material fact, and insisted on criminalizing witch-finding, leaving African peoples feeling defenseless – and convinced that the Europeans were abetting the malevolent forces in their midst (Fields 1985).24 Many South Africans maintain that the Witchcraft Suppression Act of 1957 served to drive ritual malpractice underground (cf. Commission on Gender Equality 1999:22).25 Unsurprisingly, therefore, the advent of the postcolony, in the early 1990’s, saw the rise of assertive efforts on the part of local communities to rid themselves of an alleged upsurge of witchcraft, an “epidemic” that the ANC regime was no more capable of containing than had been its colonial predecessor. Precisely because of this – because they continue to confound secular reason and the legal capacities of the state – conflicts arising out of the African occult provide glimpses of the ways in which Euromodernist and Afromodernist sensibilities have perforce to reconfigure the ground on which they confront each other.

    The conflict with which we are concerned here came to the Lehurutse magistrate in May 2000 on appeal from the chief’s court at Dinokana.26 It involved a healer, witchcraft, adultery, and attempted murder, though in the end, the matter was not defined in any of these terms. The magistrate, Noah Makabanyane, thought for some time about how to define the dispute, opting finally for breach of contract, and electing to sit with two assessors famed for their knowledge of Tswana custom.

    The applicant in the case, Koketso Mogorosi, was an infant school teacher of limited means. The defendant Jameson Ntebalang, was a traditional healer, well known in Lehurutse for his mystical powers. Mogorosi testified that the dispute had begun in March 1997, when she had reason to engage a healer. She had been introduced to Ntebalang as a bona fide specialist, and while he did not examine her, he asked about her “troubles” (ditlalèlò; also distress, anxieties); she was in a menage a trois with a local headman and his spouse, whom she needed his help “to drive away.” Ntebalang told her that he would go to Botswana to procure the necessary medicine.

    According to Mogorosi, Ntebalang duly gave her two packets of “herbs” at the cost of R470.27 She withdrew all her savings from the bank, some R400, to pay him; although the medicine, she said, lasted only two days. The healer then requested the rest of his fee, and a further R1500, the price of a beast, for the man who had actually “dug” the herbs. Mogorosi protested that she had yet to see results, but Ntebalang disagreed: she had, he insisted, “got her man.” She had not, though. Her rival remained living in the headman’s homestead.

    Further treatments of various kinds had proved equally fruitless. But the healer nevertheless pressed Mogorosi for his fee. When she flatly denied any obligation to pay,28 Ntebalang took his case to the local headman, who found against him. Undaunted, he appealed to the chief at Dinokana, who ruled in his favor, ordering Mogorosi to pay a fine of R200 and the outstanding R1500. It was this judgment that Mogorosi was contesting in Makabanyane’s court.

    Ntebalang was then permitted to cross-question Mogorosi, a Tswana jural practice not usual in South African magistrate’s courts. The healer advanced a very different story. Had Mogorosi not asked him for medicine to “deal” with – kill, that is – the legal wife of her lover? Had he, Ntebalang, not responded that he did not have “that sort of medicine,” but could procure it in Botswana at a price to which she had agreed? Mogorosi denied this. The two assessors then questioned her further: Was it not wrong to pay the healer without witnesses, and to engage in such a transaction without her parents’ knowledge?” Had Ntebalang really not examined her? On what grounds was he demanding R1500? The magistrate then intervened: Was Mogorosi still involved with the headman? No, she replied. He had subsequently made off with her own daughter.

    For his part, Ntebalang reiterated that Mogorosi had approached him to dispose of her lover’s wife; he had responded by telling her that treatment of this kind was costly. She had agreed to a fee, which she undertook to pay once the medicine had done its job. Not long after, when he saw her in the village with a bandaged finger, she told him that she had come to blows with her rival at a social gathering. This, said the healer, was a sure “sign that the dipheko (medicine) was working.” And so he had set about trying to collect his due. She, however, claimed that, since she was no longer living with her “boyfriend,” the headman, there was no debt to pay. Ntebelang disagreed. Which is when he took his case to the traditional authorities.

    Mogorosi then cross-questioned Ntebalang: If he really was a traditional doctor, why had he not examined her by means of divining bones? Why had he used his medicines against her, afflicting her rather than her enemy? One assessor then tried to gauge the extent of his professional competence; the other inquired whether he was actually claiming money for “chasing a married woman from her home.”29 Was this sort of activity acceptable to the “Dingaka Association,” the national guild that claims to regulate traditional healing in South Africa? Ntebalang said that he thought that it was.

    At this point the case was adjourned. When it resumed, months later, Ntebalang was accompanied by a witness, his wife. She supported his version of events, elaborating on one point only. When Mogorosi had made her lethal request, the healer had warned her that it was “painful” to put a person to death; her phrasing here implied both moral and physical distress, distress to both victim and perpetrator. He had recommended a less drastic potion: one that would simply destroy all affection between the man and his wife. Both parties had agreed to this, she insisted, her testimony being designed to counter the implication that Ntebalang was guilty of witchcraft at its most lethal. But the assessors challenged her evidence. Their final questions were telling: “If a traditional doctor causes a person to flee from home, is that witchcraft or healing?” one asked. “It is witchcraft,” answered the wife. “Should a witch be paid for his actions?” “No,” she said, “but the medicines must still be paid for.”

    In light of the lateness of the hour, the case was adjourned until 4 February 2001, but the defendant was unable to attend court that day. The proceeding was thus remanded for a further five months. As the due date approached, Magistrate Makabanyane told us that Ntebalang was in prison for petty theft. It looked like Mogorosi’s appeal might be postponed indefinitely.

    The court recorder, a middle-aged woman, agreed that the case might never reach conclusion, albeit for different reasons. Whatever the assessors might have implied, she said, Ntebalang was a potent practitioner. Among his powers was an uncanny capacity to elude detection and to escape custody. Once, when apprehended during the 1980’s, he simply disappeared from his cell during a lunch recess. Someone later suggested to us that he might, on that occasion, have turned himself into a bat. In another celebrated instance, as he was being chased for house-breaking, he is said to have transformed himself into an anthill. A policeman, the story goes, actually leaned on him – or, rather, on the anthill – without realizing what, or who, he was up against. We did not think it appropriate to ask why, with these talents, Ntebalang had been unable to extract his money from Koketso Mogorosi. For his part, the magistrate was less taken by the defendant, whom he referred to, with legal precision, as a “so-called ngaka (healer).” He should know. Noah Makabanyane, chief magistrate of Lehurutse, had himself grown up in the household of a particularly eminent healer.30

    Although it ended inconclusively, this dispute opens up a unusual angle of vision onto the discursive place of the law in the postcolony. It also cuts a stunning swathe through the spare lives of people at the impoverished edges of the North West Province half a decade after the end of apartheid. Ostensibly about an unpaid debt, it embraced many things, all of them of great salience in rural communities: how women seek to sustain domestic relationships amidst economic uncertainty and moral flux; how the occult is mobilized to that end; how, in an era of rampant fraud, the bona fides of healers may be verified; how contracts are to be enforced; how fragile are the norms that govern interpersonal interactions under conditions of extreme scarcity. In short, how culture, in the vernacular sense of the term, is pondered and policed from the bottom up.

    We have noted that, under the prevailing Act, itself a reformulation of British colonial law, it is illegal to practice or accuse a person of witchcraft.31 We have also noted that new legislation is unlikely to grant the reality of the African occult, preferring to reduce it to a species of material practice – notably, to the use of indigenous pharmacopeia and, in particular, poisons – thus to displace a critical problem of Culture into the simple empiricism of criminal forensics (Commission on Gender Equality 1999:22).32 Meanwhile, as Mogorosi v. Ntebalang shows, the ways and means of the arcane arts, in all their cultural clothing, are openly entertained in African magistrate’s courts; vide how, in this case, the knowledge and skills of a healer were put to the test by expert assessors. There was never any hint that their interrogation would not be part of the official proceedings. Neither the legal status nor the facticity of witchcraft are on trial here. On the contrary, they underpin the judicial process. Magistrate Makabanyane told us that, like several other colleagues, he was planning to include a ngaka, a traditional doctor, as a permanent assessor on his bench.33

    Here, then, in a remote court run by a Tswana magistrate, is an instance in which the contradiction between Law and Culture in the “new” South Africa is confronted – and, in the most mundane, most unobtrusive of terms, a radical dialogue charted. Here contemporary African concerns are addressed without offending Euromodern legal reason, without taking even the shortest step down the slippery slope of eth(n)ical relativism into a Hobbesian world of moral chaos. There is, it seems, something beyond Leviathan. What we have seen through the window of an unassuming public building in Lehurutse may be peripheral. But it tells us something important about the present and future of the question of heterodoxy in South Africa. About the manner in which Afromodernity – a labile, more or less self-conscious ensemble of signs and practices, dispositions and discourses, theories and forms of knowledge, with reference to which a specifically African sense of the contemporary is being fashioned – is assuming its place in a world of liberal modernities.34 About Culture less as heritage or commodity, less as a sign of racial marking or an alibi for difference than as the description of a more-or-less open repertoire of styles, a mode of conduct, a set of pragmatic values always under (re)construction. Less as a proper noun, that is, than as an adjective: a thoroughgoing qualification to everyday life in the postcolony.

    CONCLUSIONS, OF VARIOUS KINDS

    Three observations are to be made about the ways in which matters cultural entered the realm of legal reason in Noah Makabanyane’s court.

    The first, to which we have already alluded, concerns the framing of the case. While patently about witchcraft – about a criminal conspiracy to attempt murder by arcane means – the suit was phrased as a breach of contract, with reference not to the legalities of Ntebalang’s occult activities per se, but to their implications for the social and material relations in dispute. In this way, a “dangerous,” exotic cultural practice was treated as neither dangerous nor exotic. Rather, it was made justiciable – although, by the letter of the law, it should not have been. Of course, the evidence in the record could, technically, have been used to indict the healer for his mystical machinations and Mogorosi for conspiring in them. But, even if the state had wanted to prosecute them, it would have been very difficult: apart from anything else, nobody could be shown, forensically, to have suffered from their conspiracy. In instances of alleged occult practice, after all, it is usually impossible to establish a direct link between cause and effect. Which is what makes it occult in the first place.

    Second, the Lehurutse tribunal refused to regard the African occult as a question of belief. It assumed, as do all Tswana, that witchcraft (boloi) belongs to the domain of cultural knowledge and everyday conduct. But a critical qualification here, one that recalls what we said earlier of culture, sui generis, in the lower case: Setswana, the local version of things African, has always been a labile, growing, more-or-less open ensemble of ways and means (see e.g. Comaroff and Comaroff 1991), one that, in its encounters with other worlds, has absorbed and experimented with, transformed and appropriated their practices – including, significantly, aspects of European jurisprudence (Schapera 1943), democracy, and other elements of modernity; in this respect, African customary law, which has always been responsive to historical conditions (Schapera 1970b; Roberts and Comaroff 1978), is much more like the common law in Europe than the dehistoricized, timeless chimera made of it under colonialism (see e.g. Moore 1986). The fact that Makabanyane’s court treated this case as arising out of a collective lifeworld, had a number of corollaries. Above all, it removed the need to evaluate the sincerity of the parties involved. Once cultural usages and expectations are no longer seen as a matter of personal persuasion, once they are taken to be the contextsensitive frame in which humans live out their lives, they become, by extension, the salient terms in which disputed behavior is to be assessed. Moral relativism, under these conditions, gives way to social contextualization: actions are judged by virtue of standards – Afromodern standards being wrought, in the pragmatics of the present, out of Setswana, the common law, the new Constitution, and whatever else comes to hand – deemed normatively apposite to the circumstances of the conflict. It is such norms, not abstract canons of universal reason, that are the measure against which the court decides culpability. Thus, while Makabanyane acknowledged the power of traditional healing, while he understood why Mogorosi might have gone to a specialist for help, while he appreciate the customary calculations that infuse the kind of agreement in question here, he did not exempt Ntebalang from legal or ethical evaluation. Law and Culture, in other words, did not require to be reconciled here because no antinomy between them was recognized to begin with. In the end, of course, Mogorosi won a victory of sorts: her appeal might not have been resolved, but, for practical purposes, Ntebalang’s disappearance voided her debt to him – and, with it, the finding of the chiefly court.

    The third point is procedural, but crucial. It moves us back, from Lehurutse and postcolonial South Africa, to the generic question of law, culture, and difference. Ntebalang v. Mogorosi, observe, was tried not as a criminal matter but as a civil suit; not as arising out of a conspiracy to commit murder, or out of a fraud, or out of any other kind of felony, but out of breach of contract. This is in line with much “traditional “ African jurisprudence, which makes no distinction between the criminal and the civil; it also resonates with a global explosion in the resort to tort law to settle scores that elude conventional political and legal mechanisms. Because the case was handled thus, it escaped the purview of the Witchcraft Suppression Act, indeed the criminal law tout court. Civil actions require different standards of evidence everywhere: they are less concerned with forensics than with the circumstantial; with evidence, that is, which is socially and culturally sensitive to the context out of which the dispute arose. As a result, questions of abstract reason and legal principle are rendered secondary. And more flexible procedures may be followed. Remember how Noah Makabanyane allowed the litigants to cross question each other and encouraged ritual experts to interrogate both of them; all of which interpolated vernacular judicial routines into the formal workings of the justice system. The general point is clear. Once criminal cases are transposed into civil ones – once criminal justice becomes cultural justice – practices like witchcraft may be treated as a matter-of-fact reality.

    In sum, what we have here, in Noah Makabanyane’s court, is a practical philosophy under construction (cf. Evans-Pritchard 1937). Thus it is that “dangerous” practices are made more tractable to legal reason. Thus it is that the conundrum of heterodoxy may be confronted. Thus it is that, largely unremarked, an organic African jurisprudence comes to infuse the One Law for One Nation. Thus it is that the distinction between Euromodernity and Afromodernity is renegotiated, the content of each redrawn. Thus it is that colonialism gives way to postcoloniality. How common are the processes we have described? Hard to say. But the signs, many of them, are readily evident in the courts of the North West. Clearly, as we have said, there is greater leeway for experiment in more remote institutional contexts and in situations perceived to pose little threat to public order. Homicide, for example, is an altogether different, more difficult species of problem; although, as the two O.J. Simpson trials demonstrated in the USA, civil proceedings may yield judgments in cases of violent felonies that are much more socially acceptable, and credible, than those of the criminal justice system.35 It is also a matter of record that there have been campaigns – among them, one in the Netherlands in the 1980’s – for the radical reduction of criminal (in favor of civil) justice, even in the instance of murder; similarly, that, in banning capital punishment, the South African constitutional court invoked, as one of its justifications, ubuntu, the principal of African humanity, thereby interpellating into the law of the land a fundamental sociomoral tenet of Afromodernity. But, more important here, it is not spectacular felonies that make up the vast bulk of journeyman jurisprudence, day in and day out, over the length and breadth of the country. It is the most mundane of misdeeds and misdemeanors. The very kinds of thing that brought Ntebalang and Mogorosi before magistrate Noah Makabanyane.

    It is not only in the legal domain that the ways and means of an Afromodernity are being actively forged. Parallel process are occurring in the spheres of religion, education, business, the media, the expressive arts, and elsewhere. But the challenge of policulturalism to Euromodernity is most acutely felt in the realm of the juridical – precisely because liberal democracy, and with it the hyphenated scaffolding of the postcolonial nation-state, is so deeply inscribed in the sovereignty of One Law. This is all the more so in neoliberal times: times in which the promise of constitutional empowerment, of liberation, meets the privations of a deregulated economy; times that are not just postcolonial but post-proletarian; times marked by a growing inequality of means; times in which the appeal to Culture, as a primordially-ordained “natural” right, has become part of the quotidian language of entitlement; times in which ideology gives way, in quickly measured steps, to ID-ology. In these times, a politics is emerging that, for reasons we have spelled out, turns autonomically to the law to redress social disarray, moral decay, material deficit. That this politics fails to engage the architecture of the new capitalism in South Africa, that it merely skates its surfaces, is a constant, and serious, plaint of social critics; turning class actions into class action, or into any other kind of cogent collective dissent, appears as an anachronism. But the mutating landscape of the law – or, more precisely, the metamorphosis of politics into law – is changing the terms in which postcolonial realities are experienced, understood, negotiated.

    What we have narrated, then, is a dialectic-in-motion, an historical process that pivots on the horns of a contradiction. Dating back to the dawn of colonialism, when the earliest evangelists of Euromodernist enlightenment sought to rule peoples they defined as parochial and culturally other, this contradiction is reproduced in especially acute form in neoliberal polities. As we have said, there is no resolution to the antinomy between (i) the One Law for One Nation, its unremitting commitment to legal universalism under the new Constitution of South Africa, and (ii) the primordially-sanctioned demands of heterodoxy in this policultural society. Progressive philosophers and jurists may wish there were a resolution; some have written programmatic blueprints for plural democracies, appealing to concepts like multiculturalism, hybridity, and syncretism in pursuit of a vision that, so long as it seeks to encompass diversity within the hegemony of a Eurocentric liberalism, must remain entrapped in its own paradoxical formulation (Comaroff and Comaroff n.d. [a]). But, as long as the Bill of Rights and the precepts of Custom diverge, as long as the former is given priority over the latter, until one relinquishes sovereign authority to the other – which is highly unlikely, given the political demography of difference in South Africa – the contradiction will not, cannot, go away.

    Nonetheless, as the Lehurutse case indicates, those who toil within that contradiction, those who have perforce to produce a practical jurisprudence at the impasse between Law and Culture, find contingent means of doing so, means that often go beyond both the Law of the Land and the Kingdom of Culture. In this, they resort less to “hybrids” or “syncretisms” than to a living, growing vernacular modernity. This Afromodernity is being fashioned out of constituent elements taken from a wide variety of (re)sources. It is the voraciously creative process out of which the postcolony is being made. In seeding itself on ground long monopolized by Euromodernity, the Afromodern gives play to a pragmatics of difference in ways that challenge the limits of liberalism as never before. From the bottom up. Thus are humble new beginnings, new imaginaries, being forged in those undersides, those margins, of the “new” South Africa that most of its citizens call home.

    Postscript:
    In December 2002, Limpopo Province police announced that they were to indict a sangoma, a healer, for performing a “magic ritual” on two murder suspects: he had allegedly smeared them with goat’s blood to make them invisible to officers of the law.36 What the healer had done, they said, was no different, legally, from harboring a fugitive. Optimistic that they would win a conviction, they insisted that the act of abetting a felony, even if by witchcraft, is itself always a crime of commission. Note here, one last time how protean, in practice, is the distinction between Culture and Criminality. By these lights, of course, Ntebalang would probably have been charged of conspiracy to commit a homicide and found guilty. The public prosecutor in the Limpopo incident, Jan Henning, was less sanguine about the ease with which matters magical reduce to criminal forensics: “It is going to be very interesting…to see how the courts handle evidence on whether ritual to make the boys invisible was effective. It could turn out to be a very difficult case.”

  • Reflections on Liberalism, Policulturalism, and ID-ology

    Reflections on Liberalism, Policulturalism, and ID-ology

    How do the nation-states of the twenty-first century – nation-states increasingly forced to come to terms with the ethnic heterogeneity of their citizens – deal with the problem of cultural difference? How, in particular, does the Constitution of post-apartheid South Africa – widely believed to be the most enlightened in the contemporary world, the most tolerant of diversity – strike a balance between the “One Law” of “The Nation” and the plurality of customary beliefs sustained, as a matter of right, by the various peoples who make up this postcolony? What happens when the Constitution and Custom appear to contradict one another – and raise questions of basic human rights, even of life-and- death? How are such contradictions managed, resolved, dissolved, disclaimed? Who has the authority to police the cultural lives of a citizenry when the majority recognize legal orders other than that of the nation-state itself? These questions are addressed in a critical, broadly situated analysis of the confrontation between the Constitution of South Africa and the Kingdom of Custom of one of its indigenous peoples, drawing on a complicated case, involving death rituals, argued before a high court judge in the lexicon of modern jurisprudence. It demonstrates how a “living constitution,” tolerant of everyday ambiguity and quotidian contradiction, is being forged in the space of strategic engagement opened up by the alternative languages and cultures of legality that exist in this postcolony. And in others like it.

  • Transparent Fictions, or the Conspiracies of a Liberal Imagination

    Transparent Fictions, or the Conspiracies of a Liberal Imagination

    “Only connect.”
    E.M. Forster, Howard’s End

    Ours, it appears, is an Age of Obsessions.

    It is an age in which people almost everywhere seem preoccupied, simultaneously, with transparency and conspiracy. With the lightness and darkness of being. So much is this so that, in 2001, a year that has long signified the cinematic surreal, an outbreak of livestock disease in the United Kingdom is attributed by ordinarily rational people to everything from the secret machinations of the prime minister1 to the covert operations of animal rights activists, from the illicit import of cheap meats by the Ministry of Defense to Iraqi biological warfare.2 No wonder the country is alleged to be “on the verge of a nervous breakdown…[which] has no root in real facts and figures, only in a diseased imagination.”3 At the same time, in the United States, after a presidential election that gave the nation much to be really suspicious about, the media tell their mass publics one thing above all else: “Trust no one.”4 Conspiracy, in short, has come to fill the explanatory void, the epistemic black hole, that is increasingly said to have been left be- hind by the unsettling of moral communities, by the so-called “crisis of representation,” by the erosion of received modernist connections between means and ends, subjects and objects, ways and means. All this in a global world that is at once larger and smaller, more and less knowable, more and less inscrutable than ever before.

    If conspiracy is the autonomic explanatory trope of our age, its conceptual grounding lies in its obverse, in transparency. It is, therefore, with the latter that we begin.

    The current preoccupation with transparency reveals a distinct shift in our understanding of the term. At least according to Zizek (1997:131). When used in relation to modern technolo- gy, he argues, it presumed the possibility of actually uncovering “how the machine works”; but, in its postmodern sense, the word implies the exact opposite. This, Zizek explains, is epitomiz- ed in the signifying economy of computer screens, whose cartoon icons may simulate everyday reality with beguiling concreteness; yet they conceal the real workings of the machine behind the glass facade, contriving the kind of legibility that renders the technology itself opaque. Is this so? Perhaps, perhaps not. For many of us, the dials on our dashboards and telephones be- speak a mechanical reality only slightly less impenetrable, suggesting that there has been a shift of degree, not kind. But Zizek reminds us of two things. The first is that our obsession with transparency is not unprecedented; the second, that changing patterns of illumination cast new shadows and, with them, new domains of darkness beyond their arcs of light. In fact, the more literally we believe in the axiom that to “see is to know,” the more haunted we are by what hovers beyond the edges of the visible. The sublime is obscure, according to Burke (Mitchell 1986:126), eluding ordinary sight. It is the precisely the relation between the manifest and the inscrutable – or the front and backstage, to invoke Goffman’s (1959) more mundane, dramaturgical image – that undergirds the enduring fascination evinced by human beings almost every- where with the properties of power. As David Graeber (1996:8) observes, invoking Hobbes on idolatry, the invisible is by nature unspecific and, hence, of infinite possibility. Efficacy and influence, alike in rhetoric and realpolitik, lie largely in controlling the capacity to reveal and conceal, to make “reality” appear or disappear.

    The essays in Transparency and Conspiracy provide rich, varied evidence of an impul- se, palpable across the face of the planet, to reveal the hidden workings of power. And to unco- ver its tangled complicities. This impulse is part of a more general zeitgeist; Tony Karon refers to it as “epic paranoia,”5 describing it as a readiness to connect apparently random, dispersed features of ever more impersonal worlds into tight configurations of collusion and menace, be they local sagas of harassment and corruption or worldwide, even extra-terrestrial, cabals of fanatical terror. For most Americans, the cataclysm of September 11 served to confirm – spec- tacularly, implosively – the global reach of evil empires, of secret networks of crazed killers, of suicide cells that would foment Armageddon by infiltrating the innocent forms of everyday life in the “civilized world.” But well before that day, well before that moment of revelation and radical rupture, it had already been noted how educated Europeans have come regularly to be consu- med by frightening reports of ever new hazards lurking unseen in the social fabric. Many of them, ironically, are thought to emanate from across the Atlantic;6 although Africa, of course, has long been the ur-source of epic, epidemic fears, its perennial place beyond the arc of light making it a fertile feeding ground for Eurobsessions with inscrutable dangers of one kind or an- other. Along with this, as its condition of possibility, goes a passion for “see-through visibility” that stretches from proliferating rites of national and institutional accountability to the aesthetics of public buildings and domestic design.7

    As we have already intimated, none of this is altogether new, even though the anxieties of the moment may suggest otherwise. While that does not detract from the importance of the studies collected here – quite the converse – it underlines the essential truism that change is always also, in crucial respects, continuity: that cultural creativity involves not merely incessant improvisation on existing themes, but also the re-presentation of reality in terms that are “al- most the same but not quite” (Bhabha, as cited by Humphreys). Thus it might be argued that, while moral panics about the workings of conspiracy have waxed luxuriantly after the Cold War, so did McCarthyism after World War 2. And fascism after the war before that. Each was an ur- gent hyper-rationalization of mundane modes of explanation common in the contexts from which it sprung. What is more, these outbreaks bear some resemblance, as populist theories of cause, to the millennialism and witch cleansing that occured in many non-Western societies af- ter colonial conquest. Paranoia and political theory, Hellinger notes, are often not easy to sepa- rate in practice; both exist, in large part, in the eye of the beholder. These divers manifes- tations of moral panic might be viewed, in other words, as just so many chapters in a long-runn- ing narrative, as so many variants on an old modernist theme, as a story “[which] remains the same, yet is constantly changing” (cf. Comaroff and Comaroff 1999).

    At the same time, the proportions of change to continuity, of rupture to repetition, are neither over-determined nor immutable; they are always labile, always liable to alter. There is, we believe, an immanent historical logic to the current chapter of the story, to the one writing itself just now, that does point to an epochal shift, to significant historical discontinuities amidst the continuities. We do seem to be caught up, at the turn of the millennium, in a swelling tide – an overabundance, Humphreys calls it – of claims to discern the destructive hand of evil agents, from devil-worshipers, witches, and global jihadistas, through purveyors of death in the name of spiritual truth, to pedlars of human body parts, genetically modified foods, and other nefarious commodities. Their malign machinations are envisaged as cumulatively universal in scale, even though they are made manifest in very particular sites; like the Satanists who target sleepy towns in the South African heartland, or international kidney snatchers with a penchant for New Orleans airport, or faceless felons who pollute the US postal services with biopoisons. It is true that the quests to divine their identities – with their attendant rituals of unmasking, con- fession, and apology – have precedents in earlier times; times when the pursuit of transparency likewise kindled the popular imagination, prompting a passionate pursuit of hidden truths and moral crusades; times also, as it turns out, of epochal shift. Thus, for example, the great trans- formation that ushered in the so-called “modern” world was also a period of feverish effort to find covert connections, to discern the invisible hand that gave design and purpose to a univer- se made opaque, through great economic and technical change, to contemporary theories of cause and effect; indeed, of history-in-the-making. As we have said elsewhere, we may be, at present, in the formative stages of a social revolution every bit as radical as that of 1789-1848. Several critical features of the current moment reprise, as prefixations, that earlier time; (neo)li- beralism and (neo)Protestantism, for instance. Then, as now, ontological categories and expla- nations were in flux, sparking debate about the definition of personhood and civil order, about the nature of economy and society, about the proper constitution of the state. It was a debate that struggled to frame new vocabularies and to reconcile an enhanced sense of human agency with a concomitant understanding of the “objective” forces of history.

    Optical Illusions

    It is exactly this kind of reprise — the Elightenment replayed “with a vengeance” – that Harding and Stewart see in the “paranoid” fixations of millennial America; these fixations show a “haunting trace” of sensibilities excluded by the idioms, the very obsessional explicitness, of our therapeutically-minded culture. And it is to the Enlightenment that we must look for the ori- gins of the modernist language of transparency and conspiracy; also for the signs and concepts that comprise the mis-en-scene of liberal empiricism. For it was the progressive dissolution of the Great Chain of Being, of theodicy and ecclesiastical authority, that cast humankind adrift in a material universe whose mundane truths had to be learned anew by patient, self-willed sub- jects, equipped only with sense and reason. The blind sage in Eco’s The Name of the Rose (1983) cedes his place, as the keeper of truth, to a prosaic English empiricist, who, with the aid of vision-enhancing spectacles, produces knowledge by collecting and connecting “clues” lying on the face of the world. In this universe, “seeing is believing.” Mortal beings, says Foucault (1975), increasingly made themselves both the objects and the measure of knowledge, their lives and deaths to be read less as a sign of cosmic metaphysical forces than as the sum of mundane biophysical processes, knowable primarily through the modest art of observation. Thus it is that the autopsy could become paradigmatic of the forensic gaze; thus it is that the corpse, its vitality, motion, and social connectedness all erased, could provide a “black border” within which the interior logic of life itself might be brought to light. Yet the very exclusions that permitted this illusion of transparency and order — that set the body apart from sociomoral en- tanglement to proclaim that truth inheres only in concrete evidence contained within the discre- te, anatomical individual — ensured that the definition of life captured by biomedicine was ende- mically limited, bereft of myth and mystery. Less tangible properties of being fell outside of its purview. This remains true of radical empiricism, sui generis : it continues to privilege sight over all other forms of perception, to restrict communication about the real to apparently transparent modes of representation, and to dismiss out of hand anything unsusceptible to positivist accounting, from the force of metaphor or moral values to the power of Vodoo or paranoid fantasy. Of course, the dialectical play of visibility and concealment, of darkness and truth, is not just a Dialectic of Enlightenment, so to speak. As we implied earlier, it is probably as old as poli- tics itself. The emergence of the Greek “public,” for instance, has been described as a process of “unveiling” in which powers, formerly secreted in the hands of aristocrats, were revealed for all to see (Vernant 1983, cited by Graeber 1996:11). The quest for transparency, in sum, has a long genealogy. But its techno-empiricist connotations were born of optical imagery associated with a specific period in the history of modernity (Comaroff and Comaroff 1991:185f), of its ma- terialities and moral discourses. The likes of Mumford (1934:124) have gone so far as to argue that the development of large-scale glass production was crucial to the evolution of a modern objectivist worldview. This claim suggests rather too stark a technological determinism for our own tastes. But it does seem clear that the phenomenological impact of glass – the everyday experience of its materiality – did much to shape the analytic sensibilities of the Age. Specta- cles, telescopes, microscopes became physical extensions of the human eye; as Mumford (1934:131) notes, they helped render the mysteries of nature “transparent.” And they fixed the idiom of all forms of knowing, not least of the workings of society. Mitchell (1986:166), for one, has remarked on the central place of optical metaphor, of images of “rational transparence,” in the writings of post-Enlightenment political theorists of all stripes, from Burke to Marx. This fo- cus on transparency also produced its own obverse: a concern with refraction, distortion, con- cealment, collusion. And a symbolic lexicon to go with it: note, in this respect, not only the ca- mera obscura – itself a famously telling icon of the dangers attendant on taking visible truths at face value – but also the hidden hand and, most of all, the fetish.

    To be sure, it is precisely its revelatory language, its argot of optics, that discloses the dark underside of Enlightenment, its traffic with discourses of unreason, race, and empire. Illumination — a condition of consciousness recognizable only to those freed from benighted savagery – was a key trope of humane imperialism, giving moral force to a host of “civilizing” crusades at once spiritual and secular. Not only did the idea authorize a blanket assault on the “primitive” lifeways of sundry others. It also shaped the everyday practices of European colonization at their most substantial. Missionaries to the heathen in southern Africa, for instance, took great pains to persuade their would-be converts to build large windows into their houses. Why? To illumine the dusky interiors of their lives and beings, leaving superstition and mystery no place to hide; to make the home a place of edification, self-construction, surveillance; to achieve a salvific lightness of being (Comaroff and Comaroff 1997a:278).

    The inverse of transparency in the imperial imagination, McCarthy Brown shows, was the concept of the fetish. This was the standardized nightmare of savage unreason, of depraved idolatry: fetishism evoked a childlike propensity to bestow life on “inanimate things,” insisting, with a kind of primitive paranoia, on the sort of essential, fateful connectedness between people, objects, and spiritual forces that had become anathema to a Cartesian consciousness. The primeval status of superstition and witchcraft in evolutionary histories of the modern West, like the pejorative attitude toward Voodoo and other practices likewise deemed “magical” in contemporary America, is persuasive evidence of the enduring usefulness of the fetish as a ra- cinated foil to Eurocentric images of clear-eyed reason. This lends ironic power to Marx’s refle- xive notion of commodity fetishism, that unsettling reminder of our own civilized idolatry, not to mention the alchemy that hides in the light of our own “rational” market economy.

    If the genealogy of transparency-as-trope cuts a revealing swathe across the history of the modern empirical imagination – being finely tuned, as we have seen, to the changing regis- ters of ordinary experience – its latest unfolding points squarely to the future. Thus the mechanical optics of the Industrial Age have been upgraded in, and interdigitated into, the digital era: Windows now come from Microsoft, whose corporate leaders speak as new-age missionaries for the liberating power of knowledge. The e–revolution – or, more properly, evolution – holds out the promise of a radically democratized McWorld; although some believe that promise to be pure elusion, an infantile e-scape from the more concretely pressing political realities of our times. Maybe. More salient for present purposes, the digital age brings with it the dread of ever more extensive, nefarious, tangled webs of cyber-intrigue as hackers, militias, fundamentalists, pornographers, syndicated criminals, and schemers of all stripes gain unregulated access to means of mass communication. As the division of labor everywhere becomes increasingly glo- bal, local communities across the planet are enmeshed in economies of expanding scale and abstraction, ensuring the ever more mundane experience of realities – like long-distance mig- ration, IDs and credit cards, virtual communities, digital money, electronic frontiers — that eschew any simple division between the legible and the opaque. If ever there was evidence of the dangers of too literal an application of these dichotomies, either as a mode of analysis or as a political call to arms, it is now: now, when the numbing complexity of material, social, and cultural flows across the earth presents us with a plethora of realities that are, at best, translucent. Realities, that is, that are neither transparent nor opaque, neither in plain sight nor hidden from view. We struggle, as Schrauwers says, to see “through a glass darkly,” much like social think- ers did in the ferment of the first Age of Revolution. Now as then, we must be suspicious of the imperious claims of naive empiricism, especially in the name of technical necessity – be it biological, economic, or environmental. We in the human sciences need to fight for multiplicity and polyphony in the ways in which we may come to know the world; also for a broadband sense of what might count as evidence. And we must advocate for the significance of the unseen, for regarding as critical those forces in the world that do not present themselves in technically measurable proportions, from the social effects of abstract capital to the material implications of anomie. Above all, we need to recognize that it is the very complexity of our times, the under- mining within them of the architecture of social certainties, that prompts the quest for simplifying truths, for reassuring melodramas of good and evil, for magic that would translate complicated structural influences into the language of personal desire, animosity, forgiveness. All of which is as true of new social and economic theory as it is of new social movements

    Beyond Empiricism:

    With this in mind it is instructive to reflect, as several of the contributors to Transparency and Conspiracy have done, on contexts in which liberal empiricism has come into contact with rather different local understandings of power and agency, whether among minority communities in Europe and America or in postcolonial Africa, Korea and elsewhere. Take the African case. Here, as Sanders and West both make plain, the “harbingers of a brave new transparent world” are often unaware of the intricacies of vernacular conceptions of power – and, hence, of the mystifying effects of their own languages and practice, whether they be the introduction of ID’s or democratic voting procedures. It is not that local discourses lack their own ideas of visi- bility and concealment. Much has been written about secrecy and revelation on the continent, past and present; also about ontologies of witchcraft, sorcery, exorcisms, and purges, forms of cultural practice that provide paradigmatic instances of conspiracy theories in action. Yet the ambivalent reception of ballot boxes in rural Mozambique indicates that “transparency” means different things in different places: where communities are used to a public show of hands, for example, the “privacy” of the ballot box evokes suspicions of concealment, especially in places where memories of colonial surveillance still linger. Likewise, party politics often connote a form of cabalistic collusion, a lack of the kind of accountability expected from hereditary rulers or single-party systems (Comaroff and Comaroff 1997b; Karlström 1999). But, even more than this, where understandings of the operation of power are vested in the ongoing interplay of the manifest and the invisible – of humans and spirits, words and deeds, persons and context – discourses about the capacity to act in and upon the world assume a distinctive shape.

    In fact, as West notes, in much of Africa, politics is taken to be a perpetual “game of hide and seek.” Here leaders are always sorcerers of a kind. For sorcery, whether turned to good effect or ill, requires a kind of vision more profound than that usually implied by European empiricism; insight like that of Sanders’ Ihanzu “seer,” who is attuned to the invisible “real reali- ties” thought to animate the tangible, everyday world. Like Freud’s paranoic (see Humphreys), the seer sees something that escapes normal people. Only, in his case, the knowledge is made socially salient and useful. Such visionaries – and the objects that help them bring things to light, from oracles and “traditional X-rays” to severed heads and identity tokens – are hardly the hostages of an arcane “tradition.” They conjure with a wide range of distinctly contemporary forces, forces that manifest themselves in the conflicts and triumphs of lives at once local and translocal, forces that might as well be discerned in the cannibalistic practices of new neoliberal elites as in the mysterious flow of consumer goods or in the capricious capers of the IMF (see Bastian, Kendall, and Sanders). In so doing, they articulate processes of varying scale and perceptibility, translating the reified abstractions of economy and society into a dramaturgy of such ordinary human motives as desire, ambition, anger, and jealousy. Even remorse. Unlike a Car- tesian landscape, on which human beings are set apart from matter and nature, and act os- tensibly as isolates in empty space-time, the experiential terrain of witchcraft and spirit possession is a frenzied field of intersecting influences among persons, environments, spirits, and things. Even cities, as Bastian (1993:141) has demonstrated, can assume dangerous, over-heated personalities; these being the product of intense commerce and improper accumulation. In these contexts, the modernist injunction to “only connect” is redundant; albeit by grammatical accident, the split infinitive underscores the point. Knowledge requires the constant monitoring of, and action upon, already existing connections as they pass in and out of focus and visibility.

    Virtual Paranoia: the return of the repressed?

    What, to return to our opening questions, might any of this tell us about the burgeoning twenty-first century obsession with transparency and conspiracy? Or about its expression in fantasies, common across the planet nowadays, of righteous, revelatory crusades against invisible evil-doers? The obsession itself would seem closely related to another widely noted phenomenon of our times: the rise of a host of new charismatic religious movements that are at once intensely local and yet also span vast distances through human migration, the web, and satellite dishes. These movements, Harding and Stewart point out, provide richly creative languages for rationalizing the ever more attenuated relationship between self and world. Especially in their more markedly millennial forms, they posit moral certainty and closure in an increasingly limitless, open universe, charting clear causal pathways through a jungle of information, of wildly circulating signifiers, of immaculate deceptions; all this at a moment when the authority of grand narratives of society and history are giving way to the dispassionate, dispersed reign of the market.

    In like vein, Hellinger argues, populist stories of conspiracy and revelation should be seen as serious, sometimes empowering moral allegories that seek certainty amidst indeterminacy, surety amidst insecurity. As such, they explore the links between invisible structural forces and human action, not least political action; in so doing, they often capture terrors that more cautious analysts fear to name. These moral allegories bear an uncomfortable resemblance to some species of orthodox social thought; especially social thought of a critical bent, which presumes, as a first principle, that, wherever ruling elites exist, they act in various ways to maintain their hegemony (Parenti 1994, in Hellinger). The Buryat Mongol fable that Stalin was the rein- carnation of a Blue Elephant mirrored the “paranoid” discourse generated by Stalinism, says Humphreys; though the former exceeded the latter, she notes, by insisting on the role of individual accountability in history. Humphreys uses “paranoia” less in its commonplace, pathological sense than to describe a genre of enclosed narrative that displaces attributes of the self onto others. Such narratives, she notes, permit people to voice otherwise suppressed, highly ambivalent senses of their own historical agency. This understanding of the term, we would add, contrasts with its more derisive use in the cut-and-thrust of everyday life where, like most accusations of unreason, it tends to tell us less about essential truths than about political or confessional contestations. Indeed, to label a person or persons “paranoid” is another, generic form of displacement, one that seeks to locate them beyond the limits of “normal” society; in the case of a group of believers, it is to relegate them to the marginal world of “primitive” superstition. As this suggests, allegations of pathology may, among other things, mark out fault lines of social, cultural, and ideological difference. Like the fault lines of race within many modern nation-states (“Blacks/Jews are paranoid”); or those that distinguish Western rationality from “Muslim funda- mentalism”; or those that sustained the reciprocal conspiracies that were spun, by Cubans and exiles alike, around the small body of Elián Gonzalez (cf. Ryer n.d.).

    By connecting disparate dots from across our far-flung universe into often bizarre con- stellations, however, and by discerning design in a laissez-faire universe, conspiracy theorists may capture strange, startling truths. Thus the myth of the primordial Blue Elephant, whose triumphant return to the post-Socialist scene, recall, proclaimed a crucial flaw in Soviet theories of history: the inability to link structural determinism in any meaningful way to personal agency and morality. It is this will to connect, finally, that distinguishes the various vision quests of the post-Cold War world, be they the therapeutic millennium of an America Calvary, popular Nigerian efforts to expose those who profit from the flesh of compatriots, or the nervous efforts of Ko- rean shamans who struggle in the shadow of the IMF to implicate household gods in financial success and failure. What makes them seem “paranoid,” from a liberal humanist standpoint, is not merely that they tie macrosocial processes to the acts and intentions of particular human beings, impersonal forces to intensely personal effects; nor only that, as familiar oppositions fade and old borders erode, they imagine enemies and evil-doers to be ever more pervasive, taking up residence, like X-file aliens, in otherwise ordinary citizens and neighbors. It is that these vision quests, and the narratives of conspiracy in which they are grounded, presume the eclipse of middle-order social institutions, of conventional sites of production and power, of a collective sense of morality, sociality, and history.

    As market forces take on increasing autonomy, and local productive relations become ever more subservient to the interests of global capital, the “deep horizontal fraternities” that once shaped ideals of nationhood, class, and community give way to a politics of identity, of technical necessity, and of the consumer rights of a “me generation” turned “we generation” (Comaroff and Comaroff 2000:305); also, putatively, to the legal regulation of more-or-less eve- rything. History is reduced to “memory,” oppression to “victimhood”; the latter to be redressed less by empowering social reform than by the payment of financial reparations. The productive tensions, in modern life and thought, between subject and society, member and congregation, citizen and nation are reduced to a dialogue of customers and contracts, consumers and rights, clients and therapists. Stakeholders, all, in a vast impersonal order of exchange. Small wonder, then, that the millennium, in neoliberal guise, tends to be radically privatized; hence the planeta- ry popularity of prosperity gospels, national lotteries, pyramid schemes, and technicians of the arcane who “see” into the future. Small wonder, too, we should be witnessing the widespread pursuit of new forms of moral accountability and of new faiths capable, in Durkheim’s (1947:479) classic terms, of “completing” both the fragmentary knowledge of means and ends afforded by science and the growing abstraction of “man” in “society”; faiths, in other words, that offer insight into, and means of acting upon, the mysteries and malign undersides of a rapidly changing world. Neither should we be surprised that God and Satan – ultimate embodiments of invisible, infinite power and, also, of the ultimate Revelation and Conspiracy – should hold so central a sway over popular imaginations in this Age of Transparency, this age in which everyone is suspicious, and nobody really knows who the enemy is. Or what the hidden hand is actually doing, how it is doing it, and to whom.

  • Ethnography on an Awkward Scale

    Ethnography on an Awkward Scale

    …talking to the natives is evidently a dangerous experiment. Violetta Lee [1890] 1998:407

    More than thirty years ago we met a madman in Mafeking, now the hyphenated capital of the North West Province in the “new” South Africa.1 Or, to be more precise, we met a prophet in polythene robes who had been incarcerated in a mental asylum by the apartheid state. We spoke of him in a scholarly essay (Comaroff and Comaroff 1987): outside of his extravagantly colored costume, what had marked his presence on the local scene before his “admission” to hospital was a fondness for standing, hour af- ter hour, as a silent witness near the local railway depot. It was from here that genera- tions of black men were transported nightly to the cities of Makgoweng, the Place of Whites, to toil in its mines and factories. It was from here, too, that the capillaries of ra- cial capitalism, South Africa-style, became visible to anybody who cared to gaze upon the twilight movement of migrating males across a cloven landscape. Anybody troubled enough. Or mad enough.

    Three decades on, after the demise of the ancien régime, we passed the very spot, in Station Road, where the mute madman used to linger. He had died, anonymou- sly, some years before. It was early afternoon on a Saturday, a sparkling winter day in July. As we crossed the street on our way to the local police station we noticed a small knot of men-in-blue nearby. They had surrounded a decidedly strange figure: an adult male, nude except for a pair of threadbare boxers, covered in white paste. Emaciated, his eyes showed no animation whatsoever. With a measure of gentleness not usually associated with the law here, he was taken to the Mafikeng Community Service Center – police stations are now “community service centers,” just as the old South African Po- lice Force has become the South African Police Services – where he was fed and al- lowed to wander around unhindered. Which he did, every now and again climbing on a chair or a desk, every now and again curling up in fetal repose. All the while, like the madman of earlier vintage, he uttered not a word. We asked the officers on desk duty who, or what, the figure was.
    “A zombie,” we were told.
    “What is to become of him,” we asked.
    “We hope that his people, maybe a maternal uncle (malome), will come for him,” said one officer.
    “How did he come to be wandering in Station Road?”
    “Who knows? Perhaps his owner lost him or let him go by mistake.”

    As we have noted (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999c; cf. Ralushai et al 1996:5), there are a fair number of living-dead about these days. Termed dithotsela or dipoko (sing. sepo- ko; from the Afrikaans spook, “ghost”), they are thought to be the creatures of witches who by nefarious means, have sucked away their human essence and turned them in- to brute labor power; this to make them toil away at night in the fields. Indeed, the (then) acting Vice Chancellor of the local University of the North West, himself a scholarof the white Afrikaans occult, casually promised to introduce us to one about whom he had long known.

    He did not have to. We encountered many more in the course of our own resear- ch.2 Some of them appeared in circumstances much less benign, much more violent and troubled, than those that brought the frail phantom to the attention of the Mafikeng police. One such circumstance ended in the murder of a well-known personage in the province, “Ten-Ten” Motlhabane Makolomakwa. Sometime middle-level state emplo- yee, owner of a local football team, successful farmer, and the chairman of the tribal council of Matlonyane village, he was set alight by five youths who insisted that he had killed their fathers and turned them into spectral field hands.3 Another, in 1995, involved striking workers at a coffee plantation in nearby Mpumalanga Province: they refused to work for three supervisors whom they accused of killing employees and turning them into zombies for their private enrichment.4 A third case – immortalized in a play, Ipizom- bi, well-known in local cultural circles and beyond – was sparked by a taxi accident in Kokstad in which twelve schoolboys were killed. Much discussed all over South Africa at the time, it involved the murder of two elderly “witches” who were said to have stolen the corpses and conjured them into living-dead.5

    Cases like this are often reported in matter-of-fact terms by the national media (cf. Fordred 1998) and – along with Hollywood horror movies, local telenovelas of witch killings, and other iterations of spectral death-and-dread – are widely consumed. Signifi- cantly, they are sometimes invoked, either before the fact or in the act, by those who perpetrate occult-related violence in the South African countryside. On occasion they have also become the stuff of cybertalk, not least among southern Africans abroad, whose anxious internet exchanges, intermittently filtered through EuroAmerican urban legends, have flowed back onto local soil, there to be fabricated into new kinds of fact. Thus it is that reality and its representations become confounded in one another, at once both cause and effect, each inseparably a part of the phenomenology of everyday life in the postcolony. Thus do imported and domestic spirits infuse each other; all being signs of both the local and the translocal, here and elsewhere, now and then, the con- crete and the virtual. Thus it is that the national population of living-dead is thought, in some parts of South Africa, to have been joined by transnational zombies, entering the country from Mozambique and other places (see n.2), just as they did in earlier times (Harries 1994). Thus it is, too, that home-grown phantoms bear more than passing, if culturally inflected, resemblance to images originating in Haitian Voodoo, to the celluloid freaks that haunt such films as Night of the Living Dead (George Romero 1968) or The Serpent and the Rainbow (Wes Craven 1988), and to ghouls that rise to the rhythms of various popular musics.

    These specters, in turn, evoke others: most obviously, a trade in human beings and body parts at once local and transnational, real and imagined, legitimate and illicit, more or less coerced. It is a trade, as we all now know, that stretches from the import and export of sex-workers, domestic workers, and mail order brides (these often being hard to tell apart); through the sale and adoption of babies (also difficult to distinguish, the latter often being an ethicized, affectively-acceptable euphemism for the former); to transactions in blood, genes, eyes, hearts, kidneys, and the like, transactions in which the medical may run into the magical (Ehrenreich and Hochschild 2003; Scheper- Hughes and Wacquant 2002). Some of this trade, when it entails fully sentient persons, evokes the horrors of slavery; where less than whole persons are involved, it extends the logic of commodity exchange to ever more divisible components of homo sapiens. Almost everywhere it is regarded, by those whose populations are being harvested, as a new form of Empire erected under the increasingly contested sign of global free trade and its highly inequitable flows of wealth; a curious footnote, this, to Hardt and Negri (2000).6 Elsewhere, we argue that these phenomena are all interrelated features of an “occult economy,” itself spawned by a brand of neoliberal capitalism that attributes to the free market an ineluctably salvific, redemptive, even messianic quality. By “occult economy” (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999a) we intend a set of practices involving the (again, real or imagined) resort to magical means for material ends; or, more expansi- vely, the conjuring of wealth by inherently mysterious techniques. Of course, what counts as “magic” varies, although it is always set apart from habitual, more transparent forms of production. This arcane economy has other, well-known manifestations: among them, an alleged rise in many parts of the world of witchcraft and satanism (J. Comaroff 1997; Geschiere 1977; La Fontaine 1997), of “fee for service” faiths (Weller 2000; Comaroff and Comaroff 2002; cf Kramer 1999), of enchanted financial practices that, like pyramid schemes and lotteries, promise fabulous wealth without work.

    All this enchantment, tellingly, is making itself felt at just the moment when the global triumph of modernity was supposed to put an end, once and for all, to such puta- tively premodern things. The iron cage, so feared by Max Weber, turns out to have been a cage of ironies. To be sure, if ever there was a figure that typified the magical production of wealth without work, of the occult grounding of neoliberal capitalism tout court, it is the zombie: all surplus value, no costly, irrational, troublesome human needs. This kaleidoscopic figure, the ultimate embodiment of flexible, “non-standard,” asocial labor, comes to us in a range of ethnographic, historical, and literary accounts that point both to subtle differences and to noncoincidental similarities. Zombies appear, simultaneously, as antemodern and postmodern, simultaneously supralocal, translocal, and lo- cal, simultaneously planetary and, refracted through the shards of vernacular cultural practices, profoundly parochial. Which is why the living-dead now regularly cross inter- national borders; why, say, a South African doctor of Indian origins could claim to have been turned into a ghostly automaton by a Nigerian satanist.7 And why zombification, the stuff of much urban legend across the world right now, has become an allegorical touchstone for describing the ostensible alienation, loss of individuality, and corporate mastery of an epoch, as yet in its infancy, already being described as Post-Human (Halberstam1995; Fukuyama 2002) As it did, albeit in somewhat different guise, with the rise of Fordism and the mode of human abstraction (dis)embodied in its production lines8 – and, before that, on the plantations and in the mines of far-flung colonies.

    Our concerns here, we stress, are not theoretical or conceptual.9 We came ac- ross zombies, recall, through an empirical conjuncture: it was by force of historical fact, rather than by way of abstract analytical interest, that we found ourselves compelled to make sense of them in situ. Consequently, what detains us here is much more immediate, much more modest, much more, well, methodological. By what ethnographic means does one capture the commodification of human beings in part or in whole, the occult economy of which it is part, the material and moral conditions that animate such an economy, the new religious and social movements it spawns, the modes of produc- ing wealth which it privileges, and so on? Inherently awkward of scale, none of these phenomena are easily captured by the ethnographer’s lens. Should each of them none- the less be interrogated purely in their own particularity, their own locality? Or should we try to recognize where, in the particularity of the local, lurk social forces of larger scale, forces whose sociology demands attention if we are to make sense of the worlds we study without parochializing and, worse yet, exoticizing them. Geertz (1973), for whom ethnography defined the generic practice of anthropology, once remarked famously that we do not study villages, that we study in villages. The point was well-taken. But how – given that the objects of our gaze commonly elude, embrace, attenuate, transcend, transform, consume, and construct the local – do we arrive at a praxis for an age that seems post-anthropological? Of an age in which we are called upon not to study inplaces at all, indeed not to trust “anthropological locations” (Gupta and Ferguson 1997), but rather to study the production of place (Appadurai 1996)? If we are not sure where or what “the field” is, or how to circumscribe the things in which we interest ourselves, wherein lie the ways and means by which we are to make the knowledges with which we vex ourselves?

    Of course, the question of Method, in the upper case, is not new. It has been with us throughout the life of the discipline, if in different forms and formulations. Nor, right now, are we alone in this. Postcolonial historians, for example, seem to be angui- shing a lot these days about the death of history. Not The End of History as proclaimed a decade ago, somewhat infamously, by Francis Fukuyama (1992), but an altogether new kind of death: death by diffusion into memory, biography, testimony, heritage tour- ism, and other expressions of history-as-lived rather than history-as-learned (Minkley, Rassool and Witz n.d.; cf. J. Comaroff n.d.). In times past we anthropologists plagued ourselves over the epistemic, ethical, and political dimensions of what we do: over whe- ther ours was not an endemically colonizing enterprise – a preemptive seizure of autho- rity, of voice, of the right to represent and, incidentally, to profit – or, worse yet, an acti- vity founded, voyeuristically, on the violation of “the” other. Now, like those postcolonial historians, we worry whether our subject matter is ours at all or whether it has forever dispersed itself beyond our privileged dominion. Once we were told that we would be out of business just as soon as our natives were no longer authentically native (a.k.a. primitive, colonized). Today we are undermined by the fact that those very “natives” have seized the terms of our trade, terms in which we once described them, terms that seem not to work very well any more as analytic constructs, terms that, now essentiali- zed and commodified by “others” one and all, return to haunt us. Add to this two other considerations, themselves intimately connected: first, the aforementioned fact that al- most everything which falls within the discursive purview of contemporary anthropology exists, in the phenomenal world, on a scale that does not yield easily to received anth- ropological theories or methods; and second, that our “subjects” no longer inhabit social contexts for which we have a persuasive lexicon, not least because abstract nouns like society, community, culture, and class have all been called into question in this ever more neoliberal age (cf. Stoller 1997:82), this age of the scare quote-around-everything, this age of ironic, iconic detachment. What, in the upshot, are we left with? A very stark question: Has ethnography become an impossibility? Have we finally reached its end?

    ETHNOGRAPHY AND ITS GLOBAL DESTRACTIONS

    …what actually happened, the facts of the case, who said what,..all that is incidental. The real truth is behind all that. The real truth may be swimming in a completely different direction…And that’s what you have to get to…Forget the appearances.

    Neil McCarthy, The Great Ourdoors10

    Not surprisingly, in light of this Big Question, there has been a fair bit of debate, over the past few years, about the fate of ethnography in the age of globalization. We have addressed the matter ourselves, most pointedly in our Max Gluckman Memorial Lecture of 1998 (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999a). Its title, “Occult Economies and the Violence of Abstraction,” sought to invoke the stark dislocations wrought on the every- day lives of ordinary citizens in the northerly provinces of South Africa by material for- ces of ever more planetary scale, dislocations about which many of them spoke with both anxiety and passion. We also meant to underscore the challenge involved in gras- ping, ethnographically, the processes by which those world-historical forces were being made meaningful and tractable by the human beings in question: how they labored to condense and personalize values and relations in conditions which they presumed to be labile, difficult to understand, inherently mysterious in their effects. Among our objec- tives, in sum, was an effort to reflect on the interplay of theory and method in the treat- ment of an anthropological location of changing proportions. Although of pressing con- cern at the moment, this is a problem as old as the discipline itself. Our essay, after all, was written to commemorate a scholar who tried long ago to subject the broad sweep of the colonial encounter to the ethnographic gaze.

    In the post-Maxist age, the strongest suit of anthropology, in the eyes of most of its practitioners, remains its “ability to get inside and understand small-scale communi- ties, to comprehend local loyalties and systems of knowledge” (Graeber 2002:1222). Our disciplinary concerns may alter, our genres may blur, our theories may come and go, but ethnography remains “the anthropologist’s muse” (Lewis 1973), the source of solace to which we turn in the face of epistemic or political doubt. An extended spell of “participant-observation” is still the irreducible minimum of professional credentials re- quired in the discipline, Sherry Ortner (1997:61) notes. This in spite of the ambiguity that attaches to each of the two terms, not to mention the oxymoron built into their hy- phenation. This in spite, also, of the fact – illustrated by Ortner’s own account of study- ing the “postcommunity” – that contemporary anthropological practice deviates, as it probably always has done, from the foundational fiction of fieldwork: the conceit, now long criticized (cf. Gupta and Ferguson 1997), that it is possible to access “the totality of relations” of a “society,” or the essential workings of “a culture,” in any one place.11

    And yet the axiom that lies behind this fiction, that any knowledge derived at first- hand by proximity to natives has an a priori privilege, continues to shape the analytical vision of the discipline. “Ethnography,” says George Marcus (1994:44), “functions well and creatively without a sense that it needs a positive theoretical paradigm – that is, conventional social theory – to guide it. Instead, it breeds off the critique of its own rhe- toric.” As a result, anthropology has, for the most part, remained unrelentingly positivist in spirit. Much of its shared wisdom consists in generalizations about the particular that are also particularizations of the general; empirical aggregates, in short, not abstract propositions or explanatory schemata. The role of this species of knowledge, like its po- litics (Graeber 2002), has been to show that, even in the act of accommodating to ine- luctable macrocosmic forces, different peoples do things differently, be it because of their distinctive cultures, their social situations, or their will to resist (cf. Marcus 1994). The epistemic consequences that follow are plain enough: a committed realism, and a form of relativism that sits uneasily with “general” theory grounded in history, philoso- phy, political economy, or whatever. True, there have always been counter tendencies: those who have espoused evolutionary, Marxist, sociobiological, or psychoanalytic ap- proaches, for instance, have been more partial to higher-order abstraction, generaliza- tion, explanation. But this minority has tended to be the exception that proves the rule.

    The epistemic foundations of anthropology’s empiricism received somewhat less scrutiny than they might have done during the “reflexive moment” of the 1980’s. But in practice, ethnography was already undergoing a metamorphosis. The discipline was co- ming face to face with the consequences of what had begun to make itself felt in the 1960s: that “local” systems – or, to be more precise, the signs and practices observable within any given social world, however it was constituted – could no longer be studied, or accounted for, with reference to conventional geographies; that the fiction of sover- eign cultures, however deftly described or ethnographically authenticated, could no lon- ger be sustained; that established modes of representation were no longer sufficient unto the political and ethical demands of “writing culture” (Clifford and Marcus 1986). Yet, in the absence of “an explicit paradigm for experimentation” (Marcus 1994:46), the methodological revolution one might have expected to flow from these shifts of pers- pective – themselves sharpened with every passing year by the complex, uneven eff- ects of processes of planetary integration – has not been forthcoming. Per contra, not- withstanding some creative efforts to author new kinds of anthropology, the reaction in many quarters, in Europe as well as in North America, has been conservative. There has been a tendency to batten down the hatches in fervid defense of the particular, the local, and the parochial against the onslaught of “the global” (e.g. Sahlins 1999; Kapfer- er 2000, 2001; Englund 1996; Rutherford 1999), the latter, in anthropology-talk, having become a generalized, under-motivated sign of the changing universe in which we live and work.

    Why? One consequence of globalization for the human sciences, argues Appa- durai (1997:115), has been to instill an anxiety that the “space of intimacy in social life” will be lost; the very space of intimacy that has always been the ethnographer’s stock- in-trade. Whether or not this is a sufficient explanation for the anthropological angst of the present moment, it certainly is the case that our latest “crisis of representation” has been transposed into a methodological key – as if the survival of the discipline depended entirely on preserving its established modes of producing knowledge. Note how, in some quarters, ethnography is being depicted as an endangered species. Englund and Leach (2000:238), for instance, appear to believe that “it” is engaged in a mortal struggle with “generalizing perspectives” whose powerful, if unnamed, proponents have allegedly decreed that “localized fieldwork has had its day.” For Englund and Leach, the enemy is the “meta-narrative of modernity,” a somewhat ill-defined construct which, de- spite their protestations to the contrary, seems suspiciously like a synonym for “Theory” in the upper case.12 And for an ensemble of “familiar sociological abstractions,” among them commodification, space-time compression, individualization, disenchantment. This “metropolitan” meta-narrative, they argue, “undermine(s)…what is unique in the ethnographic method – its reflexivity, which gives subjects authority in determining the context of their beliefs and practices” (Englund and Leach 2000:225). The apprehensiveness about the future of fieldwork palpable here seems to stem, above all, from a crisis of identity, from sacred boundaries breached, and, concomitantly, from the desire to pre- serve a unique scholarly patrimony from the encroachment of an ever more generic so- cial science. It cannot have gone unnoticed, in this regard, that other disciplines have lately laid claim to ethnographic methods. Thus Englund and Leach (2000:238) insist that “[t]he uniqueness of the ethnographic method is at stake in the current fascination with multiple modernities…Sociocultural anthropology merges into cultural studies and cultural sociology, and ethnographic analyses become illustrations consumed by metropolitan theorists.” How unlike an earlier, brilliantly iconoclastic Leach (1961), who encouraged anthropologists to move, by “inspired guesswork,” beyond hide-bound empiri-

    cism. Thereareseriouspoliticalissuesatstakeinargumentslikethis.Intheeffortto privilege “the local,” however worthy it may be, we risk slighting or misrecognizing the global forces that – increasingly, if with varying degrees of visibility – are besetting “little guys” (Graeber 2002:1223) all over map. Many of those among whom we work, appa- rently unlike Englund and Leach’s “natives,”13 are very anxious about the effect of those forces, which, they tell us, are putting their social and material survival at risk. In the faux egalitarianism of these neoliberal times, it is easy to become mired in trivial argu- ments over whether “meta-narratives of modernity,” or “Theory,” removes from “others” the capacity to represent themselves or to determine their own futures. All this while the masters of the market, and powerful political pragmatists, fashion new modes of extrac- tion, abstraction, and explanation. We would do well to ponder, in this respect, why it is that so many “native” intellectuals have been distrustful of even the most sensitive, os- tensibly other-centered knowledge produced by our discipline, why they believe that this knowledge is intrinsically inimical to their own authority and interests (cf. Banaji 1970; Magubane 1971, Asad 1973). Mafeje (1998:67; cf. Sharp 1998), for one, holds that eth- nography, to be true to itself, needs to be liberated entirely from anthropology, thus to become – without even the most reflexive of ethnographers – a source “of social texts authored [solely] by the people themselves.” The logical end point of reducing our prac- tice to the elicitation of narratives of local experience is not a unique anthropology at all. Nor is it a politics of positive engagement. Quite the opposite. In a postcolonial age in which “natives” everywhere speak for themselves, it is, simply, redundancy. The alter- native, patently, is to argue for a theoretically and politically principled social science.

    For our own part, we continue to have confidence in ethnography and the forms of insight – both reflective and reflexive, both imaginative and empirical – to which it gives access. There is a proviso, however: that, instead of fetishizing method, instead of romancing the idea that it might itself yield up naked truths, we face up to the episte- mic challenge of what it takes to “commit social science” in the postcolonial world: in a world in which “globalization” is an increasingly contested, troubling reality, in which “modernity” is an increasingly contested, troubling ideological formation (Knauft 1997). Those anthropologists who have chosen to take on this challenge have tended not to decry “localized” ethnography, but to insist on its unique value in plumbing the nature and effects of large-scale social, economic, and political processes (e.g., Appadurai 1997, 1996; Geschiere 1997; Meyer 1999; Weiss 1996). Their work points to the fact that our modes of producing knowledge demand critical review – even “redesign” (Marcus 1994:46) – in the face of history; especially the history of a time such as this, when popular discourses across the planet posit that the world is undergoing changes of ma- jor proportions. This perception, after all, does not exist only in the imagination of anth- ropologists afflicted with “the meta-narrative of modernity.” What is more, we need to concede that our craft is not, and never has been, analytically self-sufficient. Part of a shifting division of labor within the human sciences, it is engaged in dialogue with other ways of making sense of the present in both its macro- and microcosmic dimensions (Stoller 1997; Sharp 1998). This is all to the good, since it is only by broadening our frames of reference that we may address some of the awkward questions that have come to confront us about our methodology: can we be sure, for example, that “the par- ticular” we seek to study, or the cultural worlds we presume to exist, may actually be empirically bounded? Is “the local” not the constantly refashioned product of forces well beyond itself (Appadurai 1996; also 1997)? Does it not exist only as part of a sociopoli- tical geography of multiple scales and coordinates (Ortner 1997)? Is it not true that the singularity of places, just like the singularity of “traditions,” “customs,” and “cultures,” is being fashioned ever more in response to the market? Surely, neat antinomies between the local and the global, between field and context, between ethnography and metanar- rative, beg the very questions that we should be asking.

    These questions have also been at the core of a friendly exchange we have had with Sally Falk Moore (1999) over the susceptibility of large-scale analytic claims to eth- nographic proof. Her critique of our Gluckman Lecture hinges on a methodological poi- nt: the unverifiability of its central thesis, namely, that the rapid expansion of an occult economy in postcolonial South Africa has been a by-product of the material and experiential impact on rural populations of the cumulative effects of a globalizing capitalism – specifically, of the processes of abstraction and alienation built into it. The “imaginative sociology” by means of which we arrive at this thesis may be illuminating, concedes Moore. But it does not offer sufficient evidence either to substantiate or to falsify a claim of cause-and-effect. Moreover, by ascribing the growth of a local occult economy to world-historical forces, we “turn general context into particular explanation” (l999:306). We also confuse the general and the particular. How so? At times, she suggests, we deny that resort to the magical, and to its associated forms of violence, is unique to South Africa; at other times we imply that there is something special about its deployment here.

    Allow us to recall what the disagreement is about. Our objectives in the Gluck- man lecture were twofold. One was to make sense of some highly visible, much discus- sed, old-yet-new practices in postcolonial South Africa. Taken together, these practices, themselves rooted in variously defined “localities,” appeared to constitute a discernible phenomenon: an occult economy. As we have implied, this term describes an empirical- ly-grounded abstraction, an abstraction derived from, but not reducible to, the narrated experience and social activities of a large number of diversely positioned human be- ings. In short, it is an analytic concept based in the concrete. Located between the glo- bal and the local, subsuming them in a four-dimensional geography,14 that concept is mobilized to arrive at “thick,” moving portraits of peoples’ lives and labors; also to eluci- date the motivation, the meaning, and the consequences of their actions. It is a tool that enables the dialectic of deduction and induction on which, in our view, all principled social science ought to be founded.

    The other objective of our analysis of “occult economies” was to explain why that enchanted economy should manifest itself so palpably now, when conventional wisdom would have us expect otherwise; why it calls forth received cultural practices, yet trans- mutes them into virulently altered forms; why, while clearly a domestic product, it bears close resemblance to similar economies in other places, most of all in post-totalitarian contexts, where neoliberal reform has suddenly and simultaneously liberated and dis- empowered, enriched and impoverished. These parallels are striking and yet hard to pin down. They bear witness to the play of large forces (i) that, although volatile and only partly visible, are not random; (ii) whose existence may be inferred only through their ef- fects; (iii) whose workings vary across the axes of the planetary map, making them im- possible to grasp at only one site; (iv) which, because they have not yet fully run their course, elude proof by ordinary means. The problem that we set ourselves, then, was to account for the workings of a metamorphosing capitalism that is both global in its reach and localized in its protean manifestations. Built into that problem is an effort to engage at once with the general and the particular, with variance and similarity, with continuity and rupture. Far from being a confusion yielded by our method, it is a necessary re- quirement thereof. Respectful of the empirical without being empiricist, we seek to open up new angles on a world-historical process of awkward, shifting scale.

    At issue here, then, are alternative ideologies-of-method, alternative epistemes. The differences that flow from them, not least over what it takes to prove an argument or to verify a theory, are substantial. Which is why we stand accused, in this exchange, of not having provided enough evidentiary support for claims about some very general transformations in South African economy and society; even more, about their location in the broad sweep of the history of capital. Even if we agreed that we ought to render as “provable propositions” our analysis of these transformations – or of the ways in which they are locally inhabited, experienced, narrated, acted upon – we find it hard to see how to do so without resorting to reduction ad absurdum. But we do not believe that this is what we should be doing; indeed, we resist the positivist reflex that would encour- age us to do so. After all, if they were held to the demands of empiricist validation, or subjected to the blinding lights of Western science, some of the most enduring insights of modernist social thought would not pass muster. We have in mind, inter alia, Marx’s analysis of the commodity, Weber’s elective affinity between Protestantism and the rise of capitalism, and Durkheim’s theory of the elementary forms of religious life.

    Marx, Weber, and Durkheim, of course, all argued against both ungrounded historical conjecture and theory deduced purely from philosophical first principles; although each of them indulged in these things on occasion. More to the point here, each sought to take the measure of the difficult relation between the experience of social phenome- na and the forces and facts, the rhymes and reasons, that lay behind it. Each exercised a fertile sociological imagination, seeking, in the Great Outdoors of their changing wor- lds, to “forget the appearances,” the better to discern the “real truths” swimming behind them (McCarthy, cited above). Each knew that social action, like the fabrication of social meaning, is not pursued by human beings just as they please; that its determinations have to be explained; that the job of the social scientist is to construe the processes by which realities are realized, objects objectified, classes of persons and things classified, and so forth. All of which returns us to the dialectics of deduction and induction – to the co-production of fact and sociological imagining – implicated in “doing ethnography.”

    It also returns us to a very basic question: Precisely what kinds of methodological operations are entailed in “doing ethnography” as we envision it? That question is not, we suggest, best answered in the abstract. Just as method is always profoundly theore- tical in its provenance, so its substance ought always to be practice-based and context- sensitive.

    CONFRONTING THE GREAT OUTDOORS

    Our time: 1989, near the end of apartheid.

    Our place: the North West Province of South Africa where, long ago, we did doctoral research.

    We returned to the Mafikeng District after an enforced absence of some twenty years; our research, in the interim, had crossed over into Botswana and into the colonial past. Driving in from across the veld, we crested the foothill to the south of the Tshidi- Rolong capital to behold a strikingly discordant landscape. The contours of the old Tswana town – weathered red-clay walls, desiccated thatch roofs, giant boulders, cattle-trodden trails, spry camelthorns – had been dwarfed by a skyline of altogether different scale. The precocious, postmodern outlines of a new city, its architecture a bold pastiche of various international styles of the 1970’s and 1980’s, proclaimed an as- sertive, upstart governmentality. History and Hubris, both capitalized, had consummat- ed a brazen, quick and dirty affaire on this arid terrain: on it, one of apartheid’s most elaborate ethnic “homelands,” had been put in place. The illegitimate insta-polity of Bophutatswana, and the simulacra of its bastard sovereignty, had been erected on land long owned and inhabited by the Tshidi, subjecting them and scores of other Tswana chiefdoms across the northwest to the violent authority of a puppet-state empowered by the material, military, and ideological might of the apartheid regime.

    What met our astonished gaze, in sum, was the enactment, in concrete, of that regime’s version of indirect rule: the tight, closely-policed integration of local polities, un- der their “traditional” rulers, into an ostensibly independent ethno-nation. Herein lay the completion of the process, endemic to colonialism, by which those polities – now designated “tribal authorities” – were relegated to the peripheries of a nation-state predicated on difference. The running together of humble adobe and soaring plate glass made visible another juxtaposition: the affirmation, on one hand, of a sense of Tshidi cultural particularity, and, on the other, its encompassment within a wider, multi-ethnic state that was itself a maelstrom of powerful economic, social, and moral currents. It hardly seem- ed accidental that the independent-minded Tshidi chief, Kebalepile, had died in Mafikeng in the early 1970’s, allegedly as a result of witchcraft at the hands of the recently- installed president of Bophuthatswana, Lucas Mangope.15 Mangope, a subaltern sovereign if there ever was one, was seen by the citizenry of Mafikeng as the new colonizing cuckoo in their nest. By blaming him for the occult killing of their traditional leader, Tshidi sought to name the spirit of a spiritless age, the Zeitgeist of late-colonial history.

    This magical murder, refracted through the local moral imaginary, might have opened a new chapter in the unfolding confrontation between the late Tshidi world and the wider universe that embraced it. But the history of which it was part went back a long way. As we have noted before (e.g., Comaroff and Comaroff 1991, 1997), setswa- na, the more-or-less open, more-or-less labile ensemble of signs and practices taken locally to constitute vernacular “culture” – the term is used as freely by black South Afri- cans these days as it is by others – was itself the offspring of a protracted colonial en- counter. Mafikeng bore all the scars of that encounter, of earlier struggles, of earlier conjunctures. In the mid-1800’s, for example, it was at the nub of a frontier along which white settlers and African chiefdoms fought over land, labor, and sovereignty; along which, too, evangelists fought for souls and civilization, Later, at the turn of the twentie- th century, during the South African War, it became an imperial battleground on which heroes and villains of all races vied for national gains and personal glory. More recently, it has been branded as a commodity, a heritage site on the newly-wrought tourist map of the postcolony. And for all this time it has lain at the crossroads of an intricate web of exchange relations: relations among the various Tswana polities of the region, relations between them and diverse “strangers,” relations that fan out, today, across the globe. The embarrassment of historical traces we found here stubbornly resist the foreshorten- ed lens of the ethnographic here-and-now.

    Consequently, in order to account for the social archaeology of the place, and for the ebullient memories of its people, we were forced from the first to historicize our me- thods; this, in the early 1970’s, at a time when there was a great deal of antipathy within anthropology toward history. We had no alternative but to develop an ethnography of the archives to discern the processes by which the past and the present had construct- ed each other; an ethnography that, among other things, entailed scouring the records – images, inventories, accounts, material shards, documents, linguistic residues, even silences and absences – for the constellation of ordinary practices, the passions and interests, that produced and reproduced this site as an empirical fact, a named-and- known locale (Comaroff and Comaroff 1992). Often this meant trawling texts for what they were not, putting into conversation pieces of paper that, in the cold storage of the archives, languish as solitary objects. It also necessitated our transposing inert verbs and nouns into depictions of living things, of vibrant ritual activities, of expressions of collective affect, effort, effect.

    If the ethnography of the archives proved anything, it was that Mafikeng, “Place of Stones,” had, from the start, been situated between a rock and a hard place. The town was established by the ruling Tshidi chief, in the 1850’s, with two ends in mind: to ward off the seizure of his land by white settlers and to quarantine the rise of Christianity, along with its Eurocentric forms of civility. In time, and for complicated historical reasons, Mafikeng would become the capital of the chiefdom. It was here that Tshidi asserted their autonomy as fully as they could from the colonial state, the settler economy, and the British missions; here that they fashioned an ethnically-marked localism – refer- red to, explicitly, as setswana, “Tswana ways and means” – that quietly fused into itself the cultural practices of various others. For their part, the Protestant converts, original residents of the place, were also to make common cause with a national black petite bourgeoisie anxious to proclaim its modernity.

    We hardly need insist here that, to be read ethnographically, these economies of signs and practices have to be situated in the intimacy of the local contexts that gave them life. At the same time, they require to be inserted into the translocal processes of which they were part ab initio: processes – commodification, colonization, proletarianization, and the like – composed of a plethora of acts, facts, and utterances whose very description demands that we frame them in the terms of one or other Theory of History. The emerging substance of Tshidi religious, legal, literary culture, their styles of costu- me and senses of self, all deployed images and materials at once fresh and familiar, autochthonous and imported. Each, in its own idiom, replayed, and sought to redress, the mutually-constitutive antimonies of the colonial world: in marking the contrast bet- ween magic and faith, custom and reason, folk dress and fashion, the living forms of setswana recycled and remade the contrast between the culturally particular and the universal, between ethnic subjects and modern persons. Between Africa and Europe.16

    For much of its modern existence, anthropology has been trapped inside this set of antinomies. Its ethnographic habitat has, conventionally if not always, been the first term of each: the particular, ethnic subjects, Africa. Conventionally, too, these terms have been taken to signify analytic domains that may be treated as self-sufficient unto themselves. And, for heuristic purposes at least, as hermetically, hermeneutically clos- ed. This was certainly the orientation that framed our first fieldwork among “the Tshidi- Rolong” of Mafikeng in the late 1960’s, when the proclivities of a British structural-func- tionalist training seemed perfectly reflected in the ethnology of African tribes invoked by high apartheid. Yet our field-site – chosen because it gave us an alternative vantage across the Bostwana border if we were expelled by a regime hostile to research on the “wrong” side of the color bar – proved stubbornly intractable to this perspective. Wheth- er in respect of political or religious life, of kinship relations or healing rites, there simply were no “customary” practices that did not bear the imprint of long-standing engage- ment with various elsewheres, with (often coercive) embodied social and material forc- es beyond themselves. The production of the local here was always also entailed in the effort to fabricate some measure of existential coherence and closure against the cross- currents of history, a history of overrule and economic expropriation, of colonial evange- lism, of apartheid, of the ravages of deliberately exploitative labor markets. Of prophets and profiteers, madmen and migrants.

    For all their discordant hyper-modernity, then, the built-forms of the bantustan were but an increment in a drawn-out dialogue between the local and the translocal, here and elsewhere – these tropes being understood not as antonyms but as imaginative axes on maps of shifting scale. As it turned out, for all its concrete confidence, this edifice of apartheid was in its death-throes. The long colonial history that had spawned it was coming to an abrupt end, swept away by the changes that marked the close of the Cold War and the realignment of the old international order. So, too, was the nation- al economy that underpinned the ancien régime, its industrial infrastructure and its sovereign autonomy recalibrated by the cumulative effects of neoliberal capitalism. By the time we next visited Mafikeng, two years after South Africa’s first free democratic elections, its civic structures had been inhabited by functionaries of a new provincial government. The old white town, once set off from its black counterpart by the railway-line, and by equally caste-iron cultural and legal barriers, had been significantly integrated.

    Other auguries also suggested that Mafikeng had entered a new era – or, rather, that the proportionate relationship between rupture and continuity had, for the moment, tilted somewhat toward the former; history, in our view is never all one or the other, al- ways a complex analytic equation-to-be-resolved. Unfamiliar forces, emanating less from the old international order than from the global economy, were making themselves felt as never before. Some of them promised the infusion of cargo that black South Afri- cans had expected with their liberation: an army of NGOs, of “universal” Neoprotestant churches, of distance-learning corporations, of internet services had opened up around town. Almost immediately, locals tried to capture the bounty promised by these techni- cians of twenty-first century “development.” Not only did satellite dishes mushroom ac- ross the veld. One mud-brick building, nestling beneath a thorn tree on an otherwise barren stretch of land, sported a rough, hand-painted sign: “We teach in English, in step with the global age.”

    At the same time, less sanguine signs gave Tswana cause for anxiety. Many pointed out – to us, in letters to newspapers, on local TV – that the old migrant labor system had collapsed and that this collapse, along with a severe recession, had made jobs extremely scarce, especially for young black males. An unusual number of people appeared to be dying in accidents, to be committing suicide, to be victimized by brutal crime, to be ill, to be depressed. Public facilities and welfare services were receding by the month. There was a growing population of “black people” on the streets, immigrants from elsewhere in Africa who were drawing much suspicious and scandalized talk: hav- ing eluded state regulation, it was said, they were plying their wares noisily on once pristine sidewalks, thus usurping the trade of South African merchants. Not only that: they had brought drugs and AIDS with them, and had taken the few available jobs on the surrounding farms. And yet, despite all this pessimism, notwithstanding all this apo- calyptic talk, in the midst of this economy of genuine hardship, some locals seemed, mysteriously, to be prospering. As we note elsewhere (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999a), it is this that has fed the raw underside of the occult economy: the killing of alleged wit- ches and zombie conjurers.

    Zombie-conjurers. This brings us back full circle to where we began. To the strangely dissociated man in the police station, to the youths who killed because they believed their fathers to have been turned into phantom laborers, to popular representa- tions of the violent abstraction entailed in witchcraft. Recall what we said at the outset: that the zombie is a figure metonymic of the playing out of world-historical forces in the northerly reaches of South Africa right now; also of the domestication of a form of neoliberal capitalism thought to enable the production of wealth without work. Recall, too, the question that followed: how are we to make sense methodologically of this figure, of those forces, of their determinations, of the unfolding connections between them? That the question demands a sociological imagination at once local and translocal, empirical and analytic, was brought into sharp relief for us in a context part pedagogic, part ethnographic. During a history class at the University of the North West, a graduate student broke suddenly across the discussion: “Do Americans believe in diphoko, in magical medicines? ” he asked. “Is it like here? Is there also trouble with zombies in America?”

    By what methodological means, then, did we actually address the question of the living-dead in the late Tswana world?

    DISCURSIVE FLOWS AND THE DIALECTICS OF DISCOVERY

    [Writing a novel is] like playing chess in three dimensions.

    David Lodge 1999:52

    So, too, is doing ethnography. Four dimensions, actually, if one includes the ter- rain of the virtual: the electronic commons that has interpellated itself – as a medium of translocal communication, as a vehicle for the flow of money and other kinds of capital, as a mechanism of the market, as an instrument for the establishment of public spheres of different scales – into even quite remote social worlds.

    Unlike chess, however, ethnography-as-practice has, in the first instance, to con- struct its own field of play, its heuristic landscape. Strategically, it has always seemed logical to us to locate the center of that field around one or more focal points to which the anthropological senses are drawn because they are the crucibles in which contem- porary vernacular concerns – whatever they may be, whatever their phenomenal scale – are construed, enacted, played out, socially contextualized. Given that our anthropo- logy seeks to be empirically-grounded without being empiricist, our objects of research have invariably been defined with reference to the prevailing preoccupations of the times and places in which we have worked, whether they be the politics of chiefship or ecstatic religious movements, agrarian development and its undersides, the colonial en- counter, occult economies, or, most recently, crime, policing, and the metaphysics of disorder. In the dialectic of the concept and the concrete, it is the latter that sets metho- dology in motion, serving as the fons et origo of the operations by which we set out to apprehend the existential processes of everyday life. Our ethnography, in other words, takes off not from theory or from a meta-narrative, but from the situated effects of see- ing and listening. Of course, the way in which we see, what we pay attention to, and how, is not empirically ordained; that, ineluctably, depends on a prior conceptual scaf- folding, which, once the dialectic of discovery is set in motion, is open to reconstruction.

    In the late 1990’s, the zombie, and the enchanted economy of which it was part, provided just such a focal point at which the preoccupations of the period had taken tangible shape. How did we know this? It came at us, insistently, from a number of diverse sources, some of them already alluded to: in such episodes as the encounter with the almost-naked man on Station Road, in what followed at the police station, and in the sheer ordinariness of the whole thing to the men in blue; in the murder of alleged corpse-conjurer, Motlhabane Makolomakwa, in its avidly-consumed press coverage (see Figure 1), in its courtroom arguments, and in the conversations to which it gave rise, many of them about the “epidemic” of occult violence afflicting the northerly provinces; in “mob” attacks, committed by local youths in the name of their communities, against those suspected of practicing the arcane arts; in personal stories of the sort told to us by the scion of a ruling dynasty – a man with a first-class graduate degree in development studies, an excellent job in government, and a large following as a DJ in a large city nearby – who had lost a beloved sibling, snatched away secretly by a witch for whom he worked until rescued many months later; in a remarkable incident in which po- lice tried to save a young boy from the persistent attacks of a vicious tikoloshe, a trans- local witch familiar,17 first by calling in the local television channel in the hope that its cameras might immobilize the creature and then by eliciting the help of several technicians of the sacred (see Figure 2); in the reactions of the state to outbreaks of witch- craft killings, which included tough law enforcement, high level conferences on the top- ic, and the appointment of a commission of enquiry; in discussions on the internet, in national and regional TV dramas, documentaries, news broadcasts, and talk shows, in local genres of cultural production (see Figure 3); and, most of all, in our everyday ex- changes in homes and schools, stores and shebeens, taxi ranks and churches across the length and breadth of the Mafikeng district.

    This was not all, not by any means. But it gives a sense of the way in which a flow of narratives, incidents, activities, dramas, material exchanges, conversations, and representations embedded in the “natural” discourse of different and complementary public spheres may come to organize the ethnographic gaze – and, thereby, to set me- thod in motion. Discursive flows, although having focal centers, are inherently open, fle- xible in scope, and shifting in both their content and their constituents. Determining what, exactly, falls within the purview of any such flow is itself a product in part of pay- ing careful attention, in part of inspired guesswork, in part of theoretical and philosophi- cal predilection; making sense of its substance depends on what, previously, we have spoken of as an “imaginative sociology.” We use “imaginative” here in two senses. It re- fers to (i) doing ethnography by plumbing – through whatever resources of the analytic imagination are available to us within the political and ethical imperatives of our practice – the phenomenal worlds in which we situate ourselves; this by (ii) seeking to grasp the manner in which those worlds are indigenously imagined and inhabited by people vari- ously positioned within them. Note all the plurals. They point to an anthropological cli- ché, albeit an important one: that most of the signs and practices with which we con- cern ourselves are either contested or, if not, are the object of a polyphony of percep- tions, valuations, means and ends.

    To the extent that doing ethnography necessitates, in the first instance, tapping into focal discursive flows – and, lest we be misunderstood, we reiterate that this inclu- des not “just” talk or texts but practices as well, not “just” the meaningful but also the material – it demands three critical methodological operations. Each is a condition of the others’ productivity.

    The first is the pursuit, in respect of any given discursive flow, of points of articu- lation among the various spheres in which it manifests itself; this by tracing the co-pre- sence of persons, texts, images, or arguments (and especially arguments of images) across them. Thus, for example, the imaginative sociology we were able to construct surrounding the figure of the zombie – and that was to sediment into our ethnographi- cally-rooted abstraction, the “occult economy” – took shape when we began to hear si- milar words and see similar pictures over and over: when, among many other things, the accused youths in the Makolomakwa murder trial claimed that the deceased had “killed their fathers and put them to work”; when stories about zombification kept return- ing to the “fact” that the witches in question, invariably sexual “perverts,” had “turned people into tools,” thereby preventing ordinary citizens from earning a living or starting a family; when an old woman, said to have amassed “mysterious” wealth, was told, as she was set on fire by the “boys” of her village, that they had no income because of her; when so much local opinion, from the most intellectual to the most humble, blamed the living-dead for the absence of employment, for denying young black males the opportu- nity to graduate to adulthood, for the despoliation of community. This is not to say that all representations of, or explanations for, the postcolonial (re-)appearance of zombies are the same. Nor that they are ascribed the same social salience by everyone. However, where there is argument about the matter – be it in courts of law or over quarts of beer, on soccer fields or in the maize fields, around backyard fires or among fired work- ers, in university classrooms, church meetings, or the electronic media – it usually turns back to the connection of witchcraft to the dearth of work and the impossibility of securing the future; the last being what we, in theory-speak, might refer to as a crisis of social reproduction. This, in short, is the animating vernacular around which the discursive flow is organized. It turns out to be crucial in the dialectic of the concept and the conc- rete, of theory and ethnography.

    The first methodological operation, then, is to map the substance of the pheno- menal landscape on which any discursive flow is grounded, thus to identify its animating vernaculars and to chart the object world in which it interpolates itself. The second is to follow the traces of that discursive flow, of its various signs and images, tracking the mi- gration of the latter from their densest intersections to wherever else they may lead.

    Let us give a couple of instances from the situation with which we were concern- ed here. One is the allusion to the sexual perversion of witches, a submerged theme in many zombie narratives. At face value, this allusion seems, in itself, to have little to do with the workings of the occult economy or the figure of the zombie, more with the figuration of the witch as “standardized nightmare” (Wilson 1951), the epitome of anti-sociality and immorality. But in pursuing the allusion, in posing questions about it, in seeing where else it turned up, we found ourselves drawn into a meaning-maze that took in AIDS, the sexualization of death, bad blood, compromised masculinity, and drought – and culminated, by fusing all of these things, in the clear and present threat to the fu- ture of communities everywhere attendant on the fact that young men cannot find work or make families. As sexual pervert, the witch, in short, embodies social destruction, fertility abused, social reproduction violated.

    The other instance also arose out of a recurrent theme in zombie narratives: What precisely is the reach of the occult economy? What is the reach of the modern witch? Is corpse-conjuring, or the arcane fabrication of wealth without work, purely a parochial matter? Or does it somehow extend beyond? One night, the local TV channel held a phone-in talk show in which the special guests were a pair of young “reformed” satanists, each with his spiritual advisor. Asked about the difference between witchcraft and satanism, one answered, in a fluent mix of Setswana and English: “Satanism is high-octane witchcraft. It is more international” (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999a). This comment called forth a flood of responses from the virtual community constructed by the program. Tse station switchboard was overrun. Audiences across the province were fascinated. Satanists were said, by and large, to be youthful, male, and black, just the social category most under threat of joblessness, most likely to dabble in nefarious new technologies. Witches, by contrast, were held to be motivated, more often, by local con- flicts, framed in long-standing idioms of kinship and community; although they, too, app- ear to be widening their horizons and their range of techniques. As the “high octane” petrochemical image suggests, what “satanic” youth bring to the occult economy is a capacity to “ride the tiger” – actually, in these parts, a leopard – “of time-space comp- ression” (Harvey 1990:351): to move across vast distances instantly, thus to accumu- late riches, without visible effort, by means unknowable to ordinary persons. The sym- bolic references in this are too dense to unravel here: they extend from the “fast” wealth being produced in the postcolony by control over the transportation of people, signs, and things to the changing salience of borders and transnational elsewheres in neolibe- ral South Africa. Above all, however, what became plain, listening both to the partici- pants in the show and to those with whom we watched it, was the fact that the occult economy is understood to link the most local of concerns, activities, and relations – un- derstood in the most local of terms – to inscrutable forces arising out of an equally in- scrutable world beyond, a world ever more “global.” This last, we stress again, is not our gloss. Recall that sign on the mud-brick school, the one that promised an education “in step with the global age” (above, p.00).

    In short, the second methodological operation involves mapping the extensions of the phenomenal landscape, the four-dimensional geography (see n.14) with referen- ce to which any discursive flow constitutes itself. Self-evidently, this, like mapping its substance, demands more than “multi-sited” ethnography. It demands an ethnography that, once orientated to particular sites and grounded issues, is pursued on multiple di- mensions and scales: an ethnography as attentive, say, to processes occurring in virtu- al space as to those visible in “real” places-under-production; to the transnational mass- mediation of images as to ritual mediations between human beings and their ancestors; to the workings of state bureaucracies or international courts as to the politics of “tradi- tional” chiefship and customary moots; to the flow of commodities across the planet as to marriage payments between lineages; and so on and on. Often it turns out that there are intimate, if invisible, connections across dimensions and scales: just as planetary commodity flows may, these days, determine bridewealth in an African village, so bride- wealth in an African village may have an impact on the planetary flow of labor, cash, and goods; similarly, just as the purview of local chiefs and their “traditional” courts may be decided by global human rights jurisprudence, global human rights jurisprudence is being challenged by demands for the recognition of “traditional” cultural imperatives.

    The third methodological operation is to trace the passage of a discursive flow over time; this to establish what, precisely, is new about it and what is not, what are the relative proportions of rupture and continuity to which it speaks, what is unique and what is merely a local instance of a wider phenomenon. How? By means of a counter- point: by (i) eliciting a local genealogy of cultural precursors and (ii) running it up against a comparative archaeology of similar signs and practices to ascertain where else, and in what circumstances, parallel discourses might be found. In respect of the zombies of the North West Province, and the occult economy of which they are part, local genealo- gies make it clear that they have not been around for much more than a decade; regar- ded thus, they signal a rupture. But there did exist a foreshadowing: sefifi, observed by missionaries in the nineteenth century (Comaroff and Comaroff 1991:143), a condition – in which “manhood is dead, though the body still lives” (Brown 1926:137) – brought about by the eclipse of a person by another, more powerful than s/he. This condition, it seems, provided a semantic frame within which the zombie has been accommodated. As to a comparative archaeology, there is evidence of at least two broadly parallel his- torical situations in Africa – in Mozambique and Cameroon earlier this century – in which living-dead have appeared (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999c). In both instances, their presence was intimately tied to radical changes in colonial labor conditions, to the disruption of received connections between persons, production, and place, to the pre- cariousness of wage employment, and to the alienation attendant on new forms of work. Put all this together and the point becomes clear: once historicized and interpella- ted into its local cultural context, the discursive flow surrounding the figure of the zom- bie has most immediately to do with labor history, with a burgeoning fear of the eclipse and commodification of people and social relations, with a sense of lost control over the means of producing value, with threats to the survival of local worlds under the impact of enigmatic forces from outside, with the unmooring of horizons and expectations oc- casioned by shifts in the workings of capital.

    CONCLUSION

    This brings us back, one last time, to the dialectic of induction and deduction, of theory and ethnography, of the concept and the concrete.

    When we resumed our work in post-apartheid South Africa in the 1990’s, as we have said, we had no idea that we would run into a fully fledged occult economy; or, to be more precise, into the phenomena captured in this ethnographically-grounded abs- traction. Nor could we have known how that economy had become a public preoccupa- tion. The appearance of a new breed of witches and zombies, and the anxieties they heralded, might have been interpreted purely as an expression of parochial conflicts and relations gone bad. What is more, in the hands of a cultural anthropologist with only the pristine horizons of the particular in view, a case could no doubt have been made for the idea that the living-dead of the present are a transformation of the sefifi of old; that the mystical evil of the here-and-now is an extension of “traditional” notions of witchcraft and sorcery. However, once we had traced out the discursive flow in which zombification is caught up – made manifest, methodologically, by charting the land- scape on which it had taken shape, rendered decipherable by recourse to local genealogies and comparative archaeologies, mediated by our own conceptual categories and commitments – it became obvious that this kind of explanation would have been woe- fully incomplete. For one thing, it would have left unaccountable the fact that similar phenomena have appeared in very different cultural contexts at roughly the same time and in response to the same broader historical conditions. For another, it would also have paid scant respect to the real-world concerns of Tswana living in the North West: to their arguments about the impossibility of social reproduction, about arcane means of producing wealth, about new forms of labor, commodification, and alienation, about witchcraft, satanism and globalization.

    In seeking to take account of those arguments and their social motivation, and to grasp the phenomenology of the lived, material world out of which they arose, we brought to bear an explicit theoretical orientation; it is one about which we had written a fair amount over the previous decade, one which contained within it a particular under- standing of the contemporary history of capital. That orientation primed our early read- ings – and misreadings – of the “new” South Africa. But it did not take long for its insuf- ficiencies to make themselves plain. Apart from all else, our take on the workings of modern industrial capitalism and its colonial extensions did not prepare us for the post- colony, for its postmodern zombies and unemployment-related witch killings, for its “cri- sis” of masculinity and generation, for the complex absent-presence of the state. It was, in other words, the incompleteness of our theoretical scaffolding – incomplete, that is, in the face of the concrete world which we were encountering – that set the dialectic in motion anew, altering our conceptual repertoire just as that repertoire was being mobili- zed to make sense of the unexpected landscape on which we found ourselves.

    Ethnography is like much else in the social sciences; indeed, more so than anthropologists often acknowledge. It is a multi-dimensional exercise, a co-production of social fact and sociological imagining, a delicate engagement of the inductive with the deductive, of the real with the virtual, of the already-known with the surprising, of verbs with nouns, processes with products, of the phenomenological with the political. Robert Foster (2002:247) has recently remarked, as we have ourselves (Comaroff and Coma- roff 1999a), that the key problem of doing ethnography “is ultimately a question of scale.” For him, that question boils down to the avoidance of “dissolving local particularities in the uniform sameness of global conditions without treating the radical distinctiveness of the local as if it stood against or apart from the global.” For us, the challenge goes yet further. It is to establish an anthropology-for-the-present on an ethnographic base that dissolves the a priori breach between theory and method: an anthropology, of multiple dimensions, that seeks to explain the manner in which the local and the trans- local construct each other, producing at once difference and sameness, conjuncture and disjuncture. An anthropology that takes, as its mandate, the need to make sense of the intersecting destinies of human lives, wherever they may happen to be lived out.

  • Millennial Capitalism, Occult Economies, and the Crisis of Reproduction in South Africa

    Millennial Capitalism, Occult Economies, and the Crisis of Reproduction in South Africa

    At its broadest, this essay explores the nature of historical consciousness among a South African Tswana people. On the basis of the imagery of two Tswana men – a “madman” institutionalized by the apartheid regime and a former migrant laborer – it examines the content of Tswana historical consciousness as expressed in vernacular cultural practices, specifically in relation to productiv work and wage labor. These differ from the narrative modes of representation associated with “history” in Euromodernist contexts, and build on various poetic devices – most strikingly, on the rhetoric of contrast – to give voice to contemporary experience and its historical roots. Thus the opposed concepts of productive work and wage labor, one associated with Setswana (Tswana ways) and the other with Sekgoa (European ways), are major tropes through which Tswana construct their past and present. It is argues that this excursion into the poetics of history in South Africa illuminates very general questions concerning the connection between consciousness, culture, history, and the poetics of representation.

  • Governmentality, Materiality, Legality, Modernity

    Governmentality, Materiality, Legality, Modernity

    [W]hat happens to people without nations . . . ? Are they human beings if they are not citizens? Julia Kristeva (1993: 26)

    PARADOXES OF THE COLONIAL STATE

    It has become commonplace, in the anthropology of colonialism, to stress the contingent, constructed, cultural dimensions of the encounter between Europe and its `others’ (e.g. Dirks 1992; Thomas 1994; Cooper and Stoler 1997: 4f). Ever more attention is being given to the making of imperial subjects by means of objects, via the manufacture of desire and the commodification of need (Comaroff and Comaroff 1997a); to the reconstruction of `natives’ through dispersed disciplinary regimes (e.g. Thomas 1990; Mitchell 1991); to the importance of overseas `possessions’ as `laboratories of modernity’ (Stoler 1995); to the impact of the life-ways of colonized

    peoples on European cultural practices (e.g. Trotter 1990: 5f). As received forms of modernization and Marxist theory retreat, dialectics give way to dialogics, political economy to poetics, class conflict to consumption, the violence of the gun to the violation of the text, world-historical material processes to local struggles over signs and styles, European domination to post-Hegelian hybridity.

    This is something of an over-statement, obviously. There are many who still argue for older approaches. And some who essay positions in between. In my own view, none of these images of colonialism is simply right or wrong: each refers to different moments in, different perspectives on, different aspects of its workings over time. I also believe that the pendulum swing between them will turn out to have a liberating effect on the Western academy.

    But I do have one lingering concern.
    It has to do with the question of the colonial state.
    George Steinmetz1 commented some three years ago, that, for all the recent attention given to colonialisms of various types, the colonial state itself is rarely theorized.2 True, its functions are often spelled out: for some, they lie in the regulation of material processes; for others, they are to be found in the establishment and maintenance of social order; for yet others, they derive from an ensemble of institutions created to protect European projects of expansion; for a few, they inhere in violence, terror, and coercion, framed as the guarantee of physical security for the colonizer against the colonized. This inventory is not exhaustive, of course; post-modern notions of the workings of the colonial state, as we shall see, include a broad range of disciplinary practices. But these, I stress, are all functional descriptions, a mode of knowing the beast by its effects (cf. Corrigan and Sayer 1985: 2). What is more, their conceptual and empirical bases are far from established. Hence Steinmetz’s caution. If he is correct, we have yet to answer some fairly fundamental questions.

    What precisely is `the colonial state?’ Is it one thing or many things or nothing at all?3 Is it a process? A series of institutional mechanisms? A specific form of governance? A cultural construct? An existential state of being-in-the world?
    And how does it differ from its Euro-counterpart, the metropolitan state `at home’?4

    Is there anything to be derived from the fact that, just as the term `state’ has two connotations in its noun form–the state, that is, as political order, structure, institution; the state as a condition-of-being–so as a verb it denotes to `give voice,’ to `articulate,’ to `narrate’?5

    It is to these questions that I direct my reflections on the colonial state in South Africa. And elsewhere. I do so by exploring, in a manner deliberately eclectic and fragmentary–at times even elementary–some of the dominant facts and fictions surrounding its social archaeology. Also by interrogating the major theoretical approaches to its description. My objective is not to tender a literature review. It is to cast radically new light on the nature of colonial governmentality, modernity, and the culture of legality at its core.

    MODERNIST MASTER NARRATIVES, LEFT AND RIGHT

    [T]he state is a territorial entity struggling to impose its will upon a fluid and spatially open process of capital circulation. It has to contest within its borders the factional forces and fragmenting effects . . . of capital[ism] . . . To do so effectively [it] must construct an alternative sense of community to that based on money, as well as a definition of public interests over and above the class and sectarian interests . . . contained within its borders. David Harvey (1990: 108)

    There is no need, in this context, to open up the question of why European colonizers–Dutch, then British6–found their way to southern Africa; or how `the colonial state’ established itself here. At first, European governance covered a limited, though gradually expanding, territory (see e.g. Krüger 1969: 325f; below). Pragmatically speaking, it set itself a fourfold mandate: (i) the `discovery’ of dark lands, which were conceptually emptied of their peoples and cultures7 so that their `wilderness’ might be fixed and named and mapped by an officializing white gaze; (ii) the pacification of `natives’ seen to be endemically unruly and hence requiring, even desiring,8 Pax Britannica; (iii) the facilitation of `commerce and adventurous industry’ (Barrow 1801- 4,1: 8f), thus to civilize the savages, to draw them into the beneficence of empire, and, simultaneously, to enrich the `mother country’; and (iv) rational administration–itself taken everywhere to be a prerequisite for the economic `management’ (read `exploitation’) of colonies (cf. Ajayi 1969: 505)–subsumed in a regime of predictable bureaucratic and fiscal practices.9 `Sociologically speaking,’ Weber (1968: 1394) was wont to say, `the modern state is an “enterprise” just like a factory.’ This, certainly, is how administrations in many parts of Africa liked to represent themselves–though, as Lugard (1997[1922]: 574) stressed, it was always deemed important to make it clear, alike `to the educated native, the conservative Moslem, and the primitive pagan,’ that `Government [was] . . . sympathetic to his aspirations,’ protective of `his natural rights,’ and `in touch with [his] thought and feeling.’

    The fourfold mandate taken upon themselves by colonial regimes in Africa implied that the master narrative of European imperial expansion, its narrative of mastery, would place `the state’ at the centre of the story: that `the state,’ in the singular, would be at once the ur-protagonist and the organizing trope of an epic history; that its heroic personages would be public figures–statesmen–who were agents of overrule and governance; also, as a result, that this history would, in its authoritative telling, be political rather than cultural, social, or even, in the first instance, economic.

    Which, of course, has turned out to be the case.

    It has been said, quite often recently, that history in its modernist form–as a chronicle of public events and heroic actions–is re-presentation (Comaroff and Comaroff 1992: 176); the authoritative self-representation, in particular, of the nation- state (cf. Anderson 1983). And, since colonialism everywhere has been inextricably imbricated in the making of European modernity (Stoler 1995), in the maturation of its sovereign communities (Cooper and Stoler 1997: 18f), it is hardly surprising that imperial encounters should have been written as the political histories of states acting out their destinies on other peoples, other places.

    In South Africa both liberal and conservative histories10 place almost exclusive emphasis on the role of the colonial state in the domestication and development of the subcontinent; or did until very recently.11 Owusu (1975: 34-5), although writing in a more general key, describes nicely the epistemic bases of the orthodox historiography of South Africa. He observes that accounts in this tradition are, wittingly or otherwise, grounded in `theories’ of modernization. (The quote marks, signs of irony, are his.) These accounts take as axiomatic the inevitability of modernity. They emphasize its gradual evolution, presume the centrality of government in effecting its progress, and treat its narrative, ultimately, as political, even when focusing on material processes.

    As told from this perspective, the story of the colonial state in South Africa is usually divided into four periods: (i) 1652-1806, the phase of Dutch mercantile rule, interrupted briefly by an English takeover (see n.6); (ii) 1806-c.1870, the early British years, in which imperial governance was restricted in geographical and administrative scope, and during which two breakaway white settler republics were established in the interior; (iii) 1870-1910, the age of the mineral and industrial revolution–and `scramble for Africa’–when the United Kingdom sought to extend its control over the subcontinent as a whole; and (iv) 1910-1994, the epoch of the Union of South Africa, a dominion within the British Commonwealth, which culminated in the rise and fall of apartheid.

    Each of these periods is narrated around a few topoi. One is the role of the state in regulating (often antagonistic) relations among whites; in particular, between those Europeans who later congealed into the Afrikaner `people,’ an agrarian population which came to resent the liberal social attitudes of the British administration toward Africans, and English settlers, who saw themselves as much more cosmopolitan and enlightened (Coetzee 1988: 9f; Streak 1974: 5f).

    Another is the centrality of the colonial state in governing `native’ populations, in overseeing their `discipline’ and `development.’ This took many forms, all clothed in a mass of legalities: among them, the introduction of `indirect rule,’ which ostensibly retained local government in the hands of traditional authorities (Lugard 1922) but, in fact, made most of them into menial civil servants of empire; the delimitation of African land into reserves and locations; the regulation–often by the naked manipulation of black economic viability–of flows of people to centres of industrial and agrarian production; the claim to be civilizing those people through enlightened rule, by such modernist means as the provision of education, public health facilities, and judicial institutions–and, more baldly, through wage work itself (Comaroff and Comaroff 1992: 199f.).

    A third motif is the function of the state as a site of, and a mediator in, struggles between Europeans and Africans over land and labour, property and rights (cf. Gann and Duignan 1969: 5); this despite the fact that it was often an interested player in those struggles, sometimes annexing territory to further its own interests (cf. Lonsdale and Berman 1979: 496f). Its adjudicatory role was most dramatically enacted in the innumerable commissions of enquiry held by the British administration over the years (cf. Ashforth 1990; see below). These arbitrated disputes of diverse kinds and, in doing so, reinforced the legitimacy of the state as a superordinate structure of governance.

    The last theme is the engagement of colonial states in the economics of empire, both at home and abroad. Liberal and conservative histories alike pay exquisitely detailed attention to the ways in which these states intervened to promote European commerce; to protect the enterprises of expatriate settlers and frontier farmers; to facilitate the extraction of raw materials and labour power; to develop trade networks and markets; and, from the 1870s onward, to interpolate itself into an unfolding mineral and industrial revolution.

    As I said, all histories of colonialism in South Africa, written from orthodox perspectives, are ultimately distilled into sequences of actions around these topoi. What is more, they usually regard the state as a benign force,12 one which sought to balance the interests of the various parties under its jurisdiction. Its excesses and descents into violence, its scandals and corruptions, its inefficiencies and incoherences, its deployment for the enrichment of some at the expense of others–if recognized at all– are treated as aberrations, as ruptures in an otherwise seamless narrative of progress. And they are, by and large, blamed not on the systemic contradictions of colonialism, but on misanthropic or misguided individuals. In this respect, Harvey (1989: 108) is correct: the state is portrayed here–much as it represented itself–as embodying and serving a public good, a collective sense of being-in-the-world, against sectarian differences within its borders (cf. Engels 1968: 586).

    Neo-Marxist historians13 of South Africa, influential in the 1970s and 1980s, contest all this. For them, it was the material logic of industrial capitalism that determined the colonial encounter–the state being the bureaucratic armature of business, a superstructure with little autonomy, will, or agency of its own. Its physical and fiscal capacity to coerce is held to have served one end: the exploitation and regulation of labour–and, concomitantly, the making of a quiescent black proletariat (e.g. Wolpe 1988; Magubane 1979). As Harvey (1990: 108) has said, after Marx, `the state, constituted as a coercive authority that has a monopoly over institutionalized violence, [is the] . . . organizing principle through which a ruling class can seek to impose its will not only on its opponents but upon the anarchical flux, change, and uncertainty to which capitalist modernity is always prone.’ Its tools of coercion vary, he adds. They include the imposition of taxes and levies; the provision or withholding of resources; control over incomes in the public sector; and a monopoly of the means of surveillance, of military might and police repression. Neo-Marxist historians in South Africa are wont to see political institutions less as a response to the anarchical flux or uncertainties of modernity–less, also, as a `principle’ through which ruling classes impose their will–than as a creature of the inexorable development of capital itself. But they would agree about the tools of coercion typically used by colonial regimes.

    They would also go one further step with Marx himself (1967,I: 765). In the colonies, he argues, the capitalist régime everywhere comes into collision with the resistance of the producer, who, as owner of his own conditions of labour, employs that labour to enrich himself, instead of the capitalist . . . Where the capitalist has at his back the [state] power of the mother-country, he tries to clear out of his way by force, the modes of production and appropriation, based on the independent labour of the producer.14

    The integration of black South Africans into the capitalist economy of colonial South Africa–through the forcible destruction of their modes of production–is narrated in a manner reminiscent of various species of dependency theory (see e.g. Bundy 1972, 1979; Marks and Rathbone 1982; Marks and Trapido 1987). Arguments over the details aside, we are told how African societies were deliberately impoverished, their economies subverted, thus to make them dependant on a mix of underpaid migrant wage labour in the urban industrial sector (done mainly done by men) and underproductive rural agriculture (done largely by women). The role of the state in this process was to provide the `overt political controls’ (Parsons 1977: 137) necessary to expedite the underdevelopment of the countryside and to guarantee the supply of compliant cheap labour. No more, no less.

    A qualification here. From other parts of Africa have come efforts to write a more nuanced version of the neo-Marxist narrative. Lonsdale and Berman (1970: 487), for example, hold that the state was never just `a loyal minister to capital’s needs,’ that it was `relatively autonomous’ (cf. Wallerstein 1974: 402). Why? Because it had to appear as an `even-handed arbiter’ presiding over different, often inimical, material and social worlds (p.489); echoes here of Harvey (see above). Moreover, government could not simply oblige the interests of colonizers, as these were often contradictory and excessive. But, if it could `not be the servant of capital,’ it certainly was `the protector of capitalist social relations’ (pp.489-90). This is the nuance: it was capitalism, rather than capital, of which governance was a reflex. Indeed, the state is defined by Lonsdale and Berman as `the historically conditioned set of institutions in any class society which . . . secures the social conditions for the production of the dominant mode of production’ (p.489). Colonial administrations, they continue, `never ceased to provide the conditions for the reproduction of settler capitalism’ (p.504). Which suggests that, for all the effort to refine its role, state remain supporting players in the political economy of colonialism.

    I shall return to this.

    PANOPTICS, POWER, AND POST-MODERN COUNTER-NARRATIVES

    Aylesbury Prison, England, 1918. He was stripped and put in a cell with a stone floor and no glass in the window . . . [But] it was not the cold that bothered him, it was being watched all the time. The eye in the door . . . an elaborately painted eye [inside the cell] . . . , was deeply disturbing . . . `’S not so bad so long as it stays in the door. You start worrying when it gets in [your head].’

    Pat Barker (1995: 36)

    A new chapter has opened up in the historical anthropology of colonialism in South Africa. And it is evoking alarm in some scholarly circles,15 largely because it subverts a host of conceptual certainties. Born of the revisionism of which I spoke at the outset–and grounded in Foucault’s discourses on power, governmentality, and the modernist subject–it has not yet been fully worked out in this part of the world. Mitchell’s Colonising Egypt (1991) is perhaps the most completely realized example in Africa, and it is written about the other end of the continent. Nonetheless, it is a harbinger of post- structuralist and post-Marxist perspectives that are beginning to make themselves felt as never before. I do not intend here to offer an introduction to Foucault on power and governmentality; enough has already been written in that vein. I should like instead to make a few points of typification, sketching briefly how a post-modern `reading’ of the colonial state might proceed in South Africa.

    From a Foucauldian vantage, the modernist state is itself a disciplinary formation. Its power is less instrumental than `capillary’: it stretches, autonomically and unseen, into the very construction of its subjects, into their bodily routines and the essence of their selfhood. Indeed, it is by inculcating a deeply interiorized, individuated sense of self-regulation–through its clinics, schools, prisons, and other sites of surveillance; its censuses, surveys, and cognate forms of accounting; its modes of objectifying personhood through the `human sciences’; its `natural’ institutions like the family, established religion, and commodified regimes of recreation–that the state imposes order. Order, that is, in both the sense of regularity and regulation, of convention and command, of civility and servility. This involves the insinuation of an entire space-time world into the mundane practices of citizens. Thus are subjects subjected to modes of control that are rendered unseen in their very enactment.

    In order to analyze the workings of colonial states, then, it is necessary to look to their capillary modes of regulation. But there is a caveat here. Unlike the European polities with which Foucault himself was concerned, colonies were never places of even tenuously-imagined homogeneity. For the most part, their administration was vested in states without hyphe-nation: in states without nations. Here lay the ideological contrast between metropolitan and colonial governance. One depended, for its existence, on the cultural work of manufacturing sameness, of engendering a horizontal sense of fraternity (Anderson 1983); this notwithstanding the fact that its political sociology frequently fell far short of its own self-representation–or that, in many cases, the identity between nation and state was more aspiration than reality. The other, despite its rhetoric of universalizing modernity, was concerned with the practical management, often the production, of difference. Consequently, imperial regimes abroad were always caught up in a `doubling’: while they spoke of transforming colonized peoples into civilized–i.e. `modern’–right-bearing citizens, they dealt in heterogeneity by naturalizing ethnic difference and racial inequality.16 The former was entailed, if nothing else, in converting `savages’ into proletarians. The latter was implicit in the grammar of cultural diversity, the organic anthropology, which underpinned the hierarchical structure of European rule. This, we have argued (1997a), is the base contradiction of colonialism. Its telos pointed toward secular modern citizenship (and eventually nationhood), its reality toward a world of ethnic subjection. In the optic of empire, `natives’ were always subject/citizens-in-formation.

    But how, exactly, did colonial states set about (re)constructing the identities, the being-in-the-world, of those over whom they governed? Wherein lay their applied anthropology? On the understanding that these were interlocking processes, let us look first at the making of the modernist citizen, then at the fashioning of the ethnicized `native.’

    In Africa, the construction of the aboriginal as a colonial citizen owed a lot to the political economy and pragmatics of overrule. As long as they lived in their own communities, ruled by their own chiefs and customs, indigenes might remain faceless and nameless. But once they entered colonial society–as workers or commodity farmers, subalterns or servants, sellers or buyers–they had to have recognizable names, individual identities, rights and responsibilities.17 How, otherwise, could they enter into contracts or be prosecuted for wrongs? How, otherwise, could they be made to pay tariffs and levies? How, otherwise, could their movements, marriages and divorces, property and possessions be regulated?

    In sum, the transformation of `savages’ into `citizens’–albeit always an incomplete process–was a corollary of the mobilization of a stable army of labourers into the capitalist sector, which demanded that employees be tied by legal agreements and defection be criminalized; of taxation, through which the cost of colonial governance could be offset and people coerced to work; of the introduction of `private’ assets, which entailed titles, estates, and testaments; and of the oversight of domestic life, including the formation, reproduction, and break up of families. All this was effected by a range of now familiar methods of enumeration, serialization, individuation, identification: the registration of births (hence, also, of names) and deaths (along, in time, with wills); the certification of lawful wedlock and its dissolution; the institution of population censuses,18 tax rolls, and identity papers; the ever more extensive documentation, bureaucratization, and rationalization of everyday life. In many places these things were actively resisted. Tswana, for example, referred to them as `the English mode of warfare.’ They were held to reduce `human beings to pieces of paper,’ and were seen as instruments of violence by which indigenes were relieved of their property and freedom of movement (J.L. Comaroff 1997: 256). Throughout the country during the twentieth century, moreover, `pass books’–notorious identity documents which blacks had to carry–were periodically burned in public, leading to bitter confrontations with police. In the late apartheid years, significantly, tax registers, census files, and the like often became targets of mass destruction.

    In its effort to create colonial citizens of color, the state was abetted, if unwittingly, by other expatriates. The most notable were Protestant evangelists, among the earliest colonizers in South Africa. Also the most thorough. The civilizing mission was intended to effect a `revolution in the habits’ of Africans (Philip 1828,2: 355) by breaking down their `semi-communistic ways’19 and severing the `promiscuous’ webs of relations that bound them together; by clothing them in `properly,’ so that their bodies would be covered and enclosed; by persuading them to treat marriage as an ensemble of rights, a contract between two consenting adults, and to live in nuclear homes on fenced-off squares of land; by teaching their children to be disciplined and to improve themselves by dint of sheer effort; by encouraging each man to work on his own behalf as a wage-earner, thus to appreciate the virtues of money, the market, and property; in short, by ensuring that their would-be converts were biologically and legally self- contained individuals.

    If these were the techniques by which colonizers recast Africans as citizens, their fabrication as ethnic, racialized subjects followed a different (dis)course.

    The transformation of southern Africa into an ethnoscape depended, first of all, on a colonizing cartography. I noted earlier that the `dark continent’ was treated as an empty space until it fell under the European gaze, thence to be mapped, by means of conventional graphic images, onto an expansive world-picture. As a contemporary poem by Jonathan Swift had it (Curtin 1964: 198): `. . . Geographers in Afric-Maps//With Savage Pictures fill their Gaps.’ Colonial cartography replaced those pictures, and the epistemic void they covered, with `scientific’ charts grounded in a political geography intended to facilitate imperial command. It entailed the compilation of atlases on which aboriginal `tribes’ and `peoples’–invented sometimes20–were labelled and placed in bounded territories, each the designated realm of a legitimate monarch, chief, or headman. For the British, in fact, command without cartography did not actually amount to colonialism at all (Barrow 1801-4,1:67). As Harvey (1990: 255) has noted: `If space . . . is always a container of social power, then [its] reorganization . . . is always a reorganization of the framework through which social power is expressed.’

    Not only a reorganization, of course. Also a re-presentation. Especially a representation of new ethnological fixities, of the geographies of governance implied in reducing the living worlds of local populations to timeless, two dimensional abstractions. Such were things that colonial functionaries understood well; they underlay `indirect rule,’ the creation of `tribal reserves,’ and the reduction of indigenous sovereigns into servants of empire, its lowly tax collectors and labour recruiters. Hence the obsession of imperial bureaucracies with mapping–and all that went with it.

    One thing that did go with it, quite regularly, were government commissions of enquiry (see Ashforth 1990). These commissions investigated territorial boundaries and dealt with land claims; set the terms of `native’ authority and administration, particularly in respect of law and custom;21 inquired into labour relations and contracts, and framed the terms of wage work for blacks, including the master-servant provisions which tied employees to their employers;22 and so on. Some had specific mandates,23 others were given very general briefs.24 All were intended, ostensibly, to reduce chaos to order. But, whatever else they did, government commissions tended to see their task as ethnological; they documented vernacular life-ways, compiling the first official ethnographic records of the peoples of the region. True, they often relied on the writings of missionaries and explorers. But they also did their own research, interviewing chiefs and elders to ascertain their `traditions.’ Many of their descriptions were very thin by anthropological standards; still, they became compendia of authoritative information about local cultures. Later they gave way to (i) annual reports, submitted by district administrators, which documented change and continuity in customary practices; and, after the formation of the Union of South Africa, (ii) ethnological surveys written by the staff of the Department of Native Affairs.

    Government commissions, then, gave bureaucratic currency to the categorical structures and cultural divisions emerging across the South African landscape. Also, by treating those cultures and categories as primordial, the state naturalized them, elevating them into hegemonic forms of naming-and-knowing–at least until anticolonial struggles began to unravel them. As we have shown,25 the genesis of modern ethnic identities and differences here had much to do with early encounters between autochthonous peoples and the civilizing mission; but the official inscription of such identities and differences increasingly became the business of government. In legitimizing labels and authorizing images of otherness–and in laying an anthropological basis for its dispersed regimes of regulation–the state tried hard to ensure the consent and the collaboration of the colonized. Glimpses here of Gramsci, foreshadowings of Fanon.

    Mirroring back to the colonized images of themselves as ethnic, racialized subjects occurred in many contexts, both ordinary and awesome. Such images–verbal, pictorial, even musical–saturated the public sphere. They also found formal representation in museums, where `traditional’ cultures were displayed in lifeless dioramas; in scholarly treatises on language, habit, and lore; in national ceremonies and monuments, especially those evoking the `discovery’ and domination of South Africa; in the theology of settler Christianity; and in a range of other specular and spectacular events. Most potently of all, perhaps, they pervaded schooling, infused alike in formal syllabi and `hidden’ curricula (Comaroff and Comaroff n.d.). There is no need here to explain why European pedagogy, with its invasive technologies of mind and body, was a crucial vector in the effort to implant new signs and practices among African peoples. Indeed, for all their ideological differences, liberal apologists and Marxist critics tend alike to (over)stress the efficacy of education in assailing the consciousness of colonial subjects. And in recasting their epistemic world, endowing it with new axes of knowing- and-being.26

    Those images, moreover, had a distinctive, refractory cast to them, portraying `the native’ as a primitive conservative.27 Having had their cultures objectified, primordialized, and dehistoricized, ethnic subjects found themselves depicted as benighted antimoderns. They were said to be governed by the primal sovereignty of their customs and customary rulers (J.L. Comaroff 1995), and cling, unquestioningly and unreasoningly, to their ancestral taboos. In response, the colonial state, practising its own politics of unreason, criminalized some cultural practices (e.g. witchcraft, polygyny, and `ritual murder’) and endorsed others (e.g. `customary law’)–depending, in part, on the exigencies of governance. It also appealed to the primal hold of custom to prevent social change, even when that change was demanded by indigenous peoples. Thus, to take one case, the British Bechuanaland Land Commission of 1886 (Great Britain 1886) invoked the `ancient system’ of `communal tenure’ to prevent a Tswana sovereign from introducing individual land ownership in one his dominion; this in spite of his having had strong local support, and sound economic and political reasons, for the move (Schapera 1983). Prior to overrule, this legislative innovation would have been within his jurisdiction (Schapera 1970). Now, however, the state authorized itself to decide that his subjects were `not ready’ for the change.

    Similarly, and more seriously, in 1905 the South African Native Affairs Commission argued against universal franchise, claiming that Africans preferred traditional forms of representation; it went on to recommend reduced black voting rights in national and provincial elections. The Commission also declared that economic and social arrangements based on individualism were not suited to aboriginal peoples. Being under the primal sway of ancestral custom, they were `unready’ for this too. In the upshot, these peoples were encouraged to see themselves as faceless Zulu or Sotho or Xhosa or whatever, with no consideration of class or gender or generation or personal circumstances. As Sartre (1955: 215) once said, the distinctive experience of colonialism is being made to feel, and then to see one’s self, as a `native.’ It was an experience to which the actions of the colonial state were strongly to conduce.

    This returns us to the contradiction at the core of colonialism. In South Africa, the state28 spoke, in a promissory voice, of making modern, right-bearing citizens out of `natives’ whom it persisted, at the same time, in treating as ethnic subjects. On one hand, `Non-Europeans’–an official term of negation–were said to be on the high road to civilization and citizenship, prosperity and propertied individualism. On the other, they were portrayed, to themselves and the world, as anonymous antimoderns, condemned for the foreseeable future to the primal mire of custom. The colonial state often engaged in its own internal arguments over this doubling; it was a recurring register in a broader discourse on `The Native Problem.’ The basic question in this discourse, as Cooper and Stoler (1997: 7) put it, was: `How much civilization was appropriate’ for aboriginal peoples? It was a question that was answered in many ways over time. But almost invariably with an eye to reproducing distinction, dualism, and discrimination. Difference, again, in three dimensions.

    THE COLONIAL STATE IN CRITICAL PERSPECTIVE: ABSENCE, ABSURDITY, INCOHERENCE

    The actual history of states has been one of continuous growth, both in their claim to regulate the lives and property of their subjects, and in their physical capacity to enforce such claims . . . Yet, paradoxically, the increase in the state’s range and power has produced countervailing decreases in effectiveness. Kenneth Minogue (1987: 239-40)

    How persuasive, then, are these paradigmatic perspectives on the colonial state?

    The differences between them are stark, of course. Which is why the weaknesses of one appear as the strengths of the other. For example, modernist approaches, both orthodox and Marxist, would seem to be on uncontentious ground in interrogating political economy to get at the workings of colonial governance; the failure to account for material forces, it is often said, is a serious deficiency in post-marxist, post-modern accounts of the same thing. On the other hand, Foucauldians have pointed out that the construction of something called `political economy,’ hardly a category given by nature, is itself a function of the history of modernity. And of its forms of power. From this viewpoint, the reciprocal inattention of pre-Foucauldian sociologies of the state to its technologies of discipline and representation is even more egregious.

    These mutual allegations carry considerable weight. But the matter is more complex than it may first look. For one thing, the obvious corollary does not follow: it is not possible simply to add a measure of political economy to post-modern approaches– or more concern with capillary power to older orthodoxies–and expect a better understanding the colonial state. As I have intimated, `political economy’ is an analytic term with its own archaeology, not a species of empirical phenomena. What it describes, how it is to be understood, is highly contested, both within and across theoretical paradigms. Conversely, capillary processes of governmentality pose their  own conundrum: the more comprehensive they were, the more persuasive in explaining colonial domination, the less colonial states ought ever to have encountered resistance. They did, everywhere. Of which more in a moment.

    But, even taken purely on their own terms, both modernist and post-modern perspectives, in all their variants, suffer from critical flaws, fallacies, failures. Let us mention just a few and allow the matter to rest; this on the understanding that paradigmatic critique–by contrast to more specific forms of theoretical exegesis–occurs at a level of generality to which there are always exceptions and qualifications.

    Modernist approaches, left and right alike, may be taken to task on four counts.

    First, in dealing with imperial governance, they seldom distinguish sufficiently between its various spheres and levels; most notably between the metropolitan and the colonial state. I have already remarked the ontological contrast between them. Its political outworkings are as crucial. Functionaries `at home’ and `abroad,’ and in different ministries and departments, often came into intense conflict with one another over questions of policy, the material and moral economics of empire, and the proper means of extending European dominion. These `tensions of empire’ (Cooper and Stoler 1997) were in part structural, in part perspectival: the imperatives of colonialism, like the fiscal commitment necessary for effective governance, did not appear the same to everyone engaged in the business of overrule; such things varied a great deal according to time, place, and position. Their negotiation had a major impact on the historical destinies of particular colonies, on their modes of governance, and the well-being of their indigenous populations.

    Second, in treating the colonial state as a generic entity, modernist discourses have tended to elide a wide spectrum of political, ideological, and imaginative forms. To speak of the Raj, at the height of its elaboration, in the same breath as the administrations of, say, Lesotho or Zanzibar is to stretch a monothetic category far beyond its breaking point. `The colonial state’ describes not a thing but a genus of historically fluid forms and processes; `it’ cannot be typified or theorized in the singular, in the indicative mood, or in the continuous past or present tense. Concomitantly, abstract statements about its workings, especially those derived from paradigmatic cases, are inherently open to disaffirmation. For example, when Kaviraj (1995: 25f) states that the state was the `controlling structure’ at the epicentre the colonial world, he seems to take South Asia as his point of reference; in nineteenth-century Africa this claim would be flatly wrong.

    Third, modernist discourses–again, conservative, liberal, and Marxist alike–have failed to address `the Minogue Paradox.’ Recall Kenneth Minogue’s (1987: 239f) observation: while states in general have had a history of cumulative growth–in their institutional complexity and the range of their authority over the lives of citizens–their elaboration has been accompanied by a proportional decrease in the efficacy of their control. This has had many manifestations, from the collapse of once potent regimes to the creeping inability of others to control the means of violence, to contain the workings of the market or the flow of money, to meet the costs of reproducing infrastructure or to limit the expansion of the `private’ sector (J.L. Comaroff 1996). Colonial administrations, likewise, appear to have evinced the Minogue Paradox. The more powerful they became, the more they managed the life-worlds of those whom they ruled, the less effective they seem to have been, over the long run, in making `natives’ into compliant subjects, in yielding a profit to the metropole, in stifling resistance, in sustaining the coherence of their modes of governance (Bissell 1998)–and, finally, in surviving the onslaught of anticolonial forces. The Minogue Paradox, in other words, raises a elemental challenge: how to explain the exquisite counterpoint of legitimacy and limitation, of regulation and resistance, of power and paralysis that animated the history of the colonial state.

    The fourth concerns the relationship between the colonial state and capital. As we saw above, both Marxist and liberal traditions have emphasized the indissoluble connection between them. From the perspective of the first, recall, the state was a reflex of capital(ism). For the second, it existed to administer the economy for the common good: to manage and monitor the money supply and the banking system; to levy taxes, oversee public spending, facilitate the development of commerce, and ensure law and order. While this view has been taken to task repeatedly for its ingenuous, roseate view of overseas administration–and for ignoring the role of the state in racializing and naturalizing inequality–the Marxist alternatives also underplay the sheer complexity of colonial political economy.

    The state, goes the counter-argument, was never just a reflex of capital. It often did serve capitalist interests, of course; even more, there were moments when government and business appeared indistinguishable. But there were also times of struggle between them, times when colonial bureaucracies acted against the private sector (Lonsdale and Berman 1979: 489f). Furthermore, for all the idea that the primary function of political authorities was to superintend the recruitment and regulation of labour, a mandate discharged with variable success, the reality was a lot less straightforward (Comaroff and Comaroff 1997a: Chap.4). All else aside, many `natives’ migrated in search of work voluntarily, sometimes under the impact of missionary teaching, long before government intervened. In this respect, it is worth noting that the state, as a forcible presence, was a relative late-comer in much of the South African interior.29 All of which points to an obvious conclusion: that, for all their interconnections and articulations, the history of colonial governance is irreducible to a history of capital(ism).

    Some of the same critical points apply as well to post-modern, post-structuralist, post-marxist analyses. There is no need to expatiate here on the allegation, noted before, that these analyses short-circuit the manifest materialities of colonial capitalism. More interesting, for present purposes, are three other lines of critique, each of which takes seriously the achievement of Foucauldian histories in illuminating the relationship between power, governmentality, and the making of the modern subject.

    One is that the capillary processes associated with colonial governance–the inculcation of a self-regulating, biologically discrete, legally constituted sense of human being–were not a function of the state alone. They were, equally, the province of the civilizing mission pursued by evangelists, social reformers, and other `noncommissioned’ agents of empire.30 In part, this had to do with the unspoken division of imperial labour, in part, with the practical constraints of command. Even when European bureaucracies were at their most developed, their mastery over the lives of indigenous peoples was always incomplete; at times, it was notably limited. This is not to say that colonial rule was never intrusive, coercive, violent. It certainly could be. But it often ran up against the limits of its own possibility; which, in turn, led administrators to rely on other white expatriates to regiment, regulate, and refine `the native.’ Simply put, to see the state as the primary producer of racialized subjects–let alone of colonized consciousness, of remapped axes of space and time, of reformed ideas of selfhood–is to misrecognize the deus ex machina of capitalist modernity.

    But there is another, more obvious problem with the stress on the capillary character of colonial rule. It is this. Colonial states everywhere depend(ed) at once on (i) instrumental, institutional, tangible forms of coercion, (ii) means of violence both immanent and manifest, (iii) diffuse modes of surveillance and discipline, and (iv) the positive production of consent. As this implies, the instrumental and the capillary are complementary dimensions of all governance; conditions, in fact, of its very existence. True, their proportions vary. But, insofar as power is the relative capacity to construct realities–to fashion human subjects and social forms, material value and truth-value, perceptions and intentions–it always has interiorized and exteriorized, spoken and unspoken, private and public, productive and repressive coordinates. It makes no sense, therefore, to reduce colonial rule, sui generis, to the insinuation of a singular kind of subjection; all the more so in light of its often incoherent, murky executive practices. And its simultaneously civilizing, criminalizing, exploitative, humanitarian, and punitive tendencies. One thing that Foucauldian approaches have not done is to explain the limits of the capillary. Until they do, the term remains a suggestive adjective, a partial description of colonial governance, not a theory of its workings. Nor does it elicit unanimous consent. Cooper (1994: 1533), for one, makes the case for a competing metaphor: `power in colonial societies was more arterial than capillary–concentrated spatially and socially, not very nourishing beyond such domains, and in need of a pump to push it…’

    Which leads to the third line of critique. To phrase it in the interrogative voice: If capillary techniques of governance were effective, if they did inculcate disciplined subjection, why did imperial regimes abroad differ so widely in deploying them?31 Even more mysterious, why, ask Cooper and Stoler (1997: 8), did colonizers spend so much time defining and defending categories and representations which were untenable–and which interfered with their command over indigenous populations? Why did they sometimes go to absurd lengths to display their firepower, especially when it was flimsy?32 Why, in sum, were colonial states so prone to failure, to drawing disruptive attention to their own administrative practices? And why, when they did rely on those very capillary techniques–ostensibly silent, invisible, innocent means of imposing control–did they frequently incur angry reactions?

    Colonial subjects, it seems, were not easily hoodwinked. Among Tswana, for instance, the government ahgent (Comaroff and Comaroff 1991: 295) was despised precisely because of his role in counting, taxing, and otherwise regulating the minutiae of their everyday lives. A few of these men were actually killed.33 But still more instructive, as a narrative of noncapitulation, is something alluded to above: that these same people spoke of the colonial culture of legality–the reduction of everything to documents, contracts, and titles–as `the English mode of warfare.’ Tswana knew violence when they saw it. Or, more accurately, when they could not see it. There is every reason to believe that their heightened awareness of invisible forms of surveillance and control arose out of the contradiction at the core of overrule; out of the fact that `natives’ were promised full, right-bearing citizenship in an enlightened new world, but found themselves delivered into racial subjection (see above). This `doubling’ could not but draw their attention, at times ruthlessly, to the means of colonial governance–rendering even the most subtle of them at once starkly visible and resonantly audible.

    As a result, far from instilling compliant self-discipline, the capillary techniques of colonial states played a great part in sparking processes of challenge and riposte, of transgression, transformation, and hybridization; a greater part than did brute force. Which is the opposite of what a Foucauldian narrative, at least in vulgar form, might lead us to expect. That narrative cannot account for the essential paradox of colonial governance: its capacity to be ordered yet incoherent, rational yet absurd, violent yet impotent; to elicit compliance and contestation, subjection and insurrection. Often at once. And, disconcertingly, in ways that blurred the lines between apparently antithetical species of action.

    RE-STATING THE PROBLEM, PROBLEMATIZING THE STATE(S)

    States, if the pun be forgiven, state . . . They define, in great detail, 28 acceptable forms and images of social activity and individual and collective identity . . . in this sense `the State’ never stops talking.34

    Philip Corrigan and Derek Sayer (1985: 3)

    It is this paradox that makes it impossible to arrive at closure by (re)formulating a neat ideal-typification of `the colonial state’; to reduce it, that is, from an active verb to an abstract noun. Indeed, the point of composing my reflection as a contrapuntal critique has been to show that the beast resists two-dimensional representation; that its variabilities, limits, fluidities, and disarticulations over time and space were an overdetermined expression of its inner workings and its dealings with `others’; that it was an immanent structure of divers possibilities whose concrete political, material, and cultural forms were made, remade, and unmade in historical practice; that it was an ensemble of generative processes, not generic properties.

    This takes us back to the Big Questions posed at the outset. Most importantly, what exactly is `the colonial state?’ Indefinite or definite article? One thing, many, or nothing at all? A series of mechanisms? A process? A specific form of governance? A cultural construct? A condition of being-in-the world? What is to be made of the fact that the word itself also connotes to `give voice,’ to `articulate,’ to `narrate’? We are now in a position to engage these questions–and, in doing so, to restate the problem of the state as a discourse in the interconnections of governmentality, materiality, modernity, and legality.

    Let us begin with the first. The colonial state, in South Africa as elsewhere, was always an aspiration, a work-in-progress, a phantasm-to-be-made-real. Rarely was it ever a fully actualized accomplishment. An `ideological project,’ Abrams (1988: 75-6) called it35–adding, provocatively, that, being an `essentially imaginative construction,’ it was `the distinctive collective misrepresentation of capitalist societies.’ Shades, here, of things written long ago. Corrigan and Sayer (1985: 7) remind us that Marx (1967) believed `the State’ to be in an important sense an illusion. Of course, institutions of government are real enough. But `the’ state is in large part an ideological construct, a fiction: [it] is at most a message of domination–an ideological artifact attributing unity, structure and independence to the disunited, structureless and dependent workings of the practice of government.

    Not just Marx either. Weber (1948: 78) too. For him, it was `a claim to legitimacy, a means by which politically organized subjection is simultaneously accomplished and concealed, and it is constituted in large part by the activities of institutions of government themselves’ (loc.cit.).

    A truly curious force of history, this, at least if we agree with Marx and Weber: simultaneously a claim to authority, a cultural artifact, an illusion,36 a present absence/absent presence, a principle of unity masking institutional disarticulation, and a potent construct which manifested itself in the quotidian activities of government. But ought we to concur with Marx and Weber,37 whose perspectives derived from a very particular place in the modernist political history of Europe?

    In nineteenth- and twentieth-century Africa, the colonial state was often an 30 elusive entity. Typically, too, it was many things at once, even when imagined as one: less a singular, definite article than an indefinite, variably integrated ensemble of sites, institutions, narratives, and material processes, it was the political frame (i) in which power sought to authorize itself thus to speak and act for a political community, for its past and its future;38 (ii) in which bureaucratic cadres ruled with differing degrees of autonomy, entering into common cause at times with various social fractions, usually defined by (if not named in the language of) class, race, and/or gender; (iii) in which cultural conventions, their coercive aspect camouflaged in the habits of everyday life, were posited as a precondition of collective being-in-the-world.

    Colonial regimes contrasted widely in the extent to which they managed to condense legitimate power in themselves, to suppress a politics of difference, to manufacture consent, and to ritualize the subjection of citizens to the state. Such things, patently, depended on a range of historical contingencies too broad to list here. So too did the degree to which partisan blocs–often, but not invariably, colonial capitalists of one kind or another–succeeded in appropriating the means of government, including the use of force. Which is why some overseas administrations were weak, others strong; some highly intrusive, others scarcely visible; some energetically protective of expatriate enterprises, others less so; some brutally violent, others barely coercive; some contested, others accommodated; in; some prone to flamboyant ceremony, others matter-of-fact in their regulatory routines; some well-ordered and efficient in their technologies of rule, others in more-or-less constant disarray. Indeed, the explanation of these patterns of variance, and of their historicity, is the task awaiting the anthropology of colonialism once its conceptual groundwork is done.

    According to modernist political sensibilities there can only ever be one state in a territory; vide any basic college course in political science. Hence the difficulty of contemplating imperial governance without speaking of `the colonial state’; this even when the term describes a largely unconnected set of administrative practices and institutions. Or, in extremis, almost none at all. Insofar as the singular, definite imagined article is the sine qua non of modernist politics, it exists, alike at the metropole and the colonial margin, as a narrated and enacted description of order: order again in the double sense of regularity and regulation, of convention and control, of civility and sovereignty. In other words, whatever its organizational lineaments, the state is a statement, an assertion: it expresses an authoritative worldview, sometimes backed by displays of might. Noun and verb do have a more than fortuitous connection. The first (`the state’) is the abstraction enunciated, realized, made manifest by the second (`to state’). And by the power that it takes to speak, persuasively, in the active voice.

    But the argot spoken by colonial regimes was not arbitrary. Their vernacular was the language of the law. Modern state-formation, Corrigan and Sayer (1985: 1f) note, was a `cultural revolution.’ At its core lay the spirit of legality. Many have tied industrial capitalism, modernity, the nation-state, governmentality, the right-bearing citizen, and lex naturae into a single historical equation; the equation on which is founded the logos of our epoch, beginning with the Age of Revolution, 1789-1848. What I seek to add here, modestly, is the proposition that it was the deployment of this language of the law, its ascent to hegemonic authority, that held colonial states together, even at their most disarticulated, least coherent, most impotent; that afforded them a means to make fact appear out of phantasm, illocutionary force out of illusion, concrete reality out of often fragile fiction, one thing out of many; that allowed them to represent themselves as guarantors of civility against savagery; that legitimized all aspects of their power, capillary and coercive, volitional and violent, arterial and instrumental; that mandated their right to mediate diverse identities and interests.

    This lexicon constituted two interrelated public spheres: (i) it laid down the terms and the terrain of cooperation, commerce, and contention among settlers and expatriates, thus establishing the state as the axis mundi of European colonial society; and (ii) it provided an ostensibly neutral medium for people of different cultural worlds, different social endowments, different material circumstances to enter into contractual relations, to transact commodities, and to deal with their conflicts. In so doing, it forged the impression of consonance amidst contrast; of the existence of universal standards which, like money, facilitated the negotiation of incommensurables across otherwise intransitive boundaries. But the law was also mobilized to delineate the moral frontiers of civil society, criminalizing `native’ cultural practices deemed uncivilized, politics deemed primitive, counter-modernities deemed dangerous (cf. Stoler 1985). To be sure, it was the hydra-headed, blunt instrument by which colonial states sought, in the name of `progress,’ to control and transform the space and time of their subjects. As Taylor (1989; see n.17) has said, there are good reasons why the language of legality and right should have emerged at the heart of European cultures of modernity. Its special significance here, however, lies in the convergence of two features of African colonial states, both of which we encountered earlier.

    The first is that most of these states were states sans nations; as I said above, states without hyphe-nation; at least until the late years of the Age of Empire. True, white settlers, who persisted in talking of Britain or France or Germany as `home,’ liked to think of the colony as a proto-Euronation. It was an affectation in which expatriate regimes participated by creating many of the figurative trappings of nationhood; given that the imperial gesture represented itself as a civilizing mission, and as political modernity incarnate, they had no alternative. But the colonial state, precisely because it was not constitutive of a nation, was founded largely on the legalities of exclusion and the politics of difference. It barred the majority of `natives’–those over whose territory it asserted sovereignty–from full membership in the polity, rationalizing racial restriction in the righteous language of statutory `protections’; in the claim that, if allowed to, Africans would alienate their land, sell their birthright, and lapse back into barbarism. It will be remembered that colonial commissions regularly limited the rights of ethnic subjects; this, along with innumerable executive orders, prevented all but few blacks from becoming right-bearing citizens, equal before the law, in a secular modern political community.

    Under these conditions there was little prospect of the emergence of a sense of nationhood based on horizontal connection (Anderson 1983)–even if colonial regimes had wanted it. Most colonies were, in any case, carved out with careless inattention to their cultural integrity or sociological viability, and were subjected to long periods of divide-and-rule. What is more, the very act of narrating and ritualizing a nation that did not exist, a practice often carried to symbolic excess, drew the attention of black elites to their legal disempowerment; also to the impossibility of their incorporation, as anything but `pariahs’ (Plaatje n.d.: 17), into colonial society. This, in turn, is often invoked to explain the rise of mass resistance across Africa, particularly after 1945.39 Whether true or not, many decolonization movements at the time did congeal into (often uneasy) nationalisms: that early counter-claims for an independent African modernity should have appropriated the language of constitutionalism and the law seems overdetermined (cf. Davidson 1992).

    So too, in this light, was the Minogue Paradox; the contention that the more elaborate colonial states became, the wider the reach of their authority over the lives of colonized peoples, the less effective they were in making `natives’ into acquiescent subjects–even, sometimes, in sustaining the coherence of their own modes of governance. This, to round out the circle, tended to drive European administrations abroad to ever further binges of legalistic regulation, especially in dealing with insubordination and counter-violence. The latter were usually treated as crime, not politics (see above); they elicited forms of repression meant, in good proportion, to instil into settler populations and `respectable natives’ a faith in law and order.

    Which leads to the second feature of the culture of legality at the core of the unhyphenated colonial state. Kristeva (1993: 26; above, p.1) hinted at it in asking, pointedly, `[Are] people without nations . . . human beings?’ The answer, in Africa, is clear: their humanity was rendered incomplete, ambiguous. This, after all, was entailed in the effort of colonial regimes to convert indigenes, contemporaneously and contradictorily, into both right-bearing citizens and culture-bearing ethnic subjects. The former might have epitomized the European bourgeois sense of refinement. But the latter were specimens of a primordial, imperfect homo sapiens, barely above beasts in their `natural’ proclivities and their promiscuous, `primitive communism.’ In colonial South Africa, blacks were regularly referred to by terms connoting animality, among them skepsels, Dutch for `creatures’ (Comaroff and Comaroff 1992: 52f).

    There is no need to belabour the implications of this bipolar construction of the colonial subject/citizen–of its promises, its paradoxes, its unfulfilled telos–save to say that it had the effect of inculcating in Africans a `double consciousness’ of their place in the world (cf. DuBois 1968). And that, in the mass anticolonial struggles of the twentieth century, it expressed itself in the uneasy coexistence of two counter-discourses of constitutional entitlement. Many of those who contested European domination in the name of nationhood and self-determination spoke eloquently of jural equality and universal rights. Rights, that is, for individuals. Especially to new African middle classes, and to orthodox Christians, this liberal discourse of rights was appealing; which is why popular political movements–among them the ANC in South Africa–framed their aspirations in the language of legality, equity, and due process.

    But there was also another discourse of rights. This one made political claims in the name of ethnic groups, many of them formed during the colonial epoch. It subordinated individual entitlements to those of collective identities, asserting–also in the language of the law–the liberty of indigenous peoples to sustain their sovereign self- determination within a federated national polity. And it made a case for a plural legal system cognizant of `customary law,’ for allowing a great deal of autonomy to `traditional’ authorities, and for a moral order based on `ancestral’ convention. This, in South Africa again, is the kind of political world to which, among others, the Zulu-centric Inkatha Freedom Party aspired.

    In sum, these two discourses of rights arose, dialectically, out of the contradictory manner in which the colonial state sought to construct its subject/citizens. Each fashioned its own vision of the present and future. Each essayed its own idea of modernity. Each aspired to its own political culture, its own form of post-colonial governance. And each spoke its own version of legalese. Which is why, in the African postcolony, the legacy of European legalism has lost none of its purchase. Whether it be in `model’ democracies like Botswana (with its very British court system), in aberations such as Nigeria (where due process has been violated, vacated, and distorted), or in a host of situations in between, law still tends to provide the lingua franca of civil society, citizenship, and the state. Or, rather, nation-state; the hyphen, and everything it stands for, remains a compelling aspiration in many parts of the continent.

    Given that post-colonial Africa inherited all the contradictions, paradoxes, and tensions endemic to the colonial world, it is little wonder that `the law’–as a universal standard of value, a medium of exchange, and a language of commensuration– continues to be widely fetishized. Not least in the breach. Note how its suspension by military dictatorships has almost always been effected in the most legalistic of terms. Alike in its presence and in its absence, the modernist culture of legality sustains itself as the dominant trope, the secular faith even, at the core of the (nation-)state; the state, that is, as both a political abstraction-made-concrete and a condition of being-in-the- world.

    CODA

    And so to a conclusion.

    The problem of the colonial state begins with its very (mis)conception. With the fact that, much of the time, we speak of it sans specification. Worse yet, we take it so for granted that it is all but absent from our theoretical discourses. By juxtaposing orthodox approaches of the left and the right against Foucauldian revisionism I have tried to problematize it anew. And in such a way as to make sense, at least in broad lines, of the alternative African political modernities40 fashioned during the late colonial epoch and transported into the postcolony.

    It will be clear now why I have insisted on treating colonial governance as a process of becoming: as both verb and noun, as a state and a statement, as an aspiration made real in varying proportions through human practice. Why it is, too, that `the colonial state’ was always both one thing and many; always simultaneously an ideological project and a (more or less articulated) institutional order; always both a fantasy and a reality–indeed, a reality with the capacity to affect the lives and deaths of those who fell within its purview.

    As I said earlier, the historical variability with which colonial designs were accomplished in Africa, the contrasts over time and space among states, remains to be accounted for. In the meantime, I suggest that, beneath all the diversity–indeed motivating the polyvalent, disparate character of imperial governance abroad–lay a number of contradictions. These arose, in major part, from the most fundamental constitutive feature of the colonial state: from the fact that it was, until just before its demise, a state sans nation. It was this that expressed itself in, even impelled, the construction of an oxymoronic subject/citizen; that set in motion the Minogue Paradox, the inverse correlation between the elaboration of the colonial state, its technologies of rule, and its efficacy in regulating `native’ life; that threw a heightened emphasis on the language of legality in constructing an ordered world; that yielded two different counter- discourses of rights, two alternative conceptions of political modernity.

    It is this last thing, the production of alternative modernities (see n.40), that is likely to be the final legacy of the colonial state in Africa; of the way in which it condensed a particular order of governmentality, legality, materiality, and civility. Perhaps also its most terrifying. The two images of nationhood and of political order– one based on universal rights, free citizenship, and individual liberty; the other on group entitlement, ethnic sovereignty, and `primordial’ cultural affinity–are, more than ever before, arraigned against each other in struggles for the determination of the continuing present and future of many postcolonies. In South Africa they almost derailed the end of apartheid. Elsewhere they have spawned genocide. Almost nowhere yet have they yielded easily habitable hybrids, new political orders that address the problem of post- colonial empowerment. This heritage of the colonial state, of its imperious civilizing mission, is the `black man’s burden’ of which Basil Davidson wrote (1992). It is also the challenge that awaits Africa as a new epoch, the epoch of global capitalism, dawns. And spreads new shadows over old horizons.

  • Colonialism, Culture and The Law

    Colonialism, Culture and The Law

    …the essence of the new way of looking is multiplicity. Multiplicity of eyes and multiplicity of aspects seen…. What I want is to look with all those eyes at once.

    Aldous Huxley, Point Counter Point (1928:193)

    It is striking quite how quickly the literature on law and colonialism has grown – in bandwidth, in thickness, in imaginative reach – over the past fifteen years; all the more so, since the discipline that might ordinarily have been expected to open up the topic to comparative interrogation, anthropology, was famously slow in paying any real attention to it.1 In its first fluorescence, that literature evinced a rather crude topos. Its primary concern was to demonstrate the importance of legalities, broadly defined, in the imposi- tion of control by Europe over its various “others”: how law was “the cutting edge of colonialism, an instrument of the power of an alien state and part of the process of coercion” (Chanock 1985:4), how it became a “tool for pacifying and governing…colonized peoples” (Stamp 1991:810). Note the iconography: a cutting edge, an instrument, a tool; all material means of manufacture these, all signs of the mettle of empire. Nor is this iconography a matter of mere scholastic fancy. In nineteenth-century South Africa, Tswana-speaking peoples, famous for their imagery of overrule, referred to the different appurtenances of the law – courts, papers, contracts, agents – as “the English mode of warfare” (Mackenzie 1887,1:77-8). The poetics of the phrase might have been poignantly original. But the perception was widely shared by those who, as Sartre (1955:215) once put it, were made by colonialism to re-cognize themselves as “natives.”

    That “mode of warfare” – or rather lawfare, the effort to conquer and control indigenous peoples by the coercive use of legal means – had many theaters, many drama- tis personae, many scripts. Most commonly noted among them was the creation of so- called “customary law,” a particular subspecies of the genus of historical practice that has come to be known, after Ranger and Hobsbawm (1983), as “the invention of tradi- tion.”2 The colonial rationale, went the argument, was straightforward enough: To the degree that non-Western cultures were mired in what Max Gluckman was fond of calling “the kingdom of custom” (Comaroff 1995), they obviously lacked a corpis juris, a modern sense of right-bearing selfhood (cf. Taylor 1989), and, most seriously of all, anything approaching “civilized” judicial procedures; it was appropriate, therefore, that, in the name of universal “progress,” they be subordinated to a superior European legal order. As a result, vernacular dispute-settlement institutions, their jurisdictions and mandates severely restricted, were everywhere formally, sometimes forcibly, incorporat- ed into the colonial state at the lowest levels of its hierarchy of courts and tribunals; furthermore, local cultural practices deemed “primitive” or “dangerous” were statutorily criminalized (Snyder 1981; Moore 1986). But this was not the only mode of lawfare inflicted on colonized peoples. Another, somewhat less well documented, came in the form of Commissions of Inquiry instituted to investigate, document, and legislate such things as “traditional” authority, land-holding patterns, property relations, marriage prac- tices, rituals and beliefs. Wherever they were established, these Commissions, which often had an elaborate ethnological aspect to them (see e.g. Shamir and Hacker, below), laid the ground for “native administration” – and, with it, the terms on which indigenous life-worlds were to be transformed under the sign of modernity (Ashforth 1990).

    If the first flush of work on law and colonialism foregrounded the brute logic of European domination, it soon produced its own antithesis: studies which set out to show, typically in exquisite historical and/or ethnographic detail, that subordinated peo- ples “frequently mobilize[d] aspects of the introduced legal system to challenge both old and new hierarchies of power” (Merry 1994:40); that the counter-hegemonic can and does arise from deep within colonial legalities (Shamir 2000:27); that, “when they begin to find a voice, peoples who see themselves as disadvantaged often do so either by speaking back in the language of the law or by disrupting its means and ends” (Coma- roff 1994:xii). At times this has taken the form of direct appeal to colonial justice which, in some contexts – although by no means all and certainly not always – has shown itself willing, or found itself compelled, to protect the rights of the colonized against the power of colonizers. At times it has involved a counter-deployment of parliamentary language, and of the culture of constitutionality in which it is embedded, in an effort to re- verse legally entrenched forms of discrimination. At times it has manifest itself in the dramatic use of the dock-as-platform, by otherwise silenced political prisoners, from which to make impassioned calls to public action, even to enact their own martyrdom before a watching world.

    The dialectical point of rest between these two poles – between (i) the early em- phasis on the lawfare of domination and (ii) the revisionist focus on the counter-insur- gent, contestatory possibilities inherent in even the most oppressive colonial legal regi- mes – is overdetermined, almost too easy: it sees law as a vehicle simultaneously of governmentality and of its subversion, of subjection and emancipation, of dispossession and reappropriation (Lazarus-Black and Hirsch 1994). Elsewhere (1995), I have argued that this bipolarity, this doubling, grew out of an ontological contradiction at the very core of nineteenth-century colonialism sui generis,3 and of colonial law in particular: On one hand, colonization was rationalized (in both senses of that term) by imperial Europe in the name of a humane, enlightened universalism that promised, under the aegis of its civilizing mission, to usher “non-Europeans” into the “body of corporate nations,” into citizenship of the modern world (see e.g. Merry 1991:896; Shamir and Hacker, below); on the other, it justified itself by sustaining the premodernity of “overseas subjects,” whom it tribalized, ethnicized, and racialized, constantly deferring the erasure of precisely those differences that were held to make the difference between colonizer and colonized, white and black (cf. Mamdani 1996). Indeed, if there was any post- that characterized the long, ambiguous duree before the age of postcoloniality, it was postponement.

    To the extent that a point of rest has been reached – to the extent that colonial law is regarded, convergently and ever more consensually, both as an instrument of do- mination and as a site of resistance,4 refusal, struggle – we are left with a very basic question: Is there anything more to say on the topic, other than to offer further historical and/or ethnographic illustration?

    The answer, of course, is yes. For a start, it is one thing to insist that lawfare was critical to colonial overrule, quite another to explain exactly why, when, and how; one thing to show that most colonial regimes relied on legal instruments to effect their will, quite another to explain why many of those regimes – not least those which enjoyed far more military and economic power than they needed to subdue “native” populations – put in place judicial institutions which were expensive, expansive, and far in excess of functional requirement; one thing to say that colonial law was both an instrument of do- mination or a weapon of the weak, quite another to explain when it was the former, when the latter, and in what proportions. But these are just a few very general, some- what random observations. The essays to follow offer many more, most of them fairly specific, all of them important. By way of introduction to those essays, let me note four.

    The first is all too obvious, and yet it is rarely remarked. It concerns the term “colonial law” itself. Or, more precisely, its analytic, semantic, and discursive terms of reference.

    Much of the time, “colonial law” is invoked, in scholarly discourse, as if it denoted a well-defined genus of phenomenon; something about which – about whose character, determinations, and historical implications – general and generalizing statements may be formulated, debated, tested, proved. And yet, if we compare the subject matter covered, respectively, by Tomlins, Benton, Espeland, and Shamir and Hacker, it is clear that the term subsumes a profoundly polythetic ensemble of things. Apart from all else, colonial legal regimes – assuming that we can isolate and define them to begin with – have varied enormously over the long run in their institutional, jurisdictional, and cultural elaboration, their reach, and their workings as systems of regulation; indeed, in some early instances, especially where formal overrule occurred long after territories were colonized, “law and order” were not the concern of the state at all, falling rather under the aegis of the private sector (see e.g. Worger 1987). But even if the scope and complexity of these regimes were not so variable, the range of issues addressed in scholarly work on them remains extraordinarily diverse and disarticulated. Thus, for example, in the essays here, Tomlins deals with the establishment of imported legal cultures, and their impact on the cartography of colonization, in seventeenth-century America; Benton, with competing court jurisdictions and struggles between church and state in a Spanish borderland during the same period; Shamir and Hacker, with a Com- mission of Inquiry into the cultivation, preparation, and consumption of a popular drug in India in the 1890s; Espeland, with a recent struggle against a “development” initiative mounted by Indians in Arizona, a struggle, justified by appeal to environmental legislation, that opened up deep ideological and political fissures in the U.S. administrative bureaucracy. Each of these obviously falls securely within the horizons of “colonial law.” But they touch upon it in vastly different ways. Nor, patently, do they exhaust the topic. Indeed, none of them even mentions customary law or “native” courts, that ur- theme of legal anthropology in many parts of the world (see above). The conclusion? In the first instance, that we ought to desist from speaking of “colonial law” as if “it” were a monothetic species of phenomenon about which easy generalizations, easy theoretical statements, might be made; in the second, more positively, that we are challenged to arrive at a comparative topography of the institutions and processes, the signs and practices, embraced within its terms of reference. In order to do that, however, several prior steps demand to be taken. The remaining points cover some of those steps.

    The second emerges most cogently from Tomlins’s essay, but is implicit in all the others as well. Received wisdom, as we have seen, has tended to regard law as an ins- trument of imperial domination; this even when its counter-insurgent potentialities are recognized. But it may be argued, much more fundamentally, that, almost everywhere, cultures of legality were constitutive of colonialism, tout court: that (i) it was by appeal to a specifically legal sensibility that the geography of colonies was mapped, transforming the landscapes of others – typically seen by Europeans as wilderness before it was in- vested with their gaze – into territory and real estate, a process which made spaces into places to be possessed, ruled, improved, protected (cf. Comaroff and Comaroff 1991: 89f, 172); by means of the law, as Benton notes, that (ii) economic rights, entitlements, and proprieties were established, that labor relations and contracts were promulgated and policed, that material interests were negotiated; in its terms, too, as Tomlins and Shamir and Hacker intimate, that (iii) colonial power/knowledge, a taken for granted gestalt of seeing and being-in-the-world, was constructed and valorized. Moreover, it was under its provisions that (iv) the “nature” of colonial subjects was construed, ethnicized, and racialized, their relations to other human beings, to the earth, and to their own cultural practices delineated; on its institutional stage that (v) state authority was ritualized, often in efforts on the part of overseas administrations to conceal their weaknesses, to invest themselves with an aura of power, and to draw their citizenry into a community of consenting clientage (cf. Comaroff 1999). To be sure, the language of the law was the language that Europeans tended most avidly to try to teach “natives,” thus to provide an argot in which the latter might understand the terms in which they were being dispossessed, displaced, disenfranchised – or, less brutishly (less Britishly?), the terms of trade in which they were being engaged. As all this implies, with due respect to those who treat colonialism primarily as a cultural encounter (see e.g. Dirks 1992), colonial law, however polyvalent may have been its manifestations, was irreducibly material in its workings, its purposes, its effects. As Espeland shows for the Yavapai, and Shamir and Hacker make plain for Bengal, the legal processes in which autochthonous peoples were caught up had irretrievably concrete implications; for Yavapai, in fact, this extended to their very survival. In sum, colonial legal cultures, precisely because they were constitutive of entire colonial worlds, were simultaneously languages of practice, symbolic and ritual systems, abstract principles for the production of social order, citizenship, and subjection, and immanent material realities. And a lot more besides.

    The third observation – which, again, recurs in all the essays, albeit in very different ways – echoes something that has been said about other aspects of colonial en- counters (see e.g. Cooper and Stoler 1997:5; Stoler 1995), especially about colonial medicine. But it has seldom been noted of law. It is that European overseas “posses- sions” were often laboratories for experimentation with, even for the production of, legal instruments, institutions, principles, procedures; also modes of regulation. One of the most persistent myths about the Age(s) of Empire, perhaps, is the idea that a well- formed Euromodernity exported itself to faraway places, there to introduce its already well-refined, highly developed ways and means to “primitive” peoples – either, depending upon ideological perspective, as a philanthropic, moral mission or as a call- ous, often violent act of conquest. Increasingly, that view has had to be revised: it is clear that “European civilization,” as it was transported abroad, was, in many respects, a somewhat tentative set of cultural, social, and material practices; that it was patently a work in progress, often more aspiration than achievement. This was no less true of law than it was, say, of medicine or agriculture. Thus, for example, Tomlins (after Greene 1993) suggests that America provided a space of experimentation for Europeans, a space for the fulfillment of hopes and schemes not easily realized back in the Old World; these included charter designs for commercial plantations, territorial lordships, and other requisites of a legal order of ownership, production, and labor relations. Similarly, at the eve of conquest, says Benton, imperial Spain was notable for its – uneasy “patchwork” of law and custom. Colonization, it appears, gave the crown an op- portunity to find ways of solidifying and systematizing that patchwork, of making a legal order. The other two papers, by contrast, demonstrate how administrative procedures, situated in the law, provided another species of laboratory: a laboratory for the production of new forms of rule, new kinds of ruler: in the case of India, by molding an indigenous elite and incorporating it into an imperial structure of governance then very much under construction; in that of the Yavapai, with the effort of a younger generation of bureaucrats to move away from older models of “development” to ones based on rational decision-making and the logic of commensuration, a process that compelled them, as they went along, to reinvent their own roles, their jobs, their professional practice, the very essence of so-called Indian administration.

    In sum, to the degree that a culture of legalities constituted any colonial world, it did so, more often than not, by an ongoing process of trial and error, invention and rein- vention; a process in which the terrain of the colonized became a testing ground from which emanated new lawfare, new technologies of order and regulation. These some- times confined themselves to the colonial frontier itself. But sometimes they were taken back to the metropole, there to alter its social lineaments. Thus, to take a celebrated in- stance, Mayhew’s (1851) ethnography of the London poor in the mid-nineteenth century, and the policy discourses that flowed from it, was based largely on an ethnolo- gical model drawn from colonial southern Africa. The implication? That, far from being a crushingly over-determined, monolithic historical force, colonialism was often an under- determined, chaotic business, less a matter of the sure hand of oppression – though colonialisms have often been highly oppressive, highly violent, unceasingly exploitative – than of the disarticulated, semi-coherent, inefficient strivings for modes of rule that might work in unfamiliar, intermittently hostile places a long way from home; witness, for example, Sir Charles Rey’s (1988) frustrated, misanthropic diary of the life and times of a British ruling elite, whose Pythonesque absurdities were, by their own admission, frequently reminiscent of the Keystone Cops at play. Here as elsewhere, in the face of the threat of disarticulation, incoherence, hostility, unfamiliarity, it was the language of the law that appeared to promise coherence, stability, a sense of authority. Of course, appearances are misleading. But they have the power to move people and to make worlds in their image.

    Fourth, and probably most significant for present purposes, is the stress placed by all of the essays on the complexity of relations among colonizers, relations often ne- gotiated in the space of law.

    It has become commonplace to eschew the Manichean opposition between colo- nizer and colonized so strongly emphasized in early studies: to observe that it was eve- rywhere breached and compromised; that, despite the tendency of Europeans to repre- sent colonial societies as sharply divided, binary worlds – a representation itself often congealed in legislation governing segregation, miscegenation, labor arrangements, and the like – the political sociology of those societies tended to be much more complicated, less dichotomous, more labile. This, in turn, has led to lively scholarly discussion of relations across the lines of cleavage, of the middle ground or so-called “third space” that transected them, of the divisions and animosities among those, respectively, on each side; Cooper and Stoler (1997) refer to the dissonances within the ranks of colonizers as “tensions of empire.” The legal aspect of these tensions emerges, perhaps more clearly than ever before, in the essays to follow; indeed, all four are centrally about them. Thus the leitmotif of Espeland’s insightful study of contemporary colonialism in the USA is, as I have already said, the confrontation bet- ween old and new guard bureaucrats working for the U.S. government; as they engaged in open contestation over the proposed building of a dam on Yavapai ground, under the terms of the National Environmental Protection Act (1969), each brought a quite different ideology of development into the triangular encounter with the Indians. Similarly, the central theme of Benton’s historically-sensitive account of Spanish colonialism is jurisidictional politics in New Mexico: the “passionate and persistent” struggle among various secular and religious authorities to gain legal hegemony – and, with it, some measure of control over the colonization of this part of the New World. Shamir and Hacker, by turn, offer us an extraordinary analysis of the arguments bet- ween British and Indian members of the Indian Hemp Drug Commission (1893) about the way in which the production and consumption of the drug ought to be regarded by the state; the two parties held starkly antithetical views of, among other things, the es- sence of Indianness and the sociology of Indian society, the public health implications of hemp use, the role of law in ruling the colony, and, reflexively, the procedures of the colonial commission of inquiry itself. But perhaps most fundamental of all, in respect of the general point, is Tomlins’s cogently made case that colonizers from Britain came to America with quite distinct legal cultures drawn from different parts of England; a “legal polyphony,” he calls it. This polyphony eventuated, at least over the short-run, in the emergence of obviously discordant, even competing, regimes of legal control.

    Of course, the historical fact that there were these “tensions of empire” did not make imperialism any the less exploitative. Or coercive. Nor did it soften the inequalities that saturated colonial societies everywhere; if anything, it sharpened them. But, for the colonized, conflict among colonizers sometimes opened up fissures through which the contradictions inherent in colonialism became visible. In so doing, they gave the consciousness of “natives” material to work on, material from which to fashion their own understandings of European overrule, their insights into its ways and means, their reactions to the challenge that it posed to vernacular cultural practices, even, at times, their strategies of resistance.

    It is here that the four observations converge. These observations – that “colonial law” refers to an irreducibly diverse ensemble of practices and institutions, that cultures of legality were constitutive of colonial society, that colonies were prime sites of sociole- gal experimentation, that the “tensions of empire” were regularly mediated by means of law – are very much of a piece. As our essays show, they are the foundational coordi- nates that frame the analysis of lawfare in all colonialism(s), past and present. To be sure, in the wake of this symposium, and the archaeology of intellectual labor congealed in it, it will be impossible to ignore the constitutive effect of law, in its various guises, on the historical production of colonial worlds everywhere; impossible to interrogate colonial legal processes without taking into account their experimental dimensions; imperative to look behind the tensions of empire, and their legal mediations, for explanations of vernacular understandings of, and reactions to, the im- perial outreach of Europe. Such is the considerable achievement of the four papers. As they focus in on various colonial situations from contrasting angles of vision. Benton, Espeland, Shamir and Hacker, and Tomlins open up multiple perspectives on things both familiar and strange. They may not have succeeded in gazing upon history “with all…eyes at once”; with due respect to Aldous Huxley (1928:193), that is impossible. But they do offer us an eye-opening excursion into very different colonial theaters, each with its own cultures of legality.

  • Privatizing the Millennium

    Privatizing the Millennium

    The first is from post-apartheid South Africa.

    The New Life Church in Mafikeng-Mmabatho, capital of the North West Province, was established just before the fall of apartheid. It typifies a brand of upbeat, technically-hyped Pentecostalism that aspires to fill the moral void left by a withering of revolutionary ideals and civic norms in the postcolony. While New Life is the creation of a talented pair of pastors, a husband and wife who have shaped it independently of denominational oversight, their community belongs to the International Federation of Christian Churches; this is a global network of congregations, all of which combine a lively charismatic realism with a frank materiality, the latter embodied in a subject not embarrassed by this-worldly desire. Congregants pay a tithe, and are encouraged to expect that their investment, both spiritual and monetary, will yield tangible empowerment. They are offered a range of services, from marriage guidance to financial counseling, that recast the pastoral in a distinctly service-oriented, therapeutic key. As in many such movements, the stress on divine manifestation is accompanied by a preoccupation with cutting-edge media: “It might sound heretical,” noted the founding pastor, “but we strive above all to make our services exciting, affecting. Our competition, after all, is the video arcade, the movie house, and the casino.” Remember the casino. We shall return to it. In New Life’s sparkling suburban sanctuary, a sophisticated sound stage replaces the altar. Services are punctuated by lilting hymns and love songs to Jesus, crooned by a modishly dressed, youthful band–or “worship team”–equipped with electronic instruments. Overhead, a large karaoke screen flashes the lyrics; in a booth to the rear, a technician monitors the acoustics. Meetings draw large crowds that span a wide spectrum of race, age, and class. They center on stylized personal testimonies that narrate, in psychological terms, a self-reborn into an individualized world of transparency, purpose, and prosperity.

    The second comes from post-Soviet Russia.
    The messiah has arrived. He is to be found in East Siberia, wherein lies “the Promised Land of the Future.” More prosaically, he lives in a compound near Minusinsk Depression, east of Abakan. Sergei Torop by name, he prefers to be called Vissarion. He had his own webpage in the 1990s,1 on which he explained that Vissarion–also the name of Stalin’s father–means “giving the life” in “the language of the Universe.” In the event that that language is not understood by ordinary mortals, seven more conventional vernaculars conveyed his cyber-message, which promised that his Word would soon spread across the World. The 40-ish year-old, ethereal looking savior established the Last Testament Church in 1991, after the repressed memory of two millennia flooded back to him, after he came to realize that he was not the child of Siberian construction workers but the Son of God, after he learned that “all religions are inserted in him”; the origin myth of the movement, significantly, dates these revelations roughly to the fall of the USSR. Vissarion acquired a substantial following during the 1990s, the Vissariontsi, composed largely of “disenchanted [former] Soviet intellectuals and idea lists.” While their exact number is uncertain–it is said to run into tens of thousands today–they soon attracted the attention of the Orthodox Church, which took to monitoring them carefully; also of the state, which appears to have left them alone, largely because the arrival of the church breathed life into a dying local economy. The movement has a strong green orientation, seeing itself as “A Siberian Global Experiment targeting Human Survival under Circumstances of Social and Natural Cataclysm.”

    Vissarion himself was a traffic warden until he turned messiah, persuaded his disciples to hand over their earthly wealth to him, and established the City of Sun, which is what he calls his rural dominion. This dominion is reminiscent of a Soviet collective— although, some time back, it formed a joint stock company, Tabrat Ltd., to bankroll its material existence. In short, the Second Coming here envisages a future in the past, a hereafter (or there-before?) that revivifies the glories of a socialist commune by lodging it securely in the global capitalist economy. Vissarion has not escaped skepticism. He has been portrayed as an enchanted entrepreneur who earns a lucrativeincome from service delivery in the God business, a business flourishing anew in these turbulent times,2 a business, suggested Tom Whitehouse in 1999, that often yields high profits to its High Priests. Torop, he went on to note, lived in lavish circumstances. No wonder that Orthodox clergy saw him as an “evil pyramid schemer,” an image which we shall have cause to revisit. Whether or not he is a charlatan, a con man with a Christ- like appearance and a creative line in income redistribution, is beside our present point. The various features of his religious movement–its entry into the world of the joint stock ventures, its presence on the web, its global outreach, its appeal to eco-technical solutions for planetary problems, its promise of instant redemption at a price in hard currency, its well-requited head of operations–are all of a piece. They tell a story at once very old and very new.

    The third is from the American heartland.

    In Columbus, Indiana, a small town some four hours drive from Chicago on Highway 64, there is an extraordinary array of churches. Columbus is known for its public architecture because the local captains of industry came to a decision, at some point in the past, to make their town into a shrine to the built form. As a result, many internationally famous “names” erected buildings across the flatlands of this otherwise unprepossessing corner of the Midwest. One of them is a profoundly beautiful, profoundly spiritual, edifice. Designed by Eero Saarinen, the North Christian Church houses a congregation of Disciples of Christ, whose journal, Cutting Edge, is unusually revealing. Volume 29 no.2 of 2000 is dedicated to the topic of “Buildings for the Post- Christendom Church” (Blankenship 2000: 1-2). “Christendom,” it declares, “is dying” (p.1). What began in the fourth century of the common era is over, a new reformation is under way. But what, precisely, are its signs? Among other things, “the adoption of market driven planning to replace tradition”; this in order to appeal to a generation that wants “choices, convenience, quality, and specialized services” in religion as in everything else (p.2; after Schaller 1999). By extension, church facilities, like prayer itself, require “above all [to be] useful, adaptable, and marketable.” And so, in the most conservative crannies of Christian America, the church enters the new millennium by making common cause not with a capitalist ethos grounded in virtuous work, in the production of the self through the production of value, but with a world of convenience and consumption, of free choice and flexibility; a world in which the provision of services, religious services like other customer services, is paramount.

    Each of these vignettes evokes the ghost of Max Weber. Each speaks of a new moment in the history of capitalism, of its Second Coming, this time in neoliberal guise, this time on an even more global scale than before. They also speak of a new religious spirit to go with that moment, a spirit which, as we shall see, is rampant in Africa. But not only in Africa. Note that our three instances come from what used to be called, respectively, the third, second, and first worlds.

    All of which raises a number of conundrums for our understanding of economy and society, culture and history, faith and identity in the early years of the new millennium. Some of the corollaries of the Second Coming –“plagues of the ‘new world order’,” Derrida (1994:91) calls them–have occasioned heated debate. Thus, for example, populist polemics have dwelt on the planetary conjuncture, for good or ill, of “homogenization and difference” (e.g. Barber 1992); on the simultaneous, synergistic spiraling of wealth and poverty; on the rise, like a disfigured phoenix, of a “new medievalism” (Brownlee et al 1991; cf. Connelly and Kennedy 1994). For its part, scholarly debate focused, at the turn of the century, on the confounding effects of rampant liberalization: on whether it engenders truly transnational flows of capital or drains them off to a few major sites (Hirst and Thompson 1996); on whether it weakens, sustains, or reinvents the nation-state (Sassen 1996); on whether it frees up, curbs, or compartmentalizes the movement of labor; on whether the current fixation with democracy, its resurrection in so many places, betokens a measure of mass empowerment or an “emptying out of [its] meaning” (Negri 1999:9; Comaroff and Comaroff 1997). Equally in question is why the present infatuation with civil society has been accompanied by alarming increases in civil strife; why, in like vein, the politics of consumerism, human rights, and entitlement has coincided with puzzling new patterns of exclusion, patterns that refract long-established lines of gender, sexuality, race, and class (Gal 1997; Yudice 1995); why, also, there has been a palpable rise in many countries of domestic violence, rape, child abuse, prison populations and, most dramatically of all, criminal “phantom-states” (Derrida 1994:83; Blaney and Pashsa 1993); forms of organized crime, in short, that mimic the state, arrogating its powers and providing some of its services for a fee.

    Other features of our present predicament were less remarked at the millennium, although they have become more so in recent times. Among them are the odd coupling of the legalistic with the libertarian, constitutionality with deregulation, and–at the core of our concerns here–hyper-rationalization with the exuberant spread of innovative occult practices and money magic, of pyramid schemes and prosperity gospels; the enchantments, that is, of a decidedly neoliberal economy, whose ever more inscrutable speculations seem to call up fresh specters in their wake. Note that, unlike others who have discussed the “new spectrality” of that economy (Negri 1999:9; Sprinker 1999), we do not talk here in metaphorical terms. We seek, instead, to draw attention to the distinctly pragmatic qualities of the messianic and the millennial; not merely in the tenor of organized religion, of which we shall have a lot to say, but of capitalism itself as a gospel of salvation. As this suggests, in speaking of Millennial Capitalism we intend not merely capitalism at the millennium–capitalism, that is, in its chronological contemporaneity–but also capitalism in its messianic, salvific, even magical manifestations; capitalism as a cultural and moral economy with the capacity, if harnessed properly, to enrich the poor and further enrich the wealthy, to solve social problems, to heal the sick, to elicit divine favor, to add material value to the commonweal.

    The question, patently, is why? Why has capitalism taken on these features? What is new about them? And how, exactly, have they reconfigured the religious world in their wake? It is on this last issue that we focus here.

    Let us, then, cut to the heart of the matter. If we are to understand the spirits of our age, the place to begin, as Marx noted for another historical juncture, is with epochal shifts in the constitutive relationship of production to consumption. This is not to say that the essence of neoliberal capitalism is reducible purely to that relationship. Quite the opposite: there is now a large literature on the various dimensions of the new global economy–from the workings of finance capital, the electronic commons, and transnational corporations through the changing, labile character of work and labor, its mobility and its transience, its gendered and generational inflections, to the impact of space-time compression, of flexible accumulation, and of the planetary flow of signs, styles, and commodities upon old sovereignties, old loyalties, old identities. All of these things are crucially important in understanding the shape of the world we live in (see Comaroff and Comaroff 2000). For now, however, we have perforce to take them for granted. In any case, we would suggest, it is specifically by interrogating the shifting articulation of production to consumption, of the pro to the con in capitalist economics, that we might make sense of the emergence of new forms of enchantment–and of the kinds of Neoprotestantism to which they appear to be giving rise in postcolonial Africa. And elsewhere.

    Capitalism at the millennium, millennial capitalism

    Consumption, recall, was the hallmark disease of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries: of the First Coming of Industrial Capitalism, an age in which the ecological conditions of production, its consuming passions, ate up the bodies of producers. Now, at the beginning of the twenty-first, semiotically transposed, it is often said to be the “hallmark of modernity,” the measure of its wealth, health, and vitality. An over- generalization? Maybe. Yet the claim does capture popular imaginings. It also resonates with the growing Eurocultural truism that the (post)modern person is a subject made with objects. Nor is this surprising. Consumption, in its ideological guise–as “consumerism”–refers to a material sensibility actively cultivated, for the common good, by Western states and commercial interests, particularly since World War II. Also by some noncapitalist regimes: in the early 1990s, even Deng Xiaoping advocated “consumption as a motor force of production” (Oirlik 1996:194).

    As consumption became the moving spirit of the late twentieth century, so there has been a concomitant eclipse of production; an eclipse, at least, of its perceived salience for the wealth of nations. This has heralded a shift, across the world, in ordinary understandings of the nature of capitalism. The workplace and labor, especially work- and-place securely rooted in a stable local context, are no longer prime sites for the creation of value or identity (Sennett 1998). The factory and the shop, far from secure centers of fabrication and family income, are increasingly experienced by virtue of their replacement at the hands of nonhuman or “nonstandard” means of manufacture. Or by their removal to an elsewhere–where labor is cheaper, less assertive, less taxed, more feminized, less protected by states and unions; in South Africa, for example, 80% of employers prefer to hire non standard workers. Hence the paradox, in many economies, of high official employment rates amidst stark deindustrialization, joblessness, and growing carceral populations. In the upshot, production appears to have been superseded, as the ur-source of wealth, by less tangible ways of generating value: by control over intellectual property, copyrights, franchises, and licensees; by owning the means of communication and the conveyancing of people and things; by the provision of services; and, above all, by the capacity to direct the flow of finance capital.

    Symptomatic in this respect, we argue in another essay (2000b), are the changing historical fortunes of gambling. Risk has always been crucial to the growth of modern economies. But, removed from the dignifying nexus of the market, it was treated until recently, alike by Protestant ethics and populist morality, as a “pariah” practice. Casinos were set apart from the workaday world, being situated in liminal places of leisure rather than sites of honest toil. Living off the proceeds of this form of speculation was, normatively-speaking, the epitome of immoral accumulation: the wager stood to the wage as sin to virtue. Over a generation, betting, in its marked form, has changed moral valence and invaded everyday existence almost everywhere, being routinized in high risk dealings in stocks, bonds, and funds whose fortunes are governed largely by chance. It also expresses itself in a fascination with “futures” and their populist counterpart, the lottery. Here the mundane meets the millennial: “Not a lotto tomaro,” proclaimed an ironic, inner-city mural in Chicago in 2000, large hands grasping a pile of casino chips, beside which nestled a motherless baby;3 this at a time when, increasingly “operated and promoted” by government, “gambling [had become not just] the fastest growing industry in the US,” but one “tightly woven into the national fabric.”4 Indeed, life itself is now a common object of bookmaking; it is no longer the sole preserve of the “respectable” insurance industry. Take, by way of an example that has always fascinated us, a report in Newsweek from early 1999:5

    In America’s casino culture, no wager is outre. So how about betting on how long a stranger is likely to live? You can buy part or all of his or her insurance policy, becoming a beneficiary. Your gamble: that death will come soon enough to yield a high return on the money you put up. The Viatical Association6 of America says that $1 billion worth of coverage went into play last year.

    In the era of millennial capitalism, securing instant returns is often a matter of life and death. Also in 1999, the India Tribune7 reported that one of the Indian states, Madya Pradesh, was “caught in a vortex of lottery mania” which had led to several suicides. It described “extreme enthusiasm among the jobless youth towards trying their luck to make a fast buck.” More mundanely, efforts to enlist divine help in tipping the odds, from the Taiwanese countryside to the Kalahari fringe, have become a regular feature of what Robert Weller (2000:482) terms “fee for service” religions. These are locally- nuanced fantasies of beating capitalism at its own game by drawing a winning number at the behest of unseen forces.

    The change in the moral valence of gambling also has a public dimension. In many countries, lotteries have become a favored means of filling national coffers and generating cultural capital. The defunct machinery of a growing number of welfare states, to be sure, is being turned by the wheel of fortune. With more and more governments depending on this source for quick revenue fixes, notes George Will, a well-known conservative commentator in the U.S., betting has “been transformed from a social disease”–subjected, not so long ago, to scrutiny at the hands of Harvard Medical School8–“into social policy.”9” Once a dangerous sign of moral turpitude, “it is now marketed almost as a ‘patriotic duty.”10

    And yet crisis after crisis in the global economy, and growing income disparities on a planetary scale, make it painfully plain that there is no such thing as capitalism without production. Apart from all else, Fordist manufacture has not disappeared. It has been transformed, dispersed, and reorganized–with the effect that sites of fabrication have been removed from sites of consumption in such a way as to give the appearance that proletariats, sensu stricto, are a thing of the past. This displacement, this rendering absent of visible production, has convinced the likes of Derrida (n.d.; after Rifkin 1995) that we have reached the end of “the world of work” as we know it: the end of the epoch of homo faber, of class consciousness, of the modernist idea of self-construction through virtuous labor. All identities seem to be contrived through self-fashioning, all wealth by means of the entrepreneurial. All of which, tautologically, affirms the putative primacy of consumption. And makes the operations of capital appear arcane, quixotic, magical. If Western scholars have been somewhat slow to reflect on why this is so, their “others” have not; especially those others who live in places where there has been a sudden infusion of commodities, an explosion of new forms of wealth, and a simultaneous shrinking of the labor market. Like South Africa. Many, to be sure, have been quick to give voice to their perplexity at the secret of this wealth: of its sources and the capriciousness of its distribution, of the mysterious forms it takes, of its slipperiness, of the opaque relations between means and ends embodied in it. Our concern here grows directly out of these perplexities: out of world-wide speculation, in both senses of the term, provoked by the shifting conditions of material existence at the end of the twentieth century. The revalorization of speculation, we have also argued before, is itself a corollary of the experiential paradox, the doubling, at the core of neoliberal capitalism, of capitalism in its millennial manifestation: the fact that it appears to produce desire on a global scale yet to decrease the certainty of work or the security of persons; that it appears to magnify class differences but to undercut class consciousness; above all, that it appears to offer up vast, almost instantaneous riches to those who master its spectral technologies–and, simultaneously, to threaten the very being of those who do not.

    This doubling is most visible in postcolonies; especially in those like South Africa- -set free by the events of 1989 and their aftermath–that entered the global arena with distinct structural disadvantages. A good deal is to be learned about the historical implications of the current moment by eavesdropping on the popular anxieties to be heard in such places: on the mounting disenchantment with liberty under libertarian conditions; on the nostalgia for past regimes, some of them immeasurably repressive; on moral panics occasioned by rapidly rising suicide rates; on the upsurge of assertions of identity and autochthony; on the widespread fears, in many parts of Africa, Asia, and Central Europe alike, concerning the apparently preternatural production of wealth. The close of the Cold War–and, in its wake, the death of apartheid in South Africa and democratization movements elsewhere on the continent–fired utopian imaginations. But liberation under neoliberal conditions has been marred by a disconcerting upsurge of violence, crime, and disorder. The quest for democracy, the rule of law, prosperity, and civility threatens to dissolve into strife and recrimination, even political chaos. Everywhere there is evidence of an uneasy fusion of enfranchisement and exclusion; of xenophobic reaction to the bleeding of national borders; of the effort to realize modern utopias by decidedly postmodern means; of the waxing, in many places, of conspiracy theories; of the fetishization of human rights, the rule of law, and civil society, a construct whose populist appeal seems everywhere to rise in rough proportion to its inchoateness as a principle of praxis.

    Gone is any official-speak of egalitarian futures, work-for-all, or the paternal government envisioned by the freedom movements of yore. Transformed, too, is the modernist nation-state as we once knew it, its hyphenation more or less ruptured under the impact of global economic and electronic integration, amidst unprecedented flows of people, commodities, and currencies, amidst changes in the very nature of citizenship and the construction of identity. These transformations have expressed themselves increasingly in a spirit of deregulation, with its taunting mix of emancipation and limitation. As those citizens not fortunate enough to win the lottery of life try to find salvation in enterprise, they find themselves battling the eccentric currents of the “new” world order, which shortcircuit received sovereignties, received means and ends, received connections between personhood and place. And as the great containers of modern social order have been fractured, so have the cultural, ethical, and spiritual coordinates on which they were founded; coordinates that charted a conceptual and institutional terrain long taken for granted in classic Western (for which read JudaeoProtestant) ideology and its civil extension–among them, the dichotomy between the sacred and the secular, the transcendent and the temporal, the material and the moral, the pious and the pecuniary, and, most of all, modernity and enchantment. Which, by turn, focuses our gaze on occult economies and new religious movements?

    Occult economies and new religious movements

    A striking corollary of the Age of Millennial Capitalism has been the global proliferation of “occult economies.” These economies have two dimensions: a material aspect founded on the sustained effort to conjure wealth–or to account for its accumulation–by appeal to techniques that defy practical reason; and an ethical aspect, grounded in the moral discourses sparked by the manufacture of value, either real or imagined, by arcane, “magical” means. It is difficult, of course, to quantify the presence of the occult–and, therefore, to make any claim that it is on the increase. As we have already noted, finance capital has always had its spectral enchantments, its modes of speculation based on less than honest toil, on less than rational connections between means and ends. Both its underside (the pariah forms of gambling of which we spoke a moment ago) and its upper side (a fiscal industry embracing everything from insurance to stock markets) have been rooted, from the first, in two inscrutables: a faith in probability, itself a notoriously unreliable way of predicting the future from the past, and a monetary system which depends for its existence on confidence, a chimera knowable, tautologically, only by its effects. Wherein, then, lies the claim that occult economies are presently on the rise? In the specific context of South Africa, we have demonstrated (1999a) that there has been an explosion of occult-related activity–arising out of accusations of ritual killing, witchcraft, and zombie conjuring–since the late apartheid years; also of fantastic Ponzi schemes, of the sale of body parts for “magical” purposes, of allegations of satanic practice, even of tourism based on the sighting of fabulous monsters. Middle class magazines run “dial-a-diviner” advertisements, national papers carry front page articles on medicine murders, prime-time television broadcasts dramas of sorcery, and more than one “witchcraft summit” has been held. Whether or not the brute quantum of occult activity exceeds that of times past, it is clear is that their reported incidence, written about by the mainstream press in more prosaic terms than ever before (Ford red 1999), has forced itself upon the public sphere, rupturing the flow of mediated news. It is this rupture–this focus of popular attention on the place of the arcane in everyday production–to which we refer when we speak of a global proliferation of occult economies.

    It is not difficult to catalogue the presence of these economies in different places across the planet. In West Africa, for example, Geschiere (1997) has shown how zombie making is an endemic feature of everyday life, how sorcery has entered into postcolonial political economy, how magic has become as much an acknowledged aspect of mundane survival strategies as it is indispensable to the ambitions and machinations of the powerful. Nor is all of this based in rural situations or among poor people. In Nigeria’s lively national press, Bastian (1993: 133f) shows, witchcraft is a frequent topic, both in quality broadsheets and in tabloids. Far from falling into the domain of the “customary” or the “exotic,” it is a vital idiom for understanding contemporary life–urban and rural, political and personal. One might add, parenthetically, that accounts of Nigerian supernaturalism are frequently recycled in the popular American press, where they have an avid readership, both black and white.

    Occult economies thrive in various parts of Asia, too, as Rosalind Morris (2000) indicates. In Thailand–where fortune telling has been transformed by global technology and email divination has taken off–one “traditional” seer, auspiciously named Madam Luk, reports that her clients nowadays ask three questions to the exclusion of all others: “‘Is my company going broke?’ ‘Am I going to lose my job?’ and ‘Will I find other employment?,,,11Here, as well, the fallout of neoliberal capitalism is having a profound impact on magical practice, a process splendidly captured in Morris’s account of the career of one of Thailand’s most renowned spirit mediums, who recently staged a dramatic, mass-mediated confession: he declared himself a fake. This, no less, so that he might take up a career as a distributor for Amway, a global pyramid scheme run by two Christian patriarchs in a small rural town in Michigan. Such schemes, says Morris, are the economic counterpart of mediumship: they “occult” the production of value with a disarmingly personalized, hyper-real directness. The verb is hers, after Zizek (1997:10); of the point itself, more in a moment.

    Sometimes dealings in the occult have a more visceral, darker side. Throughout Latin America in the 1990s, as in Africa and Asia, there have been mass panics about the clandestine theft and sale of the organs of young people, usually by unscrupulous expatriates (Scheper-Hughes 1996); violence against children has become metonymic of threats to social reproduction in many ethnic and national contexts, the dead (or missing) child having emerged as the standardized nightmare of a world out of control (J. Comaroff 1997). There, and in other parts of the globe, this commerce–like international adoptions, mail-order marriage, and indentured domestic labor–is seen as a new form of imperialism, the affluent north siphoning off the essence of poorer “others” by mysterious means for nefarious, often ritual ends. All of which gives evidence, to those at the nether end of the global distribution of wealth, of the workings of potent magical technologies and insidious modes of accumulation.

    That evidence reaches into the heart of Europe itself: hence the scares some years back, in several countries, about the sexual and satanic abuse of children (La Fontaine 1997);12 also about the theft and abuse of human tissue and genetic material by an unholy alliance of Godless scientists and corporate Frankensteins. An extreme instance is the urban myth that traversed the internet in 1997 about the secret excision of kidneys, by arcane means, from business travelers waylaid at international airports. Several police departments, moral commentators, and mass media in the USA took these stories seriously enough to investigate them.13

    Note a persistent theme in all this: the anxiety that has come to surround transformations in the everyday economic world occasioned by two things. The first is the opening up of new kinds of translocal markets, of an inscrutable traffic in people, labor, services, and things; the second, the explosion of new forms of financial speculation and investment that are at once seductive and dangerous. If the former is epitomised by the sale of persons and their bodies, part or whole, the latter reaches its apex in the extraordinary intensification, lately, of pyramid schemes, many of them tied to the electronic media. These schemes and a host of scams allied with them–a few legal, many illegal, some alegal–are hardly new. But their recent mushrooming across the world has drawn a great deal of attention; this partly because of their sheer scale and partly because, by crossing national borders and registering at addresses far from the site of their local operation, they insinuate themselves into the slipstream of global capital, thereby escaping control. Recall those whose crash sparked the Albanian revolution early in 1997, several of which took on almost miraculous dimensions for poor investors; one pyramid manager in Albania was “a gypsy fortune teller, complete with crystal ball, who claimed to know the future.”1414 Even in the tightly regulated stock markets of the USA, there has been a huge rise in illicit dealings that owe their logic, if not their precise workings, to Ponzi operations; this because investors have become ever more “disposed to throw dollars at get-rich-quick schemes.” $6 billion, infact, was lost to scams on the New York Stock Exchange in 1996.15 Voodoo economics is alive and well at the financial center of the Western World.

    These scams also bring to mind others, different yet similar, that arise from a promiscuous mix of scarcity and deregulation; also of enchantment, mystery, even salvation. This was the case with the Foundation for New Era Philanthropy, a US pyramid created “to change the world for the glory of God.” On the basis of a promise to double their money in six months, its founder, John Bennett, persuaded 500 nonprofit organizations, Christian colleges, and Ivy League universities to invest $354 million.16 Miracle 2000, a South African “empowerment” scheme that promised a 220% return on investments in 42 days, also had a strongly millennial side to it. So popular did it become that it drew crowds from across the land to the East Rand home of its 39-year- old founder, Sibusiso Radebe, crowds that would wait days to make their deposits. When an elite crime-busting unit of the South African Police Services cracked down on the scheme, arresting Radebe, hundreds of outraged investors marched on the Directorate of Public Prosecutions in Pretoria, carrying placards that proclaimed him as their “Messiah.” He was, they said, “doing more to alleviate poverty than the government.”17 In something akin to a memorial service, these protestors sung hymns and prayed for the return of both their savior and their savings.18 When Radebe was eventually released on bail, “ululating investors carried [him] shoulder-high and described him as a biblical Moses, who had delivered the downtrodden Israelites to God’s promised land.”19

    All of these things have a single common denominator: the allure of conjuring wealth from nothing. In this respect, while they recall older magicalities, they are the offspring of the same animating spirit as casino capitalism; indeed, perhaps they are casino capitalism for those who lack the fiscal or cultural capital–or who, for one or another reason, are reluctant to gamble on more conventional markets. Like the wizardry that made straw into gold (Schneider 1989), these alchemic techniques defy reason in promising to return unnaturally large profits on small investments, to yield wealth without work, to produce value without effort. Here, again, is the specter, the distinctive spirit, of neoliberalism in its triumphal phase. In its shadowy penumbra, the line between Ponzi schemes and prosperity gospels is very thin indeed.

    This, in turn, brings us to the spread of new religious movements across the planet. These, we suggest, may be seen as the apotheosis of the occult economies of which we have been speaking; as their holy-owned subsidiaries, if we may be forgiven the pun. Such movements take on a wide variety of guises. Some, like the Vissariontsi with which we began, sound perennial themes of apocalypse and utopian communitarianism, albeit tuned to a distinctively local key. But the followers of Vissarion also share a good deal with other Neoprotestant denominations elsewhere, among them the New Life Church in South Africa: a propensity for seeing congregations as joint stock companies, offering the faithful a tangible return on their investments; a fascination with new technologies and media that seem to condense the numinous magic of global enterprise; an eclipse of the ideal of patient toil and paradise postponed by the promise of prompt reward; the fusing of a millennial spirit with the speculative force of finance capital, so that the instant accumulation of wealth becomes synonymous with the unmediated power of God; a tendency, because of all this, to be viewed by orthodox believers as being mercenary, Satanic, magic-ridden.

    These features are even more palpable in the socalled “fee-for-service” faiths, those consumer cults alluded to above, which are challenging established Christian denominations in Africa and elsewhere. Typical of them is the Brazilian movement, the Universal Church of the Kingdom of God (Igreja Universal do Reina de Deus), which, since 1994, has grown rapidly all over southern Africa. Controversial in its country of origin, this church is reforming the Protestant Ethic with enterprise and urbanity. It owns a major television network in Brazil, has an elaborate website, and sponsors high- profile religious rock groups and soap operas (Kramer 1999). Above all, it promises swift payback to those who embrace Christ, denounce Satan, and “make their faith practical” by “sacrificing” all they can to the movement.20 Here Pentecostalism meets neoliberal enterprise head on; here the theological waxes psychotherapeutic. In its African churches, most of them–literally–storefronts in town centers, prayer meetings respond to candidly mercenary motives, offering everything from cures for depression through financial advice to remedies for unemployment; itinerant passers-by, clients and customers really, select the services they require. Even the smallest churches have elaborate electronic sound systems; pounding music, indistinguishable from any other rock music to all but the best trained ear, beats out a distinctly this-worldly ethos. A collage of advertisements for BMWs and lottery winnings adorned the altar in one such church that we visited. Above it was the banner heading: “Delight Yourself in the Lord and He Will Give You the Desires of Your Heart (Psalms 37: 4).” Tabloids stuck to walls and windows carried stories, told in the first person, about those whose rebirth in the fold was rewarded by a rush of wealth or an astonishing recovery of health.

    The ability to deliver in the here-and-now, itself a potent form of space-time compression, is offered as the measure of a genuinely global God, just as it is taken to explain the lively power of Satanism. Both have the instant efficacy of the magical and the millenniary. As Kramer (1999:35) says of Brazilian Neopentecostals, “innerworldly asceticism has been replaced with a concern for the pragmatics of material gain and the immediacy of desire … [T]he return on capital has suddenly become more spiritually compelling and imminent … than the return of Christ.” This shift is endemic to many new religious movements nowadays. For them, and for their many millions of members, the Second Coming evokes not a Jesus who saves, but one who pays dividends. Or, more accurately, one who promises a miraculous return on spiritual venture capital.

    It might be argued that, as neoliberal forces have eroded the provenance of liberal democratic states in respect of education, health, and welfare, religious movements– above all, those flexible “prosperity” movements that mimic the workings of business– have expanded their institutional reach into formerly “secular” public domains. In South Africa, as a rising sense of entitlement runs up against the reality of privatization and limited state resources, churches have invested ever more heavily in building schools, clinics, and sports centers. They have extended their ministry in time and content, offering a host of individualized, special services–from exorcism to book-keeping–to members and nonmembers alike. Ever more aware of their role in civil society, these denominations involve themselves actively in current politics, both local and national. As a consequence, notions of the sacred and profane, of membership and congregation, of the calendar and the institutional scope of organized religion are all being reshaped. So, too, are the means of mediating and manifesting divine power.

    Why? How, to put the matter more generally, are we to account for the current spread and impact of occult economies and prosperity cults? In framing the problem, of course, we have already pointed in the direction of some answers.

    Toward a privatized millennium

    To the degree that millennial capitalism fuses the modern and the postmodern, hope and hopelessness, utility and futility, the world created in its image presents itself as a mass of contradictions: as a world, simultaneously, of possibility and impossibility. This is precisely the juxtaposition associated with cargo cults and chiliastic movements in other times and places (Worsley 1957; Cohn 1957). But, as the growth of prosperity gospels and fee-for-service movements illustrates, the chiliastic urge in neoliberal times expresses itself in a privatized millennium, a personalized rather than a communal sense of rebirth. In this, the messianic meets the magical. In the here-and-now, the cargo, glimpsed in large part through TV and the Internet, takes the form of huge concentrations of wealth accruing, legitimately or otherwise, to the rich of the new planetary economy. It is enigmatic wealth, derived mysteriously, as we said earlier, from financial investment and management, from intellectual property and other rights, from electronic expertise and the command of cyberspace, from transport and its cognate operations, and from the supply of various sorts of post-Fordist services. All of this points to the fact that the covert mechanisms of changing markets, not to mention abstruse technological and informational knowledge , hold the key to hitherto unimaginable fortunes: to capital amassed by the ever more rapid flow of value, across time and space, into the fluid coordinates of the local and the global.

    Herein, of course, lies the other side of the coin: the sense of impossibility, even despair, that comes from being left out of the promise of prosperity, from having to look in on a global economy of desire from its immiserated exteriors. Whether it be in post-Soviet Central Europe or postcolonial Africa, in post-Thatcherite Britain or the neoliberal USA, in a China edging towards its own form of capitalism or in Neopentecostal Latin America, the world-historical process which came to be symbolized by the events of 1989 held out the prospect that everyone would be set free to accumulate and speculate, to consume, and to indulge repressed cravings in a universe of less government, greater privatization, more opulence, and infinite enterprise. For the vast majority, however, the millennial moment passed without visible enrichment.

    The implication? That, in these times–the late modernist age when, according to Weber and Marx, enchantment would wither away–more and more ordinary people see arcane forces intervening in the production of value, diverting its flow toward a new elect. They also attribute to these arcane forces their feelings of erasure and loss: an erasure, in many places, of community and family; a loss of human integrity, experienced in the spreading commodification of persons and their bodies, in the unyoking of the market value from the social value of objects and relations, in the substitution of quantities for quality, abstraction for substance. None of these perceptions is new, as we have said. Balzac (1965 [1847]) described them for France in the 1840s, as did Conrad (1957 [1911]) for prerevolutionary Russia, and neither were alone. Gluckman (1959) spoke long ago of the “magic of despair” which arose in similarly dislocated colonial situations in Africa.

    Nonetheless, to reiterate, many people across the world are experiencing these disruptions right now in ways that make them appear ever more acute, ever more devastating, ever harder to grasp or to rationalize to themselves. Which is why the ethical dimensions of occult economies are so prominent, why the mass panics of our times tend to be moral in tone, why they so often express themselves in religious movements that pursue instant material returns and yet condemn those who enrich themselves in unGodly ways. And why, more generally, occult economies consist, at one level, in the constant quest for new, magical means for otherwise unattainable ends, and yet, at another, voice a desire to sanction, even eradicate, people held to have accumulated assets by those very means. Satan and salvation, it seems, remain the conditions of each other’s imaginings.

    In sum, occult economies in general, and Neoprotestant religious movements in particular–in Africa and elsewhere–are a response to the perception of an epochal shift in the constitution of the lived world: a world in which the most promising way to create real wealth seems to lie in forms of power/knowledge that transgress the conventional, the rational, the moral, thus to multiply available techniques of producing value, fair or foul. In their cultural aspect, these economies bespeak a resolute effort to come to terms with that power/knowledge, to account for the inexplicable phenomena to which it gives rise, to plumb its secrets–a byproduct of which is the invention of new occult specters. Thus, for example, the unprecedented manifestation of zombies in some parts of the South African countryside has grown in direct proportion to the shrinking labor market for young men (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999b). The former provide a partial explanation for the latter: the living dead are commonly said to be killed and raised up by older people, by witches of wealth, to toil for them, thereby rendering rural youth jobless. There are, in this era of flexitime employment, even part-time zombies, a virtual working c1ass–of pure, abstract labor power–that slaves away at night for its masters. In this context, moreover, the angry dramas through which ritual murderers are identified often become sites of public divination. As they unfold, the accusers discuss, attribute cause, and speak out their understanding of the forces that make the postcolony such an inhospitable place for them. This is an extreme situation, obviously. But in less stark circumstances, too, changing moral and material economies tend to spawn simultaneous strivings to garner wealth and to make transparent the means by which that wealth may be produced.

    As all this suggests, appeals to the occult in pursuit of the secrets of capital generally rely on local cultural technologies: on vernacular modes of divination or oracular consultation, on spirit possession or ancestral invocation, on sorcery busting or forensic legal procedures, on witch beliefs or prayer. Whatever. We stress, though, that the use of these technologies does not imply an iteration of, a retreat into, “tradition.” Per contra, their deployment in such circumstances is frequently a means of fashioning new techniques to preserve persisting values, of retooling culturally familiar signs and practices. As in cargo cults of old, this typically involves the mimicking of powerful new ways of producing wealth (Comaroff and Comaroff 1993:xvf).

    The rise of occult economies–amidst and alongside more conventional modes of economic practice, shading into the murky domains of crime and corruption–seems overdetermined in the early twenty-first century. This, after all, is an age in which the extravagant optimism of millennial capitalism runs up against an increasingly nihilistic, thoroughly postmodern pessimism. As the connections between means and ends grow increasingly opaque, the occult becomes an ever more semantically saturated metaphor for our times. Note how commonplace it is nowadays to pepper media-parlance, science-speak, new age psychobabble, and technologese–even the law21–with the language of enchantment. But, we insist, occult economies are not reducible to the symbolic, the figurative, or the allegorical alone. Magic is, everywhere, the science of the concrete, aimed at making sense of and acting upon the world–especially, but not only, among those who feel themselves disempowered, emasculated, disadvantaged. The fact that the turn to enchantment is not unprecedented, that it has precursors in earlier times, makes it no less significant to those for whom it has become an integral part of everyday reality. Maybe, too, all this describes a fleeting phase in the long, unfinished history of capitalism. But that makes it no less momentous. Especially in the white heat of the millennial moment.

    Towards a beginning

    However we wish to characterize this Uncommon Age–as an epoch of death (of ideology, politics, the subject) or rebirth (of the spirit of Marx, Weber, and the Adams, Ferguson and Smith)–ours are perplexing times; times caught uneasily between Derrida’s “end of work” (n.d.; see above) and Zizek’s (1997) “plague of fantasies”; times in which the conjuncture of the strange and the familiar, of stasis and metamorphosis, plays tricks on our perceptions, our positions, our praxis. This conjuncture appears at once to endorse and to erode our understanding of the lineaments of modernity. And its post-ponements. Here, plainly, we have tried to do no more than offer some preliminary observations about the passage from the apocalyptic perplexities of the present to the mundane realities of the future, interrogating, with due respect to Max Weber, the elective affinity between the spirit of a rising millennial capitalism, the occult economies which are growing up in its penumbra, and those Neoprotestant religious movements that give voice to its ethos.

    As we have already intimated, and as we all know well, the inscription of materiality in moral economy, of the pursuit of this-worldly wealth in other-worldly religious faith is hardly new. In the Protestant Ethic, Weber (1958: 175) himself italicizes a passage from John Wesley that says: “we must exhort all Christians gain all they can, and to save all they can; that is, in effect, to grow rich.” What, then, is new? We have suggested that the answer lies in a historically concrete conjuncture. One side of that conjuncture is a post-Fordist, salvific form of capitalism, a capitalism that no longer waits for the messiah–with due respect to Vissarion–but acts like one. It is a form of capitalism that is experienced, to invoke Marx’s camera obscura, upside down; that appears to have done away with production, and productive labor, as its fundamental source of property, personhood, family, identity, community, moral order, even “society”; that has altered the sovereignty of the nation-state and displaced its established public institutions; that has reconstituted space and time, expanding their virtual and global coordinates; that has elevated consumption into a prime mover, into the foundation of being in the world, into an epistemic act that makes the legal, psychotherapeutic, self-contracting individual of the “new” world order into a stakeholder, itself a trope that fuses gambling with corporate citizenship.

    On the other side of the conjuncture is the religion of the Vissariontsi in Siberia, of the New Life Church in South Africa, of those Disciples of Christ in Indiana, and many others besides. It is a religion of free choice and a flexible architecture, of instant materialities and dealmaking with the divine, of radically voluntarist subjects and repressed memories, of mass-mediations, global imaginings, and enchanted investments. Old time religion, it seems, is, at least in its Neoprotestant manifestation, being compressed into space-time religion. Thus it is that, as the past becomes the future, new spiritual movements, especially in African postcolonies, seek to harness the numinous magic of global enterprise, to fuse a messianic spirit with the speculative force of finance capital, thereby “taking the waiting out of wanting.” And thereby separating salvation from saving and/or this-worldly ascetism. This is not to say that the [old] Protestantism is dead and gone. Quite the contrary: there are many contexts in which it is putting up animated resistance, in which the first incarnation of Max Weber is alive and well. However, a Second Coming seems imminent in more and more places across the planet. It is a Second Coming that heralds a new Protestant Ethic, a new Spirit of Capitalism, and a new historical anthropology to make sense of both.

    Postscript

    In 2002, as we were walking on a street in Cambridge, Massachusetts, we were given what looked like a check by an eager, clean-cut young man. It was a check. Issued by the “Jesus Christ Bank of Unlimited Resources” (Matthew 6:33), dated “Now,” and made out to “Whosoever Will” (John 1:12) for the sum of “Eternal and Abundant Life” (Romans 6:23), it bore the signature of “The Blood of Jesus Christ” (Matthew 26:28). The account number, in the name of Love, Grace and Face – which sounds like a combination of a 1960s rock group and a law firm – is Romans 5:8/Ephesians 2:8,9. On the back are instructions for cashing the check “Secure your heavenly passport and visa today,” they advise. “Cash this check daily for your every need as you strive to stay away from sin…And if you need prayer and counseling, contact Pastor S@prodigy.com.” We share this promissory note in the spirit of its final message: “Please pass this tract on.”

  • On Personhood

    On Personhood

    PROLEGOMENON

    The Autonomous Person: A European Invention.

    Is the idea of “the autonomous person” a European invention? The interrogative seems straightforward enough. Even ingenuous. But, hiding in the hypertext beneath its surface, is an- other, altogether less innocent question, one which carries within it a silent claim: To the ex- tent that “the autonomous person,” is a European invention, does its absence elsewhere im- ply a deficit, a failure, a measure of incivility on the part of non-Europeans? And what of the corollary: Is this figure, this “person,” the end point in a world-historical telos, something to which non-occidentals are inexorably drawn as they cast off their primordial differences? Is it, in other words, a universal feature of modernity-in-the-making, a Construct in the Upper Case? Or is it merely a lower case, local euroconstruct?i

    1

    We begin our excursion into African conceptions of personhood in a decentering, rela- tivizing voice: the voice often assumed by anthropologists to discomfort cross-disciplinary, transcultural, suprahistorical discourses about Western categories, their provenance and puta- tive universality. From our disciplinary perspective, “the autonomous person,” that familiar trope of European bourgeois modernity (Taylor 1989), is a Eurocentric idea. And a profoundly pa- rochial, particularistic one at that.ii To be sure, the very notion that this generic person might constitute a universal is itself integral to its Eurocultural construction, a part of its ideological apparatus. What is more, “the autonomous person”–the definite, singular article–describes an imaginaire, an ensemble of signs and values, a hegemonic formation: neither in Europe, nor any place else to which it has been exported, does it exist as an unmediated sociological reality (Comaroff and Comaroff 1991:60f). Neither, of course, does the classical contrast be- tween (i) the self-made, self-conscious, right-bearing individual of “modern Western society,” that hyphenated Cartesian figure epitomized in the Promethean hero of Universal History (Car- lyle 1842:1), and (ii) the relational, ascriptive, communalistic, inert self attributed to premodern others. As we shall see, African notions of personhood are infinitely more complicated than this tired theoretical antinomy allows (Fortes 1973; La Fontaine 1985; Lienhardt 1985).iii So, too, is the telos of Afromodernity, which is not moving, in a fixed evolutionary orbit, toward Euro- modernity. For one thing, the continent, as diverse as it is large, has spawned alternative mo- dernities in which very different notions of selfhood, civility, and publicity have taken root (Co- maroff and Comaroff 1999a). For another, there is a strong counter-teleological case to be made: a case for the radically revisionist thesis that, in sociolegal terms at least, Europe is ev- olving toward Africa, not the other way around. But that is a story for another time.iv

    As this suggests, we shall call into doubt the universality of “the autonomous person” by recourse to an anthropological insistence on cultural and historical specificity (cf. La Fon- taine 1985). But this does not exhaust either our objectives here or the interrogative that fra- mes them: …A European Invention? Phrased thus, the question mark points toward two further problems: Is the idea of “the autonomous person” properly regarded as an invention at all? If so, is it to be attributed to Europe? The first, patently, depends on the manner in which we understand processes of cultural production; the second, on the extent to which we allow that anything in European modernity was ever fabricated endogenously–rather than in hybridizing encounters with significant, usually colonized, others. We shall return, in due course, to the historical dialectics underlying the rise of post-enlightenment Western constructions of selfhood and, with them, to the answers to these questions.

    First, however, let us turn to Africa. Note that we do not seek to arrive at a generic ac- count of “the African conception of personhood.” There is no such thing. Our purpose is to take one good, historically-situated case: that of the Southern Tswana peoples of South Africa during the late colonial period. As it happens, much of what we shall have to say about Tswa- na imaginings of being-in-the-world, and about their historical anthropology, has broad reso- nances elsewhere across the continent. But, more to the present point, by illuminating the con- trasts and consonances between African and European discourses of personhood, this case casts a sharp, prismatic light on received Western notions of the modernist self and its antino- mies.

    PERSONHOOD AND SOCIETY IN THE INTERIORS OF SOUTH AFRICA

    Among those peoples who, during the colonial encounter came to be known as “the Tswana,”v personhood was everywhere seen to be an intrinsically social construction. This in two senses: first, nobody existed or could be known except in relation and with reference to, even as part of, a wide array of significant others;vi and, second, the identity of each and every one was forged, cumulatively, by an infinite, ongoing series of practical activities. Pace Tonnies, selfhood was not ascribed: status and role were determined by factors other than birth or ge- nealogy, although social standing was typically represented in genealogical terms (Comaroff and Roberts 1981:37-46).vii For reasons having to do with its internal workings–anthropolog- ists have long noted that the coexistence of an ideology of patrilineal descent with endogamous marriage yields social orders of this sortviii–the Tswana world of the time was at once highly communal and highly individuated. From within, it was perceived as a rule-governed, hier- archical, and ordered universe, and yet as an enigmatical, shifting, contentious one: a universe in which people, especially men, had to “build themselves up”–to constitute their person, po- sition, and rank–by acquiring “wealth in people,” orchestrating ties of alliance and opposition, and “eating” their rivals. Potentially at least, selfhood and social status, which was reckoned in terms of agnatic seniority, was always negotiable, an observation which Gluckman (1963) once claimed to be true of all African “tribal” societies. For Tswana of the colonial era, in sum, “the person” was a constant work-in-progress; indeed, a highly complex fabrication, whose complexity was further shaded by gender, generation, class, race, ethnicity, and religious ideo- logy. Among other things.

    But we are running ahead of ourselves. A bit more background first.

    The Tswana peoples today compose one of the largest ethnic groupings in South Af- rica.ix At least from the late eighteenth century onward, and probably for a good time before (Legassick 1969:98), the majority of them lived in expansive chiefdoms in the central, semi-arid interior of the country; although, for more than a hundred and thirty years, many have either migrated to cities and towns across the subcontinent or have lived in small decentralized rural communities (Schapera 1953; Comaroff and Comaroff 1991:127). Until the colonial state went about subverting their autonomy, the chiefdoms were a substantial political presence on the landscape, their economies founded on cultivation, cattle, hunting, and trade (Shillington 1985). Each was centered on a densely-populated capital, with thousands of residents ordered into family groups and wards, surrounded by fields and cattle-posts; polities (merafe) stretched as far as chiefs and their subjects could pasture and protect their animals (Comaroff and Comaroff 1990). In the spaces between were tracts of “bush,” cross-cut by pathways that linked the capitals. These trails served as vectors of trade and alliance, of warfare and raiding, and of the exchange of cultural knowledge over long-distances (Comaroff and Comaroff 1997:54).

    With the arrival of Protestant evangelists and European settlers from the 1820s onwards, the region became increasingly populated. And contested. White farms, trading posts, and villages began to dot the countryside. Along with the missions–themselves augmented by schools, shops, and other structures–they soon asserted a visible presence on the “bushveld.” Inexorably, roads and transport routes followed; inexorably, autochthonous populations found more and more of their land expropriated. With the mineral revolution, Southern Tswana, alrea- dy schooled by the civilizing mission in bourgeois ideas of property and progress, would learn the lessons of colonial capitalism at first hand. Many migrated as neophyte proletarians to the burgeoning mining settlements just beyond the edges of their territory; some benefitted great- ly from the opening up of markets for their produce and their services; all became embroiled in a rapid process of class formation, in which new patterns of social distinction and ideological difference, partly phrased in the polite language of the Protestant ethic, came to divide old communities. Finally, in the 1880s, overrule inserted the British state onto this terrain. Its structures and personnel located themselves either in the white towns at the hub of farming districts or in newly erected administrative centers, from which nearby “natives” could be go- verned. Often these centers were sited close to Tswana capitals and brought in yet more Europeans, generally in pursuit of trade and business; the building of a railway line across the territory in the 1890s made it accessible to people and goods otherwise unlikely ever to have entered it. Which, in turn, exacerbated the ingress of Southern Tswana into the racialized, class-fragmented world of colonial economy and society–with all that it entailed see e.g. Shillington 1985; Molema 1966).

    The most obvious thing it entailed was a complicated, contradictory sociology. On one 6 hand, colonialism spawned relations that transsected the lines of race, class, and culture, crea- ting hybrid identities and unexpected patterns of consociation (Comaroff and Comaroff 1997:24-5).x On the other, it came to be represented as a sharply sundered, Manichean world, in which the cleavage between black and white, ruler and ruled, African and European was caste in stone; the pun, of course, is intended. Elsewhere (1997:24-9), we have argued that this schismatic reality was endemic to the construction of colonial societies. We have also shown that, in its representation here–wrought largely as a result of the encounter between Southern Tswana and colonial evangelists–this irredeemable opposition came to be phrased as a con- trast between sekgoa, European ways and means, and setswana, their Tswana counterpart; each being reduced from a dynamic, evanescent, open-ended, historically expansive order of signs and practices to an ahistorical essence, a fetishized object, a tradition. A culture.

    In point of historical fact, the content subsumed by these two constructs, by setswana and sekgoa, changed a great deal over time; that much is clear from the documentary record. However, they continued to stand in stark epistemic antinomy throughout the colonial epoch. To be sure, their residues persist today–even as they are encompassed within an increasingly heterotopic postcolonial cultural politics. It is out of this contrast that we may begin to draw our description of what personhood, as framed in setswana, may be taken to have meant during the late colonial period; to have meant, that is, both as a stereotypic representation and as a set of intersubjective practices.

    Of Being and Becoming

    As we said a moment ago, the Southern Tswana world was a socially fluid, evanescent field of social relations: one in which, despite the stress on genealogical placement, the onus was on citizens, especially adult males, to “build themselves up,” to protect themselves from their enemies and rivals, to negotiate their rank and status,xi and to extend themselves across social space by accumulating wealth in people. Of course, not everybody was equal in this res- pect. For one thing, there were, until well into the colonial period, various forms of servitude to be found in most chiefdoms (Schapera 1938; cf. Tagart 1933). Slaves and servants, who were regarded as semi-social beings (Moffat 1842:383; Mackenzie 1883:57), lacked the right to own property or possessions–indeed, to be self-possessed. For another thing, women were jural minors, subject to the representation of their senior male kin. In the context of everyday social life, as well as in political process that played themselves out away from the public eye, females were anything but inert or impotent; quite the opposite (J.L.Comaroff 1987b). But, le- gally speaking, they lived in the passive voice: for example, where a man might marry (go nya- la), a woman was married (go nyalwa). For a third thing, status made a difference. Kings and commoners, the rich and the poor, ritual experts and supplicants enjoyed varying capacities to act upon the world; not least, as we shall see, because the empowering activities of some people had the effect of reducing the potency and potentiality of others.

    This qualification aside, however, most Southern Tswana adults found themselves en- gaged constantly in a praxis of self-construction. Given the scaffolding of their universe, it could not be otherwise. Either people acted upon the world or the world acted upon them. Or both, in some proportion. Every now and again this involved dramatic confrontations over property, possessions, or position. For the most part, however, it entailed the unceasing, quotidian bu- siness of cultivating relations and fields, of husbanding animals and allies, of raising offspring and avoiding the malign intentions of others, of gradually accumulating cultural capital and cash to invest in the future. Here, then, is the first principle of contemporary Tswana personhood: it referred not to a state of being but to a state of becoming. No living self could be static. Sta- sis meant social death.

    The principle of personhood as a mode of becoming expressed itself in every aspect of social existence. Take, for instance, marriage, an ensemble of practices often treated as the site, par excellence, of social formation and reproduction.xii Earlier generations of anthropolo- gists were wont to say that, in Africa, wedlock was a process rather than “an event or condi- tion” (Radcliffe-Brown 1951:49); that, as Murray (1976; 1981) has observed of Lesotho, the salient question was not whether or not two people were married, but how much. Among Sou- thern Tswana, the creation of a conjugal bond, and of the parties to it as fully social adults, took the form of a protracted, cumulative succession of exchanges, sometimes ending only af- ter the death of the spouses. What is more, the status of that bond was always open to (re)in- terpretation–as casual sex, concubinage (bonyatsi), living together (ba dula mmogo), marriage (nyalo)–this being facilitated by the fact that the terms used between partners (monna [m], mosadi [f]) were unmarked; they might as well have referred to someone with whom an individual cohabited the night before as to a mate of long-standing. Nor, in the flow of every- day life, was any effort made to clarify such things: relations might go undefined because, in the normal course of events, they were growing, developing, becoming. As were the human beings involved in them. It was only at moments of rupture, when the continuing present came to an abrupt end, that there was any necessity to decide what they had been. Or, rather, had become. And this only because different kinds of partnership involved a different disposition of assets on dissolution (Comaroff and Roberts 1981:151-3).

    Much the same stress on becoming rather than being, on persons and relations as the unfolding product of quotidian social construction, was evident in patterns of inheritance as well. By contrast to European convention, the devolution of estates across the generations was not tied to death. It began, rather, as soon as an individual reached adulthood, set about estab- lishing a conjugal union, and had children. And it continued, as an ongoing process, through- out the life cycle. Indeed, its success was measured not by how much of a residue of property one had at death, but by how much had been distributed before–and how little had been kept back to become the object of argument among heirs (Comaroff and Roberts 1981:175-215). Through the cumulative, gradual disposal of property, men and (to a lesser extent) women rea- lized themselves as parents, spouses, citizens of substance, ancestors-in-the-making; by these means they insinuated, objectified, and embodied themselves in their offspring. And ensured their perpetuity as persons.

    As this suggests, the foundational notion of being-as-becoming, of the sentient self as active agent in the world, was so taken-for-granted that it went largely unsaid. Throughout life (in embodied form) and even after death (as a narrated presence), the person was a subject with the potential to engage in the act of completing and augmenting him- or herself. Take just one, very mundane demonstration of the point:

    In 1970, in the course of doing ethnographic fieldwork in Mafikeng, we were sitting in a domestic courtyard with the family of a ward headman, Mhengwa Letsholo. An elder- ly female neighbor, obviously well past childbearing age, walked across the public mee- ting space just beyond the homestead wall. “There goes Mme-Seleka,” said the head- man’s wife, gesturing her way. “Mme-” denotes “mother of,” although its connotative fan is rather broad. Trying to place her in social space, one of us asked whether she had sons or daughters. “Not yet,” said the headman, “No, not yet.” At face value, this seemed a refractory answer: there was no doubt that, given her age, Mme-Seleka was not about to fall pregnant. But it made perfect sense. For one thing, there were conven- tional means–such as the levirate and sororate–by which offspring might be “born” to a person who could not physically produce them. But there was another, less prag- matic dimension to Mhengwa’s response: to answer in the absolute negative would have been to consign the woman’s active life to the past tense, to pronounce her socially dead. As long as she was a sentient being, as long as she was still in the process of becoming, some form of maternity was always possible. “Not yet” implies the continuous present, just as “no” puts closure to something that once may have been but now but no longer is.

    The only time that people stopped “becoming” was when they fell victim to witchcraft or were “eaten” by someone more powerful. In the former case, they were either immobilized by illness or mysteriously rendered inert, their capacity for productive activity negated (cf. Munn 1986). In the latter, which implied feminization, they were reduced to dependency and eventually lost all self-determination; typically, they ceased to toil on their own account, working instead at the behest of their masters and patrons. “Absorbed by another personality,” was the way in which one early nineteenth-century missionary-ethnographer described this state of arrested becoming (Willoughby 1932:227). A second observer, J. Tom Brown (1926:137-8), wrote an unusually vivid description of men who, having been thus consumed, suffered an eclipse of their personhood (Comaroff and Comaroff 1991:143):

    When a man’s relatives notice that his whole nature is changed, that the light of the mind is darkened and character has deteriorated so that it may be said that the real manhood is dead, though the body still lives; when they realize that…the human is alie- nated from…his kith and kin, they apply to him a name (sebibi or sehihi), which sig- nifies that though the body lives and moves it is only a grave, a place where some- thing has died or been killed. The essential manhood is dead. It is no uncommon thing to hear a person spoken of as being dead when he stands before you visibly alive. When this takes place it always means that there has been an overshadowing of the true relationships of life…

    Sefifi [sehihi], the term for this state of non-being, is the same as that for “death pollution.” Interestingly, it describes a condition strikingly similar to the figure of the zombie, which has recently appeared in the South African countryside as part of a moral panic about joblessness in the postcolony (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999b). It speaks of an erasure of self-determina- tion; of empty shells of humanity who toil mindlessly for others; of a slippage into the passive, past tense. But how, by contrast, do sentient social actors construct themselves? Wherein lies their mode of producing personhood?

    On Producing Personhood
    The production of personhood here, we reiterate, was an irreducibly social process; this despite–or, perhaps, because of–the fact that, given the workings of the Southern Tswana social universe, initiative lay with individuals for “building themselves up.” The epistemic em- phasis on self-construction was embodied, metonymically and metapragmatically, in the idea of tiro, labor.xiii Go dira, in the vernacular, meant “to make,” “to do,” or “to cause to happen.” It covered a wide spectrum of activities, from cultivation, cooking, and creating a family to pas- toralism, politics, and the performance of ritual (J. Comaroff 1985; Comaroff and Comaroff 1991:140ff). Tiro was, still is, generally translated as “[a] work” (Brown 1931:308), and accented the act of fabrication. It yielded value in the form of persons, things, and relations, although it might be undone by sorcery and other malign forces (see below). But tiro was not an abstract quality, a commodity to be bought or sold. It could not exist as alienable labor power. Southern Tswana often said that, in the past, even the energies of a serf were not to be exchanged, let alone purchased. They were only available to his or her master by virtue of a relationship of interdependence; hints, here, of Hegel. Work, in short, was the positive, relational aspect of human social activity; of the making of self and others in the course of everyday life.

    Not only were social beings made and remade by tiro, but the product–namely, person- hood–was inseparable from the process of production itself. As Alverson (1978:132) has not- ed, “an individual not only produce[d] for himself, but actually produce[d] his entitlement to be a social person.” This was captured in the various inflections of go dira. Its simple reflexive form, go itira, “to contrive oneself” or “to pose as,” carried ambiguous moral implications. It spoke of antisocial, egocentric self-enhancement; hence the common usage go itira motho (lit. “to make oneself a distinct person”) connoted “to be proud” or “haughty.” Go itira contrasted with go itirela–the reflexive extension of direla (“work for”)–which translated as “to make (work, do) for oneself” in an affirmative sense. For Tswana in Botswana during the 1970s, according to Alverson (1978:134), itirela still referred to the accretion of riches in family and social relations, in cattle and clients, in position and possessions; all of which was also held, hegemonically, to contribute to the common good. The creation of these forms of value was dubbed “great work”–the effect of which was to extend the self through ties of interdependen- ce, often by means of objects. Thus the significance of property, most notably beasts, was that it both indexed and capitalized leverage over people. By extension, power was taken here to be a measure of command within a complex, labile field of material and signal exchanges. Far from being understood in terms of individual autonomy or self-sufficiency, its signature was con- trol over the social production of reality itself.

    The concept of self-construction–of tiro, “work” and itirela, “to make [for] oneself”–then, projected a world in which the “building up” of persons in relation to each other, the accumulation of wealth and rank, and the sustenance of a strong, centralized polity (morafe) were indivisible aspects of everyday practice. The object of that practice, minimally, was to avoid social death, to continue producing oneself by producing people and things; maximally, it was to do “great works.” But just as individuals were presumed to be unequal in their capacity to construct themselves (above, p.00), so not everyone was able to toil in the same kinds of way. Above all, male labor differed from female labor. Before the introduction of the plough–and af- ter it, save for wealthy cultivators–women were associated primarily with agriculture, domesticity, and reproduction. The racial capitalism of the colonial state, and especially of the apartheid regime, played into this by coercing men into migrant wage employment away from home; concomitantly, their wives and daughters remained in the countryside. In addition to subsistence farming, these women were the source of the most basic value of all, human life. But their fertility also yielded polluting heat (bothitho) that could spoil the activities of their husbands, fathers, and brothers; even Christian converts evinced concern at this danger. Thus they were said to need physical confinement, denied an active role in the public sphere, and kept away from cattle, the most prized form of capital. Men, by contrast, were cool (tshididi): they had the qualities necessary for raising stock, for effective social production, and for the management of the commonweal. While wives did hold fields on their own account, had their own granaries, and exercised some control over the disposal of their harvest, their “works”–the fruits of their labor pains and labor power (cf. Jeffery et al)–provided the material base, the mundane commodities, on which male politics, law, and ritual depended. The point was made repeatedly in Tswana poetics: for example, the origin myth of the male initiation, the most com- prehensive of their rites de passage, told how society was born when the raw fertility of females was domesticated by men and put to collective ends.

    Personhood, Negation, and Self-Defense

    The ongoing process of self-construction was, as we said above, under constant threat of countervailing forces; forces inherent in the social world itself. Because men, especially ag- natic rivals, sought to “eat” one another, and because sorcery was an ever-present danger, work also involved protecting one’s self and one’s dependents from “being undone.” Dirologa, the reversive extension of dira, described this mode of destruction. People took great pains to fortify their homesteads and fields against attack–and sometimes to attack their adversaries, real or imagined, before being hit themselves. Nor was this true only of “traditionalists.” In the 1930s, Christian elites, deeply committed to “private interest and competition,” were ob- served–by a Tswana anthropologist–to deploy magical means to doctor their crops and cattle in order to safeguard them;xiv also, to “get ahead.” We observed the same thing, sometimes fused with Christian ritual, in the 1970s.

    Of all the available preventive measures against “being undone,” however, the most fundamental, and the most effective, lay in the fabrication of personhood itself. In anticipation of the postmodern stress on multiple subjectivity, and in a manner evocative of the partible per- sona described for Melanesia (see n.3), Southern Tswana were careful to fragment and ref- ract the self in presenting its exteriors to the world. This derived from an ethnotheory of pow- er/knowledge based on two foundational, if unspoken, axioms. First, because that self was not confined to the corporeal body–it ranged over the sociophysical space-time occupied by the sum total of its relations, presences, enterprises–anything that acted on its traces might affect it for good or ill; which is why human beings could be attacked through their footprints, immo- bilized by curses, enabled by ancestral invocation, undermined or strengthened by magical ope- rations on their houses, their clothes, or their animals. Second, to the degree that anyone was “known” to others, she or he became vulnerable to their machinations, to being consumed by them. Conversely, empowerment, protective or predatory, lay in the capacity to conceal: to con- ceal purposes, possessions, propensities, practices–and, even more subtly, to conceal concealment, to hide the fact that anything at all was being hidden.

    Put the two axioms together and the corollary is obvious: it made sense only to present partial, refractory aspects of one’s person–of one’s property, projects, interests–to the various others who shared the same coordinates of the life-world. Hence the people with whom an indi- vidual worked, or engaged in economic enterprises, were shown a single facet; political allies saw another; those with whom s/he prayed or played, yet another; and so on. Clearly, given the nature of everyday existence here, and the local predilection for gossip and scandal, there were inevitable overlaps; boundaries were breached, what was masked occasionally became transparent. Still, the effort to sustain the partibility of personhood, thus to empower the self and its undertakings, was a fundamental premise of being-through-becoming. So much so that it went utterly unremarked. But it was revealed, metapragmatically, at the one moment in the life-cycle at which the coherence of biography was enacted: death. Echoes, here, of Sartrean existentialism.

    The integration of the fractal human subject occurred toward the end of his or her fu- neral. In a public ceremony known as tatolo, people arose to narrate that part of the career of the deceased of which they, in particular, knew; and so, piece by piece, a composite portrait emerged, a life took shape from its shards. In the 1970s, we were told more than once that tatolo was the most engaging part of a burial–not least to mourning relatives, for whom the synoptic accounting was sometimes as much as a surprise as it was to relative strangers. In a universe in which social knowledge was a matter of insatiable interest and informational va- lue, it is no wonder that tatolo held such fascination: it represented an existential denouement, the summation of a biography that had, until now, been an inscrutable work-in-progress. And was about to move onto an altogether different, even less scrutable plane. In the case of per- sons of power, the fascination grew exponentially: tatolo stood to reveal their ways and means, their secrets of being-and-becoming, in this complex, labyrinthine social world.

    CONCLUSION: THE DIALECTICS OF ENCOUNTER

    The Southern Tswana conception of personhood, in sum, was part and parcel of a dis- tinct, historically-wrought universe of meaning and action; a Afromodernist universe in which labor, the self, and the social were mutually constituting. Shades, here, of Marx. This concep- tion was at once different and yet similar to its European counterpart. The latter had come to be represented, ideologically, in the liberal language of possessive individualism (Macpherson 1962), a language alien to vernacular African experience–especially because it appeared to background the social, to relegate it to mere “context.” But, pace the conventions of Western knowledge, the antinomy between Euro-individualism and African communitarianism, past and present, is profoundly misleading. For one thing, as anthropologists never tire of pointing out, personhood, however it may be culturally formulated, is always a social creation–just as it is always fashioned by the exigencies of history. This is as true in Europe and the USA as it is in Africa or Asia; as true of the eighteenth as it is of the twenty-first century. And it remains true under epochal conditions in which the very existence of Society is called into question. Or even, as in Britain of the Thatcher years (Tester 1992; Comaroff and Comaroff 1999), flatly denied.

    Similarly the stress on the social and communitarian foundations of African personhood. Nowhere in Africa were ideas of individuality ever absent (Lienhardt 1985). Individualism, another creature entirely, might not have been at home here before the postcolonial age; not, at least, outside of Protestant elites. But, each in its own way, African societies did, in times past, have a place for dividuality, personal agency, property, privacy, biography, signature, and authored action upon the world. What differed was their particular substance, the manner of their ontological embeddedness in the social, their ideological formulation. All of which ought to underscore, yet again, why crude contrasts between European and African selfhood–or the reduction of either to essentializing, stereotypic adjectives of difference–make little sense; why sociological and semantic similarities may be obscured by dissimilarities in languages of representation.

    In this respect, Michael Welker has offered the term “autoplexy” to signify the mode of personhood we describe for the late colonial Tswana world:xv a mode of personhood, as he glosses it, which involved “playing with” a multiplicity of shifting roles and identities to secure freedom of action and social position. This form of play in a fluid, intricate field of relations, Wel- ker concludes, produced something analogous in Africa to the autonomous individual of the post-Enlightenment Western imagination. Perhaps. The more fundamental point, however, is that the idea of “autoplexy,” and the analysis to which it applies, seeks to pay due regard to the sheer complexity of African ideas of personhood. Also to treat them as parallel to, and commensurate with, their European counterpart; as their coeval rather than their benighted precursor.

    We have situated this account in the late colonial period, not in “traditional” Africa. As we intimated at the outset, no such thing exists, least of all in respect of the signs and practices of personhood. Among Southern Tswana, those signs and practices altered a great deal over the long-run. In part, this was due to the encounter with Protestant missionaries, who evangelized the South African interior from the 1820s onwards, and who bore with them a strong commitment to liberal individualism and rights-bearing selfhood. The Protestants essayed contradictory perceptions of Tswana subjectivity. On one hand, “the natives” were described as “primitive communists,” savages with no individuality or sense of self; yet they were con- stantly accused of brute “selfishness” and “greed,” even of a lack of “natural affection” for others.xvi All of which made it necessary to instill in them a capacity for self-possession and an appreciation of refined individualism. For their part, Southern Tswana found the Euro- peans–whose idea of labor lacked the grammatical range and subtle semantic inflections of tiro–to be perverse in their insistence on private property and individual rights. To translate the discourse of toil into the vernacular, the Christians put itira, “to contrive oneself” (in the mo- rally ambiguous, self-seeking sense of the term) over itirela, “to make oneself” in a positive, socially accountable manner. What is more, they stressed the value of contracts, titles, and deeds, a mode of textualizing relations that, to the Africans, appeared to make humans into “paper persons”; it also disembedded exchange from its social referents and rendered visible what ought to be concealed, thus opening people up to being “eaten” more easily than before. To wit, the reduction of material transactions to these instruments of legality was referred to, by Tswana in the 1880s, as “the English mode of warfare” (Mackenzie 1887,1:80).

    As this suggests, the dialectics of encounter were far from straightforward. For all the differences between European and Tswana sensibilities, Euro-Christian concepts of self and virtuous labor had strong resonances with indigenous notions of “great work” and being-as-be- coming. As a consequence, the transcultural discourse of personhood here bore within it a num- ber of legible, transitive signs; signs that pointed toward an ideological conjuncture for those who drew near to the church, adopted the practices of bourgeois civility, and entered the black elites spawned by colonial political economy. It also set in train a long conversation among Southern Tswana themselves about selfhood and civilization (see e.g. Molema 1920; Plaatje 1996)–a conversation modulated by processes of class formation and social distinction. While some found the liberal individualism of sekgoa (“European ways”) highly appealing and took on its terms, others repudiated it entirely, even while being affected by it. Yet others forged hybridity out of the antinomy.

    They still do.

    The conversation continues today across the northern reaches of the South African countryside, albeit in altered circumstances. Indeed, it is has become more fervent as anxieties over the future of “community” and “culture,” now named as such, grow into a populist post- colonial obsession. Amidst gathering talk of human rights and civil society, of the celebration of autochthony and authenticity, the vision of an African Renaissance arises to counter the ram- pant excesses of European modes of being-in-the world.

  • Naturing the Nation

    Naturing the Nation

    PROLEGOMENON

    The White Heat of Apocalypse,  or “The Week the Cape Burned”

    Helicopters scampering over the blazing vineyards of Constantia became the “mo- tif” of the Cape of Storms this week as the Peninsula burst into flames producing scenes that could have been staged for a mega disaster movie. From the beaches of Muizenberg columns of smoke rising above the mountains…looked like Mount Vesuvius in full rage burying the fleeing victims of Pompeii…Overhead the tiny he- licopters buzz mosquito-like against the sky, heroic in purpose, but only adding to the sense of helplessness as they dash their toyish…waterbombs against the…advance of the lunatic flames.

    Mail & Guardian, Johannesburg, 21-27 January 2000, p.61

    What might “natural” disasters tell us about the ecology of nationhood? Or about the contempora- ry predicament of the postcolonial nation-state? How might the flash of environmental catastrophe illuminate the meaning of borders and the tortured politics of belonging? How might nature remake the nation under neoliberal conditions? How and why, to be more specific, do plants, especially foreign plants, become urgent affairs of state? And what might they disclose of the shifting relations among citizenship, community, and national integrity in an era of global capitalism? Pursuing these questions in South Africa, we run up against two faces of “naturalization” in the politics of the postcolony: one refers to the assimilation of alien persons, signs, and practices into the received order of things; the other, to the deployment of nature as alibi, as a fertile allegory for making people and objects strange, thus to forge critical new social and political distinctions. But we shall make our way back to such matters of theory – about naturalization, about the postcolonial state, about the ecology of nationhood – in due course. First, though, a dedication. This essay is written for Shula Marks, long-time friend and colleague, who has herself reflected astutely on the manner in which botanical knowledge, conservationism, and the aesthetics of nature – not least, in respect of the mountains of the Cape – have been mobilized “in the service of nationhood”.2 Possessed of a sharp appreciation of natural beauty and its social uses, she shares with us a deep emotional attachment to the human and horticultural landscape discussed here.

    We begin our narrative with the fire.

    Apocalypse, African Style

    The turn of the millennium came and went in South Africa without incident; this despite public fears of violence and mass destruction. Then, two weeks later, Cape Town caught fire. On an unusually hot, dry Saturday afternoon the veld caught flared up suddenly in a number of places across the greater metropolitan area. Gale-force south-east winds carried walls of flame up the stately mountain spine of the Cape Peninsular, threatening historic homes and squatter settlements alike. As those in the path of the in- ferno were evacuated, SATV showed disjunctive images of civic collaboration: of the poor helping each other carry paltry possessions from doomed shacks; of the wealthy dropping their valuables in swimming pools and lining up to pass buckets of water.3

    On Monday, as the bush continued to burn, airforce helicopters dumped thousands of tons of water on the flames. Volunteers aided emergency fire-fighters brought from as far afield as Pretoria, more than 1500km to the north. Round-the-clock reports told a distressing tale of cheetahs and ostriches grilled alive in local game parks, of landmark churches facing incineration, of world renowned vineyards razed to cinders. The Mother City sweltered under a blanket of smoke as ash rained down on her bou- levards and beaches. Air pollution increased by 20%, causing the closure of many major roads. At the national naval headquarters, shore leave for sailors was cancelled as flames devoured key administrative buildings.

    In total, some 9,000 hectares burned. The mountains smoldered on sullenly for weeks. So, too, did the temper of the population. One man was charged with viciously assaulting a youth whom he suspected of starting a blaze along a rural road4 and attributions of blame flew in many directions, none of them politically random. Fire is endemic to the region and to the regeneration of its vegetation; those who profit from its bounty have no option but to live with the risk. But this, a conflagration of unprecedented scale, raised fears about the very sustainability of the natural kingdom in the “fairest Cape”. For weeks, the blaze, some termed it “the holocaust”, dominated public discourse. Its livid scars and apocalyptic proportions evoked elemental anxieties, calling forth an almost obsessive desire to construe it as an omen, an indictment, a call to arms. This public divination – the debate in the streets, the media, the halls of government – laid bear the complex social ecology whence the fire itself had sprung, enabling it to cast penetrating light on conditions-of-being in the postcolonial state.

    Apocalypse, of course, soon becomes history, a process Davis aptly terms the “dialectic of ordina- ry disaster”.5 Thus, while early discussion of the fire was wild and contested, refracted along the divers facets of communal interest, it would reduce, over time, to a dominant interpretation. That interpretation was never shared by all. As we shall see, some people, barely audible in the media debate, had a different reading of the issues at stake. But the dominant view did draw a wide consensus; wide enough to authorize strong government action and broad civic collaboration. This, clearly, was an instance of “ide- ology-in-the-making”. As such, its efficacy rested, first, on producing a plausible, parsimonious ex- planation for the extent of the blaze. But it also succeeded in making the flames illuminate an implicit landscape of affect and anxiety, inclusion and intrusion, prosperity and loss. Through a clutch of charged references, it linked the conflagration to other domains of public experience, domains in which natural images frame urgent issues of being-and-identity. Especially being-and-identity in the body of the “new” nation-state.

    In the initial heat of the event, stray cigarette ends and abandoned cooking fires were blamed for the blaze. But this was rapidly overtaken, in “official opinion”, by talk of arson, a theory supported by some circumstantial evidence; some even detected a new front in the campaign of urban terror, widely attributed to Islamic fundamentalism, that had gripped the Cape Peninsula for several years.6 Then the discourse abruptly changed direction, alighting on an etiology that took hold with extraordinary force: whatever sparked it, the calamitous scale of the blaze was a result of invasive alien plants that burn more readily and fiercely than native flora. Fire might be a “natural part” of the Cape ecosystem, government advisors attested, but the presence of invasive aliens had changed that system significantly.7 Outrage against these intruders grew steadily, particularly in the English-speaking press; the Afrikaans media had a somewhat different agenda (see below). Landowners who had allegedly allowed these interlopers to spread unchecked were denounced for putting life and limb, even “our natural heritage” itself, at risk.8

    Note: “Our natural heritage”. Heritage has become a construct to conjure with as global markets erode the distinctive wealth of nations, forcing them to redefine their sense of patrimony. And its material worth: the mayor of Cape Town, for example, is wont to describe Table Mountain as “a national inspiration”, whose asset value is “measured by every visitor it attracts”.9 Not coincidentally, South Afri- ca is currently engaged in a bid to have the Cape Peninsula declared a “World Heritage Site” in recogni- tion of its unparalleled biodiversity. This heritage is embodied, above all, in fynbos (Afrikaans, “fine bush”; from the Dutch fijn bosch),10 the sclerophyllous or small-leaved, evergreen shrubs and heath that dominate the vegetation of the mountains and coastal forelands of the Cape.11 In recent decades, fynbos has become the prime incarnation of the fragile, wealth-producing beauties of the region; and, as it has, local environmentalists have become ever more convinced that it is caught up in a mortal struggle with alien interlopers, which threaten to reduce its riches to “impenetrable monotony”.12

    The blaze brought all this to a head. “Wake Up Cape Town”,13 screamed front page headlines set against the image of a red fire lily poking, phoenix-like, from a deep bed of ashes. Efforts by botanists to cool the hysteria – to insist that “fire in fynbos [is] normal”, not a “train smash in terms of biodiversity”14 – had little effect on the public mood. A cartoonist, allowing a rare moment of irony to flicker amid millennial anxiety, drew a UFO hovering over Cape Town as the city sank into the globally-warmed sea, its mountain tops covered by foreign flora. Peering down, the occupants of the space ship declare: “They seem to have a problem with aliens”.15

    A problem with aliens indeed! Whether or not he knew it, the satirist had touched a deep nerve: the anxiety over foreign flora gestured toward a submerged landscape of civic terror and moral alarm. – Significantly, when the fire was followed some two weeks later by ruinous floods to the north, another headline quipped: “First fires, now floods – next frogs?”16 By then, it was not altogether surprising to read that “huge forests of alien trees” were being held by experts to have “caused all the trouble” in the water-logged Mpumalanga Province.17 In this, one of the poorest regions in the land, “large stands of in- vading aliens”, the vast plantations of powerful logging corporations, were blamed for thwarting the capacity of indigenous plants to act as “natural sponges”.18 At much the same time, a lead story in the na- tional press, apparently unrelated, told how the Aliens Investigation Unit of the South African Police Ser- vices had swooped down on a luxurious club in Johannesburg, ostensibly because it employed a growing army of undocumented, unhealthy sexworkers from abroad.19 Within days, the South Africa public was promised, again in banner newsprint, a “US-style bid to rid SA of illegal aliens”.20

    What exactly was at stake in this mass-mediated chain of consciousness, this litany of alien-nation? Why the propensity to “blame it on the weeds”, as one journalist put it?21 How much does it all tell us about the meaning of moral panics inside South Africa, or about perceived threats to the nation and its patrimony? Observers elsewhere have noted that an impassioned rhetoric of autochthony, to which alien- ness is the negative counterpoint, has edged aside other images of belonging at the end of the twentieth century; also that a fetishizing of origins seems to be growing up the world over in opposition to the libe- ral credo of laissez-faire.22 But why? Why, at this juncture in the history of postcolonial nation-states, and of South Africa in particular, has the question of boundaries and their transgression, of membership and citizenship, become such an incendiary issue? Why, in the face of the burning bush, has nature pre- sented itself as a persuasive alibi for the conception of nationhood and its frontiers? And how, in turn, does the naturalization of nationality relate to the construction of older identities framed in terms of his- tory, culture, race, ethnicity? Could it be that the anxious public discourse here over invasive plant spe- cies speaks to an existential problem presently making itself felt at the very heart of nation-states everywhere: in what does national integrity consist, what might nationhood and belonging mean, what moral and material entitlements might it entail, at a time when global capitalism seems everywhere to be threatening sovereign borders, everywhere to be displacing politics-as-usual?

    These questions are not meant to cast doubt on the danger actually posed by fire or flood; nor on the effort to explain and manage them with reference to the effects of foreign flora. It is precisely because these matters are so real and urgent that they carry the charge that they do. But the extent to which aliens of all kinds became a public preoccupation in South Africa just after the millennium went far beyond the usual bounds of botany, far beyond the concerns of the environmental sciences, beyond even the imperatives of disaster control. It is with this excess that we are concerned here. For, as we have already hinted, the explosion of events, emotions, and arguments “after the fire” has a compelling story to tell about citizenship, identity and nation-building in this and other postcolonies.

    THE POSTCOLONIAL NATION-STATE IN PERSPECTIVE, RETROSPECTIVELY

    First things first, however. The postcolonial nation-state – and here we write specifically from an Africanist perspective – is not, for all the tendency to speak of it in the singular, a definite article. It refers to a labile historical formation, a polythetic class of polities-in-motion. South Africa, famously, is the latest country to join the class. As such, it reveals, with harsh clarity, many of the contemporary ob- sessions of postcoloniality, many of the contradictions which confront the effort to make modernist poli- ties in postmodern, neoliberal times. That effort, those obsessions, reach into diverse realms of collective being-in-the-world: into the struggle to arrive at meaningful terms with which to construct a sense of be- longing – and, hence, of moral and material community – in circumstances that privilege difference; into the endeavor to regulate sovereign borders under global conditions that not only encourage the transna- tional movement of labor and capital, money and goods, but make them a necessary condition of the wealth of nations; into the often bitter controversies that rage as people assert various kinds of identity to make claims of entitlement and interest; into troubled public discourses on the proper reach of twenty- first century constitutions and, especially, their protection of individual rights; into the complicated processes by which government, nongovernmental organizations, citizens acting in the name of civil so- ciety, and other social fractions seek to carve out a division of political and social labor; into the implica- tions of angst about the decay of public order, about crime both organized and random, about corruption and its policing.

    Such issues have not always dominated the discourses of postcolonial nation-states – in the plural, note – or saturated their public spheres. These polities have long entertained mass flows of human, animal, and vegetable migrants across sovereign borders;23 but never before has the presence of aliens occasioned the same sort of alarm as it seems to nowadays.24 As this suggests, many things have changed since the dawn of the postcolonial age, an age still uneasily defined by a prefixation upon what it is not. Even at the most gross of levels, postcolonies have moved through two epochal phases, a passage from the past that casts into relief much about the present.

    Epochal Shifts: from the past to the postcolony

    The first was born, historically and figuratively, in India at midnight on 14 August 1947. It lasted forty years or so. This period is conventionally associated, in master narratives of Empire, with the deco- lonization of the Third World. It is also a period in which the new states of Africa found the promise of autonomy and growth sundered by the realities of neocolonialism, which freighted them with an impossi- ble toll of debt and dependency. Under these conditions, the master narrative goes on, the idyll of Euro- pean-styled democracy, the “black man’s burden” according to Basil Davidson,25 gave way to ever more authoritarian rule, itself buttressed by the coldwar imperatives of the First and Second Worlds. The details need not detain us. What is most important for now is that, in its formative years, postcoloniality was a product of the “old” international political order, of its organization of sovereign nations within the industrial capitalist world system. In that order, people, plants, commodities, and currencies moved ac- ross frontiers under more-or-less tightly enforced, normatively-recognized state regulation. Every so often, alarmists in Europe called for the repatriation of immigrants or for rigorous control over foreign flora and fauna. But cross border movement, mainly along the coordinates of former colonial maps – the British commonwealth, Greater France, the Black Atlantic – was regarded as a routine part of the bureaucratic work of governments everywhere.

    The second epoch in the genealogy of postcolonial states, the epoch with which we are more im- mediately concerned, is very different. Its point of origin, says Bayart,26 it may be dated to 1989, when “most sub-Saharan African countries” began to experience “an unprecedented wave of demands for democracy”. These events were a product of the same world-historical movement that transformed Cen- tral Europe and reverberated across the planet at the time: the political coming of age – its economic roots and its ethos, patently, long predate the 1980s – of neoliberal global capitalism. This world- historical movement, the recitative now goes, metamorphosed the old international order into a more flu- id, market-driven, electronically-articulated universe: a universe in which supranational institutions burgeon; in which space and time are radically recalibrated; in which geography is perforce being rewrit- ten; in which transnational identities, diasporic connections, ecological disasters, and the mobility of hu- man populations challenge both the nature of sovereignty and the sovereignty of nature; in which “the network” returns as the dominant metaphor of social connectedness; in which liberty is distilled to its postmodern essence, the right to choose identities, subjectivities, commodities, sexualities, localities, and other forms of collective representation.

    As this suggests, the second postcolonial epoch has been marked by a great deal more than just a move “back” to democracy. Indeed, while the renaissance of participatory politics has reanimated some of the institutions of governance eclipsed in Africa during the years after “independence”,27 its promise to empower “the public” in affairs of state came at a juncture when institutional power departed most states as never before, dispersing itself everywhere and anywhere and nowhere tangible at all: into transnational corporations and associations, into nongovernmental organizations, into syndicated crime, into shadowy, privatized parastatal cabals.28 Which may, in part, explain why there has been a strong countervailing stress on the reconstruction of civil society since 1989. We have argued in another context29 that, as a call to action, the force of latter – of “civil society”, that is – exists in inverse proportion to its density and content as a concept; that its appeal is largely underwritten by its inchoateness, its vacuity. We have also argued that its return as a dusted-off fetish in the late twentieth century bears strong parallel with its first rise in the late eighteenth. In each case, it has come to the fore under conditions of rapid transformation: conditions in which the present and future of economy and society, of community and family, of selfhood and the social division of labor have been called into question.

    And, to be sure, the very existence of “society” is under scrutiny the world over at present; com- munity and family are said to be widely at risk; the nature of labor is seen to be changing uncontrollably; masculinity is felt to be compromised with the reconstruction of gender roles and relations. What is more, the politics of ideological struggle melt away into the politics of interest as the “me-generation” folds into the “we-generation”. And generation itself, in the guise of youth, becomes a major vector of political action, a problem, an ever more salient principle of social distinction.

    For its part, “the” state, an ever more polymorphous entity, is held, increasingly, to be in perpetual crisis,30 its power ever more dispersed, its legitimacy tested by debt, disease, and poverty, its executive control repeatedly pushed to the limit and, most of all, its hyphen-nation – the articulation, that is, of the state to the nation, of the nation-state – everywhere under challenge.31 In the circumstances, offers Mbembe,32 “the postcolony” tends to be “chaotically pluralistic”, even when it evinces a semblance of “internal coherence”. Which is why, it is often said, postcolonial regimes evince a strong predilection to appeal to magicalities, especially, to anticipate what is to come, under the sign of autochthony. That ruling cadres rely on magical means to do the work of hyphen-nation is not new of course. But resort to mass-mediated ritual excess – to produce state power, to conjure up national unity, and to persuade ci- tizens of the reality of both – does feature prominently in the second postcolonial age; in rough pro- portion, perhaps, to populist perceptions of crisis. Thus, notes Worby, in those parts of Africa where the hold of government is stretched, its authority has become dependent on the performance of quotidian ce- remonial, extravagant in its theatricality; citizen-subjects, he goes on, live with the state in a promiscuous hybrid of accommodation and refusal, power and parody, embodiment and alienation.33

    Belonging, Borders, Autochthony, Antipolitics

    While these symptoms of the second age of postcoloniality are the stuff of anxious public discour- se across Africa, the stereotypically bleak portrait of states falling apart, of nations drifting into an unhy- phenated, Hobbesian state of nature, of nature itself out of control, is overdrawn; the political sociology of postcoloniality is much more complex, more diverse, than it allows. At the same time, both the contra- dictions and the perceptions of crisis experienced by many postcolonies are part of a broader condition. We refer, of course, to the much debated issue of the present and future of the nation-state under the impact of globalization. Elsewhere34 we have offered an extended commentary on this question, seeking to chart the transformation of the modernist polity in the Age of Neoliberal Capitalism. Here, however, it is enough to note just three things about that transformation.

    The first arises out of the refiguration of the modernist subject-citizen. One corollary of the chang- ing face of nationhood in the neoliberal age, especially after 1989, has been an explosion of identity poli- tics. Not just of ethnic politics. Also of the politics of gender, sexuality, age, race, religiosity, economic combination, life-style, and, yes, social class. As a result, imagining the nation rarely presumes a deep horizontal fraternity any more.35 While most human beings still live as citizens in nation-states, they tend only to be conditionally, partially, and situationally citizens of nation-states. Identity struggles, ranging from altercations over resources to genocidal combat, seem immanent almost everywhere as selfhood is immersed – existentially, metonymically – into claims of collective essence, of innate substance and pri- mordial sentiment, that nestle within or transect the polity.

    In short, homogeneity as a “national fantasy”36 is giving way to a recognition of the irreducibility of difference; so much so that even countries long known for their lack of diversity – Botswana, for example – are now sites of identity struggles. And culture, at once essentialized and open to constant re- invention, becomes yet another possession, a good to be patented, made into intellectual property, mer- chandised, consumed.37 All of this puts even greater stress – in both senses of the term – on hyphen- nation. The more diverse nation-states become in their political sociology, the higher the level of abstraction at which “the nation-state” exists, the more compelling appears the threat of its rupture. And the more imperative it becomes to divine and to negate whatever is perceived to endanger it. States, notes Harvey, have always had to conjure up “a definition of public interests over and above…class and sectarian” concerns.38 One solution that has presented itself in the face of ever more assertive claims on society and the state, of claims made in the name of different sorts of identity, has come to lie in autochthony: in elevating to a first-principle the ineffable interests and connections, at once material and moral, that flow from “native” rootedness, and special rights, in a place of birth. Nor is this merely a strategic solution that appeals to those caught up in the business of government; it resonates with deeply felt populist fears – and with the proclivity of citizens of all stripes to deflect shared anxieties onto outsiders.

    Autochthony is implicit in many forms of identity, of course; it also attaches to places within pla- ces, parts within wholes. But, as a claim against aliens, its mobilization appears to be growing in direct proportion to the sundered hyphenation of the sovereign polity, to its popularly perceived porousness and impotence in the face of exogenous forces. Citizens in contemporary nation-states, whether or not they are primarily citizens of nation-states, seem widely able to re-imagine nationhood in such a way as to em- brace the ineluctability of internal difference: “multiculturalism”, the “rainbow nation”, and terms of similar resonance provide a ready argot of accommodation, even amidst bitter contestation. However, when it comes to the limits of that difference, autochthony constitutes an ultimate line. Whatever other identities the citizen-subject of the twenty-first century polity may bear, s/he is unavoidably either an autochthon or an alien. Nor only s/he. It too. As we have seen, and will see further, nonhumans may also be ascribed the status of indigene or other.

    The second follows closely: it concerns the obsession of contemporary polities with the policing of borders – and, hence, with the limits of sovereignty. Much of the debate over the “crisis” of the nation-state hinges upon the contention that governments can no longer control the flow of currencies and commercial instruments, of labor and commodities, of flora and fauna, of information, illegal substances, and unwanted aliens. It is true, of course, that international frontiers have always been more-or-less porous. But technologies of space-time compression do appear to have effected a sea-change in patterns and rates of global flow, human and virtual. Which is why so many states, most maybe, act as if they were constantly subject both to invasion from the outside and to the seeping away of what should properly remain within. South Africa, for instance, laments its brain drain and the pull of the market on its sports stars39 – while anguishing, xenophobically, over the inflow of millions of immigrants, makwerekwere, who, as we shall see, frequently suffer gross violations of their human rights.40

    Similar xenophobia is on the increase in Western Europe. Much of it focuses on “unassimilable” migrant workers; for which read “black”. But not always. Recall the British fear that the Channel Tunnel would open England up to rabies, that the coming of the Euro would herald the end of sterling as its sovereign currency, that the authority of the European courts would destroy its legal dominion;41 or the phobic French reaction against the infiltration of US cultural products; or the Italian effort to protect grappa, a beverage become national intellectual property, from foreign makers. All alike express anxiety, in the face of global flow, about boundaries and their breach. Globalization, after all, has provoked anta- gonistic responses not only among peoples of smaller and/or less powerful nation-states, for whom it rep- resents itself as colonialism in new, largely North American guise; nor only among the marginalized of the world. Jeremy Seabrook recently observed that the “European left scarcely distinguishes itself from a right whose faith in global laissez-faire is matched only by a hysterical defense of evaporated sovereignties and atrophied national powers”.42

    Our object, though, is not just to remark the heightened concern with borders and their transgression. It is also to observe that this concern is itself the product of a paradox. Under contemporary global conditions, given the logic of the neoliberal capitalism, nation-states find themselves in a double bind. In order to partake of that economy, to garner the value that it spins off, governments require at once to op- en up their frontiers and to secure them: on one hand, to deregulate as far as possible the movement of currencies, goods, people, and services, thus to facilitate the inflow of wealth; on the other, to regulate them by establishing enclaved zones of competitive advantage so as to attract transnational manufacture and media, investment, information technology, and the “right” kind of migrants – among them, tourists, highly skilled personnel, NGOs, development consultants, even laborers who will work more cheaply and tractably than locals without claim to the entitlements of belonging. In this way, the nation-state is transformed, in aspiration if not always in reality, into a mega-management enterprise, a business in the business of attracting business; this for the benefit of “stakeholders” who desire simultaneously to be glo- bal citizens and yet corporate subjects with shares in the commonweal of a sovereign polity. The corollary is plain. The border is a double bind because national prosperity appears to demand, but is simultaneously threatened by, both openness and closure. No wonder the angst, the constant public de- bate in so many places, about what ought or ought not to be allowed in, what is or not in the collective interest. And for whom.

    The third salient feature of the predicament of the nation-state is, baldly stated, the depoliticiza- tion of politics. The argument goes like this: neoliberal capitalism, in its triumphal, all encompassing glo- bal phase, offers no alternatives to laissez-faire; nothing else – no other ideology, no other political economic system – seems even plausible. The primary question left to public policy is how to succeed in the “new” world order. Why? Because this new order hides its ideological scaffolding in the dictates of economic efficiency and capital growth, in the fetishism of the free market, in the exigencies of science and technology. Under its hegemony, the social is dissolved into the natural, the biological, the organic.43 “Political choices”, as Xolela Mangcu puts it for South Africa,44 are depoliticized and given the aura of technical truth. Public policies that get implemented are those backed by “growth coalitions” which span government, business, the media and other interest groups… [These] shape national consensus on priorities.

    Politics, then, are reduced either to the pursuit of pure advantage or to struggles over “special” interests and issues: the environment, abortion, health care, child welfare, rape and domestic abuse, human rights, capital punishment, and the like. In the circumstances, there is a strong tendency for urgent questions of the moment, often sparked by ecological catastrophe and justified with reference to the technical imperatives of nature, to become the stuff of collective action, cutting across older, ever more anachronistic lines of ideological and social commitment. Each takes the limelight as it flares into public awareness, becomes a “hot” issue, and then burns down, its embers consigned to the recesses of collective consciousness – only to flame up again if kindled by contingent conditions or vocal coalitions. Or both.

    Our evocation here of the imagery of fire – now situated within in the imperatives of the postcolo- nial nation-state, its location in the global world of neoliberal capitalism, its contemporary political so- ciology, its altered forms of citizenship, its obsessions with boundaries, aliens and autochthony, its dis- placements of the political – return us to the apocalyptic events in Cape Town at the turn of the millennium..

    NATURING THE NATION

    …Ralph Waldo Emerson once commented on the impact of immigration: “A nation, like a tree, does not thrive well till it is engraffed (sic) with a foreign stock”.

    Hopewell Radebe, The Star, 16 March 2000, p.1345

    A Lesson from Fynbos

    It is possible to read the burning bush as an epic instance of nature’s deadly caprice. Such, to be sure, is a construction to which “white Africans”, who are disproportionately represented in current con- servationist circles, are especially prone. But the full impact of the blaze arose, we would argue, from the capacity of those flowers and flames to signify charged political anxieties, many of them unnameable in everyday discourse. Also from the promise that there might arise, out of the ashes, a greater good: a distinctly local, “new” South African, sense of community, nation, civil society. But we are running ahead of ourselves. How exactly did those flowers and flames come to mean so much?

    First, the flora. Flowers have long served as signifiers of modern states, of course. Protea cynaroi- des (Giant/King protea) – the bloom that most typifies fynbos – has been South Africa’s emblem for many years. Sui generis, as an inclusive category, however, fynbos is associated primarily with the autochthonous identity and patrimony of the Western Cape; it is the distinctive mark, the “rich cloak”, of the region.46 Also with Cape Town, whose emergence as a global city it has come to symbolize. To both, it stands in a relationship resembling that of classic African totemism: in a relationship of humans to nature, place to species, in which each enriches the other so long as the former respects, and does not wantonly consume, the latter. Thus, while the export of fynbos plants has developed into a huge industry since the 1960s – market demand has actually stimulated the development of many new “wild” cultivars47 – Cape Flora have simultaneously become the focus of ever greater conservationist concern. Even “passion”.48 This vegetation, the object of ever widening state protection, is commonly described by re- searchers as being under serious threat. It is a threat born, increasingly, by invasive aliens,49 whose significance in environmentalist discourse has overtaken that of human beings.50

    It was not always so. None of it.

    For a start, the use of fynbos to refer to the indigenous plants of the southwestern Cape – the “Fyn- bos Biome” – is quite recent. Described by early naturalists as “Flora Capensis”51 or “Cape Flora”,52 this vegetation was “officially christened” as the “Cape Floral Kingdom” in the early twentieth century,53 and was known as such for decades.54 Fynbos does appear in Acocks’ Veld Types of South Africa in 1953, but only as the Afrikaans translation for “Coastal Macchia”.55 Sometimes used colloquially used at times to refer to the narrow-leaved, evergreen plants of the region, the term did not become established , either in popular or botanical parlance until the lat 1960s and early 1970s.56 Note that this was precisely the time when international demand for Cape Flora began to take off, and a national association was formed to market them. It was also the point at which politicians began to dub fynbos a “natural asset” and a “trea- sure-chest”57 – and at which botanists began to argue that it merited conservation as a “unique biome type”.58

    In sum, for all the fact that fynbos has come to stand for a “traditional” heritage of national, natu- ral rootedness, it emerged as unique, and uniquely threatened, at a particular moment in the history of the South African state; at a moment, too, in the historical development of global capitalism when new rela- tions were being forged between transnational markets and the fashioning of subnational identities, cul- tures, and ecologies that appear endangered by the very forces that produce them.59 Before then, Cape Flora seem to have been resilient.60 As recently as 1953, an authority on the subject actually described fynbos as an invader whose expansion threatened the mixed grassveld of the southwestern Cape.61 What is now said of aliens was being said, not long ago, of this “national treasure”.

    Admittedly, the vegetation of this ecological niche has altered much since then. But so have the values that inform our perceptions of it. Where, once upon a time, farmers saw Cape Flora as useless, as poor grazing on barren soil,62 a “fynbos landscape” – rather than a landscape of grassveld or of trees that bind soil and provide fuel – is widely taken for granted as the “climax community”;63 i.e. an evolutionary end-point to be achieved and conserved. This despite the fact that other views are possible. One has it that a “fynbos landscape” might be less an end-point than “a stage in succession to forest”.64 In this light, the ideal of sustaining such a landscape in perpetual equilibrium might be seen as an instance of the kind of functionalism that, Cronon argues, “remove[s] ecological communities from history”.65

    Encounter with Aliens

    But it is not just as fragile heritage that fynbos has captured the imagination of the public in the postcolony. It is also as a protagonist locked in mortal struggle with alien invaders that threaten to co- lonize its habitat and choke off its means of survival. Foreign “plants currently use…3300m cubic meters of water each year,…7% of South Africa’s mean annual runoff”, declared the Minister of Water Affairs and Forestry at a high level symposium on invasive species, held in Cape Town after the blaze.66 Anxiety about these invaders is not limited to South Africa. The issue has become urgent in other Western nations as well; among them, the USA, Australia, Britain and Germany. Ironically, in Australia, it is South African flora (like yellow soursobs and Capeweed) that are demonized;67 ironic because it was Australian species, vegetation that “grows taller and burns easier than fynbos”, that bore the brunt of blame for the Cape fires of January 2000,68 the “chief nasties” being wattles (including the infamous rooikrans), pines, bluegum, and hakea – this last, to close the ironic circle, a “Protea-type shrub”.69 There are, it is true, some telling contrasts between the other Western cases and the South African preoccupation with alien- nature.70 Still, alien plants do seem to have become the stuff of melodrama, of resonant allegory, on a worldwide scale. This, we shall argue, is because they transform and re-present diffuse political terrors as natural facts.

    Time was when there was great enthusiasm at the Cape for plant imports. Already by the opening decades of the eighteenth century, species such as Mediterranean cluster pine had to be introduced to the mountain slopes in large numbers to cater for the timber demands of the settlers.71 By the mid nineteenth century, interest in horticultural borrowing had turned to Australia – the other antipodean British colony and South Africa’s enduring rival – whose heathlands constitute a Mediterranean biome so similar to the southwestern Cape that some posit an evolutionary convergence between them.72 In the effort to bind soils on the windswept Cape Flats, the most sizeable agricultural plain in the region, the then Colonial Secretary began bringing in Australian wattles and myrtle to provide screens and enable dune formation. By 1875, the government was encouraging large plantations of cluster pine and other imports, including hakea and Port Jackson, to shelter them. So eager were the authorities to see these exotics take root that they distributed millions of seeds and awarded prizes for the greatest acreages planted.73 This is in stark contrast to the present day: now there are moves to tax foreign seed and force landowners to clear their properties of these very same imports.74

    What happened in the intervening hundred years? How did desirable imports become invasive aliens, “pests”, “colonizers”, even “green cancers”?75 For one thing, exotic species spread beyond the confines of plantations and gardens – both spontaneously and through human effort – establishing themselves with great success among Cape Flora. Experts note that, while this process as having gained ground through the twentieth century, it evoked little interest until quite recently among botanists, government, or the population at large; this despite the fact that some disquiet had already been voiced in the late nineteenth century, and legislation to curb some “noxious weeds” was passed, if ineffectually, as early 1937.76 It was only in the late 1950s and 60s that the Botanical Society of South Africa established a committee to promote awareness of the problem and voluntary “hack groups” first took to the veld to cut out the malignant growth.

    During the 1970s and 1980s, plant invasion at the Cape came under increasing scrutiny. Botanists, noting that foreign “infestations” were visible even on satellite pictures,77 concluded that invasive weeds had “outgrown any merits they might have had in the fynbos region”. In 1978, the Department of Nature and Environment Conservation published a popular source-book, Plant Invaders: Beautiful but Dange- rous, and additional groups were founded in upper middle class rural white areas; although the effect of their efforts remained uncertain, as the aliens – like those in Hollywood B-movies – seemed to thrive on chopping and burning.78 At the same time, local expert opinion still had it that exotics, in controlled po- pulations, did have some utility; that, in any case, it was impossible to eliminate them altogether; and that, even if it were possible, “other species might appear as weeds in the future”.79 All of which implied a sense that botanical categories might shift over time, a view reflected in debates on the topic elsewhere – like Australia, where the line between the “naturalized” and the “native” is taken to be much more fluid (see n.70). At this juncture, too, threats to the Cape Flora were described in multidimensional causal terms, terms that embraced fire, climatic change, and human intervention.80

    It was not always to remain so.

    The 1990s witnessed a marked tendency to reduce multidimensional causes to monolithic agents – above all, to alien plants – in accounting for the fragility of Cape Flora. This becomes abundantly clear from the way in which attitudes to fire in the fynbos shifted over the decade, culminating in the “holo- caust” of January 2000.

    Playing with fire

    As we have said, fire has long been recognized as endemic to the Cape floral ecology;81 as even the earliest colonial observers noted, “natural” blazes consume large expanses every year, their rate and intensity varying with the age and state of the vegetation, with topography, and with prevailing weather conditions. Much burning is also intentional: African views of regeneration have long set great store on it, for instance – despite the fact that colonial authorities, unnerved by the prospect of natives playing with fire, applied stringent discouragements.82 Official disapproval continued until quite recently, when systematic research began to paint a more complicated picture of the forms and functions of fynbos com- bustion.83 Thus, while the media almost invariably labels these fires “devastating”,84 expert opinion acknowledges that the conservation of species diversity is “at least partly dependent” on burning.85 But these caveats were muted by the popular debate that raged after the millennial conflagration in Cape Town.

    Most salient to our concerns here is the changing place accorded to aliens in arguments about the connection of fire to fynbos – not to mention in the politics and the perceptions that inform them. True, it has long been said that certain imports burn more intensely than Cape Flora, which is itself quite flamma- ble. But foreign vegetation was, in the past, only one of several factors held to produce fires of distinct kinds, scale, and effects. One authoritative report,86 for example, does not even discuss invasive plants; van Rensberg’s more recent popular guide to fynbos lists exotics only at the very end of a diverse list of possible combustible agents.87 As we have seen, not even the public discourse after the fires of 2000 alighted immediately on aliens. When it did, however, they became a burning preoccupation.

    Not everybody blamed them. But dissenting voices were drowned out as the dialectic of disaster gained momentum. One view attributed the conflagration to global climatic change. It was given remar- kably short shrift;88 this, tellingly, was a calamity that seemed to demand an explanation grounded in lo- cal contingencies. Another line of argument was to be read in the Afrikaans press which, while it reported the same events, dealt with them rather differently. Indicative, here, was the stance of Die Bur- ger, major organ of the New National Party, which held a majority in the Cape provincial parliament. While the paper did say note experts blamed aliens for the blaze, it glossed the whole event as indictment of the ANC regime, of its inefficiency in government, its inability to deliver emergency services, its wanton neglect of the Cape, and so on.89

    Such, of course, were divisions among more or less enfranchised fractions of the population; aside from echoing party political oppositions, they gave voice to the kinds of tension that often arise in post- colonies between regionalism and national governance. But many others were altogether excluded from the public debate. For some of them, alien plants had another significance altogether. We refer to the large numbers of poor and unemployed of the Peninsula – in particular, those living in informal settle- ments.

    Squatter “camps” have loomed ever larger in the Cape metropolitan area since the late apartheid years. During those years, migrants to the city resisted forced removal to impoverished “homelands” and, in so doing, brought the savagery of the ruling regime to the attention of the world. Africans have long felt unwelcome in the Western Cape, which has long been predominantly the preserve of whites and co- loureds. But, since the transition, black in-migration has become a veritable flood. Informal communities have burgeoned along national roads and on mountain sides, many in close proximity to healthy populations of combustible alien trees – like the Australian rooikrans (acacia cyclops), fuel of choice for the braaivleis (“barbecue”), a key rite of white South African commensality.

    What is extraordinary about many recent migrants to the Cape is the degree to which their lives are provisioned by alien timber.90 Unelectrified settlements in the hollowed-out bush comprise row upon row of square houses, most of them built of slim, laterally-laid logs of rooikrans and other Australian wattles. Threading between these abodes walk women and children, heads piled high with kindling of “imported” provenance; the search for fuel is a permanent feature of the lives of squatters, wherever they reside. Along the roadsides men sell small bundles of braai wood to commuters, the vast majority of them white and middle class, as they travel to leafy suburbs or the fynbos coast. Used in domestic food fests, these aliens, condemned in public, are, in private, the stuff of a hallowed cultural practice.91

    Not surprising, then, that the first reaction to the blaze of wood vendor Thami Mandlana – one of only squatter camp residents interviewed by the press at the time – was to exclaim that “the price of logs will soar this month!”92 He was right. The cost of a bundle of rooikrans went up 50% after the fire. But its longer-term implications for these woodcutters was more alarming. Mandlana again:

    [L]ots of people…cut wood around here and now there won’t we enough to go around. Our hearts are sore because of this fire …This is our only livelihood and now we hardly have any left.

    This is the other face of the story of alien vegetation in the Western Cape. That vegetation has long been an integral part of the local economy – the underclass part, which is all but invisible to the more fortunate who touch its roadside edges. But in the postcolony, where wealth is ever more polarized and state provi- sion is largely absent, it is a vital part; a recent survey of “people’s plants” estimates the value of rooi- krans as fuel wood in the Cape at R30m p.a.93 But this touches hardly at all on the interests of those for whom aliens have become anathema, those by whom they are seen to jeopardize the future of a shared natural, national heritage. Where, in fact, imported flora does feed mainstream commerce, those who publicize its dangers have run into difficulty: Guy Preston (see n.7, 18), quoted as having blamed huge forests of non-indigenous trees for exacerbating floods in poverty-stricken Mpumalanga – where giant logging corporations are major employers – was later prompted to “clarify” his remarks. He went to some lengths to acknowledge that the planting of these forests was “usually acceptable”, that it provided much needed jobs and yielded foreign currency.94 The discourse of invasive aliens clearly has its limits. Still, as we shall see further, its ideological scope has become strikingly broad, encompassing the integrity and regeneration of the nation-state itself.

    As Preston’s “clarification” makes plain, scholarly experts find themselves playing a delicate role as the drama of alien-nature has caught fire, fanned by an avid press. With the conservation of “natural heritage” being sucked deeper and deeper into a space of intense public passion, botanists are invoked as never before, their work taken to be a matter of urgent national import. But, as their findings become the stuff of political mobilization, nuances – like the fact that not all imported plants are aggressive invaders – are lost. To wit, polite protest to the media has added little subtlety to the escalating excitement.95

    How has this ideological inflation occurred? To what anxieties, interests, emotions does it respond?

    Aliens and the African Renaissance.

    Until a few years back, the term “alien” had rather archaic connotations in South Africa, enshrined in laws – like the Aliens Act (1937) and Aliens Registration Act (1939) – which aimed to prevent an in- flux of European refugees prior to World War 2. This legislation remained largely intact until the 1990s,96 when “aliens” once again become a charged political issue, now in the “new” South Africa. It was at about the same time that foreign plants took on fresh salience; that they became both the subject of ecological emergency and an object of national renewal.97 Perhaps the most telling evidence of this was the Working for Water Programme (WFW), launched in 1995 by then Minister of Water Affairs and Fo- restry, Kader Asmal. Part of the post-apartheid government’s Reconstruction and Development initiative, the scheme centered squarely on the eradication of alien vegetation. Billed as a flagship public works project to create jobs and combat poverty, the Programme envisaged twenty years of bush clearing, at a cost of R600m p.a. Its tone was urgent: “[Alien plants] are similar to a health epidemic, spreading widely out of control”, declared the WFW home page;98 laws would be promulgated to prosecute landowners who failed to curb non-indigenous flora. Concerted intervention would not merely restore the productive potential of the land. It would also invest in “the most marginalised” sectors of South African society, thus to promote social equity. Unemployed women and youth, ex-offenders, even the homeless would be rehabilitated by joining alien eradication teams, and by working in industries that made invaders into marketable products. Meanwhile, the general public was exhorted not to buy or sell foreign plants – and to inform the authorities of anyone who encouraged their spread.

    Alien-nature, in other words, was to become the raw material of communal rebirth. At first, the scheme met with mixed success. Financing eradication units in any sustained fashion proved difficult, al- though stirring pictures of the formerly unemployed hacking away at unwanted foreign growth appeared in the media. In July 1997, the Cape Argus reported that Minister Asmal had been “given the brush-off” by the Cape Metropolitan Council, which refused to fund the clearing of invasive plants on Table Mountain.99 Efforts to pass legislation were equally controversial: proposals to introduce levies on “water interception” (a.k.a. rainfall) and “alien seed pollution” drew strong protest from the forestry industry.100 But, while the eradication plan was made to “tread water” for a year or two, public anxiety about invasive species became ever more audible.

    Thus, by the time the apocalyptic fires broke out in January 2000, there was no half-heartedness about attacking the alien. Ukuvuka, Operation Firestop, was launched within days of the blaze, and media and corporate sponsors stepped in to bolster the Working for Water Programme.101 Even the powerful Forestry Owners Association, formerly on “collision course” with the Programme, came to an uneasy compromise about clearing foreign flora from river banks.102 With popular feeling ever more sharply fo- cused on attacking the “scourge”, public commentators seemed intent on coaxing “a spirit of communi- ty”103 from the ashes. A newly elected Minister of Water Affairs and Forestry put it succinctly:104

    The fire has united us all. All key stakeholders – the authorities, the commercial interests, the landowners and the general public – now can come together to ensure that we are never again placed at such risk. And the key to it all is the clearing of these alien plants…

    There now appeared to be widespread faith in the fact that a purge of foreign flora had “huge potential for job creation”, itself a nation-making priority here. The Director of the Botanical Society of South Africa took the occasion to suggest that the “environmental sector” deserved 15% of the proceeds of that neoliberal substitute for the commonweal, the National Lottery.105 A national Water Week and Hack Day would soon follow, with special newspaper supplements illustrating the most offensive aliens, calling on the public at large to report those who harbored them, and appealing, in the name of patriotism, for recruits to voluntary hack groups.106

    As time went by, politicians made ever more overt connections between the war against aliens and the collective prosperity of the nation. A symposium to discuss international cooperation in the control of invasive species, held in Cape Town a month after the blaze (see above), drew no less than four govern- ment ministers, one bearing a message from the state president. “We are all in this together”, pleaded the Minister for Water Affairs, “for alien species do not respect lines drawn on maps”. 107Global trade and tourism, it was noted, had created a class of “unwanted international travelers” like foreign flora and dis- ease-bearing insects.108 But the most portentous words of all were those of President Mbeki himself: Alien plants, he avowed, “stand in the way of the African renaissance”.109

    FOREIGN OBJECTS: THE POLITICS OF ESTRANGEMENT IN THE POSTCOLONY

    And so, in rhetoric that both mirrored and magnified the public mood, invading plants become em- broiled in the state of the nation. But this does not yet answer the questions we posed a moment ago: To what anxieties, interests, historical conditions does the allegory of alien-nature, the allegory fed by fire and flood, finally speak? What underlies the ideological inflation which began with the burning bush, went on to inflame patriotic passions, and has flared so fiercely as to endanger the African renaissance? An answer is to be found in a cluster of implicit associations and organic intuitions that, as they surfaced into the public sphere, gave insight into the infrastructure of popular consciousness-under-construction; in particular, into the way in which processes of naturalization made it possible to speak the unspeakable, to assail the unassailable, thus to deal with the contradictions inherent in the making of postcolonial na- tionhood under post-1989 conditions. Also to deal with the sense of apprehension that seems accompany it in this age of global flow, of borders at once open and closed, of people unavoidably on the move, of irreducible social and cultural difference, of compromised politics, of a shrinking commonweal.

    Take this comment by a well-known newspaper columnist, satirist, and self-confessed cynic:110

    Doubtless there are gardening writers who would not think twice about sounding off in blissful praise of something as innocent…as the jacaranda tree…But…you may be nothing more than…a racist. Subliminally that is…Behind its blossoms and its splendid boughs, the jacaranda is nothing but a water-hogging…weed-spreading alien.

    As naturalized immigrants, plant imports used, in the past, to grace the nation. The jacaranda (Jacaranda mimosifolia) as “almost…South Africa’s national tree”.111 Now, in a bizarre drama in which flora signify what politics struggles to name, they are objects of estrangement, even racination; this in a land obsessed with who is or not a citizen, with constitutional rights and wrongs, with routing out all vestiges of racism from within the body politics, not least in the liberal press.112 A second columnist made this yet more ex- plicit in speaking of the “ethnic cleansing” of the South African countryside. For centuries, she wrote, people enjoyed the shade of oaks, the smell of roses – aliens all. Now, “floundering in the complacency of democracy”, they blame all evil on those very aliens.113 But it was a wry letter to the Mail & Guardian, perhaps South Africa’s most distinguished weekly, that made the political subtext most brutally plain.114

    It is alien-bashing time again. As an alien…I am particularly prickly about criticisms of aliens even if they are plants …Alien plants cannot of course respond to these accusations. But before the Department of Home Affairs is dragooned into investigating the residence permits of these plants I, as a concerned fellow alien, wish to remind one and all that plants such as maize…soybean, sunflower…originated outside of the continent of Africa. In any case, did the fire-and-flood-causing alien plants cross the borders and establish plantations …by themselves?

    For this interpolated alien, himself under no illusions, the allusions are obvious. They flow from the natu- ralization of xenophobia. Barely displaced in the kingdom of plants is a distressingly familiar crusade: the demonization of migrants and refugees by the state and its citizenry alike.

    It has been noted that the migrant, and more recently the asylum seeker, is the “specter” on whose wretched fate the triumphal neoliberal politics of the “new” Europe has been founded (see n.42). In South Africa too, a phobia about foreigners, above all from elsewhere in Africa, has been the illicit offspring of the fledgling democracy – waxing, paradoxically perhaps, alongside appeals to the African Renaissance and to ubuntu, a common African humanity. That this is occurring among a people themselves familiar with exile, who in the past lived reasonably peaceably with in-migrating labor, seems all the more ironic – and all the more in need of explanation. Of late, the phobia, which started out as a diffuse sense of misgiving, has congealed into an active antipathy to what is perceived as a shadowy alien-nation of “illegal immigrants”; the qualifier has become all but inseparable from the sign, just as, in the plant world, invasive has become locked, adjectivally, to alien. Popularly held to be “economic vultures”115who usurp jobs and resources, who foster crime, prostitution and disease, these doppelganger anticitizens are accused – in uncanny analogy with non-indigenous flora – of spreading wildly out of control. And of siphoning off the rapidly diminishing wealth of the nation.116

    Aliens are a distinctive species in the popular imagination. In a parodic perversion of the past, they are marked ineluctably by skin color and “native” culture. This is most dramatically revealed, as such things often are, at moments of mistaken identity – when South Africans are themselves thought to be outsiders and treated accordingly. Like the national volleyball star, apprehended by police because she looked too dark, or the son of a former exile, arrested eight times over the past few years because his “fa- cial structure” and accent marked him as foreign.117 Once singled out, “illegals” are seldom differentiated from bona fide immigrants or refugees.118 All are referred to as makwerekwere, a disparaging Sotho term for incompetent speech – and, by implication, for exclusion from the moral community.

    Their fears are well-founded. With the relaxation of controls over immigrant labor, previously se- cured by intergovernmental agreements and electrified borders,119 South Africa has become the destination of choice for unprecedented numbers of people from troubled countries to the north; estimates vary from two to eight million.120 This influx has occurred amidst transformations in the domestic econo- my that have significantly altered relations of labor to capital.121 Not only has drastic downsizing, euphemized as “jobless growth”, cost some 500,000 jobs in the past five years, most of them held by blacks;122 even more noteworthy, over 80% of employers now opt for flexible, “non-standard” labor,123 much of it done by lowly paid, non-unionized “illegals”, whom farmers and industrialists see as essential to their survival in competitive markets.124 Small wonder, then, that unemployment is a ubiquitous an- xiety; that it is seen as a major impediment to postcolonial prosperity; that routing the alien,125 who has come to embody the threat to work and welfare, presents itself as a persuasive mode of confronting economic dispossession.

    Thus it is that foreigners – in particular, black foreigners – are the object of consternation and con- testation across the new nation, from politicians and their parties, through the media and trade-unions, to street hawkers and the unemployed.126 In September 1998, a crowd returning by train from Pretoria, where they had been protesting the loss of work, threw three makwerekwere to their deaths for purpor- tedly stealing jobs.127 A few months later came reports of a gang of hoodlums in Johannesburg dedicated to the “systematic elimination” of aliens.128 Immigrants and their property have regularly been attacked by local communities, forced into “ghettos”, criminalized and scapegoated.129 A survey conducted in 1997 by the South African Migration Project, under the aegis of the Institute for Democracy, ranked the hostility of South Africans toward newcomers as one of the highest in the world. So acute is it that the Human Rights Commission has launched a “Roll-back Xenophobia Campaign” and various agencies of government are actively supporting cultural projects aimed at combating discrimination against out- siders.130

    Yet the state is itself an ambiguous actor in this drama. On one hand, it strives volubly to uphold the standards of liberal universalism, insisting on the uncompromising protection of human rights; on the other, it sometimes contributes, wittingly or not, to the mood of xenophobia. Thus its law enforcement agencies have been unable to resist the temptation of attacking the foreign specter. As its ability to main- tain public order has increasingly been questioned, the Ministry of Safety and Security has grown propor- tionately more active in its war on non-citizens: while anxiety about invasive plants was escalating in the opening weeks of 2000, government announced its “US-style bid to rid SA of illegal aliens” (see above, n.20) and to penalize those who knowingly employed them. The parallel could not have been more clear. Not long after, police around the country carried out high profile raids on “gentlemen’s clubs” suspected of trafficking in undocumented sexworkers.131 Onslaughts on “illegals” in show business, the media, and the music industry followed.132 Then, within weeks, the Minister of Safety and Security personally initia- ted a “blitz” in Johannesburg on strongholds of immigrant business, vowing to “thoroughly ventilate all criminal elements and illegal immigrants out”.133 Senior police in Pretoria followed suit. Panic ensued as some 14,000 people were searched, over 1,000 arrested134 and, despite their protests, “honest, taxpaying citizens” were humiliated in the streets and in taxis.135 Reports reminiscent of the apartheid era told of violence on the sidewalks where refugees, desperate for documentation, camped outside the Home Af- fairs Department. Foreign nationals, held at a privately-owned deportation center, were said to have been harshly beaten, their property looted.136

    Then began the reaction: amidst accusations of excess, respected commentators maintained that the clamp down had seriously backfired, putting human rights at risk. They and others voiced urgent calls for a more adequate, enforceable immigration policy.137 Meanwhile, suspicion started to surface, just as it did in the case of invasive plants, that the zeal for weeding out aliens was misplaced. Why this harassment of strangers? asked one “appalled citizen”. It was not as if they were guilty of the “rape, murder, hijacking and bank robberies” that South Africans were perpetrating on each other.138 The answer seems plain, at least to Steven Friedman, Director of the Centre for Policy Studies in Johannesburg.139 Arresting “illegal” immigrants may do “nothing to reduce crime”. But it does create “the impression of activity and effectiveness” on the part of government, an illusion “often as important as reality”. Here, in short, is an instance of precisely the kind of symbolic activity of which we spoke ear- lier; of the mass-mediated ritual excess, directed to producing state power and national unity, that features so prominently in the second postcolonial age. It appears to work. According to a Human Sciences Research Council poll, notes Friedman, most citizens believed, in December 1998, that the regime had lost its capacity to contain crime and to assure public order. Now some 60% think that it actually does have some control – despite no change in the incidence of serious felonies.

    ENDS AND MEANINGS

    Geschiere and Nyamnjoh140 argue that the growing stress in Africa on autochthony – and, conco- mitantly, on the exclusion of the allogène, the stranger – departs in important respects from older ontolo- gies of being, belonging, and difference; most notably from ethnicity, with which it shares many features, among them a capacity to arouse strong affect and to justify the construction of unambiguous social boundaries. Autochthony, they suggest, is less specific, more protean in its substance, and thus more readily open to political manipulation on many levels at once; not least in reaction to the kinds of social and economic processes set in motion by “seemingly open-ended global flows”. Yet more may be said about its salience as a naturalizing allegory of collective being-in-the-world; also about its salience as a motor of collective action. But it is undeniable that, in post-apartheid South Africa, outrage against aliens has provided a versatile call to arms, uniting people long divided by class, color, and culture: it is enthusiastically mobilized by those who seek to conjure a new nation not merely by bridging familiar antinomies but by erecting finite frontiers under conditions that, by all appearances, threaten to dissolve them altogether. And, with them, the coordinates of material and moral community. We have spelled out those conditions. They lie in the particular historical circumstances of postcolonial nation-states at the close of the twentieth century, of their absorption into a global capitalist economy whose neoliberal ways and means have altered Fordist patterns of production and consumption, the articulation of labor to capital, the nature of sovereignty and civic identity, geographies of space and time, and much else be- sides. Hence the insistence earlier on situating our understanding of those nation-states not in a comfortable sociology of ideal-types, but in the hard-edged specificities of their second, post-1989 coming.

    Here, then, lies one theme in the theoretical counterpoint that animates this essay: the conceptuali- zation of postcolonial polities. It is beyond our present scope to “theorize” those polities – whatever that might mean at this moment in the history of Western social thought. However, because of the manner of their insertion into world history, we have argued, they evince three notable features. Each is an intensifi- cation of the predicament of the contemporary nation-state sui generis, each a corollary of the changing face of capitalism, all of them interconnected. The first is the transfiguration of the modernist political subject: a move away from a sense of belonging in a homogeneously imagined community of right-bear- ing individuals towards one in which difference is endemic and irreducible, in which the polity subsumes persons with a range of diversely constituted identities and entitlements; from a stress on citizenship based on “deep horizontal fraternity” to which all other connections are secondary toward one in which each national is a “stakeholder” vertically rooted, like homegrown plants in soil, in a body corporate; from a notion that attachment may be acquired equally by ascription, residence, immigration, and naturalization toward the primacy of autochthony, making it the most “authentic”, the most essential of all modes of connection. The second is the contradictory logic of sovereign borders: the simultaneous necessity that they be open to various forms of flow – of finance, workers, commodities, consumers, infra- structure – and yet enclaved enough both to offer competitive advantage for global enterprise and to serve the material interests of a national citizenry; in other words, to husband the kinds of difference, the kinds of distinction between the local and the nonlocal, from which transnational capital may profit and rich nations protect their spheres of influence. The third is the depoliticization of politics, their displacement from the realm of the social and the cultural, the moral and ideological, into the technical, apparently value-free dictates of the market – and its attendant forms of economic and legal “rationality”. Also into the imperatives of nature, however those come to be constructed, disseminated, taken-for- granted.

    Put these things together, and the moral panic about strangers becomes overdetermined. Take human aliens. Their very existence embodies the contradiction of borders and boundaries in the age of global capital. On one hand, by crossing those borders they import value into the heart of the polity, be it as cheap, manageable labor for agribusiness or industry, as traders who undersell indigenous merchants to the advantage of local consumers, as people with skills in short supply, or whatever. On the other, they are held to take away jobs and benefits from nationals, to undercut the struggles of local workers, to bring contagion, and, by trafficking in drugs, bodies and contraband, to commit the kinds of crime that unravel the social fabric itself. Moreover, their presence raises difficult questions about the changing nature of political citizenship in the postcolony: given that South Africa, like other nation-states, fe- tishizes human rights – rights, that is, which transcend parochial identities and borders of all kinds – should outsiders not enjoy them like any autochthon? What precisely ought to separate the entitlements of the citizen from those of any other human being? On what basis is discrimination against foreigners justified in a society dedicated to “nonracism”, in a nascent national culture that speaks the language of ubuntu, a common Africanity? Taking into account the apotheosis of the free market, why should strangers be the target of local protectionism? This, in sum, is where the liberal ideology of universal inclusion runs up against a politics of exclusion whereby identity is mobilized to create “closed” spheres of interest within “open” neoliberal economies. Note here, too, the depoliticization of politics in the treatment of the alien-as-specter, of their displacement into a technicist discourse about demography and economic sociology, about health and disease, about social pathology and criminality.

    Much the same may be said of alien vegetation. We have seen how that vegetation may, simulta- neously, be one person’s livelihood and another’s apocalypse. The passage across frontiers, among plants as among people, illuminates all the contradictions of openness and closure, of regulation and deregula- tion, of otherness and indigenization: Is the jacaranda, “almost the national tree”, a naturalized South Af- rican? Or a hateful interloper? The fact that it has become the subject of ironic comment about subliminal racism and ethnic cleansing – something almost unthinkable a short while ago – makes clear how much the concern with borders, belonging, autochthony, and alien-nation has imploded in very recent times. It is, of course, but a short step to posing the same questions about humans. Who, exactly, is a South Afri- can? As this suggests, the transference into the floral kingdom of profoundly political questions is a dra- matic instance of the process of depoliticization of which we have spoken. While there is no doubt that real issues of ecology are raised by the effect of imported vegetation on fire and flood – as we have said, their gravity is not to be underestimated – the effort to construct a nation with reference to a rhetoric of exclusion, a rhetoric validated by appeal to the apparent value-free exigencies of botany and the environ- mental sciences, is a cogent instance of naturalization. To which, now, we return.

    Before that, however, a parenthetic remark. Self-evidently, South Africa is not alone in its obses- sion with aliens and alien-nature. Earlier we noted that many countries, some of them postcolonies some not, are caught up in similar moral panics. These nation-states share a common feature: all are former la bor importers and centers of capital – and, as such, nexes of wealth within a vastly unequal world economy – into which job-seekers and fortune hunters are popularly imagined to be pouring, usually across ill- regulated borders, in order to take scarce work and resources away from locals. This standardized night- mare evokes exactly the same anxieties as those to which we have alluded in South Africa. It has his- torical precedents, as we all know. Similar panics about immigration and belonging, about inclusion and exclusion, have characteristically occurred at the close of imperial epochs, when people from former “overseas possessions” have sought entry to the “mother country” only to find themselves barred, as colonial subjects, from citizenship – and from the sovereign benefits that accrued to it.

    But this leaves one remaining topic not yet resolved: Why nature? Here lies the other strand of our theoretical argument. It concerns naturalization. Central to our analysis are the claims (a) that the apoca- lyptic fire in Cape, under-determined by the proximate events themselves, became the lightning rod for a panic about non-indigenous vegetation, a panic (b) which crystallized inchoate fears about alien-nature, named them, and called them into the heart of public consciousness; (c) that this is owed, overdetermin- edly, to the fact that the anxiety concerning foreign flora, while real enough in and of itself, was, at the same time, also a metonymic projection of more deep-seated questions facing the postcolonial state about the nature of its sovereign borders, about the right to citizenship within it, about the meaning and the pas- sion inherent in national belonging – and, in particular, about the tendency to invoke autochthony in ans- wering those questions, both pragmatically and figuratively.

    This is where naturalization enters the picture. Recall that classically, as we noted, it has had two contrary connotations. One is the assimilation of alien persons, signs, and practices into a world-in-place; its prototype is the metamorphosis of outlanders into citizens of the liberal nation-state. The other, whose genealogy stretches from Marx through Gramsci to Foucault, is the deployment of nature as alibi, as a fertile allegory for rendering some people and objects strange, thereby to authenticate the limits of the (“natural”) order of things; also to interpolate within it new social and political distinctions. It is tempting, in the South African case, to invoke yet another connotation – one owed to Durkheim – according to which processes in nature are taken to be a direct reflection of processes in society. Some local commentators did just this, as we have seen, finding in the panic about invasive plants a mirror for the angst about immigrants. But such a reading of the events in question is insufficient. Nature is every- where more directly, more dynamically implicated in the social practices by which history and ideology make each other. The unfolding controversy about indigenous plants and alien-nature became the vehicle for a public debate, as yet unfinished, over the proper constitution of the polity, over the limits of belonging, over the terms in which the nation, the commonweal, and the stakeholding subject are to be constituted in the age of global capitalism and universal human rights. In so doing, it permitted a vocalization of anxieties and conundrums not easily addressed by politics-as-usual. Even more, the dis- placement of the argument about outsiders into the floral kingdom made it possible, by analogy, to contemplate and legitimate discrimination against those humans not embraced in the body of the nation, those cast adrift on the currents of the new world order. And sanctioned, albeit unwittingly, a new, post- racist form of racism; a form of racism that, by concealing itself in the language of autochthony and alien-nature, has come to co-exist seamlessly with a transnational culture of universal rights.

    As this implies, discourses of nature cast a sharp light on the everyday actions and events through which definitions of belonging and citizenship – and their dark underside, the politics of exclusion – are being reframed in the postcolony. In particular, they illuminate the question of why it is that autochthony – a form of attachment that ties people to place, that natures the nation, that authorizes entitlement – has become so central in an epoch when nationhood seems at once critical and yet in crisis, when borders everywhere present themselves as paradoxes, when a beleaguered political imagination strives to make sense of social being in a world of laissez faire.

  • Millennial Capitalism

    Millennial Capitalism

    We live in difficult times, in times of monstrous chimeras and evil dreams and criminal follies.

    Joseph Conrad, Under Western Eyes

    Slouching Toward Bethlehem

    The global triumph of capitalism at the millennium, its Second Coming, raises a number of conundrums for our understanding of history at the end of the century. Some of its corollaries—“plagues of the ‘new world order,’” Jacques Derrida (1994: 91) calls them, unable to resist apocalyptic imagery—have been the subject of clamorous debate. Others receive less mention. Thus, for example, populist polemics have dwelt on the planetary conjuncture, for good or ill, of “homogenization and difference” (e.g., Barber 1992); on the simultaneous, syn- ergistic spiraling of wealth and poverty; on the rise of a “new feudalism,” a phoenix disfigured, of worldwide proportions (cf. Connelly and Kennedy 1994).1 For its part, scholarly debate has focused on the confounding effects of rampant liberalization: on whether it engenders truly global flows of capital or concen- trates circulation to a few major sites (Hirst and Thompson 1996); on whether it undermines, sustains, or reinvents the sovereignty of nation-states (Sassen 1996); on whether it frees up, curbs, or compartmentalizes the movement of labor (Geschiere and Nyamnjoh, in this issue); on whether the current fixation with democracy, its resurrection in so many places, bespeaks a measure of mass empowerment or an “emptying out of [its] meaning,” its reduction “to paper” (Negri 1999: 9; Comaroff and Comaroff 1997).2 Equally in question is why the present infatuation with civil society has been accompanied by alarming increases in civic strife, by an escalation of civil war, and by reports of the dra- matic growth in many countries of domestic violence, rape, child abuse, prison populations, and most dramatically of all, criminal “phantom-states” (Derrida 1994: 83; Blaney and Pashsa 1993). And why, in a like vein, the politics of con- sumerism, human rights, and entitlement have been shown to coincide with puz- zling new patterns of exclusion, patterns that inflect older lines of gender, sexual- ity, race, and class in ways both strange and familiar (Gal 1997; Yudice 1995). Ironies, here, all the way down; ironies, with apologies to Jean-Paul Sartre, in the very soul of the Millennial Age.

    Other features of our present predicament are less remarked, debated, ques- tioned. Among them are the odd coupling, the binary complementarity, of the legalistic with the libertarian; constitutionality with deregulation; hyperrational- ization with the exuberant spread of innovative occult practices and money magic, pyramid schemes and prosperity gospels; the enchantments, that is, of a decidedly neoliberal economy whose ever more inscrutable speculations seem to call up fresh specters in their wake. Note that, unlike others who have discussed the “new spectral reality” of that economy (Negri 1999: 9; Sprinker 1999), we do not talk here in metaphorical terms. We seek, instead, to draw attention to, to interrogate, the distinctly pragmatic qualities of the messianic, millennial capitalism of the moment: a capitalism that presents itself as a gospel of salvation; a capitalism that, if rightly harnessed, is invested with the capacity wholly to transform the universe of the marginalized and disempowered (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999b).

    Such interrogatory observations point to another, even more fundamental question. Could it be that these characteristics of millennial capitalism—by which we mean both capitalism at the millennium and capitalism in its messianic, salvific, even magical manifestations—are connected, by cause or correlation or copresence, with other, more mundane features of the contemporary historical moment? Like the increasing relevance of consumption, alike to citizens of the world and to its scholarly cadres, in shaping selfhood, society, identity, even epi- stemic reality? Like the concomitant eclipse of such modernist categories as social class? Like the “crises,” widely observed across the globe, of reproduction and community, youth and masculinity? Like the burgeoning importance of gen- eration, race, and gender as principles of difference, identity, and mobilization? The point of this essay lies in exploring the possibility of their interconnection; even more, in laying the ground of an argument for it.

    As this suggests, our intent in this special issue of Public Culture is to animate further debate on the enigmatic nature of millennial capitalism, and also on its implications for theorizing history and society at the start of the twenty-first cen- tury. However we wish to characterize our current moment—as an age of death (of ideology, politics, the subject) or rebirth (of the spirit of Marx, Weber, and the Adams Ferguson and Smith)—ours are perplexing times: “Times of monstrous chimeras” in which the conjuncture of the strange and the familiar, of stasis and metamorphosis, plays tricks on our perceptions, our positions, our praxis. These conjunctures appear at once to endorse and to erode our understanding of the lin- eaments of modernity and its postponements. Here, plainly, we can do no more than offer preliminary observations and opening lines of argument on a topic whose full extent can only be glimpsed at present.

    Let us, then, cut to the heart of the matter: to the ontological conditions-of- being under millennial capitalism. This begins for us—as it did for the “fathers” of modernist social theory—with epochal shifts in the constitutive relationship of production to consumption, and hence of labor to capital. This requires, in turn, that we consider the meaning of social class under prevailing political and economic conditions, conditions that place growing stress on generation, gender, and race as indices of identity, affect, and political action. In light of these reflec- tions we go on to explore three corollaries, three critical faces of the millennial moment: the shifting provenance of the nation-state and its fetishes, the rise of new forms of enchantment, and the explosion of neoliberal discourses of civil society.

    First, however, back to basics.

    The political history of capital [is] a sequence of attempts by capital to withdraw from the class relationship; at a higher level we can now see it as the history of the succes- sive attempts of the capitalist class to emancipate itself from the working class. Mario Tronti, “The Strategy of Refusal” (Tronti’s emphasis)

    Specters, Speculation: Of Cons and Pros Consumption, recall, was the hallmark disease of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, of the First Coming of Indus- trial Capitalism, of a time when the ecological conditions of production, its con- suming passions (Sontag 1978; cf. Jean Comaroff 1997a), ate up the bodies of producers.3 Now, at the end of the twentieth century, semiotically transposed, it is often said to be the “hallmark of modernity” (van Binsbergen and Geschiere n.d.: 3), the measure of its wealth, health, and vitality. An overgeneralization, maybe, yet the claim captures popular imaginings and their representation across the earth. It also resonates with the growing Eurocultural truism that the (post)mod- ern person is a subject made with objects. Nor is this surprising. Consumption, in its ideological guise—as “consumerism”—refers to a material sensibility actively cultivated, for the common good, by Western states and commercial interests, particularly since World War II. It has even been cultivated by some noncapital- ist regimes: In the early 1990s, Deng Xiaoping advocated “consumption as a motor force of production” (Dirlik 1996: 194).

    In social theory, as well, consumption has become a prime mover (van Bins- bergen and Geschiere n.d.: 3). Increasingly, it is the factor, the principle, held to determine definitions of value, the construction of identities, and even the shape of the global ecumene.4 As such, tellingly, it is the invisible hand, or the Gucci- gloved fist, that animates the political impulses, the material imperatives, and the social forms of the Second Coming of Capitalism—of capitalism in its neolib- eral, global manifestation. Note the image: the invisible hand. It evokes the ghost of crises past, when liberal political economy first discerned the movements of the market beneath swirling economic waters, of “free” enterprise behind the commonweal. Gone is the deus ex machina, a figure altogether too concrete, too industrial for the “virtualism” (Carrier and Miller 1998) of the post-Fordist era.

    As consumption has become the moving spirit of the late twentieth century, so there has been a concomitant eclipse of production; an eclipse, at least, of its per- ceived salience for the wealth of nations. This has heralded a shift, across the world, in ordinary understandings of the nature of capitalism. The workplace and labor, especially work-and-place securely rooted in a stable local context, are no longer prime sites for the creation of value or identity (Sennett 1998). The factory and the shop, far from secure centers of fabrication and family income, are increasingly experienced by virtue of their erasure: either by their removal to an elsewhere—where labor is cheaper, less assertive, less taxed, more feminized, less protected by states and unions—or by their replacement at the hands of nonhu- man or “nonstandard” means of manufacture. Which, in turn, has left behind, for ever more people, a legacy of irregular piecework, of menial “workfare,” of rela- tively insecure, transient, gainless occupation. Hence the paradox, in many West- ern economies, of high official employment rates amidst stark deindustrialization and joblessness.5 In the upshot, production appears to have been superseded, as the fons et origo of wealth, by less tangible ways of generating value: by control over such things as the provision of services, the means of communication, and above all, the flow of finance capital. In short, by the market and by speculation.

    Symptomatic in this respect are the changing historical fortunes of gambling. The latter, of course, makes manifest a mechanism integral to market enterprise: it puts the adventure into venture capital. Financial risk has always been crucial to the growth of capitalism; it has, from the first, been held to warrant its own due return. But, removed from the dignifying nexus of the market, it was until recently treated by Protestant ethics and populist morality alike as a “pariah” practice. Casinos were set apart from the workaday world. They were situated at resorts, on reservations and riverboats: liminal places of leisure and/or the haunts of those (aristocrats, profligates, “chancers”) above and beyond honest toil. Liv- ing off the proceeds of this form of speculation was, normatively speaking, the epitome of immoral accumulation: the wager stood to the wage, the bet to per- sonal betterment, as sin to virtue. There have, self-evidently, always been differ- ent cultures and mores of betting. However, the activity—whether it be a “flut- ter” on the horses or a domestic card game, on a sporting contest or an office pool—has generally been placed outside the domain of work and earning, at best in the ambiguous, nether space between virtue and its transgression. Over a generation, gambling, in its marked form, has changed moral valence and invaded everyday life across the world.6 It has been routinized in a widespread infatuation with, and popular participation in, high-risk dealings in stocks, bonds, and funds whose fortunes are governed largely by chance. It also expresses itself in a fascination with “futures” and their downmarket counterpart, the lottery. Here the mundane meets the millennial: “Not A LOT TO TOMAR, OW!” proclaims an ironic inner-city mural in Chicago (see Millennial Transitions, in this issue), large hands grasping a seductive pile of casino chips, beside which nestles a newborn, motherless babe.7 This at a moment when “gambling [is] the fastest growing industry in the US,” when it is “tightly woven into the national fabric,” when it is increasingly “operated and promoted” by government.8

    Life itself has become the object of bookmaking; it is no longer the sole pre- serve of the “respectable” insurance industry, of its abstract argot of longevity statistics and probability quotients. A recent article in Newsweek sports the head- line “Capital Gains: The Lottery on Lives”:

    In America’s fin de siècle casino culture, no wager seems outré. So how about betting on how long a stranger is likely to live? You can buy part or all of his or her insurance policy, becoming a beneficiary. Your gamble: that death will come soon enough to yield a high return on the money you put up. The Viatical Association of America says that $1 billion worth of coverage went into play last year.9

    A much better bet, this, than the sale of the Savior for thirty pieces of silver. Inflation notwithstanding.

    In the era of millennial capitalism, securing instant returns is often a matter of life and death. The failure to win the weekly draw was linked with more than one suicide in Britain in the wake of the introduction of national lottery in 1994; in 1999, the India Tribune reported that one of the biggest central Indian States, Madya Pradesh, was “caught in the vortex of lottery mania,” which had claimed several lives.10 Witnesses described “extreme enthusiasm among the jobless youth towards trying their luck to make a fast buck,” precisely the kind of fatal ecstasy classically associated with cargo cults and chiliastic movements (Cohn 1957). More mundanely, efforts to enlist divine help in tipping the odds, from the Taiwanese countryside to the Kalahari fringe, have become a regular feature of what Weller (in this issue) terms “fee-for-service” religions (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999b). These are locally nuanced fantasies of abundance without effort, of beating capitalism at its own game by drawing a winning number at the behest of unseen forces. Once again that invisible hand.

    The change in the moral valence of gambling also has a public dimension. In a neoliberal climate where taxes are anathema to the majoritarian political cen- ter, lotteries and gaming levies have become a favored means of filling national coffers, of generating cultural and social assets, of finding soft monies in times of tough cutbacks. The defunct machinery of a growing number of welfare states, to be sure, is being turned by the wheel of fortune. With more and more governments and political parties depending on this source for quick revenue fixes, betting, says George Will, has “been transformed from a social disease”— subjected, not so long ago, to scrutiny at the hands of Harvard Medical School—“into social policy.”11 Once a dangerous sign of moral turpitude, “it is now marketed almost as a ‘patriotic duty.’ ”12

    Put these things together—the explosion of popular gambling, its legitimate incorporation to the fiscal heart of the nation-state, the global expansion of highly speculative market “investment,” and changes in the moral vectors of the wager—and what has happened? “The world,” answers a reflective Fidel Castro, has “become a huge casino.” Because the value of stock markets has lost all grounding in materiality, he says—anticipating a point to which we shall return —their workings have finally realized the dream of medieval alchemy: “Paper has been turned into gold.”13 This evokes Susan Strange (1986: 1–3; cf. Harvey 1989: 332; Tomasic and Pentony 1991), who, in likening the Western fiscal order to an immense game of luck, was among the first to speak specifically of “casino capitalism”: “Something rather radical has happened to the international finan- cial system to make it so much like a gambling hall. . . . [It] has made inveterate, and largely involuntary, gamblers of us all.” Insofar as the growth of globalized markets, electronic media, and finance capital have opened up the potential for venture enterprise, the gaming room has actually become iconic of capital: of its “natural” capacity to yield value without human input (Hardt 1995: 39), to grow and expand of its own accord, to reward speculation.

    And yet crisis after crisis in the global economy, and growing income dispari- ties on a planetary scale, makes it painfully plain that there is no such thing as capitalism sans production, that the neoliberal stress on consumption as the prime source of value is palpably problematic. If scholars have been slow to reflect on this fact, people all over the world—not least those in places where there have been sudden infusions of commodities, of new forms of wealth—have not. Many have been quick to give voice, albeit in different registers, to their per- plexity at the enigma of this wealth: of its sources and the capriciousness of its distribution, of the mysterious forms it takes, of its slipperiness, of the opaque relations between means and ends embodied in it. Our concern here grows directly out of these perplexities, these imaginings: out of worldwide speculation, in both senses of the term, provoked by the shifting conditions of material exis- tence at the end of the twentieth century.

    We seek, here, to interrogate the experiential contradictions at the core of neoliberal capitalism, of capitalism in its millennial manifestation: the fact that it appears both to include and to marginalize in unanticipated ways; to produce desire and expectation on a global scale (Trouillot 1999) yet to decrease the cer- tainty of work or the security of persons; to magnify class differences but to undercut class consciousness; above all, to offer up vast, almost instantaneous riches to those who master its spectral technologies—and, simultaneously, to threaten the very existence of those who do not. Elsewhere (1999c) we have argued that these contradictions, while worldwide in effect, are most visible in so-called postrevolutionary societies—especially those societies that, having been set free by the events of 1989 and their aftermath, entered the global arena with distinct structural disadvantages.14 A good deal is to be learned about the historical implications of the current moment by eavesdropping on the popular anxieties to be heard in such places. How do we interpret the mounting disen- chantment, in these “liberated zones,” with the effects of hard-won democracy? Why the perceptible nostalgia for the security of past regimes, some of them immeasurably repressive? Why the accompanying upsurge of assertions of iden- tity and autochthony? How might they be linked to widespread fears, in many parts of Eastern Europe and Africa alike, about the preternatural production of wealth?

    The end of the Cold War, like the death of apartheid, fired utopian imagina- tions. But liberation under neoliberal conditions has been marred by a disconcert- ing upsurge of violence, crime, and disorder. The quest for democracy, the rule of law, prosperity, and civility threatens to dissolve into strife and recrimination, even political chaos, amidst the oft-mouthed plaint that “the poor cannot eat votes or live on a good Constitution.”15 Everywhere there is evidence of an uneasy fusion of enfranchisement and exclusion; of xenophobia at the prospect of world citizenship without the old protectionisms of nationhood; of the effort to realize modern utopias by decidedly postmodern means. Gone is any official- speak of egalitarian futures, work for all, or the paternal government envisioned by the various freedom movements. These ideals have given way to a spirit of deregulation, with its taunting mix of emancipation and limitation. Individual cit- izens, a lot of them marooned by a rudderless ship of state, try to clamber aboard the good ship Enterprise. But in so doing, they find themselves battling the eccen- tric currents of the “new” world order, which short-circuit received ways and means. Caught up in these currents, many of them come face to face with the most fundamental metamorphoses wrought by the neoliberal turn: the labile role of labor in the elusive algorithm connecting production to consumption, the pro to the con of capitalism.16

    Which brings us back to the problematic status of production at the turn of the new century.

    Labor’s Pain: Producing the Class of 2000 The emergence of consumption as a privileged site for the fabrication of self and society, of culture and identity, is closely tied to the changing status of work under contemporary conditions. For some, the economic order of our times represents a completion of the intrinsic “project” of capital: namely, the evolution of a social formation that, as Mario Tronti (1980: 32) puts it, “does not look to labor as its dynamic foundation” (cf. Hardt 1995: 39). Others see the present moment in radically different terms. Scott Lash and John Urry (1987: 232–33), for instance, declare that we are seeing not the denouement but the demise of organized capitalism, of a system in which cor- porate institutions could secure compromises between management and workers by making appeal to the national interest. The internationalization of market forces, they claim, has not merely eroded the capacity of states to control national economies. It has led to a decline in the importance of domestic produc- tion in many once industrialized countries—which, along with the worldwide rise of the service sector and the feminization of the workforce, has dispersed class relations, alliances, and antinomies across the four corners of the earth. It has also put such distances between sites of production and consumption that their articulation becomes all but unfathomable, save in fantasy.

    Not that Fordist fabrication has disappeared. There is a larger absolute number of industrial workers in the world today than ever before (Kellogg 1987). Neither is the mutation of the labor market altogether unprecedented. For one thing, as Marx (1967: 635) observed, the development of capitalism has always conduced to the cumulative replacement of “skilled laborers by less skilled, mature laborers by immature, male by female”—also “living” labor by “dead.” As David Harvey (1989: 192–93) reminds us, the devaluation of labor power has been a traditional response to falling profits and periodic crises of commodity production. What is more, the growth of global markets in commodities and services has not been accompanied by a correspondingly unrestricted flow of workers; most nation- states still try to regulate their movement to a greater or lesser extent. The simul- taneous “freeing” and compartmentalizing of labor, Peter Geschiere and Francis Nyamnjoh (in this issue) point out, is a tension long endemic to capitalism.

    Nonetheless, Harvey insists, if not in quite the same terms as Lash and Urry (1987), that the current moment is different: that it evinces features that set it apart, fracturing the continuing history of capital—a history, Engels once said, that “remain[s] the same and yet [is] constantly changing” (quoted by Andre Gunder Frank [1971: 36]). Above all, the explosion of new markets and mone- tary instruments, aided by sophisticated means of planetary coordination and space-time compression, have given the financial order a degree of autonomy from “real production” unmatched in the annals of political economy (cf. Turner n.d.: 18). The consequences are tangible: “Driven by the imperative to replicate money,” writes David Korten (1996: 13; cf. McMichael 1999: 98), “the [new global] system treats people as a source of inefficiency”: ever more disposable. The spiraling virtuality of fiscal circulation, of the accumulation of wealth purely through exchange, exacerbates this tendency: it enables the speculative side of capitalism to act as if it were entirely independent of human manufacture. The market and its masters, an “electronic herd” (Friedman 1999) of nomadic, deterritorialized investors, appear less and less constrained by the costs or moral economy of concrete labor.

    If capital strives to become autonomous of labor, if the spatial and temporal coordinates of modernist political economy have been sundered, if the ontological connection between production and consumption has come into question, what has happened to the linchpin of capitalism: the concept formerly known as class?

    Denunciations of the concept, Fredric Jameson (1999: 46–47) laments, have become “obligatory.” Even for Marxists. This in spite of the fact that class names an “ongoing social reality,” a persistently active dimension of “post-Cold War maps of the world system.” He is, moreover, unconvinced by claims that it no longer makes sense of the transnational division of labor; nor is he persuaded that gender, race, and ethnicity are more constitutive of concrete experience in the contemporary moment. For Jameson, gender and race are too easily reconciled with the demands of liberal ideology, with its solutions to social problems, with the sorts of politics it proffers. Class, finally, remains more intractable and more fundamental. Thus Tom Lewis (1999: 151): the failure to recognize it as “the most effective subject position” through which to organize against racism and sexism is “particularly regrettable.”

    But surely the matter runs deeper than this? Subject positions are multiply determined, shaped less by political expediency than by the compelling truths of sense and perception. As Jameson himself notes (1999: 49), “Nothing is more complexly allegorical than the play of class connotations across the . . . social field.” Our task, surely, is to examine how consciousness, sentiment, and attach- ment are constituted under prevailing conditions; why class has become a less plausible basis for self-recognition and action when growing disparities of wealth and power would point to the inverse (cf. Storper, in this issue); why gender, race, ethnicity, and generation have become such compelling idioms of identification, mobilizing people, both within and across nation-states, in ways often opposed to reigning hegemonies.

    Once again, this problem is hardly new. There has long been debate about the two big questions at the nub of the historical sociology of class: Why do social classes seem so seldom to have acted for themselves (für sich)? And why have explicit forms of class consciousness arisen relatively infrequently, even under the worst of Fordist conditions (see, e.g., Wallerstein 1972: 173; Comaroff and Comaroff 1987)? Complex, poetically rich, culturally informed imaginings have always come between structural conditions and subjective perceptions—imagin- ings that have multiplied and waxed more ethereal, more fantastic, as capitalist economies have enlarged in scale. Neither the absolute increase in industrial workers across the globe nor the fact that 70 percent of the population in advanced capitalist societies “structurally belong to the working class” (Lewis 1999: 150–51) dictates that people will experience the world, or act upon it, in classic proletarian terms.

    Quite the opposite. As we have already said, the labile relation of labor to capital may have intensified existing structures of inequality, but it is also erod- ing the conditions that give rise to class opposition as an idiom of identity and/or interest. Key here is the dramatic transnationalization of primary pro- duction (this by contrast to trade in raw materials and finished products, which has long crossed sovereign borders; see Dicken 1986: 3). A world-historical process, it is having profound effects on the configuration, and the cognition, of social relations of production everywhere: (1) By undermining the capacity of states to sustain economies in which “production, plant, firm and industry were essentially national phenomena” (Hobsbawm 1979: 313), it renders obsolete the old system of bargaining in which labor and capital could negotiate wages and conditions within an enclaved territory (Lash and Urry 1987: 232–33; see above); (2) by subverting domestic production in industrialized countries, it encourages the cutting of labor costs through casualization, outsourcing, and the hiring of discounted (female, immigrant, racinated) workers, thereby either making blue-collar employees redundant or forcing them into the menial end of the service sector; (3) by widening the gulf between rich and poor regions, it makes the latter—via the export of labor or the hosting of sweatshops and maquiladoras—into the working class of the former; and (4) by reducing pro- letarians everywhere to the lowest common denominator, it compels them to compete with little protection against the most exploitative modes of manufacture on the planet.

    To the extent, then, that the nation-state is, as Aijaz Ahmad (1992: 318) says, “the terrain on which actual class conflicts take place,” it follows that the global dispersal of manufacture is likely to fragment modernist forms of class con- sciousness, class alliance, and class antinomies at an exponential rate. It is also likely to dissolve the ground on which proletarian culture once took shape and to disrupt any sense of rootedness within organically conceived structures of production. Already, in many places, there has been a palpable erosion of the con- ventional bases of worker identity. Thus, while it is possible to argue, with Terence Turner (n.d.: 25; cf. Cox 1987: 271), that transnational flows of capital and labor have replicated “internal” class divisions on an international scale, exist- ing relations among labor, place, and social reproduction—and, with them, the terms of class conflict itself—have been thoroughly unsettled for now.

    While the contours of the global proletariat are ghostly at best—and while middle classes seem everywhere to be facing a loss of socioeconomic security, their center ground ever shakier (cf. Storper, in this issue)—a transnational capitalist class is taking more and more tangible shape. Here, again, there are questions of nuance about the old and the new: international bourgeoisies are, arguably, as old as capitalism itself. Dependency theorists have long insisted that they were a critical element in the making of modern European states and their national economies; also that their exploitation of colonial wealth was indispensable to the development of the Western metropoles. The new transna- tional capitalist elite—its frequent-flier executives, financiers, bureaucrats, professionals, and media moguls—may appear to be the planetary version of those older cosmopolitan bourgeoisies, its cadres centered in the imperial capi- tals of the world. But, as Leslie Sklair (1998: 136–37) argues, this new elite is distinctive in several ways. Above all, its interests are vested primarily in glob- alizing forms of capital: capital whose shareholder-driven imperatives are unrelated to any particular local enterprise, metropolitan or colonial. Hence, while its business ventures might loop into and out of national economies, this does not, as Saskia Sassen (n.d.) stresses, make them “national” enterprises. The entrepreneurial activities of this class are conceived in terms of markets, monetary transactions, and modes of manufacture that transcend national bor- ders. They seek to disengage from parochial loyalties and jurisdictions, thus to minimize the effects of legal regulations, environmental constraints, taxation, and labor demands.17

    Decontextualization, the distantiation from place and its sociomoral pres- sures, is an autonomic impulse of capitalism at the millennium;18 crucial, in fact, to its ways and means of discounting labor by abstracting itself from direct con- frontation or civic obligation. The poor are no longer at the gates; bosses live in enclaved communities a world away, beyond political or legal reach. Capital and its workforce become more and more remote from each other: frequent fliers and frequent friers seldom meet on the global highways they travel—in contrapuntal rhythm. Here is the harsh underside of the culture of neoliberalism. It is a culture that, to return to our opening comment, re-visions persons not as producers from a particular community, but as consumers in a planetary marketplace: persons as ensembles of identity that owe less to history or society than to organically conceived human qualities.

    This logos does not go uncontested, of course—neither by popular nationalisms nor by social movements of various stripes, left and right, North and South, especially among the marginal (Sklair 1998: 137; Turner n.d.). But the gospel of laissez-faire is a potent presence in contemporary capitalist societies, its axioms reinforced by quotidian experience and its truths instilled in its subjects by the remorseless commodification of ever more finely targeted areas of everyday life. Witness the following interpolation:

    You are at one with the world. . . . The real world where time treads with a leisure measure. You express your commitment to the new age . . . in the way you think, the way you talk, the way you dress. Leisure time dressing is YOU.”

    The off-the-peg poetics of this call to postproletarian identity comes from a label attached to a pair of women’s shorts marketed in a climate of “patriotic capital- ism” by a South African chain store.19 The thickening hegemony to which it speaks is borne also by the global communicative media, themselves seeking to construct a planetary “ecumene” (see n. 4 above), whose satellite signals and fiber-optic nerves reach the widest possible audience. Those signals are designed to evade control exercised by states over flows of images and information— flows once integral to the creation of political communities and national “publics” (cf Anderson 1983:63).

    For all their transformative power, as anthropologists have repeatedly insisted, these material and cultural forces do not have simple, homogenizing effects. They are, in some measure, refracted, redeployed, domesticated, or resisted wherever they come to rest. What we call globalism is a vast ensemble of dialectical processes (J. L. Comaroff 1996; Jean Comaroff 1997b), processes that cannot occur without the grounded, socially embedded human beings from whom they draw value. Nor can these processes occur without the concrete, cul- turally occupied locales—villages, towns, regions, countries, subcontinents—in which they come to rest, however fleetingly. Still, they are re-forming the salience of locality, place, and community in ways that often bypass the state. Hence the proliferation of attachments at once more particular and more univer- sal than citizenship (Turner n.d.: 8)—from those based on gender, sex, race, and age through those organized around issues such as environmentalism and human rights to those, like the Nation of Islam or the hip-hop nation, that mimic nation- hood itself.

    The paradox of class at the millennium, in sum, must be understood in these terms. Neoliberalism aspires, in its ideology and practice, to intensify the abstrac- tions inherent in capitalism itself: to separate labor power from its human con- text, to replace society with the market, to build a universe out of aggregated transactions. While it can never fully succeed, its advance over the “long” twen- tieth century has profoundly altered, if unevenly in space and time, the phenom- enology of being in the world. Formative experiences—like the nature of work and the reproduction of self, culture, and community—have shifted. Once-legible processes—the workings of power, the distribution of wealth, the meaning of politics and national belonging—have become opaque, even spectral. The con- tours of “society” blur, its organic solidarity disperses. Out of its shadows emerges a more radically individuated sense of personhood, of a subject built up of traits set against a universal backdrop of likeness and difference. In its place, to invert the old Durkheimean telos, arise collectivities erected on a form of mechanical solidarity in which me is generalized into we.

    In this vocabulary, it is not just that the personal is political. The personal is the only politics there is, the only politics with a tangible referent or emotional valence. By extension, interpersonal relations—above all, sexuality, from the peccadillos of presidents to the global specter of AIDS—come to stand, metonymically, for the inchoate forces that threaten the world as we know it. It is in these privatized terms that action is organized, that the experience of inequity and antagonism takes meaningful shape. In this sense, Jameson (1999: 47) is correct. There is no autonomous discourse of class. Certainly not now, if ever. Oppositions of gender and race, even if not in themselves explicit vehicles for that discourse, are frequently “reinvested” in its practical dynamics and express its stark antagonisms. This is inevitable. Reigning hegemonies, both popular and academic, may separate the construction of identity from the antinomies of class. But the market has always made capital out of human dif- ference and difference out of capital, cultivating exploitable categories of workers and consumers, identifying pariahs, and seeking to silence enemies of established enterprise. As lived reality, then, social class is a multiply refracted gestalt. Its contrasts are mobilized in a host of displaced registers, its distinc- tions carried in a myriad of charged, locally modulated signs and objects— from the canons of taste and desire to the niceties of language use, the subtle discriminations of advertising to the carnal conflict of sport.

    In short, as neoliberal conditions render ever more obscure the rooting of inequality in structures of production, as work gives way to the mechanical soli- darities of “identity” in constructing selfhood and social being, class comes to be understood, in both popular and scholarly discourse, as yet another personal trait or lifestyle choice. Which is why it, like citizenship, is measured increasingly by the capacity to transact and consume; why politics is treated as a matter of indi- vidual or group entitlement; why social wrongs are transposed into an issue of “rights”; why diffuse concerns about cultural integrity and communal survival are vested in “private” anxieties about sexuality, procreation, or family values; why the fetus, neoliberal subject par excellence, becomes the focus of a macabre nativity play, in which, “vexed to nightmare by a rocking cradle,” moral antago- nists lock in mortal battle over the right to life (Jean Comaroff 1997a; Berlant 1997). Analytically, of course, it is imperative for us not to take these things at face value. The problem, rather, is to explain why, in the millennial age, class has become displaced and refracted in the way that it has. Which is why, finally, its reduction, to the mere “experience of inferiority,” as Jameson (1999: 47) would have it, is insufficient. The concept of class so reduced captures neither the com- plex construction of contemporary experience nor the crises of social reproduc- tion in which much of the world appears to be caught.

    Generating Futures:Youth in the Age of Incivility That sense of physical, social, and moral crisis congeals, perhaps more than anywhere else, in the contempo- rary predicament of youth, now widely under scrutiny (Comaroff and Comaroff n.d.). Generation, in fact, seems to be an especially fertile site into which class anxieties are displaced. Perhaps that much is overdetermined: it is on the backs of the pubescent that concerns about social reproduction—about the viability of the continuing present—have almost always been saddled. Nonetheless, genera- tion as a principle of distinction, consciousness, and struggle has long been neglected, or taken for granted, by theorists of political economy. This will no longer do: the growing pertinence of juveniles — or, more accurately, their impertinence—is an ineluctable feature of the present moment, from Chicago to Cape Town, Calcutta to Caracas. Preadulthood, of course, is a historically constructed category: while, in much of the late-twentieth-century English-speaking world, young white persons are teenagers, their black counterparts are youth, adolescents with attitude. And most often, if not always, male.

    There are startling similarities in the current situation of youth the world over, similarities that appear to arise out of the workings of neoliberal capitalism and the changing planetary order of which we have spoken. These similarities seem to be founded on a doubling, on simultaneous inclusion and exclusion. On one hand is their much remarked exclusion from local economies, especially from shrinking, mutating blue collar sectors. As the expansion of the free market runs up against the demise of the welfare state, the modernist ideal in which each generation does better than its predecessor is mocked by conditions that disen- franchise the unskilled young of the inner city and the countryside (cf. Abdullah 1998). Denied full, waged citizenship in the nation-state, many of them take to the streets, often the only place where, in an era of privatization, a lumpen pub- lic can be seen and heard (cf. Appadurai forthcoming). The profile of these pop- ulations reflects also the feminization of post-Fordist labor, which further disrupts gender relations and domestic reproduction among working people, creating a concomitant “crisis of masculinity”: a crisis as audible in U.S. gangsta rap as in South African gang rape, as visible in the parodic castration of “The Full Monty” as in the deadly machismo of soccer violence or the echoing corridors of Columbine High. This crisis is not confined to youth or workers, of course— world cinema has made that point cogently in recent years—but it is magnified among them.

    On the other hand is the recent rise of assertive, global youth cultures of desire, self-expression, and representation; in some places, too, of potent, if unconventional, forms of politicization. Pre-adults have long been at the frontiers of the transnational: the waxing U.S. economy in the 1950s was marked by the emergence of “teens” as a consumer category with its own distinctive, interna- tionally marketable culture. This, however, intensified immeasurably during the 1980s and 1990s. To a greater extent than ever before, generation became a con- crete principle of mobilization, inflecting other dimensions of difference, not least class, in whose displacements it is closely entailed (cf. Corrigan and Frith 1976). Youth activism, clearly, has been hugely facilitated by the flow of infor- mation, styles, and currencies across old sovereign boundaries. The signifying practices on which it is based appear to flourish, more than most things, with space-time compression.

    This is not to imply that the young form a “homogeneous, sociological cate- gory of people which thinks, organizes and acts” in coherent ways (Seekings 1993: xiv). The fact that youth culture is increasingly capacious in its reach does not mean that the situation of “kids,” or the nature of their social experience, is everywhere the same. But it is to say that, in recent times, this segment of the population has gained unprecedented autonomy as a social category an und für sich, both in and for itself; this in spite, or maybe because, of its relative margin- alization from the normative world of work and wage. In many Western contexts they, along with other disenfranchised persons (notably the homeless and the unemployed), constitute a kind of counternation: a virtual citizenry with its own twilight economies, its own spaces of production and recreation, its own modali- ties of politics with which to address the economic and political conditions that determine its plight (Venkatesh 1997).

    As a consequence, youth tend everywhere to occupy the innovative, uncharted borderlands along which the global meets the local. This is often made manifest in the elaboration of creolized argots, of streetspeak and cybertalk, that give voice to imaginative worlds very different from those of the parental gener- ation. But these borderlands are also sites of tension, particularly for disadvan- taged young people from postrevolutionary societies, from inner cities, and from other terrors incognita who seek to make good on the promises of the free mar- ket; also for anyone who jostles against the incivilities, illegalities, and importu- nities of these precocious entrepreneurs. In the late twentieth century, the image of youth-as-trouble has gained an advanced capitalist twist as impatient adoles- cents “take the waiting out of wanting” by developing remarkably diverse forms of illicit enterprise20—from drug trafficking in the urban United States, through the “bush” economies of West and Central Africa, which trade diamonds and dollars, guns and gasoline over long distances (Roitman 1999; De Boeck 1999), to the supply of services both legal and lethal. In this they try to link the poles of consumption and production and to break into the cycle of accumulation, often by flouting received rules and conventions. The young have felt their power, power born partly of the sheer weight of numbers, partly of a growing inclination and capacity to turn to the use of force, partly of a willingness to hold polite society to ransom.

    Bill Buford (1993: 264–65) has suggested that British soccer fans experience a compelling sense of community in moments of concerted violence. Others have said the same of gangland wars in North American cities, witch burning in the northerly provinces of South Africa, and cognate social practices elsewhere. Is it surprising, then, that so many juveniles see themselves as ironic, mutant citizens of a new world order? Or that the standardized nightmare of the genteel main- stream is an increasingly universal image of the adolescent, a larger-than-life fig- ure wearing absurdly expensive sports shoes, headphones blaring gangsta rap, beeper tied to a global underground economy—in short, a sinister caricature of the corporate mogul? Is this not a dramatic embodiment of the dark side of con- sumerism, of a riotous return of the repressed, of a parallel politics of class, social reproduction, and civil society?

    Precisely because of its fusion of monstrosity, energy, and creativity, this fig- ure also subsumes some of the more complex aspects of millennial capitalism, if in the manner of a grotesque: its tendency to spark the pursuit of new ways and means for the production of wealth; its ambivalent, contradictory engagement with the nation-state; its play on the presence and absence of civil society. It is to these three faces of the “rough beast, its hour come round at last,” that we now turn.

    Three Faces of Millennial Capitalism

    Liberal democracy . . . has never been . . . in such a state of dysfunction. . . . Life is not only distorted, as was always the case, by a great number of socio-eco- nomic mechanisms, but it is exercised with more and more difficulty in a public space profoundly upset by techno-tele-media apparatuses and by new rhythms of information and communication, . . . by the new modes of appropriation they put to work, by the new structure of the event and its spectrality. Jacques Derrida, Specters of Marx

    Occult Economies and New Religious Movements: Privatizing the Millennium A striking corollary of the dawning Age of Millennial Capitalism has been the global proliferation of “occult economies.”21 These economies have two dimen- sions: a material aspect founded on the effort to conjure wealth—or to account for its accumulation—by appeal to techniques that defy explanation in the con- ventional terms of practical reason; and an ethical aspect grounded in the moral discourses and (re)actions sparked by the (real or imagined) production of value through such “magical” means. It is difficult, of course, to quantify the presence of the occult—and, therefore, to make any claim to its increase. As we note above, finance capital has always had its spectral enchantments, its modes of speculation based on less than rational connections between means and ends. Both its underside (the pariah forms of gambling of which we spoke a moment ago) and its upper side (a fiscal industry, embracing everything from insurance to stock markets) have been rooted, from the first, in two inscrutables: a faith in probability (itself a notoriously poor way of predicting the future from the past) and a monetary system that depends for its existence on “confidence,” a chimera knowable, tautologically, only by its effects. Wherein, then, lies the claim that occult economies are presently on the rise?

    In the specific context of South Africa, we have demonstrated (1999b, 1999c) that there has been an explosion of occult-related activity—much of it violent, arising out of accusations of ritual killing, witchcraft, and zombie conjuring— since the late apartheid years. These also include fantastic Ponzi schemes, the sale of body parts for “magical” purposes, satanic practices, tourism based on the sighting of fabulous monsters, and the like. Here middle-class magazines run “dial-a-diviner” advertisements, national papers carry headline articles on medi- cine murders, prime-time television broadcasts dramas of sorcery, and more than one “witchcraft summit” has been held. Patently, even here we cannot be sure that the brute quantum of occult activity exceeds that of times past. But what is clear is that their reported incidence, written about by the mainstream press in more prosaic, less exoticizing terms than ever before (Fordred 1999), has forced itself upon the public sphere, rupturing the flow of mediated “news.” It is this rup- ture—this focus of popular attention on the place of the arcane in the everyday production of value—to which we refer when we speak of a global proliferation of occult economies.

    It is not difficult to catalogue the presence of occult economies in different parts of the world. In West Africa, for example, Peter Geschiere (1997), among others, has shown how zombie conjuring is becoming an endemic feature of everyday life, how sorcery and witchcraft have entered into the postcolonial political economy as an integral element of a thriving alternative modernity, how magic has become as much an aspect of mundane survival strategies as it is indis- pensable to the ambitions of the powerful (see also Bastian 1993). Nor is all of this based in rural situations or among poor people. In South Africa a recent case involved a well-known physician: she was “turned into a zombie” by a “Nigerian devil-worshipper,” who, having rendered her insensate, took a large sum of money from her bank account.22 By labeling the accused a Nigerian devil wor- shipper, the report ties the menace of the satanic to the flow of immigrants across national borders.

    Nor is this only an African phenomenon. In various parts of Asia occult economies thrive, often taking surprising turns (see Morris, in this issue). In Thai- land—where fortune-telling has been transformed by global technology and e- mail divination has taken off—one “traditional” seer, auspiciously named Madam Luk, reports that her clients nowadays ask three questions to the exclu- sion of all others: “‘Is my company going broke?’ ‘Am I going to lose my job?’ and ‘Will I find another job?’ ”23 In the United States, too, the fallout of neolib- eral capitalism is having its impact on magical practice. There is, for instance, a growing use (“seeping into the grassroots” of the U.S. heartland and taking its place beside other millennial pursuits) of tarot readings as a respectable form of therapy—described by the director of the Trends Research Institute as a low- cost “shrink in the box.”24 By these means are psychology, spirituality, and for- tune-telling fused.

    Sometimes dealings in the occult take on a more visceral, darker form. Throughout Latin America in the 1990s, as in Africa and Asia, there have been mass panics about the clandestine theft and sale of the organs of young people, usually by unscrupulous expatriates (Scheper-Hughes 1996). Violence against children has become metonymic of threats to social reproduction in many ethnic and national contexts, the dead (or missing) child having emerged as the stan- dardized nightmare of a world out of control (Jean Comaroff 1997a). There, and in other parts of the globe, this commerce—like international adoptions, mail- order marriage, and indentured domestic labor—is seen as a new form of impe- rialism, the affluent North siphoning off the essence of poorer “others” by mys- terious means for nefarious ends. All of which gives evidence, to those at the nether end of the global distribution of wealth, of the workings of insidious forces, of potent magical technologies and modes of accumulation.

    That evidence reaches into the heart of Europe itself. Hence the recent scares, in several countries, about the sexual and satanic abuse of children (La Fontaine 1997); about the kidnapping and murder of street “urchins,” most recently in Ger- many by “Russian gangs,” for purposes of organ harvest and export; about the alleged “trafficking in women [especially] from . . . nations of the former Soviet bloc” for prostitution, labor, and other “personal services” in Western Europe, the Americas, Japan, and China.25 Again, the United States is not exempt from anxi- eties over the pilfering of human bodies and body parts for profit. Note, for just one extreme instance, the urban myth that traversed the Internet in 1997 about the secret excision of kidneys, by apparently incredible means, from business travelers.26

    In other contexts, the occult concentrates itself in purely financial dealings. Thus there seems to have been an extraordinary intensification of pyramid schemes lately, many of them tied to the electronic media. These schemes, and a host of scams allied with them—a few legal, many illegal, some alegal—are hardly new. But their recent mushrooming across the world has drawn a great deal of attention—partly because of their sheer scale and partly because, by crossing national borders and/or registering at addresses far from the site of their local operation, they insinuate themselves into the slipstream of the global econ- omy, thereby escaping control. Recall the ten or so whose crash sparked the Albanian revolution early in 1997, several of which took on almost miraculous dimensions for poor investors. One pyramid manager in Albania, according to the New York Times, was “a gypsy fortune teller, complete with crystal ball, who claimed to know the future.”27 Even in the tightly regulated stock markets of the United States there has been a rise in illegal operations that owe their logic, if not their precise operation, to pyramids: another New York Times report attributes this to the fact that investors are presently “predisposed to throw dollars at get- rich-quick schemes.” Six billion dollars were lost to scams on the New York Stock Exchange in 1996.28 These scams also bring to mind others that arise from a promiscuous mix of scarcity and deregulation, among them, the notorious Nigerian-based “419,” a truly transnational con that regularly traps foreign busi- nessmen into signing over major assets and may actually have fabricated a national election at home (Apter 1999); also the Foundation for New Era Philan- thropy, a U.S. pyramid created “to change the world for the glory of God.” On the basis of a promise to double their money in six months, its founder, John Benett, persuaded five hundred nonprofit organizations, Christian colleges, and Ivy League universities to invest $354 million.29 The line between Ponzi schemes and evangelical prosperity gospels is very thin indeed.30

    All of these things have a single common denominator: the allure of accruing wealth from nothing. In this respect, they are born of the same animating spirit as casino capitalism; indeed, perhaps they are casino capitalism for those who lack the fiscal or cultural capital—or who, for one or another reason, are reluctant— to gamble on more conventional markets. Like the cunning that made straw into gold (Schneider 1989), these alchemic techniques defy reason in promising unnaturally large profits—to yield wealth without production, value without effort. Here, again, is the specter, the distinctive spirit, of neoliberal capitalism in its triumphal hour. So much for the demise of disenchantment.

    Speaking of the neoliberal spirit, occult economies have close parallels in the spread of new religious movements across the planet. To wit, the latter may be seen as holy-owned subsidiaries of the former. These movements take on a wide variety of guises. In the case of the Vissariontsi, “disenchanted Soviet intellectu- als” who follow a traffic warden-turned-messiah, members renounce their earthly wealth for life in the City of Sun, a congregation in Siberia that recalls a commu- nist farm. The Second Coming here, led by a man with a sense of both history and irony—a City of Sun, in Siberia? A career in Russian traffic management for the Son of God?—envisages a future in the past, a hereafter (or therebefore?) that recaptures the glories of a socialist commune.31 But the renunciatory orien- tation of the Vissariontsi is not usual among new religious movements at the mil- lennium. Much closer to the global mood of the moment are fee-for-service, con- sumer-cult, prosperity-gospel denominations. These creeds are well exemplified by any number of neo-Pentecostal sects; best perhaps by the Universal Church of the Kingdom of God (Igreja Universal do Reino de Deus), a denomination of Brazilian origin which, true to its name, has opened up outposts in many parts of the world (Kramer 1999).

    The Universal Church reforms the Protestant ethic with enterprise and urban- ity, fulsomely embracing the material world. It owns a major television network in Brazil, has an elaborate web site, and, above all, promises swift payback to those who embrace Christ, denounce Satan, and “make their faith practical” by “sacrificing” all they can to the movement.32 Here Pentecostalism meets neolib- eral enterprise. In its African churches, most of them (literally) storefronts, prayer meetings respond to frankly mercenary desires, offering everything from cures for depression through financial advice to remedies for unemployment; casual passersby, clients really, select the services they require. Bold color adver- tisements for BMWs and lottery winnings adorn altars; tabloids pasted to walls and windows carry testimonials by followers whose membership was rewarded by a rush of wealth and/or an astonishing recovery of health. The ability to deliver in the here and now, itself a potent form of space-time compression, is offered as the measure of a genuinely global God, just as it is taken to explain the power of satanism (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999b); both have the instant efficacy of the magical and the millennial. As Kramer (1999: 35) says of Brazilian neo-Pentecostals, “Inner-worldly asceticism has been replaced with a concern for the pragmatics of material gain and the immediacy of desire. . . . The return on capital has suddenly become more spiritually compelling and imminent . . . than the return of Christ.” This shift is endemic to the new religious movements of the late twentieth century. For them, and for their many millions of members, the Second Coming evokes not a Jesus who saves, but one who pays dividends. Or, more accurately, one who promises a miraculous return on a limited spiritual investment.

    Why? How—to put the matter more generally—are we to account for the current spread of occult economies and prosperity cults?

    To the degree that millennial capitalism fuses the modern and the postmod- ern, hope and hopelessness, utility and futility, the world created in its image presents itself as a mass of contradictions: as a world, simultaneously, of possi- bility and impossibility. This is precisely the juxtaposition associated with cargo cults and chiliastic movements in other times and places (Worsley 1957; Cohn 1957). But, as the growth of prosperity gospels and fee-for-service movements illustrates, in a neoliberal age the chiliastic urge emphasizes a privatized millen- nium, a personalized rather than a communal sense of rebirth; in this, the mes- sianic meets the magical. At the end of the twentieth century, the cargo, glimpsed in large part through television, takes the form of huge concentrations of wealth that accrue, legitimately or otherwise, to the rich of the global economy—espe- cially the enigmatic new wealth derived from financial investment and manage- ment, from intellectual property and other rights, from cyberspace, from trans- port and its cognate operations, and from the supply of various post-Fordist services. All of which points to the fact that the mysterious mechanisms of a changing market, not to mention abstruse technological and informational expertise, hold the key to hitherto unimaginable fortunes amassed by the ever more rapid flow of value, across time and space, into the fluid coordinates of the local and the global; to the much mass-mediated mantra that the gap between the affluent and the indigent is growing at an exponential rate; and to the strange convolutions in the structural conditions of labor, discussed above, that seem at once to reduce and produce joblessness by altering conventional terms of employment, by feminizing the workforce, and by deterritorializing proletariats.

    This, of course, is the flip side of the coin: the sense of impossibility, even despair, that comes from being left out of the promise of prosperity, from having to look in on the global economy of desire from its immiserated exteriors. Whether it be in post-Soviet Central Europe or postcolonial Africa, in Thatcherite Britain or the neoliberal United States, in a China edging toward capitalism or neo-Pentecostal Latin America, the world-historical process that came to be symbolized by the events of 1989 held out the prospect that everyone would be set free to accumulate and speculate, to consume, and to indulge repressed crav- ings in a universe of less government, greater privatization, more opulence, infi- nite enterprise. For the vast majority, however, the millennial moment passed without visible enrichment.

    The implication? That, in these times—the late modernist age when, accord- ing to Weber and Marx, enchantment would wither away—more and more ordi- nary people see arcane forces intervening in the production of value, diverting its flow toward a new elect: those masters of the market who comprehend and control the production of wealth under contemporary conditions. They also attribute to these arcane forces their feelings of erasure and loss: an erasure in many places of community and family, exacerbated by the destabilization of labor, the translocal- ization of management, and the death of retail trade; a loss of human integrity, experienced in the spreading commodification of persons, bodies, cultures, and histories, in the substitution of quantity for quality, abstraction for substance.33 None of these perceptions is new, as we have said. Balzac (1965: 418, 117) described them for France in the 1840s, as did Conrad (1957) for prerevolutionary Russia; Gluckman (1959), moreover, spoke of the “magic of despair” that arose in similarly dislocated colonial situations in Africa. Nonetheless, to reiterate, such disruptions are widely experienced throughout the world as intensifying at a frightening rate at present. Which is why the ethical dimensions of occult economies are so prominent; why the mass panics of our times tend to be moral in tone; why these panics so often express themselves in religious movements that pursue instant material returns and yet condemn those who enrich themselves in nontraditional ways. To be sure, occult economies frequently have this bipolar character: At one level, they consist in the constant quest for new, magical means for otherwise unattainable ends; at another, they vocalize a desire to sanction, even eradicate, people held to have accumulated assets by those very means.

    Occult economies, then, are a response to a world gone awry, yet again: a world in which the only way to create real wealth seems to lie in forms of power/knowledge that transgress the conventional, the rational, the moral—thus to multiply available techniques of producing value, fair or foul. In their cultural aspect, they bespeak a resolute effort to come to terms with that power/knowl- edge, to account for the inexplicable phenomena to which it gives rise, and to plumb its secrets. The unprecedented manifestation of zombies in the South African countryside, for instance, has grown in direct proportion to the shrinking labor market for young men. The former provides a partial explanation for the latter: the living dead are commonly said to be killed and raised up by older peo- ple, witches of wealth, to toil for them (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999b), thereby rendering rural youth jobless. There are, in this era of flexitime employment, even part-time zombies, a virtual working class—of pure, abstract labor power—that slaves away at night for its masters. In this context, furthermore, the angry dramas during which ritual murderers are identified often become sites of public divination. As they unfold, the accusers discuss, attribute cause, and give voice to their understanding of the forces that make the postcolony such an inhospitable place for them. This is an extreme situation, obviously. But in less stark circumstances, too, these economies tend to spawn simultaneous strivings to garner wealth and to put a stop to those who do so by allegedly misbegotten means.

    As all this suggests, appeals to the occult in pursuit of the secrets of capital generally rely on local cultural technologies: on vernacular modes of divination or oracular consultation, spirit possession or ancestral invocation, sorcery bust- ing or forensic legal procedures, witch beliefs or prayer. But the use of these technologies does not imply an iteration of, a retreat into, “tradition.” On the con- trary, their deployment in such circumstances is frequently a means of fashioning new techniques to preserve older values by retooling culturally familiar signs and practices. As in cargo cults of old, this typically involves the mimicking of pow- erful new means of producing wealth (Comaroff and Comaroff 1993: xv–xvi).

    In short, the rise of occult economies—amidst and alongside more conven- tional modes of economic practice that shade into the murky domains of crime and corruption—seems overdetermined. This, after all, is an age in which the extravagant promises of millennial capitalism run up against an increasingly nihilistic, thoroughly postmodern pessimism; in which the will to consume out- strips the opportunity to earn; in which, relatively speaking, there is a much higher velocity of exchange than there is of production. As the connections between means and ends become more opaque, more distended, more mysteri- ous, the occult becomes an ever more appropriate, semantically saturated metaphor for our times. Not only has it become commonplace to pepper media parlance, science-speak, psychobabble, and technologese with the language of enchantment; even the drear argot of the law is showing signs of the same thing.34 And we all remember voodoo economics, that Reagan-era insult to the rationality of Caribbean ritual practice. But, we insist, occult economies are not reducible to the symbolic, the figurative, or the allegorical. Magic is, everywhere, the science of the concrete, aimed at making sense of and acting upon the world—especially, but not only, among those who feel themselves disempow- ered, emasculated, disadvantaged. The fact that the turn to enchantment is not unprecedented, that it has precursors in earlier times, makes it no less significant to those for whom it has become an integral part of everyday reality. Maybe, too, all this describes a fleeting phase in the long, unfinished history of capitalism. But that makes it no less momentous.

    Of all the enchantments that accompanied the First Coming of Capitalism, perhaps the most perduring was nationalism. And the nation-state, a political community—conjured always out of difference, often against indifference— that gave the Durkheimean conscience collective a distinctive, effervescent twist. Recently, as everyone knows, there has been much talk of its death, especially with the end of the Age of Empire, the close of the Cold War, and the onset of the postcolonial era; it is as if the Treaty of Westphalia has finally given way to the Failure of the West. We shall consider this view, and the articulate dissent it has provoked, in a moment. What is beyond question, however, is that the Second Coming, the dawning Age of Millennial Capitalism, has had complex, controver- sial effects on the present and future of the nation-state.

    Alien-Nation, Hyphen-Nation, Desti-Nation: The Future of the Nation-State and the Fetishism of Law In its broad outlines, the scholarly debate over the current condition of the nation-state — the definite, singular article — has become something of a cliché. The thesis that the hyphenated modernist polity is being dramatically subverted, doomed even, has been rehearsed ad infinitum, with varying degrees of nuance; aspects of it have been foreshadowed in what we have already said.

    Nation-states, from this vantage, have been rendered irrelevant by world mar- ket forces (1) because capital has become uncontrollable and keeps moving, at its own velocity, to sites of optimum advantage; (2) because the global workforce has become ever more mobile as job seekers, increasingly managed by private agen- cies, migrate ever further in pursuit of even the most menial of jobs, under even the most feudal of conditions;35 and (3) because these human flows seem, in vary- ing proportions, to elude surveillance, despite the highly repressive mechanisms often put into place to monitor national frontiers. Under such conditions, it is said, state regulation of both capital and labor becomes obsolete, impossible; so, too, do fiscal designs that run counter to the mechanisms of global markets and/or the imperatives of global corporations. As Paul Hirst and Grahame Thompson (1996: 175–76), who argue the antithesis, put it, “[States] can no longer independently affect the levels of economic activity or employment within their territories. . . . [Their] job is to provide the infrastructure and public goods needed at the lowest possible cost.”

    In its historical framing, this thesis sees the leitmotif of the twentieth century as the “battle between government and the marketplace” (Yergin and Stanislaw 1998), the latter winning out to the point that “public sectors are shrinking, deregulation is everyone’s priority, state companies are being auctioned off to private investors, and Wall Street is the most powerful influence on economies everywhere” (Garten 1998: 7). As Sassen (n.d.: 4–5) notes, this perspective casts the strength of the nation-state in a zero-sum opposition to the global economy —note, not to neoliberal capitalism, nor globalization tout court, but to the global economy. Where one gains, the other must lose. Thus, says Robert Ross (1990: 206–7, 218), until recently the regulatory role of national governments expanded progressively. Now, however, corporations are able to prevail on states “to restrain regulations, cut taxes, and allocate more public funds toward subsidizing production costs,” which puts “global capital in a position to demand changes in state policy” (211, emphasis ours). Taken together, this adds up to the prognosis that, “in the long run, the power of the state, of centralized government, will weaken everywhere, an inevitability which will change profoundly the very tex- ture of history” (Lukacs 1993: 157).

    In all this, as will be clear, it is the workings of transnational corporations, and especially the mobility of their productive operations, that are held account- able for the imminent demise of the nation-state. Others have also laid causal stress on the fiscal mechanics of the world economy, in particular on their tech- nological transformations. Joel Kurtzman (1993), for example, holds that the growth of a global electronic economy—based on an “electronic commons” in which virtual money and commodities may be exchanged instantly via an unreg- ulated world network of computers—has shattered the integrity of sovereign polities (85–86, 214–15): it has eroded their monopolistic control over the money supply, their capacity to contain wealth within borders, and even their ability to tax citizens or corporations. From this perspective, the emergence of a global economy is said to be undermining the nation-state by deconstructing currency, credit, and customs boundaries—which formerly gave governments a major means of control over the wealth of their nations—by creating mobile markets across the planet, thus dispersing the production and circulation of value. Which is why, it is so commonly said, many states are finding it impossible to meet the material demands placed upon them by their citizenry or to carry out effective economic development policies; why few can adequately house, feed, school, and ensure the health of their populations; why even fewer can see their way clear to settling their national debt or reducing their deficits; why only a handful can be confident about the replacement of infrastructure over the medium term; why almost none have the capacity to control their money supply, let alone flows of goods and people; and why a growing number have shown a startling inability to regulate violence.

    The thesis has also been argued in terms other than the simply economic, of course. The eroding boundedness of the nation-state, its loss of sovereignty as a commonwealth of signs, has been variously attributed, not least on the pages of this journal, to the impact of planetary cultural flows and electronic media (see e.g., Appadurai 1990; Hannerz 1989: 69–70; Moore 1989; Foster 1991); to the assertive spread of transnational communities, social movements, and identities; to the universalization of many aspects of the law (if not of justice; Silbey 1997: 209), the expansion of tribunals that subject national jurisdictions to supranational ones (Darian-Smith 1995, 1999), and the rise of an intercontinental commercial arbitra- tion establishment (Garth and Dezalay 1996); to “worldkill,” the commodification of violence that makes it possible for corporations, political blocs, shadow states, or nations to rent soldiers on the Internet, to arrange for the application of force in breach of sovereign borders, even to buy a coup from a multinational company (John L. Comaroff 1996);36 to the shift in dominant patterns of warfare from confrontations between countries to civil conflicts that tend to trans-localize themselves, to kill higher proportions of civilians than ever before, and to feed an arms industry that has metamorphosed from a highly regulated import-export business to a global trade in illicit gun-running;37 to the assimilation of many of the traditional functions of government either into the private sector or into supranational combinations.

    As Peregrine Worsthorne recently noted, in an essay tellingly entitled “Farewell to England’s Nation State,” the “only area where [the country] remains independent and sovereign is sport.” On which Patriotic Front, he adds laconi- cally, “miserable results say all that needs to be said.” Even here, labor has become a mobile commodity as citizens of convenience take the field in acquired (“naturalized”) colors; although it is true that this is perhaps the most significant, sentiment-inspiring, trauma-inducing site of national effervescence in many parts of the world.38 In every other domain, Worsthorne continues, English institu- tions, all of them dysfunctional, have been replaced by more effective interna- tional or global ones. “But who cares?” he asks. “It is time to change our think- ing.”39 This from a notable public intellectual, in Britain’s most widely read conservative newspaper, about England, self-appointed cradle of modernity, democracy, and the state—not some struggling postcolony still trying to throw off the effects of the Age of Empire.

    Some do care—and are not prepared to give up so easily on the salience of the nation-state. It is not yet time, says Khachig Tölölyan (1991: 5), “to write [its] . . . obituary.” Turner (n.d.: 25), for one, argues that the “development of the global capitalist system” has “not led to any withering away of the state” at all. Quite the opposite, the relevance of “[nation-]state boundaries” has been height- ened; contemporary states, especially successful ones, still “attempt to regulate, encourage or obstruct flows of workers, capital and commodities across their bor- ders” (25). In stark contrast to the likes of Kurtzman, Turner also speaks of the perceived “need for national economies to remain competitive under global con- ditions” (23–24); a far cry, this, from the notion that there no longer is any such thing. Similarly Hirst and Thompson (1996: 17): “The globalization of produc- tion,” they hold, “has been exaggerated.” Companies, of which few are truly to remain so” (2). Also overstated are claims for “the dominance of world mar- kets and their ungovernability” (6); in point of fact, financial flows and trade are concentrated in the “triad” of North America, Europe, and Japan (2). Here, in a nutshell, is the countercase.

    This antithetical position has a nontrivial political dimension for its advocates, especially those on the left. To the degree that globalization dissolves the sover- eign nation-state into a sea of planetary economic forces and legal jurisdictions, it would appear to negate any real prospect of progressive or proletarian politics— be they international or intranational—as they would have no terrain on which to occur, no concrete object in terms of which to frame itself, no obvious target against which to act (cf. Hirst and Thompson 1996: 1; Ahmad 1992: 317).40 We share the concern. As it is, there is a strong argument to be made that neoliberal capitalism, in its millennial moment, portends the death of politics by hiding its own ideological underpinnings in the dictates of economic efficiency: in the fetishism of the free market, in the inexorable, expanding “needs” of business, in the imperatives of science and technology. Or, if it does not conduce to the death of politics, it tends to reduce them to the pursuit of pure interest, individual or collective—or to struggles over issues (the environment, abortion, health care, child welfare, human rights) that, important though they may be, are often, pace Jameson (1999: 47), dissociated from anything beyond themselves. It is here that the analytic case for the sustained salience of the modernist polity merges into the normative case for its desirability.

    A parenthetic comment here. There are those who would muddy the argument by pointing out that the notion of a strong nation-state has always been some- thing of a fantasy. This on three grounds: the state, the nation, and the hyphen. Recall, in respect of the first, Philip Abrams (1988: 75–77), for whom the state was always “the distinctive collective misrepresentation of capitalist societies”: an “essentially imaginative construction,” it was, at once, a “triumph of conceal- ment” and an ongoing “ideological project.” Even more extreme is Ralph Miliband’s (1969: 49) famous claim that “the ‘state’ . . . does not, as such, exist.” Shades here of things written long ago. Philip Corrigan and Derek Sayer (1985: 7) remind us that Marx (1967) believed the state to be “in an important sense an illusion . . . : [it] is at most a message of domination—an ideological artifact attributing unity, structure and independence to the disunited, structureless and dependent workings of the practice of government.” For Weber (1946: 78), too, it was “a claim to legitimacy, a means by which politically organized subjection is simultaneously accomplished and concealed, and it is constituted in large part by the activities of institutions of government themselves” (Corrigan and Sayer, 1985: 7). A truly curious force of history, this: at once an illusion, a potent claim to authority, a cultural artifact, a present absence and an absent presence, a prin- ciple of unity masking institutional disarticulation. But nothing like the kind of essentialized “thing” that much of the current debate treats either as alive or dead. Likewise the nation: the enormous literature on the topic—both before and after Imagined Communities (Anderson 1983)—makes it abundantly clear that neither at its dawn nor in its high modernist phase was this polity homogeneous, that even its European exemplars were as different as they were alike. What is more, their capacity to regulate boundaries and to control flows—of capital and cultural property, communications and currencies, persons and information— was invariably incomplete in the face of transnational pressures and incentives. So, too, was their hold over the loyalty of their citizens and subjects. Indeed, the nation-state has always and everywhere been a work in progress, nowhere a fully realized accomplishment. The same may be said, by extension, of its hyphen- nation: of the articulation of state to nation. Polities across the planet vary hugely in both the extent to which, and the manner in which, nation and state are con- joined in them, of which more shortly.

    In part, it is just such complexities that have led to reformulations of the argu- ment from both sides—and to the opening up of a middle ground. Even those who have made the case most forcibly for the continuing relevance of the nation- state do not deny that it is undergoing transformation or that it has been weak- ened in some respects in the face of global capitalism (see, e.g., Hirst and Thomp- son 1996: 170–71). The problem, of course, is to specify how it has changed. For some, its metamorphosis is captured in an aphoristic shift, an apt metaphor for the millennial moment: Philip McMichael (1998: 113), for one, speaks of the sub- stitution of the “citizen state” for the “consumer state.” This is a polity, adds Susan Hegeman (1991: 72–73), in which identity, at all levels, is defined not merely by the consumption of objects, but also by the consumption of the past (89–91). Echoes, here, of Jean Baudrillard (1998); also of the language of national charters, in which the protection of consumers takes precedence over the protection of workers and citizens are redefined as “stakeholders.”

    More substantively, synthetic positions typically begin by deconstructing the zero-sum opposition between globalization and the autonomous functioning of nation-states. Few would continue to deny that the sovereign independence of the latter has contracted, not least in the realms of economic management, defense, and communications; that, for all their efforts to regulate the flow of labor, their hold over the mobility of people, inward or outward, has been more or less undermined; that their parliamentary politics are devoted, in increasing proportion, to safeguarding the operations of the market, to providing stable and secure environments for transnational corporations, and to attracting overseas invest- ment. In this respect, add Hirst and Thompson (1996: 179), it is also true that, without international warfare and conventional enemies, the state does become less immediately significant to its citizens; “national efficiency” (in such things as industrial growth, education, health care, welfare, and the provision of infra- structure) does diminish; and solidarity, save for sporting allegiances, does pale. At the same time and in counterpoint, Sassen (n.d.: 6–9) observes, “most global processes materialize in national territories, [largely] through national institu- tional arrangements, from legislative acts to firms.” These may be transformed in the process, but they remain perceptibly national in their location and operation. To be sure, Sassen continues, states often participate actively in setting up those fiscal and legal frameworks through which the global economy works, and with- out whose specialized instruments it could not exist—they are not just inert objects on which that economy impacts. Nor are they inert objects in the face of the emergence of regional economic spheres that breach their frontiers— whether these be officially constituted, like the Oresund Region in Scandinavia (Peebles n.d.), or spaces of unregulated activity dominated by armed factions, like the Chad Basin in West Africa. With regard to the latter, in fact, Janet Roiman (1998) demonstrates that, far from proclaiming the demise of the nation- state, these transnational networks exist in complicated, mutually perpetuating, often complicitous relations with it; this notwithstanding the fact that those who control the networks—often very powerful armed factions—compete with gov- ernment for financial and regulatory ascendancy. In doing so, they depend on the very national frontiers they transgress and the institutions of the state in order to produce wealth; conversely, the state establishes its own legitimacy, and justifies its own existence, by doing battle with these armed factions.

    It is also the case, as we have intimated, that not all nation-states submit to the demands of the global economy without some mediation or intervention; few administrations would survive if they did. Take postcolonial South Africa again: while the African National Congress (ANC) government is unreservedly commit- ted to participating in the global capitalist economy, its new labor laws seek to protect workers in ways that do not simply serve the interests of transnational business; quite the opposite, employers have protested these laws for that very reason. Whether or not they will survive, and what their effects will be over the long run, is still very much in question. But the general point of which this is an exemplary instance—that nation-states do seek to hold a measure of control over the terms on which their citizens engage with the market—will be clear. So too will the fact that the processes by which millennial capitalism is taking shape do not reduce to a simple narrative according to which the nation-state either lives or dies, ebbs or flourishes. Its impact is much more complicated, more polyphonous and dispersed, and most immediately felt in the everyday contexts of work and labor, of domesticity and consumption, of street life and media-gazing.

    This brings us back full circle to the relationship between the nation-state and millennial capitalism—which, we reiterate, is not synonymous with globalism, although globalization is an inherent part of it. Rounding off the dialectics of the argument we have just outlined, we would like to make a few points about this relationship. All flow from things already said.

    Let us begin with the most basic. There is an antinomy at the heart of the con- temporary history of the modernist polity. On one hand, there is no such thing, save at very high levels of abstraction, as “the nation-state.” Self-evidently, the sociology of the polities that exist under its sign varies dramatically. It is difficult to establish any terms in which, say, Germany and Guinea, Bhutan and Belgium, Uganda and the United States, England and Eritrea may be held to belong to any- thing but the most polythetic of categories. Nor are the substantive differences among them—differences that are growing as a result of their engagement with global capitalism—satisfactorily captured by resort to vapid oppositions, to con- ventional contrasts like rich versus poor, North versus South, successful versus unsuccessful countries. In some places, as we all know, the state can hardly be said to perdure at all, or to perdure purely as a private resource, a family busi- ness, a convenient fiction; in others, the nation, as imagined community, is little more than a rhetorical figure of speech, the color of a soccer stripe, an airline without aircraft, a university rarely open. More complicatedly, there are many postcolonial, postrevolutionary polities, not least but not only in Africa and the former Soviet Union, in which there have developed deep fissures between state and government, this being a corollary of the transition from old to new regimes, in which, as often as not, the power brokers, bureaucrats, and administrative per- sonnel of the past are either left in situ—typically to ensure the confidence of foreign investors—or succeed in finding less visible ways to keep their hands on the levers of authority. Almost invariably, this sets in motion a struggle into which neoliberal capitalist enterprise inserts itself, often with decisive effects. On occasion, too, as in Russia (Ries 1999), organized crime seizes on that struggle to fashion itself into a spectral, underground para-state, providing civic amenities and policing on a fee-for-service basis (cf. Derrida 1994: 83). This, in turn, leads to the popular impression that government has retreated, that order has evapo- rated, that the nation-state is no longer.

    On the other hand, despite this variability in their political sociology, nation- states appear, at least in their exterior forms, to be more similar than ever before, converging on the same notions of the rule of law, enacting similar constitutions, speaking more and more English, borrowing from a single stock of signs and symbols, worshipping together at the altar of Adam Smith, and, yes, all alike dealing with the impact of the global economy—as well as the sense of crisis, real or imagined, to which its implosion has given rise. Even the strongest, for reasons we have spelled out, find themselves hard put to sustain past levels of public expenditure and/or the costs of infrastructural reproduction. Many of them, moreover, have been witness both to calls for “less government” and to a widening rupture in their hyphen-nation; in the disarticulation, that is, between nation and state. Indeed, the assertion of civil society against the state, itself a burgeoning global phenomenon, is just one symptom of that disarticulation. Of, so to speak, alien-nation. Again, none of this is unprecedented. Throughout their history, states have suffered legitimation crises, been held to account for exces- sive public spending, and had to deal with threats to the integrity of the political community. That, however, does not diminish their significance in the white heat of the millennial moment.

    The millennial moment.

    As the term suggests, it is out of the current sense of change and crisis, especially in its impact on the hyphen-nation of the modernist polity, that the millennial dimensions of millennial capitalism reenter our narrative in two ways.

    First, it is striking that almost everywhere that occult economies have arisen, the perceived need to resort to magical means of producing wealth is blamed, in one way or another, on the inability of the state to assure its national citizens a regular income: to protect them from destitution as productive employment migrates away across its borders; to stop the inflow of immigrants and others who divert the commonweal away from autochthons; to incarcerate criminals, witches, and other nefarious characters who spoil the world for upright, hard- working people. The state is also held culpable for failing to safeguard those upright people from violence. To wit, when communal action is taken—in the name of informal justice, cultural policing, or whatever—against those who ply the immoral economy, it is often in the millennial hope of restoring coherence and control in a world run amok, of filling the void left by the withdrawal of the state and making good on its sundered obligation to the nation (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999d).

    Second, in the face of the same rupture, there is a strong tendency for states to appeal to new or intensified magicalities and fetishes in order to heal fissures and breaches in the fabric of the polity. Here, again, an interpolation: recall our com- ments on the question of identity. For reasons alluded to earlier (and explored in extenso elsewhere; John L. Comaroff 1996) one of the most notable corollaries of the changing face of nationhood in the neoliberal age, and especially after 1989, has been an explosion of identity politics. Under these conditions, imagining the nation rarely presumes a “deep horizontal fraternity” any longer, not even in what once regarded themselves as the most undifferentiated of polities. While the vast major- ity continue to live as citizens in nation-states, they tend to be only conditionally, partially, and situationally citizens of nation-states. Ethnic struggles, ranging from polite altercations over resources to genocidal combat, seem immanent almost everywhere as membership is claimed on the double front of innate substance and primordial sentiment, as culture becomes intellectual property (Coombe 1998), as indigenous knowledge becomes an object of commerce, as aboriginal spirituality becomes the site of a consumerist quest (Povinelli, in this issue), as self-imagin- ings, visual representations, even genes become copyright incarnate.41 In the event, homogeneity—as “national fantasy” (Berlant 1991), national aspiration (Anderson 1983), national imperative—is giving way rapidly to a recognition of the irre- ducibility of difference. All of which puts even greater stress on hyphen-nation; all of which presses even more the necessity of finding its millennial key. The more diverse nation-states become in their political sociology, the higher the level of abstraction at which “the nation-state” exists, the greater the imperative to find that key. By their very nature, as David Harvey (1989: 108) notes, modernist states had always “to construct a . . . sense of community . . . based on [more than] money,” and, hence, to conjure up “a definition of public interests over and above the [bour- geois] class and sectarian interests” they served. They still have to fabricate that sense of community. But, with the displacement of class, the interests that they have now to encompass lie in cultural and other forms of identity.

    That states rely on magical means to succeed in the work of hyphen-nation, of articulating nationhood, is a point recently made by Michael Taussig (1997) and Fernando Coronil (1997), each in his own way. A resort to mass-mediated ritual both to produce state power and national unity and to persuade citizens of their reality is epidemic in the age of millennial capitalism—in rough proportion, per- haps, to populist perceptions of crisis, to the inability of governments to sustain their monopoly over the means of violence and the flow of wealth, and to the alien-nation of their subjects. Thus, suggests Eric Worby (1998: 560), in those parts of Africa where the hold of ruling cadres is tenuous at best, executive authority has become dependent on the performance of quotidian ceremonial, extravagant in its dramaturgy and improvisational content alike, to ensure the collusion of citizen-subjects. The latter, he goes on (562; after Mbembe 1992a: 3–4), live with the state in a promiscuous hybrid of accommodation and refusal, power and parody, embodiment and detachment. This, in turn, tends to rob “the public” of its vitality and, reciprocally, vulgarizes the political—with it, nation- hood as well—reducing it to a chimera, which creates the need for yet more magic.

    Here, it seems, lies the key to the magicality of the state in the age of millen- nial capitalism. It is not just that ruling regimes resort to theatrical display or to illusion to conjure up the present and future of the political community, its desti- nation; this has always been true, from Elizabethan royal progresses (cf. Geertz 1977) to the trumped-up rites of colonial regimes (cf. Fields 1985). It is, rather, that they become caught up in cycles of ritual excess in which ceremonial enact- ments of hyphen-nation, alike in electronic space and real time, stand as alibis for realpolitik—which recedes ever further as its surfaces are visible primarily through the glassy essence of television, the tidal swirl of radio waves, the fine print of the press. By constantly narrating hyphen-nation, moreover, these cere- monial enactments tend to draw attention to its fragility, to the ineluctable differ- ences on which the body politic is built, to the divergence of interests that it must embrace. State ritual itself, then, becomes something of a pyramid scheme: the more it is indulged, the more it is required. Hence its cyclicity, its excess, its mil- lennial qualities.

    But it is not only in the register of ritual that nation-states engage with the millennial. Another crucial dimension is the fetishism of the law, of the capacity of constitutionalism and contract, rights and legal remedies, to accomplish order, civility, justice, empowerment. Like all fetishes, the chimerical quality of this one lies in an enchanted displacement, in the notion that legal instruments have the capacity to orchestrate social harmony. This misses a point once cogently made, in prose fiction, by Carlos Fuentes (1992), namely that power produces rights, not rights power; that law in practice, by extension, is a social product, not a prime mover in constructing social worlds. Still, like many fetishes—including the “free” market itself—this one continues to survive its repeated demystification. The modernist nation-state has, from the first, been grounded in a culture of legality. Its spirit, with a nod to Montesquieu, has always been the spirit of the law. Globalization and the growth of neoliberal capitalism intensify this by an order of magnitude. The latter, because of its contractarian conception of human relations, property relations, and exchange relations, its commodification of almost everything, and its celebration of deregulated private exchange, all of which are heavily invested in a culture of legality.42 The former, because of the way in which it demands new institutional modes of regulation and arbitration to deal with new forms of property, practice, and possession—as well as with the abrogation of old jurisdictional lines and limits (cf. Jacobson 1996; Salacuse 1991; Shapiro 1993). But the fetishism of the law goes way beyond this.
    In situations of ruptured hyphen-nation, situations in which the world is con- structed out of apparently irreducible difference, the language of the law affords an ostensibly neutral medium for people of difference—different cultural worlds, different social endowments, different material circumstances, differ- ently constructed identities—to make claims on each other and the polity, to enter into contractual relations, to transact unlike values, and to deal with their conflicts. In so doing, it forges the impression of consonance amidst contrast, of the existence of universal standards that, like money, facilitate the negotiation of incommensurables across otherwise intransitive boundaries.43 Hence its capacity, especially under conditions of moral and cultural disarticulation, to make one thing out of many, illocutionary force out of illusion, concrete realities out of often fragile fictions. Hence, too, its hegemony, despite the fact that it is hardly a guarantor of equity. As an instrument of governance, it allows the state to repre- sent itself as the custodian of civility against disorder: as having a mandate to conjure moral community by exercising the monopoly of which Harvey (1989: 108) spoke—a monopoly over the construction of a commonweal out of inimi- cal, immanently fractious diversities of interest. This, in large part, is reflected in the rash of new constitutions written since the late 1980s. If law underpins the langue of neoliberalism, constitutionalism has become the parole of universal human rights, a global argot that individuates the citizen and, by making cultural identity a private asset rather than a collective claim, transmutes difference into likeness. It is an open question whether or not these constitutions yield any empowerment at all. (Interestingly, the celebrated South African one has recently been dubbed a Tower of Babel: it is utterly incomprehensible in the vernaculars of those whom it was supposed to enfranchise.44) After all, as we have said, not one of them actually speaks of an entitlement to the means of survival. They do not guarantee the right to earn or to produce, only to possess, to signify, to consume, to choose. This is consistent not only with the neoliberal mood of the millennium but also with another of its panaceas: the renaissance of procedural democracy, a “universal human right” that transposes freedom into choice by offering empowerment through the ballot—the black box that reduces politics to the rough equivalent of a quinquennial shopping spree (Comaroff and Comaroff 1997)—all in the name of the rule of law, of its magical capacity to promise new beginnings.

    But cultures of legality, constitutionality, right, and democracy speak primar- ily to the question of hyphen-nation, to moral community and citizenship, from the discursive vantage of the state and its functionaries. From the other side of the hyphen, from the side of “society against the state,” there has emerged another, complementary discourse of populist, millennial optimism: civil society.

    Postnative, Posthuman, Postscript: Civil Society in Pursuit of the Millennium

    More than any other sign, perhaps, civil society has surfaced as the Big Idea of the Millennial Moment;45 indeed, as an all-purpose panacea for the postmodern, postpolitical, postnative, even “posthuman” condition.46 Its recent genealogy, before and after 1989, is too well known to detain us here (see, e.g., Walzer 1992; Cohen and Arato 1994; Krygier 1997), save to say that the more of a global obsession it has become, the less clear it is what the term might actually mean— as a concrete object(ive), as an abstract concept, or as a political practice. Civil society, it seems, is known primarily by its absence, its elusiveness, its incom- pleteness, from the traces left by struggles conducted in its name. More aspira- tion than achievement, it retreats before the scrutinizing gaze. For all those, like Václav Havel (n.d.), who seek a way Toward a Civil Society, there are others who deny the point of so doing. Why? Some, like Michael Hardt (1995: 27), argue that we are already in the “postcivil society” era, an era incapable of producing the conditions of its possibility. Others simply dismiss it as an inherently polymor- phous, inchoate, unspecifiable signifier. Worse yet, it is said to conflate an ana- lytic construct with an ideological trope, thus rendering the former promiscuous and the latter vacuous (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999a).

    In spite of this, civil society has served as a remarkably potent battle cry across the world. During inhospitable times, it reanimates the optimistic spirit of modernity, providing scholars, public figures, poets, and ordinary people alike a language with which to talk about democracy, moral community, justice, and populist politics; with which, furthermore, to breathe life back into “soci- ety,” declared dead almost twenty years ago by the powerful magi of the Sec- ond Coming, especially Maggie Thatcher. Amidst fin de siècle cynicism and retrospection, protagonists of civil society look bravely toward a new world. True, their idyll has been disparaged for its excessive Eurocentrism, for its naive liberalism, for re-presenting old-style imperialism in a seductive new garb, and for the manner of its export by such latter-day evangelists as non- governmental organizations. True, too, it has been downsized, localized, tailored to the neoliberal age; purged, in short, of global historical visions and grand emancipatory dreams (cf. Cohen and Arato 1994: xii). But, notwithstanding the skepticism, the Idea—the fetish—has worked its magic, kindling a reformist spirit all over the place as it promises rescue from the political vacuum of postmodern nihilism.

    What is it, then, about civil society that so fires the moral imagination? What makes it such a trenchant trope for these millennial times? An answer is to be found in the parallels between the history of the here and now and the history of the First Coming of the Idea in the late eighteenth century; the post-Enlightenment age in Europe, that is, that spawned the hyphenated nation-state, the concepts of political economy, culture, the civil, civility, civilization—and the distinction between “the state” and something that came to know itself as “society” (cf. Keane 1988a: 15).

    It is common cause that the world-historical conditions of the late eighteenth century embraced philosophers and everypersons alike in a phenomenology of uncertainty (Becker 1994: xii–xiv); a sense of unease occasioned by the intersec- tion of epochs, at which time the generic nature of humanity, of sociality, of self- hood and its abstraction in labor, property, and rights, of the value of things, of received means and ends was under ontological reconstruction. Though they could not have known it, they were living at the front end of an Age of Revolu- tion (Hobsbawm 1962), an age that posed profound issues of practical epistemol- ogy. Those issues were formulated, in the first instance, in political terms: they grew out of a malaise of governance, of populist opposition to absolutist rule and monarchial despotism (see, e.g., Woods 1992: 79; Keane 1988b: 65).

    But behind the surfaces of the political were working much more fundamen- tal processes of reconstruction: those attendant upon the advance of capitalism and commodity relations; upon the birth of the right-bearing citizen-subject; upon the empowerment of the bourgeoisie and the emergence of a public “with its own opinion[s]” and “interests” (Taylor 1990: 108; cf. Habermas 1989); upon the dawn of modernist nationhood; upon the rise of what Crawford Macpherson (1962) was famously to dub “possessive individualism.” In light of these processes, the problem of “the social” presented itself with particular force. How, given the erosion of old ways of being and knowing—not to mention the expand- ing scale and cumulative abstraction of human relations—was the present and future of “society” to be grasped? Wherein lay its moral, material, and regulatory moorings? It became imperative, says Tester (1992: 7), to “explain how society was [even] possible” in a world in which “time-honoured answers were collaps- ing through mixtures of political crisis, intellectual enlightenment, technological development and the . . . rapid urbanization of social life”; in which new, national divisions of labor were taking root amidst the encroachment on everything of finance; in which the sanctity of the family was seen to be at risk; in which peo- ple, things, and nature (cf. Coronil, in this issue) were being objectified in an altogether unprecedented manner. In which the prospect of Adam Smith’s face- less “society of strangers” stalked disturbingly close to hand—novel specters of a haunted gothic fiction dramatized the strangeness of what had become real (Clery 1995: 174).

    It is not hard to see why, at the time, discourses of civil society, in both their analytic and utopic registers, should have focused on the issues that they did: on the relationship between state (or, more generally, political authority) and soci- ety; on the posited existence, in the space between the citizen and the sovereign polity, of an interpolated public with its own will; on the role of voluntary asso- ciations in providing alternative loci for the achievement of the commonweal; on a democratizing image of self-generating moral community, whose elemental atom was the Christian family; on the significance of the free market in under- writing the prosperity of that community; on the capacity of commerce to inscribe civility in a new civics. Foreshadowing here of Hegel, Simmel, Durkheim and Habermas.

    The parallels with the present are more than obvious; indeed, they knit together all the various strands of our portrait of the Age of Millennial Capital- ism. Now, as then, the call for civil society typically presents itself as an emanci- patory reaction to a familiar doubling: on one hand, to the greater opacity, intrusive- ness, and monopolistic tendencies of government; on the other, to its diminishing capacity “to satisfy even minimally the political and economic aspirations” of its component publics (Haynes 1997: 16), to guarantee the commonweal, or to meet the needs of its citizenry. Thus, for example, in Central Europe the pursuit of the Idea, which took on millennial features from the first, is said to have arisen in response to increasingly repressive communist rule—and in postcolonial times, to have been sustained by the memory of Soviet excesses (see, e.g., Rupnik 1988; Krygier 1997). In the West, a cause for it has been found in burgeoning corpo- ratism of the state (Taylor 1990: 95–96) and a disenchantment with politics tout court. And in Africa it is ascribed to the rise of antistatist, promarket populism occasioned by the collapse of totalitarian regimes (Young 1994: 36), whose “pol- itics of the belly” (Bayart 1993) and vulgar spectacles of power (Mbembe 1992b) persuaded citizens that governments no longer “champion society’s collective interests” (Haynes 1997: 2).

    But this, too, speaks purely to surfaces. Now, as then, the roots of the process lie deeper: in the interiors, and the animating forces, of the Age of Millennial Capitalism—in particular, in its impulse to displace political sovereignty with the sovereignty of “the market,” as if the latter had a mind and a morality of its own; to reorder the ontology of production and consumption; to reconstruct the essence of labor, identity, and subjectivity; to disarticulate the nation from the state; to reduce difference to sameness by recourse to the language of legality; to elevate to first causes “value-free” technological necessity and the ostensibly neutral demands of economy; to treat government as immanently undesirable, except insofar as it deregulates or protects “market forces”; to fetishize “the law” as a universal standard in terms of which incommensurable sorts of value—of relationship, rights, and claims — may be mediated; to encourage the rapid move- ment of persons and goods, and sites of fabrication, thus calling into question existing forms of community; to equate freedom with choice, especially to con- sume, to fashion the self, to conjure with identities; to give free reign to the “forces” of hyperrationalization; to parse human beings into free-floating labor units, commodities, clients, stakeholders, strangers, their subjectivity distilled into ever more objectified ensembles of interests, entitlements, appetites, desires, purchasing “power.” And so to raise the most fundamental question of all: In what consists the social? Society? Moral community?

    Here, then, is our point. As in the late eighteenth century, and in strikingly similar fashion, the Idea of Civil Society makes its appearance just as the fabric of the social, the possibility of society, the ontological core of humanity, the nature of social distinction, and the essence of identity are being dramatically challenged; just as we experience an epochal metamorphosis in the organization of production, labor, and the market, in technology and its sociocultural implica- tions, in the constitutive connections between economy and polity, nation and state, culture and place, person, family, and community; just as we find it impos- sible to sustain the dominant terms of modernist sociology-as-lived, of received anthropologies of knowledge, of our geographical grasp of an increasingly four- dimensional world (Harvey, in this issue). Amidst populist moral panics, mass- mediated alienation, crises of representation, and scholarly perplexity, Civil Society, in its Second Coming, once more becomes especially “good to think,” to signify with, to act upon. The less substance it has, the emptier its referents, the more this is so; which is why its very polyvalence, its ineluctable unfixability, is intrinsic to its power as panacea. It is the ultimate magic bullet in the Age of Mil- lennial Capitalism. For it promises to conjure up the most fundamental thing of all: a meaningful social existence. And, thereby, to lay to rest—for now at least — Adam Smith’s ghostly phantasm: the Society of Strangers.

    ✦✦✦

    We have argued that many of the enigmatic features of economy and society circa 2000—be they the allegorical transfiguration of the nation-state, the assertive stridency of racinated adolescence, the crisis of masculinity, the apoth- eosis of consumption, the fetishism of civil society, the enchantments of everyday life—are concrete, historically specific outworkings of millennial capitalism and the culture of neoliberalism. For all their apparent polysemy and disarticulation, these things are closely interrelated, all at once rooted in the past and new in the present. Together, they point to the fact that we inhabit an age that is both revo- lutionary and yet is also an ongoing chapter in the story of capital, a story that, in Theodor Adorno’s (1981: 96) phrase, “sound[s] so old, and yet [is] so new.” Despite the proclamations of neoliberal prophets, history has not come to an end. Nor will it soon. As Felipe Fernandez-Armesto (1999) puts it, “Millenarianism will survive the millennium.” Today’s apocalypse will become tomorrow’s mun- dane reality, laying down the terms of a dialectic out of which human beings will struggle to make sense of the world, to make livelihoods, politics, communities.

    Already there are signs of altered configurations, of fresh efforts to challenge the triumphal reign of the market, to turn aside the sweeping consequences of transnational economic pressures. In the wake of fragmenting national identities, Turner (n.d.) observes, newly assertive social movements have begun to pursue common cause on a world scale, forging an alternative, critical “global civil soci- ety.” It is too early, patently, to take the measure of their success. But their “pas- sionate intensity,” to invoke the spirit of Yeats one last time, might yet kindle the mature politics of a new age; “the worst” might yet become the best. There are also signs that organized labor is seeking expansive ways and means to deal with the emergent economic order. Thus a leading unionist: “The end of the century is the starting point of . . . an international labor fightback. . . . Global unionism is born.”47

    We can only hope. History, of course, will determine the substance of the poli- tics of the twenty-first century. For our part, we find it unimaginable that innovative forms of emancipatory practice will not emerge to address the excesses of neolib- eral capitalism. But that is in the future. For now, in introducing this special issue of Public Culture—a rich array of analyses of, among other things, economy and society, the production of knowledge, the fashioning of public spheres and popular discourses, the nature of nature, citizenship, subjectivity, and identity—we seek to stress the epistemic importance of critical distance. Of a refusal, that is, to be seduced into treating the ideological tropes and surface forms of the culture of neoliberalism—its self-representations and subjective practices, identities and utilities—as analytic constructs. Life, under millennial capitalism, is neither a game nor a repertoire of rational choices. It is irreducible to the utilitarian prag- matics of law and economy or to methodological individualisms of one kind or another. Indeed, these and other theoretical discourses are part of the problem. Critical disbelief, in pursuit of a reinvigorated praxis, is the beginning of a solution.

  • Alien-Nation

    Alien-Nation

    What might zombies have to do with the implosion of neoliberal capitalism at the end of  the twentieth century? What might  they  have to do with post–colonial, post-revolu­tionary nationalism? With labour history? With the “crisis” of the modernist nation-state? Why are these spec­tral, floating signifiers making ;in appearance in epic, epidemic pro­portions in several parts of Africa just now? And why have immigrants­ those wanderers in pursuit of work, whose proper place is always elsew-

    • here-become pariah citizens of a global order in which, paradoxically, old  borders are said everywhere  to be dissolving? What, indeed, do any of these things, which bear the dis­tinct taint of exoticism, tell us about the hard-edged material, cultural, epistemic realities of our times? Indeed, why pose such apparently perverse questions at all when our social world abounds with practical problems of immediate, unremitting gravitas?

    So much for the questions. We shall cycle slowly back toward their ans­ wers. Let us move, first, from the interrogative to the indicative, from the conundrums with which we shall be concerned to the circumstances whence they arise.

    Spectral capital, capitalist speculation: From production to Consumption

    Consumption

    In the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries it was the hallmark illness of the First Coming of Industrial Capitalism. Of the age in which the ecological conditions of production, its consuming passions (Sontag1978; cf Comaroff 1997), ate up the bodies of producers. Now, at the end of the twentieth, semantically trans­posed into another key, it has be­come, in the words of van Binsbergen and Geschiere (n.d.:3), the “hallmark of modernity”. Of its wealth, health, and vitality. Too vast a generalization? Maybe. But the claim captures popular imaginings, and their mass-media representation, from across the planet. It also reso­ nates with the growing Eurocultural truism that the (post) modern  per­ son is a subject made by means of objects. Nor is this surprising.

    Consumption, in its ideologicai guise-as   “consumerism”-refers    to a material sensibility actively cultiva­ ted, ostensibly for the common good, by Western states and com­ mercial interests, particularly since World War II.’ In social theory, as well, it has become a Prime Mover (loc. cit.), the force that determines definitions of value, the construction of identities, even the shape of the global ecumene.’ As such, tellingly, it is the invisible hand  that animates the political and material impera­ tives, and the social forms, of the Second Coming of Capitalism; of capitalism in its neoliberal, global manifestation. Note the image: the invisible hand. It recalls a moving spirit of older vintage. a numinous force that dates back to the Time of Adam. Adam Smith, that is. Cone is the deus ex machina, a figure too mechanistic, too industrial for the post-Fordist era.

    – consumption has become the moving spirit of the late twentieth century, so there has been a concomi­tant eclipse of production; an eclipse, at least, of its perceived salience for the wealth of nations. With this has come a hidespread shift, across the world, in ordinary understandings of the nature of capitalism. The work­ place and honest labour, especially work-and-place securely rooted in local community, are no longer prime sites for the creation of value. Per contra, the factory and the workshop, far from secure centres of fabrication and family income, are incrtasingly experienced byvirtueof their closure: either by their removal to somewhere else-where labour is cheaper, less assertive, less taxed, more feminized, less protected by states and unions-­ or by their replacement by non­ human means of manufacture, which, in turn, has left behind, for ever more people, a legacy of part­ time piece work, menial make work, relatively insecure, gainless occupa­ tion. For many populations, in the upshot, production appears to have been replaced, as the Jons et ongo of capital, by the provision of services and the capacity to control space, time, and the now of money. In short, by the market and by speculation.

    Symptomatic, in this respect, are the changing historical fortunes of gam­ bling. Until very recently, living off its proceeds was, normatively spea­ king, the epitome of immoral accu­ mulation; the wager stood to the wage, the bet to personal  better­ ment, as did sin to virtue. Now it is routinized in a widespread infatua­ tion with, and  popular participation in financial “investments” that take the form of vast, high risk dealings in stocks and bonds and funds whose rise and fall appear to be governed purely by chance. It also expresses itself in a fascination with  futures and with their downmarket counter­ part, the lottery; banal, if symbolical­ ly saturated fantasies these of abun­dance without effort, of beating capitalism on its own terms by drawing a winning number at the behest of unseen forces.’ Once again thal, invi­ sible hand. At a time when taxes are anathema lo the majoritarian politi­cal centre, gambling has become a favoured means of raising revenues, of generating cultural and social assets, in what were once welfare states. Some even talk or the ascen­ dance of “casino capitalism”. Argues Susan Strange (1986:1-3; cf. Harvey 1989:332; Tomasic 1991), who likens the entire Western fiscal order to an immense game of luck, undignified even by probability “theory”:

    Something rather radical has happened to the international financial system to  make it so much like a gambling hall. V. iat that change has been, and how it has come about, are not clear. What is certain is thatit has affected everyone … [It] has made inveterate, and largely involuntar)’. gam­ blers of us all.

    The gaming room, in other words, has become iconic of the central impetus of capital: its capacity to make its own vitality and increase seem independent of all human labour (Hardt 1995: 39), to seem like the natural yield of exchange and consumption.

    Something rather radical has hap­ pened to the international financial system to make it so much like agam­ blinghall. What that change has been, and how it has come about, are not clear.

    And yet crisis after crisis in the global economy, and growing income dis­parities on a planetary scale, make it painfully plain that there is no such thing as capitalism sans production; that the neoliberal stress on consumption as the ur-source  of value is palpably problematic. At once in perception, in theory, in practice. Indeed, if scholars have been slow to reflect on the fact, people all over the world-not least those in places where there  have been sudden infusions of commodi­ties, of wealth without  work-have not. Many have been quick to give voice, albeit in different registers, to their perplexity at the enigma of this wealth. Of its origin and the capri­ciousness of its distribution, of the opaque, even occult, relation bet­ween means and ends embodied in it

    (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999; van Binsbergen and Geschiere n.d. :3). Our concern in this paper grows, directly out or these perplexities, these imaginings: out of world-wide speculation, in both senses of the term, at the spectres conjured up by real or imagined changes in the conditions of material existence at the end of the twentieth century.

    We seek here, in a nutshell, to inter­ rogate the experiential contradic­tion at the core or neoliberal capita­lism in its global manifestation: the fact that it appears to offer up vast, almost instantaneous riches to those who control its technologies-and, simultaneously, to threaten the very livelihood of those who do not. More specifically. our objective is to exp­ lore the ways in which this conun­drum is resolved, the ways in which the enchantments of capital are addressed, through efforts to plumb the mysterious relation of consumption to production; efforts that take a wide variety of local, culturally­ modulated forms; efforts that reveal much about the nature of economy and society, culture and  politics in the postcolonial, post-revolutionary present. As anthropologisLS are wont to do, we ground our excursion in a set of preoccupations and practices both concrete and historically parti­cular: the obsession, in rural post­ apartheid South Africa, with a rush of new commodities, currencies, and cash; with things whose acquisition is tantalizingly close, yet always just out of reach to all but those who unders­tand their perverse secrets; with the disquieting figure of the zombie, an embodied, dis-spirited phantasm widely associated, with the produc­tion, the possibility and impossibility, of these new forms of wealth. Although they are creatures of the momenL, zombies have ghostJy fore­ bears who have arisen in periods of social disruption, periods characte­ rized by sharp shifts in control over the fabrication and circulation of value, periods that also serve to illu­minate the here-and-now.

    We shall argue that the half-life of zombies in South Africa, past and present, is linked to that of compromised workers of another kind: immigrants from elsewhere on the continent, whose demonization is an equally prominent feature of the postcolonial scene. Together, these proletarian pariahs make visible a phantom history, a local chapter in a global story of changing relations of labour to capital, of production .to consumption-indeed, of the very’ pro and con of capitalism–on the cusp of the millennium. Their mani­festation here also allows us to pon­ der a paradox in the scholarly litera­ture: given that the factory model of capitalist manufacture is said now to infuse all forms of social production (e.g. Deleuze 1986), why does labour appear less and less to undergird the social order of the present epoch (Hardt 1995: 39)?

    Thus we bring you the case of the Zornbie and the (Im) Migrant; this being the sequel to an earlier inqui­ry into work, labour, and the nature of historical consciousness in South Africa (Comaroff and Comaroff 1987). But first a brief excursion into the problematic status of production in the age of global capital.

    Labour’s lost

    The emergence of consumption as a privileged site for the fashioning of society and identity, it may be argued, is integrally connected to the changing status of work under contemporary conditions. For some, the economic order of our times represents a completion of the intrinsic “project” of capital: namely, the evolution of a social formation that, as Tronti (1980:32) puts it, “does not look to labour as its dyna­mic foundation” (cf Hardt 1995:39). Others see the present moment in radically different terms. Lash and Urry (1987:232[). for instance, declare that we are witnessing not the denouement but the demise of organized capitalism; of a system in which corporate institutions could secure compromises between employers and employees by making appeal to the national interest. The internationalization of market forces, they claim, has not merely dislocated national economies and state sovereignties. lt has led to a decline in the imponance of domestic pro­duction in many once inrlustrialized countries. All of which, along with the worldwide rise of the semce sec­ tor and the feminization of the work­ force in many places, has dramatical­ly eroded the bases of proletarian identity and its politics-dispersing class relations, alliances and antino­mies, across the four comers of the earth. The globalization of the division of labour reduces workers everywhere to the lowest common denominator, to a disposable cost, compelling them to compete with sweatshop and family manufacture.’ It has also put such a distance bet­ ween sites of production and consumption that their relationship becomes all but unfathomable, save in fantasy.

    Not that Fordist fabrication has disappeared. Neither is the mutation of the labour market altogether unprecedented. For one thing,  as Marx (1967: 635) observed, the deve­lopment of capitalism has always conduced to the cumulative replace­ment of “skilled labourers by less skilled, mature labourers by imma­ture, male by female… “. For another, David Harvey (1989:192!) reminds us, the devaluation of labour power has been a traditional response to falling profits and periodic crises of commodity production. What is more, the growth of a global free market in commodities and semces has not been accompanied by a cor­respondingly free flow of workers; most nation-states still regulate their movement to a greater or lesser extent. Yet the likes of Harvey insist, nonetheless, that the current moment is different, that it evinces significant features which set it apart, rupturing the continuing history of capital-a history that   “remain (s] the same and yet-[is] constantly changing”.’ Above all else, the explo­ sion cf new monetary  instruments and markets, aided by ever more sophisticated means of planetary co­ ordination and space-time compres­ sion, have allowed the financial order to achieve a degree of autono­ my from “real production” unmatched in the annals of modern political economy. Indeed, the ever more virtual qualities of fiscal circu­lation enable the speculative side of capitalism to seem increasingly inde­pendent of manufacture, less con­strained either by the exigencies or the moral values of virtuous labour.

    The internationalization of market forces… has not merely dislocated national economles and state sove­ reignties. It has led  to a decline in the importance of domestic produc• tion in many once industrialized countries.

    How might any of this be connected to conditions in contemporary South Africa, to the widespread preoccupation there with reserve armies of spectral workers? What might we learn about the historical implications of the global age by eavesdrop­ ping on popular anxieties at this co­ordinate on the postcolonial map? How do we interpret mounting local fears about the preternatural pro­duction of wealth, about its fitful flow and occult accumulation, about the destruction of the labour market by technicians of the arcane?

    The end of  apartheid might  have fired utopian imaginations around the world with a uniquely telegenic vision of rights restored and history redeemed. But South Africa has also been remarkable for the speed with which it has run up against problems common to societies, especially to post-revolutionary societies, abruptly confronted with the prospect of libe­ration under neoliberal conditions. Not only has the miraculously peace­ful passage to democracy been marred by a disconcerting upsurge of violence and crime, both organized and  everyday. The  exemplary quest for Truth and Reconciliation  threa­tens to dissolve into recrimination and strife, even political chaos. There is widespread evidence of an uneasy fusion of enfranchisement and exclu­sion, hope and hopelessness; of a radically widening chasm between rich and poor: of the effort to realize modern utopias by decidedly post mo­dern means. Gone is any official­ speak of an egalitarian socialist future, of work-for- all, of the welfare state envisioned in the Freedom Charter that, famously, mandated the struggle against the ancien regime.’ Gone, too, are the critiques of the free mar­ket and of bourgeois ideology once voiced by the antiapartheid move­ments, their  idealism re-framed by the perceived reality of global econo­mic forces (cf. Sharp 1998:245!).” Elsewhere (1999), we have suggested that these conditions, and similar ones in other places, have conduced to a form of ‘millennial capitalism’. By this we mean not just capitalism at the millennium, but capitalism invested with salvific force: with intense faith in its capacity, if rightly harnessed, whol­ly to transform the universe of the marginalized and  disempowered.  At its most extreme, this faith is epitomi­zed by forms of money magic, ran­ging from pyramid schemes to pros­perity gospels, that pledge to deliver immense, immediate wealth by large­ly inscrutable means: in its more mun­dane manifestation, it accords the market itself an almost mystical capa­city to produce and deliver cash and commodities.

    Of course, as we intimated in spea­ king of consumption and specula­ tion, market redemption is now a world-wide creed. Yet its millennial character is decidedly more promi­nent in contexts-like  South Africa and Central Europe-where   there has been an abrupt conversion to laissez-faire capitalism from tightly regulated material and moral econo­ mies: where evocative calls for entre­preneurialism confront the  realities of marginalization in the planetary distribution of resources: where totalizing ideologies have suddenly given way to a spirit of deregulation, with its taunting mix of desire and disappointment, liberation and limitation. Individual citizens, many of them marooned by a rudderless ship of state, attempt to clamber aboard the good ship Enterprise by whatever they have at their disposal. But, in so doing, they find themselves battling the eccentric currents of the “new” world order, which forge expansive connections between the  local and the trans local, short-circuit establi­shed ways and means, disarticulate conventional relations of wealth and power, and render porous received borders, both within and between nation-states. In the vacuum left by retreating national ideologies-or, more accurately, by ideologies increasingly contested in the name of identity politics-people in these societies are washed over by a flood of mass media from across the earth; media depicting a cargo of animated objects and life-styles that affirm the neoliberal message of freedom and self-realization through consump­tion.

    In the vacuum left by retreating natio­ nal ideologies–or, more accurately, by ideologies increasingly contested in thename of identity politics­ people in these societies are washed over by a flood of mass media from across the earth; media depicting a cargo of animated objects and life­ styles that affirm the neoliberal mes­sage of freedom and self-realization through consumption.

    Under such conditions, where images of desire are as pervasive as they are inaccessible, it is only to be expected that there would be an intensification of efforts to make sense of the hidden logic of supply and demand, to restore some trans­ parency to the relation between pro­ duction and value, work and wealth. Also to multiply modes of accumula­tion, both fair and foul. The occult economies of many postcolonial societies (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999), and the spectacular rise within them of organized crime, are alike features of millennial capita­lism, disturbing caricatures of mar­ket enterprise in motion, of the impetus to acquire vast fortunes without ordinary labour costs. Yet, distinctive as they are, the conditions of which we speak here are not unprecedented. In Africa at  least, they recall an earlier moment of glo­bal expansion, of dramatic articula­tions of the local and the translocal, of the circulation of new goods and images, of the displacement of indi­ genous orders of production and power. We refer to the onset of colo­nialism. It, too, occasioned world-transforming, millennial aspirations (cf Fields 1985).

    With this parallel in mind, we turn to contemporary South Africa.

    The nightshift: Workers m the alternative economy

    …. no job; no sense

    Tell him, Joe,

    go kill

    Attention,

    quick march…

    Open your lap,

    stand at ease

    Fall in,

    fall out,

    fall down…

    Order: dismiss! ‘

    Zombie’, Fela Anikulapo Kuti & Africa 70′

    There can be no denying the latter­ day preoccupation with zombies in rural South Africa. Their existence, far from being the subject of elusive tales from the backwoods, of fantas­tic fables from the veld, is widely taken for granted: As a simple matter of fact. In recent times, respectable local newspapers have carried ban­ner headlines like ‘”Zombie’ Back From The Dead”, illustrating their stories with conventional, high-rea­list photographs;” similarly, defence lawyers in provincial courts have sought, by forensic means, to have clients acquitted of murder on grounds of having been driven to their deadly deeds by the zombifica­tion of their kin;” and illicit zombie workers have become an issue in large scale labour disputes.” Public culture is replete with invocations of the living dead, from popular songs and prime-time documentaries to national theatrical productions.” Not even the state has remained aloof. The Commission of Inquiry into Witchcraft Violence and Ritual Murders (Ralushai et al. 1996), appointed in 1995 by the Northern Province administration to, investi­gate an “epidemic” of occult violen­ce, reported widespread fear of the figure of the zombie. The latter, it notes in a tone of ethnographic neu­trality (p.5),
    is a person who is believed to have died, but because of the power of a witch, he is resurreted … [and] works for the person who has turned him into a zombie. To make it impossible for him to communica­te with other people, the front part of his tongue is cut off so that he cannot speak. It is believed that he works at night only…[and] that he can leave his rural area and work in an urban area, often far from his home. Whenever he meets people he knows, he vanishes.

    Speechless and unspeakable, this apparition fades away as soon as it becomes visible and knowable. It is a mutation of humanity made mute.

    The observations of the Commission are amply confirmed by our own experience in the Northwest Province since the early 1990s; although our informants added that zombies (dithotst!la; also diphoko)” were not merely the dead-brought­ back-to-life, that they could be killed first for the purpose. Here, too, refe­ rence to them permeates everyday talk on the street, in private backyards, on the pages of the local press, in courts of law. Long-standing notions of witchcraft, boloi,have come to embrace  zombie-making, the brutal reduction of others-in South Africa, largely unrelated neighbours-to instruments of pro­ duct.ion; to insensible beings stored, like tools, in sheds, cupboards, or oil drums at the homes of their creators (cf Ralushai et al. 1996: 50). In a world of flexitime employment, it is even said that some people are made into “part-time zombies” (cf Ralushai et al. 1996:224-5), whose exhaustion in the morning speaks of an unwit­ting nocturnal mission, of involunta­ry toil on the night shift.

    Thus do some build fortunes with the lifeblood of others. And, as they do, they are held to destroy the job market-even more, the very essen­ ce of self-possessed labour-in the process. Those typically said to conjure up the living dead tend, unsurprisingly, to be persons of conspicuous wealth; especially new wealth, whose source is neither visible nor readily explicable. Such things, of course, are highly relative: in very poor rural communities, where (almost) all things are rela­tives, it does not take a great deal to be seen to be affluent. In point of fact, those actually accused of the mystical manufacture of night wor­kers, and assaulted or killed as a result, are not always the same as those suspected: much like peoples  assailed elsewhere as witches and sor­cerers, they are often elderly, relict individuals, mostly female. Note: not all, although there is a penchant in much of northerly South Africa to refer to anyone alleged to engage in this kind of magical evil as “old women”.” Conversely, their primary accusers and attackers, more often than not, are young,  unemployed men (Comaroff and Comaroff 1999).

    Zombie-makers are sexual perverts whose deformed genitalia and poiso­ nous secretions make them wtable toreproduce; they fuse, in a single gro­ tesque, the very essence of negative value: the simultaneous, reciprocaldestruction of both production and reproduction.

    Zombie-makers, moreover, are semiotically saturated, visually char­ ged figures. In contrast to their victims, who are neutered by being reduced to pure labour power, they are stereotypically described as sexual perverts whose deformed genitalia and poisonous seo·etions make them unable to reproduce; worse yet, to make them likely to spoil the fertility of others. Also, by extension, of the collectivity at large, be it a clan, a village, a town. Which is why they have become iconic of a perceived crisis of household and community in rural South Africa.1• In this respect, they fuse, in a single gro­tesque, the very essence of negative value (cf Munn 1986): the simultaneous, reciprocal destruction of both production and reproduction. On one hand, by manufacturing spectral workers, they, annihilate the very possibility of productive employ· ment, imaginatively if not manifestly; on the other, by taking jobs away from young people, they prevent them from securing the wherewithal to establish families and to repro­duce-and so make it impossible for any community to ensure its future. No wonder that, in one of the most poignant witch-killings of the 1990s, the old woman set alight by morally outraged youths-determined to save their community by removing all evil-doers-was to hear, in her final agony. the words:

    ‘Die, die you witch. We can’t get work because of you!’ (Ralushai 1996:193f; Comaroff and Comaroff 1999).

    Discourse in a range of overlapping public spheres, from ‘customary’ tri­ bunals and provincial courts through local religious and political assemblies to the print and broadcast media, makes it clear that, for many, the threat of a spectral workforce is all too concrete. And urgent. On more than one occasion, large crowds have gathered in towns in the region to watch the epic effort of healers to “liberate” zombies from their captors; in vernacular parlance, to “return them home”. Here the spectral becomes spectacle. The fan­tasy of forcing underground evil into public visibility, of reversing the arcane alienation that creates  phantom workers, is a palpable feature of the domestic cultural scene. The media, widely Africanized since the fall of apartheid,  have been crucial in all this. They have taken the conventions of investigative repor­ting far beyond their orthodox ratio­nalist frame in order to plumb the enigma of new social realities ( Fordred 1998); harsh realities whose magicality, in the prevailing historical circumstances, does not permit the literary conceit of magical realism. demanding instead a deadly serious engagement with the actuali­ty of enchantment.

    Thus a long-running saga in 1993 on the pages of Mail-formerly the Mafikeng Mail, a small town newspaper, now a Northwest provincial weekly with large circulation in the region-in which a pair of journa­lists sought to verify the claims of a healer, one Mokalaka Kwinda. Kwinda had claimed that he had re­vived a man who had been living for four years as the ‘slave’ of witches in the nearby Swartruggens district; this before the “eyes of his”, the zombie’s “weeping mother”.” Likewise a quest that same year to cover the efforts of four diviners to “retrieve” a “zombie woman” from the clutches of a male­ volent in the nearby Luhurutshe dis­trict.20 These stories marry the sur­real to the banal, the mystical to the mundane: in the former case. the healer told the reporters that his elu­sive patient was undergoing ‘prelimi­nary’ treatment, so that he might be “able to speak and return to normal life”.” Nor are such events confined to the cutback. In Mabopane, in the eastern part of the Northwest Province, “hundreds of students and workers” reportedly filled the streets one weekday in May 1994, eager to witness a “zombie hunt”.”

    The fear of being reduced to ghost labour, of being abducted to feed the fortunes of a depraved stranger, occurs alongside another kind of spectre: a growing mass, a shadowy alien-nation, of immigrant black wor­kers from elsewhere on the conti­nent. So overt is the xenophobic sen­timent that these workers are disrup­ting local relations of production and reproduction-that they usurp scarce jobs and resources, foster prostitution, and spread AIDS-that they have been openly harassed on South African streets. Like zombies, they are nightmare citizens, their rootlessness threatening to siphon off the remaining, rapidly diminishing prosperity of the indigenous population. Interestingly, like zom­bies too, they are characterized by their impaired speech: the common term for immigrant, makwerekwere, is a Sesotho word implying limited competence in the vernacular. Suggesting a compromised capacity to engage in intercourse with autochthonous society, this usage explains why migrants live in terror that their accents might be detected in public.”

    ‘Die, die you witch. We can’t get work because of you!’

    Their apprehension is well-founded. In September 1998, for example, a crowd returning by train from a march in Pretoria-held, significant­ly, to protest mass unemployment­ threw three makwerekwere to their deaths, purportedly for stealing scarce jobs; two were Senegalese, one from Mozambique.” Three months later, in December, there came alarming reports of a band of hoodlums in Johannesburg who seemed bent on the “systematic elimina­tion” of foreign nationals… Immigrants from neighbouring countries, and from further abroad, have worked in industry, on farms, and across the service sector  in South Africa for over a century. But, in the 1990s, the tight regulation of these labour flows has given way to less controlled, often subcontracted, sources of supply.” Employers are ever more attracted by the potential of this cheap labour; it is said that as many as 80% of them use casual, “non-standard” workers (Horwitz, cited in Adam et al. 1998:209). A recent investigation shows that, while the preponderance of immigrants in the past decade have actually been male entrepreneurs plying their trade in large cities, a great number do find their way into other areas of the economy, often in provincial towns;” some, especially those lac­king legal documentation (frequent­ly, women and children) land up in the highly exploitable reaches of rural agriculture-in places like the Northwest Province. v\lherever they land up in South Africa, immigrants take their place on a fraught histori­ cal terrain. Anxieties about unem­ployment have reached unpreceden­ted levels: by common agreement, the rate is much higher than the unofficial 38% to which the state admits. According to one estimate, 500,000 jobs, virtually all of them held by blacks, have evaporated over the last five years. And this is proba­bly a conservative reckoning, based primarily on shrinkage in the formal sector.  “No jobs means our youth are destroyed,” a resident of Soweto told a reporter from The Chicago Tribune in February 1999. Even the eternal optimist Nelson Mandela, his retirement imminent, recently quipped: “In a few months, I’ll be standing by the road with a sign: Please help. Unemployed with a new wife and a big family.”

    In the northerly provinces, which are among the poorest in the country, there has been scant evidence of the prosperity and redistribution that was expected to follow the fall of apartheid. True, the newly deregula­ted economy has granted some blacks a larger share of the spoils: postcolonial South Africa has seen a raised standard of liiving for  sections of the African middle class, most notably for the ‘liberation aristocra­cy’, a few of whom have become ins­tant millionaires and living personifi­cations of the triumph of nonracial, neoliberal capitalism (Adam et al. 1998:203) . In spite of all this, or per­haps because of it, the so-called “transition” has, as we noted earlier, kindled a millennial faith in the opportunities of “free” market enter­prise, now ostensibly open to all . “I want every black person to feel that he or she has the opportunity to become rich and only has himself to blame if he fails, ” declared Dan Mkhwanazi, launching the National Economic Trust (Adam ct al. 1998:217).”

    But, for the vast majority, millennial hope jostles material impossibility. The much vaunted Reconstruction and Development Plan (RDP), de­signed to root out endemic poverty, has thus far had minimal impact. Indeed, its broad reformist objec­tives, which harked back to the age of the welfare state, soon hardened into GEAR, the government’s Growth, Employment And Recon­struction strategy, which privileges development understood in terms of privitization, wage flexibility and massive public service cutbacks (Adam et al. 1998:206) Little of the positive effect of these policies, or of recent post Fordist expansion in domains like tourism, finds its way into rural landscapes of the North or the Northwest Provinces. Here a living has to be eked out from pitiful small-scale subsistence farming and (very) petty commerce; from such things as brewing, sex work and the refashioning of used commodities, classically the pursuit of women. Such assets as pensions, paltry though they may be, have become the subject of fierce competition; their beneficiaries, mainly widows and surviving old men, are prime targets of bitter jealousy and allegations of avarice. Meanwhile, the regular migrant labour wages  that had long subsidized agrarian endea­vours, and had given young men a degree of independence, are noticea­bly diminishing; this, in turn, has exa­cerbated their sense of threatened masculinity, and has under-scored the gendered, generational conflicts of the countryside. which is why the overwhelming proportion of those accused of witchcraft and zombie­ making are older and female. And why their accusers are overwhelmin­gly out-of-work young adult males.

    At the same time, provincial towns in these northerly provinces are home to small but bustling black elites, many of them spawned originally by the late “homelands,” into which the apartheid regime pumped endless resources over several decades. Well positioned to soak up novel business opportunities and to engage in behind-the-scenes dealings, they have quickly taken charge of a sizeable proportion of retail marke­ting and the provision of services in the countryside. For them, increasin­gly, the conspicuous consumption of prized commodities-houses, cars, TVs, cell phones–does more than just signal accomplishment. It also serves to assuage the inequities of the colonial past. But, as it does, it also marks the growing inequities of the postcolonial present. These distinctions, to those who gaze upon them from below, also seem to be a product of enchantment; given that they have appeared with indecent speed and with little visible exertion, their material provenance remains mysterious. So, even more, does the cause of joblessness amidst such obvious prosperity. In the upshot, the two sides of millennial capitalism, post apartheid style, come together: on one is the ever more distressing awareness of the absence of work, itself measured by the looming figure of the immigrant; on the other is the constantly reiterated suspicion, embodied in the zombie, that is only by magical means, by consuming others, that people may enrich themselves in these perplexing times.

    The symbolic apotheosis of this syllogism is to be found in a commercial advertisement run by a “traditional healer” in Mmabatho, capital of the Northwest. It appears, in of all places, the Mafeking Business Advertiser, a local trade weekly. Top among the occult skills on offer is a treatment which promises clients to “get a job early if unemployed.” The healer in question, Dr. S. M. Banda, should know. He is an immigrant.

    Precursors: The ghosts of workers past

    On the face of it, much of this is new. When we did research in the Northwest in the late 1960s and  mid­ 1970s-it was then the Tswana ethnic “homeland”-most males were, or had been away as migrants in the industrial centres. There was barely a black middle class to speak of and no manifest anxieties about immigrants. Labourers had long come from elsewhere to seek employment in local towns and on the farms of the neighbouring Western Transvaal; and there were “foreigners” (Zimbabweans, and Xhosa descen­dants of those who had built the rail­road at the turn of the century, for instance) who lived quite amicably with Tswana-speaking populations. There was also no mention of zom­bies at the time. True, many people spoke of their concern about witch­craft, understood as an unnatural means of garnering wealth by “eating” others and absorbing their capacity to create value. On occa­sion, moreover, malevolents would cause young migrants to loose their moorings, to forsake their kin at home and to eschew the demands of domestic reproduction.” But there was nothing like the current preoc­cupation with the danger of humans being made into toiling automatons; nor with the sense that a spectral economy. founded on the labour of these and other aliens, might be draining the productive or repro­ductive potential of the community at large.

    Yet these late twentieth-century preoccupations are not entirely unprecedented either. In disinter­ring vernacular conceptions of work, labour and consciousness during the high years of apartheid (Comaroff and Comaroff 1992:169), we noted that Tswana regarded certain modes of migrant toil (mmi:reko) as aliena­ting; that they spoke of the way in which its disciplined routines re­duced humans to draft animals, even to “tinned fish”.” These tropes implied a contrasting notion of self­ possessed work (tiro), typically work­ at-home, which created social value. By contrast to selfish activity, this form of exertion constructed person­ hood in a positive key through the simultaneous building up of others. And, concomitantly, of a centred col­lective world. But the historical record indicates that Tswana ideas of estranged labour are not limited  to the experience of proletarianization alone. Accounts from earlier this century tell of a condition linked to the eclipse, typically by witches, of self-possession and, with it, the capa­city to accumulate wealth and social power. An individual affiicted in this manner was “alienated from fellow­ship with his kith and kin,” noted.Tom Brown (1926:137-8), a missio­nary-ethnographer with a well deve­loped grasp, of SetSwana. He goes on, in the real-time ethnographic present:

    … they apply to him a name (sebibi or sehihi). which signifies that though the body lives and moves it is only a grave. a place where something has, died or been killed. The essential manhood is dead. It is no uncom­mon thing to hear a person spoken of as being dead when he stands before you visi­bly alive. When this takes place it always means that there has been an oveshadowing of the true relationships of life …

    Here, patently, we have a precursor of the zombie. But, whereas the lat­ter is conjured from a corpse, either killed for the purpose or already deceased, sehihi is a state of eclipse effected by the appropriation of the essential selfhood of a living person, leaving behind a sentient shell as mute witness to the erasure of the social being it once housed. Moreover, where sehihi entailed the loss of all human creativity-often said to have been eaten whole by witches to enhance their own physi­cal, political, and material potency­ the zombie is transformed  purely into alienated labour power, abduc­ted from home or workplace, and made to serve as someone else’s pri­vatized means of production.”

    Evidence from elsewhere in sou­ thern Africa fills out this phantasma­ goric history of labour,  enabling  us to track its fitful figurings, its conti­nuities and breaks. Thus Harries’s (1994:221) study of the world of Mozambican migrants to South Africa between 1860 and 1910 shows that witches (baloyi), held to be pre­valent on the mines, were said to seize the “life essence” of others, for­cing them to toil for days as zombies (dlukula) in closed-off subterranean galleries, where they lived on  a diet of mud. The poetic particularity of phantom workers-here, as else­ where-is sensitive register of shif­ting experiences of labour and its value. The introduction of compen­sation pay for miner’s phthisis, for example, quickly led to a notion that zombies returned from below ground with numbers-potential payouts, blood money-chalked on their backs. Junod (1927:298-9;5 l 3; cf Harries 1994:221). classic ethno­ grapher of early south-eastern Africa, remarked on similar fears in the southern Mozambique country­ side around 1910. “Modernized” witches there, anticipating their lat­ ter-day South African counterparts, were thought capable of reducing their fellows to a nocturnal agrarian workforce, masquerading by day as innocent children.” Some could even induce young men to wander off to the Witwatersrand mines, never to return. Once more  we see the zombie as a “walking spectre,” an object of collective terror and desire, to use Clery’s (1995:174) description of the “terrorist genre” of haunted Gothic fiction in late eighteenth cen­tury England, where industrializa­tion was similarly restructuring the nature of work-and-place. Like these “Horrid Mysteries,” zombie tales dra­matize the strangeness of what had become real; in this instance, the problematic relation of work to the production  of social  being secured in time and place.

    Other instances of ghost workers in Africa underline the point. Take Ardener’s (1970) piquant narrative of zombie beliefs among the Bakweri of West Cameroon. These beliefs­ an intensification, it appears, of older ideas about  witchcraft-arose at the time of the Great War, with the relatively sudden penetration of German colonisers into this fertile agricultural region. Their land expropiiated for the establishment of plantations manned largely by foreigners, the Bakweri found them­ selves crowded into inhospitable reserves; as a result, they entered a period of impoverishment and redu­ced fertility. It was then that the zombie labour force (vekongi) first made itself felt, sheltering in tin houses built by those locals who had somehow managed to profit from the unpromising circumstances. The living dead, many of them chil­dren, were said to be victims of the murderous greed of their own close kin; they were sent away to work in distant plantations, where witchmas­ters had built a town overflowing with modem consumer goods.

    Here, as in newly colonized Mozambique, we see the sudden conjuncture of local world-in which production is closely tied to kin groups-with forces that arro­gate the capacity to create value and redirect its flow. Above all, these forces fracture the meaning of work and its received relation to place. Under such conditions, zombies become the stuff of “estranged reco­gnition” (Clery 1995:ll 4): recognition not merely of the commodifica­tion of labour, or its subjection to deadly competition, but of the invi­sible predations that seem to congeal beneath the banal surfaces of new forms of wealth.

    In their iconography of forced migration and wandering exile, of children abused and relatives viola­ted, the living dead comment on the disruption of an economy in which productive energies were once visibly invested in the reproduction of a situated order of domestic and com­munal relations; an order through which the present was, literally. kept in place. And the future was secured.

    Ardener (1970:l 48) notes the com­plex continuities and innovations at play in these constructions, which have, as their imaginative precondi­tion, ideas of the occult widely distri­buted across Africa and, the New World; in particular, the idea that witches, by their very nature, con­sume the generative force of others. Zombies themselves seem to be born, at least in the first instance, of colo­nial encounters: of ilie precipitous engagement of local worlds with imperial economies that seek to exert control over the essential means of producing value, means like land and labour, space and time. It is in this abstract, metaphorical sense that Rene Depestre (1971:20) declares colonialism to be “a process of man’s general zombification”.” In purely historical terms, the affinity between colonization and zombification is less direct: colonialism does not always call forth zombies, and zombies are not always associated with colonia­lism. What they do tend to be associa­ted with, however, are rapidly chan­ging conditions of work under capita­lism in its various guises; conditions which rupture not just established relations of production and repro­duction, but also received connec­tions of persons to place, the material to the moral, private to public, the individual to the communal, past to future. In this respect, the living dead join a host of other spectral figures­ vampires, monsters, creatures of Gothic “supernaturalism”- who alike have been vectors of an affective engagement with the visceral implica­tions of the factory, the plantation, the market, the mine (cf Ardener 1970: 156; Clery 1995: 9).

    As this suggests, however abstract a set of ideas may be embodied in the living dead sui generis, any particular zombie congeals the predicament of human labour at its most concrete, its most historically specific. How, then, might those we have encoun­tered in rural South Africa be linked, in more precise terms, to the late twentieth-century transformations with which we began? Or to the impact of millennial capitalism in this postcolony?

    Conclusion

    These questions have been anticipa­ted, their answers foreshadowed, elsewhere. Thus Harries (1994:221) has argued that, among early twentieth-century Mozambican miners in the Transvaal, zombie­ making magic was a practical res­ponse to the unfamiliar: specifically, to the physical depredations of under­ ground work and to the explosion of new forms of wealth amidst abject poverty. Witchcraft, in a virulently mutated strain, he says, became a proxy for capitalist exploitation; witch-hunting, a displacement of class struggle. Niehaus (1995, 1993, n.d.:16), writing of the rural Northern Province at the other end of the century, arrives at a similar conclusion: mystical evil is a “cultural fantasy” manipulated by the domi­nant to defend their positions of pri­vilege. Explanations of this sort belong to a species of interpretation that brings a critical understanding of ideology to Evans–Pritchard’s (1937) classic conception of witchcraft as a “socially relevant” theory of cause (Geschiere n.d. ; Ferguson 1993; Comaroff and Comaroff 1993). Many would agree with their underlying premise: that witches and zombies are to be read as etiological principles which translate structural contradictions, experiential anomalies, and aporiahs – force-fields of greater com­plexity than is normally implied by “class struggle”-into the argot of human agency, of interpersonal kin­ship, of morality and passion.

    But here lies the rub. How does this very general truism, as valid for early colonial witchcraft as it is for latter­ day zombies, relate to the implosive, shifting histories of which we have spoken? If the living dead are merely walking spectres of class struggle, why have they not been a permanent fixture of the modern South African scene? What accounts for their comings and goings and, to return to our opening conundrums, for the dramatic intensification of their appeal in the postcolony? How, furthermore, do we make sense of the particular poetics of these fantasies, whose symbolic excess and expressive exuberance gesture toward an imagi­native play infinitely more elaborale than is allowed by a purely pragmatic, functionalist explication.

    We have tried, in the course of this narrative, to show that the mounting preoccupation with zombies and immigrants here is owed to a precise, if large-scale set of historical condi­tions; that these conditions underlie a postcolonial moment experienced, by all but the rnostt affluent, as an unprecedented mix of hope and hopelessness, promise and impossi­bility, the new and the continuing. They have their source in social and material transformations sparked by the rapid rise of neoliberal capita­lism on a global scale, a process that has intensified market competition; translocalized the division of labour; rendered national polities and eco­nomies increasingly porous, less sovereign; set many people in motion and disrupted their sense of place; dispersed class relations across international borders; and widened the gulf between flows of fiscal circu­lation and sites of concrete produc­tiion, thus permilting speculative capital to appear to determine the fate of post-revolutionary societies. What is more, because industrial capital chases cheap, tractable labour all over the earth, searching out optimally (de) regulated environ­ments, it often erodes the social infrastructure of working communi­ties, adding yet further to the stream of immigrants in pursuit of employ­ment-and to the  likelihood that they will be despised, demonized, even done to death.

    The backwash of this process, as we have seen, is readily evident in contemporary South Africa. where rapid deregulation, increasingly la­bile employment arrangements, and the gross shrinkage of the job market have altered the generic meaning of labour, the specific relationship of production to reproduction, and the connection of work-to-place. Where, also, labour migralion-which had become a rite of passage to social manhood-has all  but vanished.  In the void left behind, especially in the countryside, there have risen new, unaccountable manifestations of weallh; wealth not derived from any discernible or conventional  source. In this void, too, jobs seem available only for “nonstandard” workers: those, like immigrants, who will take anything they can get. Zombies, the ultimate “nonstandard” workers, take shape in the collective imaginary as figurations of these conditions. In their silence they give voice to a sense of dread about the human costs of intensified capitalist production; about the loss of control over the terms in which people alienate their labour power; about the de­mise of a moral economy in which wage employment, however distant and exploitative, had “always”·been there to support both the founding of families and the well-being of communities. This bears its own measure of historical irony. In the colonial epoch, the migrant contract system was regarded as a social, moral, and political travesty, brea­king up black households and for­cing men to toil under exacting conditions for pitiable earnings; then a frequent object of protest, it is seen, in retrospect, as having been one of the secure foundations of the social landscape. Shades, here, of earlier revolutions, earlier metamor­phoses in the articulation of capital and labour.

    Here, then, is what is unique about the moment in the Soulh African postcolony; what it is that has called forth an alien-nation of pariah prole­tarians, dead and alive. It is a histori­cal moment that, in bringing toge­ their force-fields at once global and local, has conduced to a seismic mutation in the onlological expe­rience, of work, selfhood, gender, community, and place. Because the terms of reference for this expe­rience are those of, modernist capi­talism-indeed, these are the only terms in which the present may be reduced to semiotic sense-and-sensi­bility-it is framed in the language of labour lost, factories foreclosed, communities crumbling. Which is why the concern with zombies in the northerly reaches of the country, while in many ways a novel confec­tion, replays enduring images of alie­nated production. In Adorno’s (1981:96) phrase, “it sounded so old, and yet was so new”. Much like the story of labour itself which, in an abs­tract sense, is still subject to the fami­liar “laws” of capitalism; yet, as concrete reality, has been substan­tially allered by the reorganization of the world economy as we know it. To reiterate: it all remains the same and yet [is] constantly changing”.

    One final point. Although we have tried to subdue the fantasy of spec­tral labour by recourse to histoiical reason, its key animus still eludes us. What, finally, are we to make of its symbolic excess? What does the intri­cate discourse about alien workers tell us of the sublerranean workings of terror, of the life of standardized nightmares in a world of “daylight reason” (Duncan 1992:113)?,. There is little question that this discourse gives motive and moral valence to disturbing events; that, in the classic manner of ideologies everywhere, it links etiology to existing orders of power and value. But zombie-speak seems to do much more: its produc­tive figurations feed a process of fer­vent speculation, poetic elaboration, forensic quest. The menacing dan­gers of zombification-the disorien­ted wanderings, the loss of speech, sense, and will, the perverted prac­tices that erase all ties to kith and kin-serve to conjure with inchoate fears, allowing free play to anger and anguish and desire. Also to the effort to make some sense of them. Like Gothic horror, the elaboration of these images ‘encourage[s] an experience of estranged recognition’ (Clery 1995:114) . And not only at the immiserated edges of polite society. The hardboiled social analyst might insist that the obsession with the living dead misrecognizes the sys­temic roots of deprivation and dis­tress. But its eruption onto the ferti­le planes of post-apartheid public culture-via sober press reports, TV documentaries and agitprop theatre–has  had a  tangible  impact. It has forced a recognition of , the crisis in the countryside, of the plight of displaced youth, of an alien­ nation within the postcolony itself.

    As the very conditions that call forth zombies erode the basis of conventional politics of labour and place and public interest, we would do well to keep an open mind about the pragmatic possibilities of these creatures of the collective dread; about the provocative manner in which they, perhaps more than anything or anybody else, are compelling the state to take note. Even to act.